NSF Ansi Can 61-2021 + NSF Ansi Can 600-2021

NSF International Standard /
American National Standard /

National Standard of Canada
NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 - 2021
Drinking Water System Components -
Health Effects
NSF International, an independent, not-for-profit,
nongovernmental organization, is dedicated to
being the leading global provider of public health
and safety-based risk management solutions
while serving the interests of all stakeholders.
This Standard is subject to revision.

Contact NSF to confirm this revision is current.
Users of this Standard may request clarifications and

interpretations, or propose revisions by contacting:
Chair, Joint Committee on Drinking Water Additives – System Components

c/o NSF International
789 North Dixboro Road, PO Box 130140
Ann Arbor, Michigan 48113-0140 USA
Phone: (734) 769-8010 Fax: (734) 769-0109
Email: info@nsf.org
Web: <www.nsf.org>
NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021

for Drinking Water Additives –
Drinking Water System Components –

Health Effects
Standard Developer
NSF International
ICS 13.060.20
Designated as an ANSI Standard

April 14, 2021
American National Standards Institute
Designated as a National Standard of Canada

April 14, 2021Standards Council of Canada
i
Prepared by
The NSF Joint Committee on Drinking Water Additives
Recommended for adoption by

The NSF Council of Public Health Consultants
Adopted by
NSF International
June 1988
Revised October 1988 Revised May 1990 Revised May 1991

Revised May 1992 Revised September 1994 Revised January 1995
Revised July 1996 Revised September 1996 Revised November 1996
Revised January 1997 Revised March 1997 Revised July 1997
Revised November 1998 Revised January 1999 Revised November 1999
Revised September 2000 Revised February 2001 Addendum September 2001
Revised July 2002 Addendum August 2002 Editorial revision October 2003
Revised November 2004 Addendum March 2005 Revised October 2005
Revised March 2007 Revised July 2007 Addendum October 2007
Revised December 2008 Revised August 2009 Revised February 2010
Revised October 2010 Revised June 2001 Addendum March 2012
Revised July 2012 Addendum March 2013 Revised January 2014
Revised September 2014 Revised February 2015 Revised October 2015
Revised July 2016 Addendum January 2017 Revised October 2017
Revised February 2019 Revised October 2019 Revised July 2020
Revised November 2021
Published by
NSF International
PO Box 130140, Ann Arbor, Michigan 48113-0140, USA
For ordering copies or for making inquiries with regard to this Standard, please reference the designation
“NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021.”
Cette Norme Nationale du Canada est disponible en versions Franҫaise et Anglaise.
Copyright 2021 NSF International
Previous editions © 2020, 2019, 2017, 2016, 2015, 2014, 2013, 2012, 2011, 2010, 2009, 2008, 2007, 2005,
2004, 2003, 2002, 2001, 2000, 1999, 1998, 1997, 1996, 1995, 1994, 1992, 1991, 1990, 1988
Unless otherwise specified, no part of this publication may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and microfilm, without permission in writing from
NSF International.
Printed in the United States of America.
ii
Disclaimers1
NSF International (NSF), in performing its functions in accordance with its objectives, does not assume or
undertake to discharge any responsibility of the manufacturer or any other party. The opinions and findings
of NSF represent its professional judgment. NSF shall not be responsible to anyone for the use of or reliance
upon this Standard by anyone. NSF shall not incur any obligation or liability for damages, including
consequential damages, arising out of or in connection with the use, interpretation of, or reliance upon this
Standard. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard to judge the suitability of the ANS for the user’s
purpose.
NSF Standards provide basic criteria to promote sanitation and protection of public health and the
environment. Provisions for mechanical and electrical safety have not been included in this Standard
because governmental agencies or other national standards-setting organizations provide safety
requirements.
Participation in NSF Standards development activities by regulatory agency representatives (federal, state,
or local) shall not constitute their agency's endorsement of NSF or any of its Standards.
Preference is given to the use of performance criteria measurable by examination or testing in

NSF Standards development when such performance criteria may reasonably be used in lieu of design,
materials, or construction criteria.
The illustrations, if provided, are intended to assist in understanding their adjacent standard requirements.
However, the illustrations may not include all requirements for a specific product or unit, nor do they show
the only method of fabricating such arrangements. Such partial drawings shall not be used to justify
improper or incomplete design and construction.
At the time of this publication, examples of programs and processes were provided for general guidance.
This information is given for the convenience of users of this standard and does not constitute an
endorsement by NSF International. Equivalent programs and processes may be used.
Unless otherwise referenced, the annexes are not considered an integral part of NSF Standards.
The annexes are provided as general guidelines to the manufacturer, regulatory agency, user, or certifying
organization.
1 The information contained in this Disclaimer is not part of this American National Standard (ANS) and has not been
processed in accordance with ANSI’s requirements for an ANS. Therefore, this Disclaimer may contain material that
has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process. In addition, it does not contain requirements necessary
for conformance to the Standard.
iii
This page is intentionally left blank.
Contents
1 General ................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Purpose ......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Scope ............................................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 Normative references ................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 Limitations ..................................................................................................................................... 3
1.5 Alternate products or materials ..................................................................................................... 4
1.6 Significant figures and rounding ................................................................................................... 4
2 Definitions ............................................................................................................................................... 4
3 General requirements ............................................................................................................................. 6

3.1 General ......................................................................................................................................... 6
3.2 Information and formulation requirements .................................................................................... 6
3.3 Identification of analytes ............................................................................................................... 9
3.4 Products manufactured from Annex N-2 acceptable materials .................................................. 10
3.5 Restriction on use of lead containing materials .......................................................................... 17
3.6 Lead content of products ............................................................................................................ 17
4 Pipes and related products ................................................................................................................... 17

4.1 Scope .......................................................................................................................................... 17
4.2 Definitions ................................................................................................................................... 18
4.3 General requirements ................................................................................................................. 18
4.4 Sample requirements .................................................................................................................. 18
4.5 Extraction procedures ................................................................................................................. 19
4.6 Analysis ....................................................................................................................................... 24
4.7 Normalization of contaminant concentrations ............................................................................. 24
4.8 Evaluation of contaminant concentrations .................................................................................. 26
5 Barrier materials ................................................................................................................................... 32

5.1 Scope .......................................................................................................................................... 32
5.2 Definitions ................................................................................................................................... 32
5.6 Analysis of extraction water ........................................................................................................ 38
5.7 Normalization .............................................................................................................................. 38
6 Joining and sealing materials ............................................................................................................... 46

6.1 Coverage .................................................................................................................................... 46
6.2 Definitions ................................................................................................................................... 46
6.3 Material and extraction testing requirements .............................................................................. 46
6.4 Items of special significance ....................................................................................................... 47
7 Process media ...................................................................................................................................... 47

7.1 Scope .......................................................................................................................................... 47
7.2 Definitions ................................................................................................................................... 47
7.6 Analysis ....................................................................................................................................... 53
7.7 Normalization .............................................................................................................................. 53
v
8 Mechanical devices .............................................................................................................................. 58
8.1 Coverage .................................................................................................................................... 58
8.2 Definitions ................................................................................................................................... 58
8.3 Device, component, or material requirements ............................................................................ 58
8.4 In-line devices, components, and materials ............................................................................... 59
8.5 POE systems, components, and media...................................................................................... 60
8.6 Chemical feeders and generators ............................................................................................... 60
8.7 Other mechanical devices, components, and materials ............................................................. 61
9 Mechanical plumbing devices ............................................................................................................... 63

9.1 Coverage .................................................................................................................................... 63
9.2 Definitions ................................................................................................................................... 64
9.3 Device, component, or material requirements ............................................................................ 65
9.4 Exposure and normalization ....................................................................................................... 65
9.5 Evaluation of normalized contaminant concentrations ............................................................... 66
10 Instructions and information ................................................................................................................. 67
Normative Annex 1 Product / material evaluation .................................................................................. lxviii

N-1.1 Background.............................................................................................................................. 69
N-1.2 General evaluation requirements ............................................................................................ 69
N-1.3 Joining and sealing materials .................................................................................................. 72
N-1.4 Mechanical devices ................................................................................................................. 74
N-1.5 Mechanical plumbing devices.................................................................................................. 79
N-1.6 Collection and preservation of extraction media after exposure ............................................. 81
N-1.7 Analysis methods .................................................................................................................... 82
N-1.8 Normalization ........................................................................................................................... 89
N-1.9 Extraction water preparation.................................................................................................... 95
Normative Annex 2 Acceptable materials ............................................................................................... 115

N-2.1 Purpose ................................................................................................................................. 115
N-2.2 Evaluation of acceptable materials ........................................................................................ 115
N-2.3 Extraction testing ................................................................................................................... 115
N-2.4 Documentation ...................................................................................................................... 115
Informative Annex 1 Toxicology review and evaluation procedures ....................................................... 119
Informative Annex 2 Normative drinking water criteria ........................................................................... 121
Informative Annex 3 Informational drinking water criteria ....................................................................... 123
Informative Annex 4 Revisions to the evaluation of lead ........................................................................ 125
Informative Annex 5 Weighted average lead content evaluation procedure to a 0.25%

lead requirement .................................................................................................................... 127
Informative Annex 6 Water quality criteria considerations for piping materials in contact with
drinking water ........................................................................................................................ 129
I-6.1 Background............................................................................................................................ 129
I-6.2 Criteria (by material type) ...................................................................................................... 129
I-6.3 Determining HCO3- concentration from alkalinity using Standard Methods 4500-CO2
Carbon Dioxide (Editorial revisions, 2011) ............................................................................ 132
Informative Annex 7 Revisions to the evaluation of lead ........................................................................ 135

I-7.1 Background............................................................................................................................ 135
I-7.2 Incorporation of revisions into Standard ................................................................................ 135
I-7.3 Revisions ............................................................................................................................... 135
vi
Interpretation Annex .................................................................................................................................. 139
vii
Foreword2
In response to a competitive request for proposals from the US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA),
a Consortium led by NSF International (NSF) agreed to develop voluntary third-party consensus standards
and a certification program for all direct and indirect drinking water additives. Other members of the
Consortium include the American Water Works Association Research Foundation (WRF), the Association
of State Drinking Water Administrators (ASDWA), the Conference of State Health and Environmental
Managers (COSHEM), and the American Water Works Association (AWWA). (COSHEM has since become
inactive as an organization.) Each organization was represented on a steering committee with oversight
responsibility for the administration of the cooperative agreement. The Steering Committee provides
guidance on overall administration and management of the cooperative agreement. Currently, the member
organizations remain active in an oversight role.
Two Standards for additives products have been adopted. NSF/ANSI/CAN 60: Drinking Water Treatment
Chemicals ― Health Effects covers many of the water treatment chemicals, also known as direct additives.
This Standard, NSF/ANSI/CAN 61, covers all indirect additives products and materials. Testing to
determine the potential of a product to impart taste and/or odor to drinking water is not included in this
Standard.
NSF/ANSI/CAN 61, and subsequent product certification against it, has replaced the US EPA Additives
Advisory Program for drinking water system components. US EPA terminated its advisory role in April 1990.
For more information with regard to US EPA's actions, refer to the July 7, 1988 Federal Register
(53FR25586).
NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 was developed to establish minimum requirements for the control of potential adverse
human health effects from products that contact drinking water. It does not attempt to include product
performance requirements that are currently addressed in other voluntary consensus standards established
by such organizations as the AWWA, ASTM International, and the American National Standards Institute
(ANSI). Because this Standard complements the performance standards of these organizations, it is
recommended that products also meet the appropriate performance requirements specified in the
standards of such organizations.
Water age can be a major factor in the deterioration of water quality within plumbing systems affecting
issues of both public health and aesthetic concerns. With increased water age is an increased potential for
the formation of disinfection by-products, increased corrosion, and an increased potential for microbial
regrowth. It can also lead to a loss in the effectiveness of corrosion control measures and an increased
potential for nitrification of the water.
Within NSF/ANSI/CAN 61, most extraction protocols result in exposure periods between 12 to 24 hours.
While these are appropriate for typical drinking water system use, they can be significantly less than in
others. Examples of where high water age can occur include:
— water storage tanks in rain water catchment systems where the duration may be weeks or months;
— plumbing system designs in green buildings which result of overall reduction in water usage without
a change in piping design to minimize stagnation;
— buildings where stagnant periods occur due to nonuse such as schools between semesters,
vacation homes, or seasonal buildings; and
— products on isolated lines with either long or oversized piping resulting low water turnover.
ix
NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 compliant products are often specified in these applications yet the potential
accumulation of leachates over extended periods of exposure may or may not be addressed though this
Standard. It is important that the design of drinking water plumbing systems take into account potentials for
extended aging of water. This may include the flushing of the water piping system after extended periods
of nonuse. It is also important for managers of the drinking systems in buildings be aware of the potential
for high water age and proactively manage the system to minimize it.
This Standard and the accompanying text are intended for voluntary use by certifying organizations, utilities,
regulatory agencies, and/or manufacturers as a basis of providing assurances that adequate health
protection exists for covered products. Product certification issues, including frequency of testing and
requirements for follow-up testing, evaluation, enforcement, and other policy issues, are not addressed by
this Standard.
In 2020, the Joint Committee developed proposed changes designed to increase the public health
protection of this Standard relative to the evaluation of lead leaching from endpoint devices. Due to the
significant impact of these changes, the Joint Committee has established an extended effective date for the
requirement to become mandatory on January 1, 2024. This effective date was selected to provide
manufacturers a reasonable time to reengineer products to meet the new requirements, to have them
tested, and to make them available in the marketplace. This date is based on the date of product
manufacture. Manufacturers and certifiers are encouraged to actively pursue conformance to the new
requirement prior to January 1, 2024. For clarity, the Joint Committee has placed the pending requirements
in an informative annex.
All references to gallons (gal) are in US gallons.
This Standard is designated as a National Standard of Canada (NSC) in compliance with requirements and
guidance set out by the Standards Council of Canada (SCC).
This edition of the Standard contains the following revisions:
Issue 157
This revision removes Table N-1.3a, adds the pH 5 extraction water test to brass / bronze surfaces in Table
N-1.3 (formerly Table N-1.3 b), and adds the requirement of a use limitation statement on product literature
and certification listings for those products that fail for copper at pH 5.
Issue 158
This revision adds units of in2/L to the DSA-to-volume ratio numbers in the first bullet under Section 3.3.2.
Issue 159
This revision includes several corrections and clarifications, including:
⎯ additional guidance in Table 4.2 (Single time point exposure schedule) to be consistent with other
exposure sequence tables in the standard;
⎯ correction of reference to exposure protocol from Sections N-1.4.4.2 to N-1.4.4.4 for other
mechanical devices. Section N-1.4.4.2 is for POE systems and system components requiring exposure
under pressure for a 16-hr exposure time. Section N-1.4.4.4 redirects to Table N-1.9 which specifies
an exposure time of 24 hr for other mechanical devices, aligning with guidance in Section 8.3.2;
⎯ guidance for reverse osmosis systems in Table N-1.7 (product exposure) to indicate that typical
exposure conditions occur within the product itself; and
x
⎯ additional guidance on decanting and refilling of samples for in-line and other mechanical devices
that was previously included in Section N-1.4.4.1 to be consistent with other exposure sequence tables
in the standard.
The Interpretations Annex contains responses to interpretation requests. The responses will be published
in each version of the Standard until such time that the interpretation response is no longer applicable.
This Standard was developed by the NSF Joint Committee on Drinking Water Additives – System
Components using the consensus process described by the American National Standards Institute and the
Standards Council of Canada’s Requirements and Guidance. At the time of approval, the Joint Committee
consisted of 9 public health / regulatory, 9 industry, 6 product certifier / testing lab, and 8 user
representatives.
Suggestions for improvement of this Standard are welcome. This Standard is maintained on a Continuous
Maintenance schedule and can be opened for comment at any time. Comments should be sent to:
Chair, Joint Committee on Drinking Water Additives – System Components at standards@nsf.org, or c/o
NSF International, Standards Department, PO Box 130140, Ann Arbor, Michigan 48113-0140, USA.
xi
SCC Foreword
A National Standard of Canada is a standard developed by a Standards Council of Canada (SCC)

accredited standards development organization, in compliance with requirements and guidance set out by
the SCC. More information on National Standards of Canada can be found at <www.scc.ca>.
SCC is a Crown corporation within the portfolio of Innovation, Science and Economic Development (ISED)
Canada. With the goal of enhancing Canada’s economic competitiveness and social well-being, SCC leads
and facilitates the development and use of national and international standards. SCC also coordinates
Canadian participation in standards development, and identifies strategies to advance Canadian
standardization efforts.
Accreditation services are provided by SCC to various customers, including product certifiers, testing
laboratories, and standards development organizations. A list of SCC programs and accredited bodies is
publicly available at <www.scc.ca>.
xii
Consortium Organizations
NSF International
Popularly referred to as NSF, NSF International is a noncommercial agency. It is incorporated under the
laws of Michigan as a not-for-profit organization devoted to research, education, and service. It seeks to
solve problems involving man and his environment. It wishes to promote health and enrich the quality of
life through conserving and improving that environment. Its fundamental principle of operation is to serve
as a neutral medium in which business and industry, official regulatory agencies, and the public come
together to deal with problems involving products, equipment, procedures, and services related to health
and the environment. It is conceived and administered as a public service organization.
NSF is perhaps best known for its role in developing Standards and Criteria for equipment, products, and
services that bear upon health. NSF was the lead organization in the Consortium responsible for developing
this Standard. NSF conducts research; tests and evaluates equipment, products, and services for
compliance with standards and criteria; and grants and controls the use of NSF registered Marks.
NSF offers product certification (listing services) for all products covered by its Standards. Each program
has established policies governing the associated product evaluation, Listing Services, follow-up, and
enforcement activities. The NSF Listing Mark is widely recognized as a sign that the product or service to
which it relates complies with the applicable NSF Standard(s).
Water Research Foundation
The mission of the American Water Works Association Research Foundation (now the Water Research
Foundation), is to sponsor practical, applied research on behalf of the drinking water industry of North
America. The scope of the research program embraces all aspects of water supply operation, from
development and maintenance of water resources to treatment technologies and water quality issues, from
storage and distribution system operations to health effects studies and utility planning and management
activities. Water Research Foundation (WRF) serves as the centralized industry institution for planning,
managing, and funding cooperative research and development in drinking water, including the subsequent
transfer of technology and results for practical application by the water utility community.
WRF's purpose in this cooperative program is to provide a communication link with the water utilities
throughout North America and serve as the focal point for identification of research needs of the water
supply industry with respect to the additives program.
The Association of State Drinking Water Administrators
The Association of State Drinking Water Administrators (ASDWA) is a nonprofit organization whose eligible
membership is comprised of drinking water program administrators in each of the 50 states and seven US
territories. Through the organization, representatives speak with a collective voice to Congressional
committees, the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), professional and trade
associations, water utilities, and the general public on issues related to state drinking water programs. With
its mission of protecting the public health through assurance of high-quality drinking water, and promoting
responsible, reasonable, and feasible drinking water programs at the state and federal levels, the
Association is a valued contributor to the consortium, and to the program. It provides the link between the
additives program and the state drinking water programs.
xiii
The Conference of State Health and Environmental Managers
The Conference of State Health and Environmental Managers (COSHEM), known formerly as the
Conference of State Sanitary Engineers (CSSE), is currently inactive as an organization. It brought to the
consortium expertise and involvement of state health and environmental program managers. The
Conference was the focal point for health concerns of all state environmental programs, including drinking
water, wastewater, air, solid and hazardous wastes, radiology, occupational health, and food. A standing
committee on water supply focused on drinking water issues and kept the membership informed. The
Conference played an important role early in the program through two-way communication with state health
and environmental program decision makers.
American Water Works Association
The purpose of the American Water Works Association (AWWA) is to promote public health, safety, and
welfare by improving the quality and increasing the quantity of water delivered to the public, and to
developing and furthering an understanding of the problems relating thereto by:
— advancing the knowledge of the design, construction, operation, water treatment, and management
of water utilities;
— developing standards for procedures, equipment, and materials used by public water supply
systems;
— advancing the knowledge of problems involved in the development of resources, production, and
distribution of safe and adequate water supplies;
— educating the public on the problems of water supply and promoting a spirit of cooperation between
consumers and suppliers in solving these problems; and
— conducting research to determine the causes of problems with providing a safe and adequate water
supply, and proposing solutions thereto in an effort to improve the quality and quantity of the water
supply provided to the public.
AWWA brings to the Consortium its established position as the largest public drinking water association in
North America, with a broad membership that includes utilities, consultants, manufacturers / distributors /
agents, contractors, and other organizations with a direct interest in drinking water.
xiv
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
NSF/ANSI/CAN Standard
Drinking Water System Components –

Health Effects
1 General
1.1 Purpose
This Standard establishes minimum health effects requirements for the chemical contaminants and
impurities that are indirectly imparted to drinking water from products, components, and materials used in
drinking water systems. This Standard does not establish performance, taste and odor, or microbial growth
support requirements for drinking water system products, components, or materials.
1.2 Scope
1.2.1 This Standard is intended to cover specific materials or products that come into contact with:
drinking water, drinking water treatment chemicals, or both. The focus of the Standard is evaluation of
contaminants or impurities imparted indirectly to drinking water. The products and materials covered
include, but are not limited to, process media (e.g., carbon, sand), protective materials (e.g., coatings,
linings, liners), joining and sealing materials (e.g., solvent cements, welding materials, gaskets), pipes and
related products (e.g., pipes, tanks, fittings), mechanical devices used in treatment / transmission /
distribution systems (e.g., valves, chlorinators, separation membranes, point-of-entry (POE) drinking water
treatment systems), and mechanical plumbing devices (e.g., faucets, endpoint control valves).
1.2.2 Point-of-use (POU) drinking water treatment devices are not covered by the scope of this Standard.
1.3 Normative references
The following documents contain requirements that, by reference in this text, constitute requirements of this
Standard. At the time this Standard was balloted, the editions listed below were valid. All documents are
subject to revision, and parties are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the recent editions
of the documents indicated below. The most recent published edition of the document shall be used for
undated references.
21 CFR Part 58, Good Laboratory Practice for Nonclinical Laboratory Studies3
40 CFR Part 136, Guidelines Establishing Test Procedures for the Analysis of Pollutants3
40 CFR Part 141, National Primary Drinking Water Regulations3
40 CFR Part 160, Good Laboratory Practice Standards3
3National Archives and Records Administration, Office of the Federal Register. 7 G Street NW, Suite A-734,
Washington, DC 20401. <www.ecfr.gov>
1
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
40 CFR Part 798, Health Effects Testing Guidelines3
APHA/AWWA/WEF, Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, twenty-second
edition4
ASTM A240/A240M-05, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications 5
ASTM A269-04, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service5
ASTM A312/A312M-05, Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Pipes5
ASTM A789/A789M-05, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic / Austenitic Stainless
Steel Tubing for General Service5
ASTM A790/A790M-05, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic / Austenitic Stainless
Steel Pipe5
ASTM A815/A815M-04, Standard Specification for Wrought Ferritic, Ferritic / Austenitic, and Martensitic
Stainless Steel Piping Fittings5
ASTM C31/C31M-00e1, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field 5
ASTM C109/C109M-99, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars 5
ASTM C 183-02, Standard Practice for Sampling and the Amount of Testing of Hydraulic Cement 5
ASTM C192/C192M-00, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory5
ASTM C511-98, Standard Specification for Moist Cabinets, Moist Rooms, and Water Storage Tanks Used
in the Testing of Hydraulic Cements and Concretes5
ASTM C778-00, Standard Specification for Standard Sand5
ASTM D2855-96, Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Pipe and Fittings5
ASTM D3182-89 (1994), Standard Practice for Rubber – Materials, Equipment, and Procedures for Mixing
Standard Compounds and Preparing Standard Vulcanized Sheets 5
ASTM E29-02, Standard Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with
Specifications5
ASTM F493-97, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe and Fittings5
ANSI/AWWA B100-96, AWWA Standard for Filtering Material6
4 American Public Health Association, American Water Works Association, and Water Environment Federation.
<www.standardmethods.org>
5 ASTM International. 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. <www.astm.org>
6 American Water Works Association. 6666 W Quincy Avenue, Denver, CO 80235. <www.awwa.org>
2
©2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
ANSI/AWWA C652-92, AWWA Standard for Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities6
NSF/ANSI/CAN 60, Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals – Health Effects
NSF/ANSI/CAN 372, Drinking Water System Components – Lead Content
NSF/ANSI/CAN 600, Health Effects Evaluation and Criteria for Chemicals in Drinking Water
OECD, OECD Guidelines for the Testing of Chemicals, May 19967
SSPC-PA2– 2004, Steel Structures Painting Manual Volume 2. Paint Application Specification8
The Society for Protective Coatings, Steel Structures Painting Manual. Volume 2. Reference Paint
Application Specification No. 2 (SSPC-PA2)8
US EPA-570-9-82-002, Manual for the Certification of Laboratories Analyzing Drinking Water, October
19829
US EPA-600/4-79-020, Methods for the Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, March 19839
US EPA-600/4-80-032, Prescribed Procedures for Measurement of Radioactivity in Drinking Water 9
US EPA-600/4-84-053, Methods for Organic Chemical Analysis of Municipal and Industrial Wastewater,
June 19849
US EPA-600/R-05/054, Determination of Nitrosamines in Drinking Water By Solid Phase Extraction and

Capillary Column Gas Chromatography With Large Volume Injection and Chemical Ionization Tandem
Mass Spectrometry (MS/MS), September 20049
US FDA, Toxicological Principles for the Safety Assessment of Direct Food Additives and Color Additives
in Food10
1.4 Limitations
The requirements of this Standard are limited to addressing potential health effects, except where specific
application and performance standards are referenced. This Standard does not establish taste and odor
requirements for drinking water system products and materials. The criteria set forth in this Standard cover
products created by good manufacturing practices (GMP) and generally recognized manufacturing
processes. As the presence of unusual or unexpected impurities is frequently dependent upon the method
of manufacture and the quality of raw material used, products prepared by other than recognized methods
of manufacture or with unusual raw materials shall be fully evaluated in accordance with Section 3 of this
Standard (General requirements). Products that have been evaluated and found to meet other
NSF standards having health requirements equivalent to this Standard as indicated in each section shall
be acceptable for drinking water applications without separate evaluation under this Standard.11
7Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development. 2 Rue Andre-Pascal, 75775 Paris Cedex 16, France.
<www.oecd.org>
8 Association for Materials Protection and Performance. 15835 Park Ten Place. Houston, TX 77084. <www.ampp.org>
9 US Environmental Protection Agency. 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue NW, Washington, DC 20004. <www.epa.gov>
10US Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service, Food and Drug Administration. 10903 New
Hampshire Ave, Silver Spring, MD 20993. <www.fda.gov>
11 Final acceptance of a product for drinking water application is the responsibility of the appropriate federal, state, or
local regulatory agent.
3
1.5 Alternate products or materials
While specific materials are stipulated in this Standard, drinking water system products or components that
incorporate alternate materials shall be acceptable when it is verified that the product or component meets
the applicable requirements of the Standard based on its end use.
1.6 Significant figures and rounding
For determining conformance with the specifications in this Standard, the Absolute Method in ASTM E295
Standard Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with Specifications
shall be used. When rounding data, the rounding procedure in Section 6.4 of ASTM E295 shall be used.
2 Definitions
Terms used in this Standard that have a specific technical meaning are defined here.
2.1 analytical summary: A list of the analytes and analytical procedures, both chemical and
microbiological, that are selected to determine whether a product is conformant to the requirements of the
Standard; analytes may be either product-specific or formulation-dependent.
2.2 at the tap: Referring to the point of delivery or point of use for drinking water.
2.3 cold water application: A product application that is not intended to result in exposure for extended
periods to water in excess of ambient water temperature.
2.4 contaminant: A physical, chemical, biological, or radiological substance or matter in water.
NOTE — Consistent with the definition in the US Federal Safe Drinking Water Act, a contaminant can have
either a beneficial or detrimental effect on the potability of water.
2.5 diluted surface area (DSA): The surface area / volume ratio of a product, component, or material
calculated using its actual wetted surface area, the field static and/or field flow volumes directed by the
standard for the end use for which the product is being evaluated. The calculation shall use the
normalization equation specific to that end use. The values for lab surface area and lab volume in the
normalization equation shall be entered as 1 for the purposes of this determination causing the DSA ratio
to equal the calculated NF factor. The volume of chemical generated or water treated shall be for a 24-h
period.
Example calculation: For a component of a chemical generator that has an actual surface area of 5 in 2 and
the unit treats a minimum daily water volume of 500,000 L/d (refer to Annex N-1 for definition of
normalization terms):
in2 SAF VL VF(static) VTC 5 1 in2

DSA ( ) = NF = N1 × N2 × N4 = × × × = × = 0.00001
L SAL VF(static) VF(flowing) VWT 1 500,000 L
Where:
SAF = surface area exposed in the field
SAL = 1 (per DSA definition)
VL = 1 (per DSA definition)
VF(static) = cancels out of the equation for this example
4
VF(flowing) = VTC and the two cancel out of the equation in this example (i.e., the volume of solution
leaving the chemical generator [VF(flowing)] is the same as that being used to treat the water [VTC])
VWT = volume of raw water treated with the concentrated chemical when dosed at the prescribed
feed rate during a 24-h period.
2.6 direct additives: A treatment chemical and its contaminants directly added to water during the
production of drinking water.
2.7 distribution system: The system of conduits or the network of pipelines (located primarily in the
streets) through which a primary domestic water supply is distributed to consumers. In plumbing codes, this
term is applied to all the hot and cold water piping installed in buildings.
2.8 drinking water: Water intended for human consumption.
2.9 drinking water treatment unit system: A complete water treatment device, including all
components needed to connect the device to a potable water supply.
2.10 free available chlorine: The sum of hypochlorous acid and hypochlorite ions.
2.11 good manufacturing practices (GMP): The practice of maximizing the purity of products and
materials by maintaining and practicing appropriate quality control (QC) and quality assurance (QA)
procedures.
2.12 hot water application: A product application that is intended to result in exposure for extended
periods to water that has been raised from ambient temperature.
2.13 indirect additives: Contaminants that are extracted into drinking water through contact with the
surfaces of materials, components, or products used for its treatment, storage, transmission, or distribution.
2.14 manufacturer: A corporation, company, or individual that produces, formulates, packages, or

repackages products, components, and materials that are intended to be in contact with drinking water.
2.15 maximum contaminant level (MCL): The maximum concentration of a regulated contaminant that
is permitted in a public drinking water supply, as defined under the US Federal Safe Drinking Water Act.
NOTE — If the manufacturer requests review to relevant alternate regulatory requirements, the certifying
agency can consider alternative regulatory levels, e.g., Canadian maximum acceptable concentrations
(MACs).
2.16 normalization: The process of adjusting laboratory extraction results by accounting for differences
between laboratory and field surface area-to-volume ratios to reflect the contaminant concentration at the
tap.
2.17 normalized concentration: A value for a contaminant concentration from a laboratory extraction
test that has been adjusted to reflect the potential contaminant concentration at the tap.
2.18 point-of-entry (POE) system: A system with a minimum initial clean-system flow rate of no less
than 15 L/min at 103 kPa pressure drop and 18 ± 5 °C water temperature (not less than 4 gal/min at
15 psig pressure drop and 65 ± 10 °F water temperature) used to treat the water supply at a building or
facility for drinking, washing, and flushing or for other nonconsumption water supply purposes.
2.19 point-of-use (POU) system: A plumbed-in or faucet-mounted system used to treat the drinking
and/or cooking water at a single tap or multiple taps but not used to treat the majority of water used for
washing and flushing or other nonconsumption purposes at a building or facility. Any batch system or device
not connected to the plumbing system is considered a POU system.
5
2.20 short-term exposure level (STEL): A maximum concentration of a contaminant that is permitted
in drinking water for an acute exposure calculated in accordance with NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously
Annex A).
2.21 single product allowable concentration (SPAC): The maximum concentration of a contaminant
in drinking water that a single product is allowed to contribute as defined by NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously
Annex A).
2.22 total allowable concentration (TAC): The maximum concentration of a nonregulated contaminant
allowed in a public drinking water supply as defined by NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously Annex A).
2.23 transmission system: A system of conduits through which a primary water supply is transmitted
to the distribution system.
2.24 unit void volume (UVV): Total water-holding volume with the medium (media) and internal
components in place.
3 General requirements
3.1 General
3.1.1 Product and material information described in Section 3.2 shall be used to determine the specific
section (4 through 9) under which a product or material shall be evaluated.
3.1.2 Products or materials whose intended uses fall under more than one section of this Standard shall
be evaluated under the section with the most rigorous evaluation conditions.
3.1.3 Within the applicable section of this Standard, products shall be evaluated under the most rigorous
conditions unless results from a less rigourous test can be mathematically extrapolated to ensure
compliance with the most rigorous condition.
3.1.4 The most rigorous condition is associated with the shortest conditioning period, longest exposure
period, highest surface area to volume ratio, and highest exposure temperature, unless demonstrated
otherwise with emperical data.
3.2 Information and formulation requirements
The following information shall be obtained and reviewed for all materials with a water contact surface to
determine the appropriate analytical testing and to ensure that the potential health effects of products and
materials are accurately and adequately identified:
— the product section(s) under which the product, component, or material is covered and the intended
function or end use of the product or the material;
— for assemblies, subassemblies, products or components, a list of all materials and their
corresponding surface areas that come into direct contact with water;
— when appropriate, the total volume of water that the product can hold when filled to capacity;
— the anticipated minimum, maximum, and average volumes of water that come into contact with the
product, component, or material during a 24 h period;
6
— complete formulation information (equal to 100.0%) for each water contact material. This shall
include:
— a complete formulation shall result in the identity by CAS number or chemical name of each
component of the formulation including but not limited to the activators, antioxidants, antimicrobials,
cosolvents, fillers, initiators, peroxides, pigments, plasticizers, process aids, solvents, stabilizer,
surfactants and terminators; and
— percent or parts by weight for each chemical in the formulation or reference to a national or
international standardized material specification for metallic materials (e.g., UNS copper alloy
specifications).
NOTE 1 — The complete formulation information may be omitted for a component material if:
— the generic material type is contained in Table 3.1 and its DSA in the application is ≤ 0.001 in2/L
or 0.0001 in2/L for static or flowing conditions respectively; or
— the generic material type is contained in Table 3.1 and if the material is in a high flow device and
used exclusively at public water treatment facilities. For the purposes of this section, high flow devices
are limited to chemical feeders, disinfectant generators (e.g., chlorine dioxide, hypochlorite, ozone
and ultraviolet), electrodialysis technologies, microfiltration technologies, nanofiltration technologies,
reverse osmosis and ultrafiltration technologies; or
— the generic material type is contained in Table 3.1 and if (1) used in a mechanical device or
mechanical plumbing device, and (2) the material is not a coating, and (3) the component is not a
process media; or
— if (1) the material is not listed in Table 3.1, and (2) it is used in a mechanical device or mechanical
plumbing device, and (3) the material is not a coating, and (4) the component is not a process media,
and (5) the material is tested to the requirements of Table 3.2.
If the product is to be considered compliant to a lead content standard, the lead content (percent by
weight) and wetted surface area of each component that comes into contact with the direct flow of water
under the normal operation of the product is required. Complete documentation shall be submitted in
accordance with NSF/ANSI/CAN 372.
NOTE 2 — A material is defined as a combination of ingredients used to manufacture (mold, extrude,

stamp, cast, machine, mix, etc.) a part or component used in the assembly of a device. To include, but
not be limited to, plastics, elastomers, metallic components, media, lubricants, adhesives, process aid,
preservatives, coatings, and surface treatments.
— when the chemical composition of an ingredient or component cannot be determined based on the
information submitted by the material supplier, the information shall be obtained by the certifier from
the ingredient supplier prior to determining all formulation dependant analytes;
— the composition of the materials ingredients and their components shall be known to determine the
identity of formulation specific analytes;
— the maximum temperature to which the product, component, or material is exposed during its
intended end use;
— a description / classification of the manner in which the product or material is manufactured

(including any process parameters that affect product surface areas in direct contact with water),
handled, and packaged. The manufacturing process variability shall be verified by the manufacturer as
to its effect on contaminant leachate levels, and the manufacturer shall establish and demonstrate
appropriate ongoing process controls to ensure ongoing product conformance with this Standard;
7
NOTE — The methods used to alter the water contact surfaces of product components during
manufacturing, either mechanically (e.g., metal cutting, molding, stamping) or chemically (e.g., washing,
coating, plating, brite-dip cleaning), may have a significant effect upon contaminant leachate
performance.
— when available, a list of the known or suspected impurities within the product or material and the
maximum percent or parts by weight of each impurity;
— when available, the solubility, hydrolysis products, and extraction rates of chemicals within the
product or material; and
— when available, a list of published and unpublished toxicological studies relevant to the chemicals
and impurities present in the product, component, or material.
3.2.1 Information and formulation requirements for regenerated / reactivated media
In addition to the information formulation requirements of Section 3.2, the following information is required
for the formulation review and preparation of the analytical summary for regenerated and reactivated media:
— a description of the regeneration / reactivation process and process controls, such as time,
temperature, chemical regenerants, and any quality control (QC) tests associated with the regeneration
/ reactivation process to ensure contaminants are removed from the spent media so that it complies
with the requirements of this Standard;
— a copy of the procedure detailing the evaluation, and conclusion associated with the review of data
from spent media sources identifying all regulated contaminants, or other contaminants of concern that
are removed from water and any contaminant spills or unusual water conditions; and
— a copy of the data, and a copy of the documentation associated with the evaluation of the data from
the spent media source(s) associated with a specific lot of reactivated or regenerated media for which
a retained sample is available for testing.
3.2.1.1 Incoming shipments of media to be regenerated / reactivated
The following information shall be provided by the water system and maintained by the processing plant for
each shipment of spent media received for regeneration / reactivation:
— identification of the type of the spent media, spent media source, and application of use
(e.g., production of drinking water);
— identification of the original media, including manufacturer or previous regeneration / reactivation

facility, trade designation, mesh size and compliance with this Standard for each spent media source;
— regulated contaminants or other contaminants of concern removed from water, including any
contaminant spills or unusual water quality conditions;
— statement as to whether the spent media has been knowingly exposed to:
— activated carbon: polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), or dioxins; or

— other media: herbicides, pesticides, PCBs, dioxins or 1,2 dibromo-3chloropropane (DBCP).
— statement to verify that the spent media source is from a public water system (publicly or privately
owned) as defined by US EPA regulations (40 CFR § 141.2),3 or equivalent regulations in Canada and
other countries, where applicable.
8
3.3 Identification of analytes
For all products and materials, the formulation information required in Section 3.2 shall be reviewed for
completeness (e.g., all formulations total 100.0%), and to determine whether a minimum test battery has
been established for each water contact material (see Table 3.1). In addition to selecting the minimum
testing parameters decribed in Table 3.1, a formulation review to identify any formulation-dependent
analytes shall be performed for all water contact materials (see Section 3.3.1).
In instances where the complete formulation has not been obtained for a material that is used in a
component of a mechanical device or mechanical plumbing device as allowed through Note 1 of
Section 3.2, testing shall include the material-specific analyses in Table 3.1, or as directed in Table 3.2.
3.3.1 Formulation-dependent analysis selection
For all water contact materials, the formulation information described in Section 3.2 shall be reviewed, and
formulation-dependent analytes shall be identified for each water contact material. The criteria for selection
of a formulation-dependent analyte shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
— known or suspected toxicity of the substance or its byproduct(s);
— high water solubility of the substance;
— monomer(s) of polymeric ingredients;
— solvents and cosolvents used in the polymerization process or those used in the material
formulation;
— antioxidants, antimicrobials, curing agents, initiators, peroxides, pigments, plasticizers, process

aids, stabilizer and terminators and their impurities, degradation and hydrolysis products;
— high probability of extraction of a substance or its byproduct(s) at toxicologically significant

concentrations; and
— extraction or migration information for the substance provided by the manufacturer or that present
in the public literature.
3.3.2 Established minimum test batteries
The materials listed in Table 3.1 or Table 3.2 shall be tested for the indicated analyses and any
formulation-dependent analyses identified during the formulation-dependent analyte selection. Products,
components, or materials made exclusively from materials in Table 3.1 shall not require testing if:
— their DSA-to-volume ratio in the application is ≤ 0.001 in2/L or 0.0001 in2/L for static or flowing
conditions respectively, or
— the material is uncoated concrete for use in a water storage structure of 1.33 × 106 L
(0.35 × 106 gal) or greater and any admixtures used have been evaluated to this Standard and found
compliant within the use levels in the concrete, or
— the material is uncoated concrete or for use in applications with a DSA-to-volume ratio less than or
equal to 0.8 in2/L or 0.08 in2/L for static or flowing conditions respectively, and any admixtures used
have been evaluated to this Standard and found compliant within the use levels in the concrete; or
9
NOTE — The addition of the criteria for concrete water storage structures is in recognition of the
diminishing value of investigations on those with high volumes (low surface area-to-volume ratios) where
admixtures have seprately been verified as compliant with this Standard and the water storage structure
is seperately monitored for regulated contamaminants including radionuclides.
— the material is in a high flow device and used exclusively at public water treatment facilities. For
the purposes of this section, high flow devices are limited to chemical feeders, disinfection generators
(e.g., chlorine dioxide, hypochlorite, ozone and ultraviolet), electrodialysis technologies, microfiltration
technologies, nanofiltration technologies, reverse osmosis and ultrafiltration technologies.
3.4 Products manufactured from Annex N-2 acceptable materials
Products manufactured entirely from Annex N-2 materials shall not be required to undergo extraction testing
for material-specific analytes of interest. However, extraction testing for contaminants contributed by
processes specific to a production site shall be considered formulation-dependent analytes. Annex N-2
contains the evaluation requirements for qualification as an acceptable material.
Table 3.1
Material-specific analyses
Material type Required analyses

pipe / fitting / device materials
aluminum regulated metals,1 aluminum
aluminum oxide ceramics regulated metals,1 aluminum
GC/MS,2 VOCs, regulated metals,1
asphaltic-coated ductile iron polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons (PNAs), molybdenum,
vanadium, manganese
brass regulated metals,1 zinc, nickel, bismuth3
GC/MS,2 VOCs, polynuclear hydrocarbons (PNAs),
carbon graphite nonimpregnated
regulated metals1
carbon graphite (phenol 2
GC/MS, VOCs, polynuclear hydrocarbons (PNAs),
formaldehyde impregnated) formaldehyde, regulated metals1
carbon steel regulated metals1
cast iron regulated metals1
chrome / nickel plating regulated metals,1 nickel
concrete4 regulated metals1
concrete aggregate4 regulated metals,1 radionuclides
copper regulated metals1
ductile iron regulated metals1
galvanized steel regulated metals,1 zinc, nickel
magnets regulated metals,1 metals3,5
nickel based alloys regulated metals,1 nickel
platinum regulated metals,1 platinum
quartz regulated metals1
ruby or sapphire (natural and
synthetic aluminum oxide regulated metals,1 aluminum
gemstones)
silicon carbide ceramics regulated metals,1 silicon
silver regulated metals,1 silver
10
Table 3.1

stainless steel regulated metals,1 nickel
titanium regulated metals,1 titanium
tungsten carbide regulated metals,1 tungsten
zirconium oxide ceramics regulated metals,1 zirconium
plastic materials
acetal (AC) / polyoxymethylene
GC/MS,2 VOCs, regulated metals,1,3 formaldehyde
(POM)
acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene
GC/MS,2 VOCs, regulated metals,1,3 acrylonitrile,
(ABS),
1,3-butadiene, styrene
acrylonitrile-styrene (SAN)
GC/MS,2 VOCs, regulated metals,1,3
cross-linked polyethylene (PEX)
methanol, tert-butyl alcohol6
nylon 6 GC/MS, VOCs, regulated metals,1,3 caprolactam
2
other nylons GC/MS,2 VOCs, regulated metals,1,3 nylon monomers

polybutylene (PB) GC/MS,2 VOCs, regulated metals1,3
polycarbonate (PC) GC/MS,2 bisphenol A, VOCs, regulated metals1,3
polyethylene (PE) GC/MS,2 VOCs, regulated metals1,3
polyphenylene oxide (PPO) GC/MS,2 dimethyl phenol, VOCs, regulated metals1,3
GC/MS,2 VOCs, regulated metals,1,3 hexamethylene diamine,
polyphthalamide (PPA)
terephthalic acid, isophthalic acid
polypropylene (PP) GC/MS,2 VOCs, regulated metals1,3
styrene, GC/MS,2 VOCs, regulated metals,1
polystyrene
phenolics (by GC/MS base/acid scan)2
polysulphone including
poly[phenylene sulphone] GC/MS,2 VOCs, regulated metals,1,3 sulphone monomer
(PPSU)
polyurethane (PUR) GC/MS,2 VOCs, regulated metals1,3
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and
regulated metals,1,3 phenolics,2 VOCs, tin,7 lead, antimony,8
chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
residual vinyl chloride monomer (RVCM)9
(CPVC)
GC/MS,2 VOCs, regulated metals,1,3 lead,
PVC (flexible)
phthalates,10 RVCM,9 tin,7 zinc11
joining and sealing materials
GC/MS,2 VOCs, and 2-chloro-1,3-butadiene,
chloroprene
phthalates,10 PNAs,2 nitrosoamines12
ethylene-propylene-diene
GC/MS,2 VOCs, phthalates,10 PNAs,2 nitrosoamines12
monomer (EPDM)
ethylene tetrafluoroethylene
GC/MS,2 VOCs, perfluorooctanoic acid
(ETFE)
flux GC/MS,2,3 VOCs, regulated metals,1,3 PNAs2,3
fluoroelastomer GC/MS,2 VOCs, perfluorooctanoic acid
GC/MS,2 VOCs, phthalates,10 PNAs,2
isoprene
isoprene monomer, nitrosoamines12
nitrile-butadiene rubber GC/MS, VOCs, phthalates,10 PNAs,2 1,3-butadiene,
2
(NBR, BUNA-N, HNBR) acrylonitrile, nitrosoamines12
11
Table 3.1

PTFE GC/MS,2 VOCs, perfluorooctanoic acid
PVDF GC/MS,2 VOCs, vinylidene fluoride, hexafluoropropene
silicone GC/MS,2 VOCs, 2,4-dichlorobenzoic acid
solder regulated metals,1 aluminum, bismuth, nickel, silver, strontium, zinc
GC/MS,2 VOCs,3 acetone, tetrahydrofuran, cyclohexanone,
solvent cements
methyl ethyl ketone, dimethylformamide, methyl isobutyl ketone
GC/MS,2 VOCs, phthalates,10 PNAs,2 1,3-butadiene,
styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR)
styrene, nitrosoamines12
barrier materials
GC/MS,2 VOCs, regulated metals,1 molybdenum, vanadium,
asphaltic coatings
manganese, PNAs2
GC/MS, VOCs, bisphenol A,3 bisphenol A-diglycidyl ether,13
2
bisphenol A-diglycideryl ether,13 bisphenol A-propoxylate,3,13

epoxy coatings
epichlorohydrin,3 bisphenol F,3 bisphenol F-diglycidyl ether,3,13
(liquid and powder)
bisphenol F-diglycideryl ether,3,13 bisphenol F-propoxylate,3,13
solvent and reactive diluent additives3,14
polyester coatings GC/MS,2 VOCs, residual monomers15
polyurethane coatings GC/MS,2 VOCs
GC/MS,2 regulated metals,1 dioxins and furans, radionuclides,
portland and hydraulic cements4
glycols and ethanolamines16
1 Antimony, arsenic, barium, beryllium, cadmium, chromium, copper, lead, mercury, selenium, thallium. Chromium
shall be evaluated against the pass/fail criteria of chromium VI as a screening level. If the normalized result exceeds
this criteria, the sample shall be tested according to the method described in Section N-1.7.3 and shall be evaluated
against the pass/fail criteria listed in Table 4.1 of NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously Table D.1) for the tested product.
Regardless of chromium species, the total chromium pass/fail criteria shall not be exceeded.
2 See Section N-1.7
3 The testing may be waived for a this specific analyte where formulation information indicates that it is not present.
In instances where the complete formulation has not been obtained for the material as allowed through Note 1 of 3.2,
testing shall include this analyte.
4Concrete aggregate sampling is required only if the method for testing for individual concrete components is used.
Aggregate sampling is not required if concrete cylinders are tested for the constituents in portland and hydraulic
cements.
5 Aluminum, antimony, arsenic, barium, beryllium, bismuth, cadmium, cerium, cobalt, chromium, cesium, copper,
dysprosium, erbium, europium, gallium, gadolinium, germanium, hafnium, indium, lanthanum, lead, lithium, lutetium,
manganese, mercury, molybdenum, niobium, neodymium, nickel, palladium, praseodymium, platinum, rubidium,
rhenium, rhodium, ruthenium, samarium, selenium, silver, strontium, tantalum, tellurium, thallium, tin, titanium,
tungsten, uranium, vanadium, tungsten, ytterbium, zinc, zirconium. Chromium shall be evaluated against the pass/fail
criteria of chromium VI as a screening level. If the normalized result exceeds this criteria, the sample shall be tested
according to the method described in Section N-1.7.3 and shall be evaluated against the pass/fail criteria listed in
Table 4.1 of NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously Table D.1) for the tested product. Regardless of chromium species, the
total chromium pass/fail criteria shall not be exceeded.
6 tert-Butyl alcohol analysis is required for PEX materials except those crosslinked via e-beam methodology.
7 The analysis for tin is required when tin-based stabilizers are used.
8 The analysis for antimony is required when antimony-based stabilizers are used.
9 The level of RVCM within the walls of PVC or CPVC products and materials shall be directly determined
(Section N-1.7).
12
Table 3.1

10The analysis for phthalates is required when phthalate ester plasticizers are used. Analysis shall be for the specific
phthalate ester(s) used in the formulation.
11 The analysis for zinc is required when zinc-based stablilizers are used.
12Analysis for n-nitrosodimethylamine, n-nitrosomethylethylamine, n-nitrosodiethylamine, n-nitrosodi-n-propylamine,
n-nitrosopyrrolidine, n-nitrosomorpholine, n-nitrosopiperidine, n-nitrosodi-n-butylamine and n-nitrosodiphenylamine
are required when material is sulfur cured.
13 Analysis shall be performed using liquid chromatography with ultraviolet detection (LC/UV).
14 Analysis shall be performed for the specific solvent and reactive diluent additives used in the individual product
formulation, such as benzyl alcohol.
15
Analysis shall be performed for residual concentrations of the specific ester monomers used in the individual product
formulation.
16 Glycol and ethanolamine analyses shall be performed on cements containing these compounds as grinding aids.
13
Table 3.2
Material specific analyses not listed in Table 3.1 or materials without formulation information
(excluding coatings and process media)
Material Suggested
Material specific analyses1
type Method2
aluminum, antimony, arsenic, barium, beryllium, bismuth, cadmium, cerium,
cobalt, chromium, hexavalent chromium, cesium, copper, dysprosium,
erbium, europium, gallium, gadolinium, germanium, hafnium, indium,
lanthanum, lead, lithium, lutetium, manganese, mercury, molybdenum,
niobium, neodymium, nickel, palladium, praseodymium, platinum, rubidium,
rhenium, rhodium, ruthenium, samarium, selenium, silicon, silver, strontium,
metallic tantalum, tellurium, thallium, tin, titanium, tungsten, uranium, vanadium,
materials tungsten, ytterbium, zinc, zirconium EPA 200.8
not listed in
Table 3.1 Chromium shall be evaluated against the pass/fail criteria of chromium VI
as a screening level. If the normalized result exceeds this criteria, the
sample shall be tested according to the method described in Section
N-1.7.3 and shall be evaluated against the pass/fail criteria listed in
NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 Table 4.1 for the tested product. Regardless of
chromium species, the total chromium pass/fail criteria shall not be
exceeded.
bisphenol A, caprolactam, dimethyl phenol, terephthalic acid, isophthalic
acid, hexamethylene diamine, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid,
bisphenol A-propylene oxide adducts, hydroquinone, phthalic acid, LC/UV
1,4-butanediol, p-phenylenediamine, o-phenylenediamine, 1,6-hexanediol,
m-phenylenediamine, melamine, triethylene diamine, trimethylolpropane
nylon monomers = 11-aminoundecanoic acid, 1,10-diaminodecane,
LC/UV
laurolactam, adipic acid, 2-methyl-1,5-pentanediamine
sulphone monomer, 4,4'-dichlorodiphenyl sulfone, and diphenyl sulfone LC/UV
formaldehyde EPA 8315A
RVCM, 1,2-dichloro-3-propanol, 1,3-dichloro-2-propanol, methyl butenol
isomers, methylene bis-cyclohexylamine 4,4'-, cyclohexanamine GC/FID
methylenebis methyl propyl, methylenedianiline, methanol
dimethylphthalate, diethylphthalate, bis(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate (DEHP),
EPA525.2
plastic di-n-butylphthalate
materials 1,3-butadiene, styrene, tert-butyl alcohol, VOCs, epichlorohydrin,
not listed in methyl-tert-butyl ether (MTBE), vinylidene fluoride, hexafluoropropylene, EPA 524.2
Table 3.1 acrylonitrile
antimony, arsenic, barium, beryllium, cadmium, chromium, hexavalent
chromium, copper, lead, mercury, selenium, thallium, tin
Chromium shall be evaluated against the pass/fail criteria of chromium VI
as a screening level. If the normalized result exceeds this criteria, the
sample shall be tested according to the method described in Section EPA 200.8
N-1.7.3 and shall be evaluated against the pass/fail criteria listed in
NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 Table 4.1 for the tested product. Regardless of
exceeded.
phenolics, acetal oligomers, dimethyl terephthalate, diethylphthalate,
EPA 625
diisobutylphthalate, di-n-butylphthalate, butylbenzylphthalate,
BNA
di-n-octylphthalate
perfluorooctanoic acid LC/MS ES
14
Table 3.2
Material Suggested
type Method2
phenolics (by GC/MS base/acid scan), PNAs, semivolatile compounds,
bisphenol F, bisphenol F – propylene oxide adducts, diisobutylphthalate EPA 625
diethylphthalate, dimethyl terephthalate, butylbenzylphthalate, BNA
di-n-butylphthalate, butylbenzylphthalate, di-n-octylphthalate
VOCs, and 2-chloro-1,3-butadiene, isoprene monomer, chloroprene,
1,3-butadiene, acrylonitrile, vinylidene fluoride, hexafluoropropene, EPA524.2
2,4-dichlorobenzoic acid, alpha-methyl styrene, styrene, isobutylene
elastomer
materials aniline GC/ECD
not listed in perfluorooctanoic acid LC/MS ES
Table 3.1 dimethylphthalate, diethylphthalate, di-n-butylphthalate, diphenylamine,
bis(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate (DEHP), p-phenylenediamine, o-toluidine, EPA 525.2
o-phenylenediamine, m-phenylenediamine
n-nitrosodimethylamine, n-nitrosomethylethylamine, n-nitrosopiperidine,
n-nitrosodiethylamine, n-nitrosodi-n-propylamine, n-nitrosopyrrolidine, EPA 521
n-nitrosomorpholine, n-nitrosodi-n-butylamine, n-nitrosodiphenylamine
metals EPA 200.8
tetraethylene glycol, ethylene glycol, 2-ethyl-1,3-hexanediol LC/MS
m-phenylene diamine, methacrylic acid, bisphenol A, bisphenol A -
propylene oxide adducts, melamine, maleic acid, hydroquinone, acrylic LC/UV
acid, ethyl-2-cyanoacrylate
acetates and acrylates, 1,3-butylene glycol dimethacrylate, semivolatile
EPA 625
compounds
adhesives formaldehyde EPA 8315A
epichlorohydrin, 1,3-butadiene, acrylonitrile EPA 524.2
1,3-dichloro-2-propanol in water, methylenedianiline micro / derivatization,
1,3-dichloro-2-propanol, micro / derivatization, 1,2-dichloro-3-propanol, GC/FID
aniline
*1,4- butanediol, cyanoacetic acid, benzyl alcohol LC/MS
phenolics EPA 625
2,4-dichlorobenzoic acid, acrylic acid LC/UV
lubricants
perfluorooctanoic acid LCMS/ES-
propylene glycol; ethylene glycol LC/MS
derivatization
chlorobenzenediamine, and dichlorobenzenediamine isomers
GC/ECD
other volatile organic compounds including 2-methylpropene (isobutylene),
materials not tetrahydrofuran, cyclohexanone, acetone, 1,3-butadiene, 2-chloro-1,3-
listed in butadiene (chloroprene), epichlorohydrin, methyl ethyl ketone, 2-methyl-
Table 3.1 1,3-butadiene (isoprene), divinyl benzene (vinyl styrene), EPA 524.2
without 2,4-dichlorobenzoic acid, 2-methylpropene (isobutylene) methyl-tert-butyl
formulation ether (MTBE), alpha-methyl styrene, hexafluoropropylene, vinylidene
information
fluoride, hydroquinone monomethyl ether, acrylonitrile
(excluding
semivolatile compounds, PNAs, acetates and acrylates, ethyl acetate,
coatings and
process vinyl acetate, 1,4-dioxane, ethylhexyl acrylate, dimethyl terephthalate, EPA 625
media) diethylphthalate, diisobutylphthalate, di-n-butylphthalate, BNA
di-n-octylphthalate, butylbenzylphthalate
gross alpha and beta radioactivity in drinking water EPA 900.0
15
Table 3.2
Material Suggested
type Method2
acrylamide by derivitization, captan, methylenedianiline aniline, micro /
GC/ECD
derivatization, methylene bis-cyclohexylamine 4,4'-, microextraction
methyl-2-propanol, 2-, (t-butylalcohol), methanol, n-butanol, sec-butyl
alcohol, methyl butenol isomers, 1,2-dichloro-3-propanol, 1,3-dichloro-2- GC/FID
propanol in water, 1-propanol, 2-propanol
aluminum, antimony, arsenic, barium, beryllium, bismuth, cadmium, cerium,
cobalt, chromium, hexavalent chromium, cesium, copper, dysprosium,
erbium, europium, gallium, gadolinium, germanium, hafnium, indium,
other lanthanum, lead, lithium, lutetium, manganese, mercury, molybdenum,
materials not niobium, neodymium, nickel, palladium, praseodymium, platinum, rubidium,
listed in rhenium, rhodium, ruthenium, samarium, selenium, silicon, silver, strontium,
Table 3.1 tantalum, tellurium, thallium, tin, titanium, tungsten, uranium, vanadium,
without ytterbium, zinc, zirconium EPA 200.8
formulation
information Chromium shall be evaluated against the pass/fail criteria of chromium VI
(excluding as a screening level. If the normalized result exceeds this criteria, the
coatings and sample shall be tested according to the method described in Section
process N-1.7.3 and shall be evaluated against the pass/fail criteria listed in
media) NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 Table 4.1 for the tested product. Regardless of
exceeded.
triethylene diamine, 1,6-hexanediol, 2-ethyl-1,3-hexanediol,
trimethylolpropane, propylene glycol, perfluorooctanoic acid, diethylene
LC/MS
glycol, ethylene glycol, hexalene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, triethylene
glycol, dipropylene glycol
benzyl alcohol, bisphenol A , bisphenol A - propylene oxide adducts,
bisphenol F, diphenyl sulfone, 4,4'-dichlorodiphenyl sulfone,
dimethylformamide, n,n-dimethylacetamide, diphenylamine, di-t-butyl-4-
alkyl phenols, ethylenethiourea (2-imidazolidinethione), hydroquinone,
methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, n,n-diethyl-p-toluidene, isomers of phenylene
diamine, toluenediamine, 2,4-, toluenediamine, 2,6-, tetramethyl thiuram LC/UV
other monosulfide, diethylene triamine, ethylene diamine, 2-methyl-1,5-
materials not
pentanediamine, ethyl-2-cyanoacrylate, laurolactam, 1,3-butylene glycol
listed in
dimethacrylate, caprolactam, acrylic acid, adipic acid11-aminoundecanoic
Table 3.1
without acid, hexamethylene diamine, maleic acid, methacrylic acid, melamine
formulation trimellitic acid, cyanoacetic acid
information n-nitrosodimethylamine, n-nitrosomethylethylamine, n-nitrosodiethylamine,
(excluding n-nitrosodi-n-propylamine, n-nitrosopyrrolidine, n-nitrosomorpholine, EPA 521
coatings and n-nitrosopiperidine, n-nitrosodi-n-butylamine, n-nitrosodiphenylamine
process 1,4-butanediol LC/MS
media)
formaldehyde EPA 8315A
4,4'-methylenebis[N-(1 -methylpropyl)- cyclohexanamine,
LC/MS
2-methylimidazole
isophthalic acid, phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, o-toluidine, n,n-diethyl-p-
toluidene, dimethylphthalate, diethylphthalate, di-n-butylphthalate, EPA 525.2
bis(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate (DEHP)
1 The testing may be waived for a specific analyte when partial information indicates that it is not present.
2 Refer to Section N-1.7 for analytical methods. Alternate methods that have been validated may be used.
16
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
3.5 Restriction on use of lead containing materials
There shall be no lead added as an intentional ingredient in any product, component, or material submitted
for evaluation to this Standard, with the following exceptions:
— brass or bronze used in products meeting the definition of “lead free” under the specific provisions
of the Safe Drinking Water Act of the United States;
— solders and flux meeting the definition of “lead free” under the specific provisions of the
Safe Drinking Water Act of the United States;
— brass or bronze used in products specifically identified as exemptions within Section (a)(4)(B) of
the Safe Drinking Water Act of the United States;
— fire sprinklers (head);
— trace amounts required for operation of products used to monitor the characteristics of drinking
water, such as the glass membranes used with some selective ion or pH electrodes; and
— materials or components exempted from formulation information requirements as allowed per

Section 3.2, Note 1.
NOTE — To the maximum extent possible, lead should not be added as an intentional ingredient in any
product covered by the scope of this Standard. The exception above relative to materials and components
exempt from formulation information requirements has only been included in recognition that the use of
lead as an intentional additive is unable to be identified in cases where formulation information is not
obtained.
3.6 Lead content of products
With the exception of those exempted in the Safe Drinking Water Act of the United States, the wetted
surfaces of products shall have a weighted average lead content ≤ 0.25% when evaluated in accordance
with NSF/ANSI/CAN 372. For the purpose of this section, product shall refer to anything individually
evaluated for compliance under the standard, including materials and components. Solders and fluxes shall
have a lead content no more than 0.2%.
4 Pipes and related products

4.1 Scope
4.1.1 The requirements in this section apply to pipes and pipe-related products and the water contact
materials associated with these products. Pipe-related products include, but are not limited to, the following
items: fittings, couplings, mini-manifolds, flexible and rigid tubing, riser tubing, dip tubes, hoses, well
casings, drop pipes and well screens.
4.1.2 Coatings and other barrier materials requested to be evaluated on their own that are intended for
application to pipes or pipe-related products shall be evaluated under Section 5.
NOTE — Coatings and other barrier materials, which meet the requirements of Section 5 at a specific surface
area-to-volume ratio, shall be considered to meet the requirements of a pipe or pipe-related product application
for a surface area-to-volume ratio less than or equal to the ratio accepted under the Section 5 evaluation.
4.1.3 Individual ingredients of cement-based pipes and related products (including portland and blended
hydraulic cement and admixtures) are evaluated under Section 5.
17
4.1.4 Products and materials intended to join or seal pipes or pipe-related products are evaluated under
Section 6.
4.2 Definitions
4.2.1 cold water application: A product application that is intended to result in continuous exposure to
water of ambient temperature. Products are tested for an end use temperature of 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F).
4.2.2 commercial hot water application: A product application that is intended to result in continuous
or intermittent exposure to water that has been raised from ambient temperature. Intermittent exposure is
defined as any hot water contact that is not continuous. Products are tested for an end use temperature of
82 ± 2 C (180 ± 4 F).
4.2.3 domestic hot water application: A product application that is intended to result in continuous or
intermittent exposure to water that has been raised from ambient temperature. Intermittent exposure is
60 ± 2 C (140 ± 4 F).
4.2.4 fire sprinkler: A fast response fire suppression device for dwelling units that automatically opens
when heat activated, allowing the discharge of water onto a fire.
4.2.5 nominal diameter: A designation system used to specify a pipe size, where the designation for a
specific size is approximately equal to the average inside diameter of the pipe.
4.2.6 mini-manifold: A device with an inlet and less than four other openings used to connect tubing
within a residence or building. This device shall be evaluated as a fitting under Section 4.
4.3 General requirements
4.3.1 The product size with the most conservative normalization condition shall be evaluated. Successful
evaluation of such a product shall qualify all products of less conservative normalization conditions,
provided that the materials of construction are identical as specified in Section 4.4.1.
NOTE — For products of 1.3- to 10-cm (0.5- to 4-in) nominal diameter and products of 10-cm (4-in) diameter
and greater, the most stringent normalization condition is typically the smallest inner diameter product within
the nominal diameter range. Products of less than 1.3-cm (0.5-in) nominal diameter are assumed to have
limited exposure in the distribution system (see assumptions in Tables 4.4 and 4.5). Successful qualification
of products of less than 1.3-cm (0.5-in) nominal diameter may not demonstrate the acceptability of all products
1.3-cm (0.5-in) nominal diameter and greater.
4.3.2 Residual vinyl chloride evaluation
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) products and materials shall be
evaluated for the level of residual vinyl chloride monomer (RVCM) in the product wall or in the material
according to Section N-1.7.
4.4 Sample requirements
4.4.1 General
A sample can represent a product line of various sizes when:
— materials are of the same alloy, composition, or formulation;

— materials have undergone the same manufacturing process (e.g., casting or extrusion);
— designs and manufacturing processes are analogous; and/or
— it has the most stringent normalization requirements (see Section 4.3.1).
18
4.4.2 Materials
When a material is proposed for evaluation, a representative sample of the material shall be used. Material
test samples (e.g., plaque or sheet) shall be used only if no chemical or physical difference exists between
the material sample and the material as it is used in applications covered by Section 4. A material intended
to be processed by more than one method (e.g., injection molding, extrusion, or stamping) shall be tested
in each of its processed forms.
4.4.3 Finished products
When a finished product (e.g., pipe or fitting) is proposed for evaluation, a sample of the finished product
shall be used for testing except in the following specific instances:
— concrete cylinders, cubes, or other concrete surrogate samples can be evaluated on behalf of
concrete-lined pipes and other concrete-based products;
— coatings, applied to the appropriate substrate, can be evaluated on behalf of products whose entire
water contact surface is covered by the coating; or
— finished products shall be permitted to be evaluated using material samples if a finished product
evaluation is impractical for one or more of the following reasons:
— an internal volume ˃ 20 L (5.3 gal);

— a weight ˃ 34 kg (75 lb); or
— in situ manufacture of the finished product.
Material samples shall be permitted to be evaluated on behalf of a finished product if the first and second
criteria listed under Section 4.4.1 are satisfied.
4.5 Extraction procedures
4.5.1 Analytical summary
An analytical summary shall be prepared for each product or material. The analytical summary shall consist
of the formulation-dependent analytes identified in Section 3.2 and the applicable material-specific analytes
listed in Table 3.1.
4.5.2 Preparation of test samples
4.5.2.1 To the extent possible, test samples shall be prepared so that the laboratory surface
area-to-volume ratio is equal to or greater than the surface area-to-volume ratio at which the product is
intended to be used in the field. When the use of test assemblies is required, they shall be constructed in a
manner as to not cover an otherwise wetted surface. Test assembly end closures that marginally increase
the volume of the test assembly beyond the volume at which the product is intended to be used in the field
may be used. Components and materials added to the test sample to form the test assembly shall be
present in the control sample.
4.5.2.1.1 For the evaluation of metal and metal containing product samples that are connected to pipe
or tubing products under normal installation conditions (e.g., fittings), the samples shall be attached to
lengths of pipe or tubing of the appropriate nominal diameter. The exposed surface area-to-volume ratio of
the fitting test sample shall represent a percentage of the total exposed surface area (test sample plus the
attached pipe or tubing) that is equal to the percentage specified in the Table 4.5 normalization assumptions
(± 5%) (e.g., 94.2 to 189.0 cm2/L [55.3 to 110.9 in2/gal] for nominal 1/2-in pipe which is part of a flexible or
rigid piping system respectively).
19
Assemblies should be made of relatively inert materials and designed in a manner which eliminates or
minimizes the occurence of the same contaminant being present in the control and the test sample
whenever possible. The control shall be made of the same material and exposed at the same surface area
to volume ratio as the test sample.
Threaded products shall be assembled by threading a pipe material which has been cut to an appropriate
length equal to the VF(static). For products being tested which are less than a liter, the attached pipe volume
combined with the product volume shall be equal to 1 L (± 5%) for the test sample. When preparing a
product which has a soldered joint, the control shall be prepared using the same solder and extension
material as the test sample. Products with quick connect fitting ends are most easily assembled by attaching
polyethylene tubing, cut to the appropriate length and diameter using the same polyethylene tubing for the
control.
Nonmetal and copper (C12200) product samples that are connected to pipe or tubing products under
normal installation conditions (e.g., fittings) may be prepared as described for metal and metal containing
product samples. Nonmetal containing products and copper (C12200) may also be prepared so that the
laboratory surface area-to-volume ratio is equal to or greater than the surface area-to-volume ratio at which
the product is intended to be used in the field.
Components (e.g., gaskets or O-rings) of a fitting that are wetted under normal operating pressures but are
not wetted under the conditions of a static exposure shall be tested separately from the assembly in an
“in vessel” exposure. The laboratory surface area for the “in vessel” exposure shall be a minimum of
ten-fold greater than the wetted surface area of the product to ensure that the reporting level of the analysis,
when normalized, is equal to or less than the pass/fail criteria for all contaminants. The result of the
“in vessel” exposure shall then be normalized to the applicable surface area of the product.
4.5.2.2 Unless the manufacturer’s instructions direct otherwise, test samples shall be rinsed in cold tap
water until any extraneous debris or contamination that occurred during shipping and handling is removed.
The samples shall then be rinsed in reagent water that meets the requirements of Section N-1.9.2.1.
4.5.2.3 If the exterior surface of a product is to be exposed, all markings that are not integral to the
product (e.g., ink markings) shall be removed.
4.5.2.4 When the test sample contains internal threaded outlets, 75% of the threaded surface area shall
be covered by insertion of a threaded component of the appropriate diameter to produce a watertight seal.
4.5.3 Exposure water
4.5.3.1 General
Exposure water selection shall be determined by the analytes of interest identified on the analytical
summary (see Section 4.5.1). Exposure water(s) shall be selected in accordance with Section N-1.2.5.
4.5.3.2 Copper (C12200) pipe, tubing and fittings
Copper (C12200) pipe, tubing and fittings evaluated under Section 4 of this Standard shall not require
analysis for regulated metals release under the pH 5 test condition provided the following use limitation
statement is included in the manufacturer’s use instructions or product literature that references this
Standard:
“Use of this material may not be appropriate in all water chemistries. Copper [tube, pipe, or fitting] may
require corrosion control to limit the leaching of copper into drinking water under certain water
chemistries. Refer to Informative Annex I-6.1 of NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 for the water quality considerations
to be used before installing this product.”
20
4.5.3.3 Copper and copper alloys other than C12200
Copper and copper alloy pipe and tubing comprised of alloys other than C12200 shall be exposed in either
the pH 5 (Section N-1.9.3) or the pH 6.5 (Section N-1.9.4) exposure waters (at the discretion of the
manufacturer) and in the pH 8 (Section N-1.9.7) exposure waters as described in Section N-1.9. Copper
and copper alloy fittings comprised of alloys other than C12200 intended to be used with copper and copper
alloy pipe and tubing shall be exposed in either the pH 5 (Section N-1.9.3) or the pH 6.5 (Section N-1.9.4)
exposure waters (at the discretion of the manufacturer) and in the pH 8 (Section N-1.9.7) exposure water,
as described in Section N-1.9. For all copper and copper alloy pipes, tubing, and fittings tested using the
pH 6.5 exposure water, the manufacturer’s literature shall indicate this use limitation by inclusion of the
following statement in the use instructions or product literature that references this Standard:
“Use of this material may not be appropriate in all water chemistries. Copper [tube, pipe, or fitting] may
require corrosion control to limit the leaching of copper into drinking water under certain water
chemistries. Refer to Informative Annex I-6.1 of NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 for the water quality considerations
to be used before installing this product.”
4.5.3.4 Brass and bronze materials
Brass and bronze materials shall be exposed in the pH 5 (Section N-1.9.3) and in the pH 8 (Section
N-1.9.8) exposure waters as described in N-1.9. Normalized copper concentrations observed using the
pH 5 test waters that exceed the TAC for the static condition or the SPAC for the flowing conditions at pH
5 may be waived when the product contains brass or bronze materials and when the manufacturer’s
literature includes the use limitations for these materials with certain water characteristics by inclusion of
the following statement in the use instructions or product literature that references this Standard:
“Use of this material may not be appropriate in all water chemistries. Products containing brass/bronze
materials may require corrosion control to limit the leaching of copper into drinking water under certain
water chemistries. Refer to Informative Annex I-6.1 of NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 for the water quality
considerations to be used before installing this product.”
4.5.4 Conditioning and exposure options
4.5.4.1 In-product conditioning and exposure
During in-product conditioning and exposure, the test sample shall be filled completely with exposure water.
The product having the greatest surface area-to-volume ratio (typically the smallest diameter) shall be
preferentially used. When necessary to prevent the loss of exposure water, samples shall be capped with
inert materials (e.g., glass).
4.5.4.2 In-vessel conditioning and exposure
During in-vessel conditioning and exposure, samples shall be placed in containers composed of and
covered with a material that is inert to the exposure water. The exposure water shall completely immerse
the sample. All samples shall be exposed at a surface area-to-volume ratio that is equal to or greater than
that of the intended end use. The actual wetted surface area-to-volume ratio achieved during the exposure
shall be recorded.
NOTE — The stated duration of the conditioning period at the hot temperature does not include any time
needed to elevate the product sample or exposure vessel to the required exposure temperature.
4.5.4.3 Multiple time point protocol
When the normalized concentration of a contaminant exceeds, or is expected to exceed, its acceptable
level when evaluated as a single time point exposure, determination of the contaminant leaching rate using
a multiple time point exposure shall be considered. For the purpose of contaminant concentration
21
evaluation, Day 1 shall be defined as the time point at which extractant water is collected for analysis under
the single time point exposure protocol. Day 90 shall be defined as 90 d after this time point. When over
time data are used, the Day 1 concentration for the contaminant of concern shall meet the short term
exposure level and Day 90 concentration shall meet the total allowable concentration (TAC) / single product
allowable concentration (SPAC) respectively. When extrapolation is used, the relationship between
contaminant concentration and time shall be determined and plotted using a minimum of five data points.
When a multiple time point protocol is employed in the evaluation of a contaminant, consideration shall be
given to the availability of appropriate toxicity data to define an acute exposure limit for the contaminant, as
required in NSF/ANSI/CAN 600, Section 3.3 (previously Annex A, Section A.5). Consideration shall also be
given to the leaching characteristics of the contaminant. Multiple time point analysis shall not be used for
lead or any other metal contaminant listed as a regulated contaminant by US EPA or Health Canada.
4.5.5 Single time point conditioning protocols
A separate sample shall be conditioned for each type of exposure water selected in Section 4.5.3.
4.5.5.1 Single time point conditioning – Cold and intermittent hot applications
Products that are intended to be in contact with cold water or intermittent hot water shall be conditioned in
the exposure water(s) selected in Section 4.5.3 at 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F) for 14 d. During the 14-d period,
the exposure water shall be changed at least 10 times with a minimum period of 24 ± 1 h between water
changes. The free available chlorine concentration during the conditioning period shall be 2 mg/L. After the
14-d conditioning period, the exposure water in the product or in the vessel shall be decanted and
discarded. Shortened conditioning periods shall be used at the request of the manufacturer. Exposure of
the sample according to Section 4.5.6 shall immediately follow conditioning.
NOTE — Table 4.1 provides an example single time point conditioning protocol. Alternate protocols shall be
permitted as long as the requirements of Section 4.5.5.1 are met.
4.5.5.2 Single time point conditioning – Continuous hot applications
Products that are intended to be in continuous contact with hot water shall be conditioned in the exposure
water(s) selected in Section 4.5.3 at either 60 ± 2 C (140 ± 4 F) or 82 ± 2 C (180 ± 4 F) for 14 d. During
the 14-d period, the exposure water shall be changed at least 10 times with a minimum period of 24 ± 1 h
between water changes. The free available chlorine concentration during the conditioning period shall be
2 mg/L. After the 14-d conditioning period, the exposure water in the product or in the vessel shall be
decanted and discarded. Shortened conditioning periods shall be permitted at the request of the
manufacturer. Exposure of the sample according to Section 4.5.6 shall immediately follow conditioning.
NOTE — Table 4.1 provides an example single time point conditioning protocol. Alternate protocols shall be
permitted as long as the requirements of Section 4.5.5.2 are met.
4.5.6 Single time point exposure protocols
Products to be evaluated at a single time point shall be exposed according to the schedule in Table 4.2.
The first two 24-h exposure periods shall be optional at the discretion of the manufacturer. A separate
sample shall be exposed for each type of exposure water selected in Section 4.5.3. For each sample, the
exposure water shall be of the same pH as the water used for conditioning of the sample.
4.5.6.1 Single time point exposure – Cold application
Immediately after conditioning, the product shall be exposed at 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F) according to the
schedule in Table 4.2.
22
4.5.6.2 Single time point exposure – Hot applications
4.5.6.2.1 Intermittent hot water exposure
Immediately after conditioning, the product shall undergo exposure according to the schedule in
Table 4.2. Prior to each exposure, the product shall be exposed at the selected elevated temperature, either
60 ± 2 C (140 ± 4 F) or 82 ± 2 C (180 ± 4 F), for 30 ± 5 min. The product shall then be exposed at
23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F) for the duration of the exposure period.
4.5.6.2.2 Continuous hot water exposure
Immediately after conditioning, the product (in-product exposures) or the exposure vessel (in-vessel
exposures) shall be filled with fresh exposure water of the applicable pH (see Section 4.5.3). The product
shall then be exposed at the selected elevated temperature, either 60 ± 2 C (140 ± 4 F) or 82 ± 2 C
(180 ± 4 F), according to the schedule in Table 4.2.
4.5.7 Multiple time point conditioning / exposure protocols
For the purpose of determining a contaminant leaching rate as a function of time, extractant water samples
shall be collected during the conditioning period of products for which multiple time point exposure has
been elected, according to the protocols in Sections 4.5.7.1 and 4.5.7.2. A separate sample shall be
conditioned and exposed for each type of exposure water selected in Section 4.5.3.
4.5.7.1 Cold application
Products that are intended to be in contact with only cold water shall be maintained at 23 ± 2 C
(73 ± 4 F) for 19 d. During the 19 d period, the exposure water shall be changed at least 12 times, with a
minimum period of 24 ± 1 h between water changes. At five of these water changes, extraction water shall
be collected for analysis after a 24 h exposure. For extrapolation and normalization purposes, the number
of hours elapsed since the most recent water change (or sample collection) and the number of days elapsed
since the initiation of the exposure shall be recorded at the time of each extraction water collection.
NOTE — Table 4.3 provides an example multiple time point conditioning / exposure protocol. Alternate
protocols shall be permitted as long as the requirements of Section 4.5.7.1 are met.
At the discretion of the manufacturer, direct measurement of a Day 90 extraction shall be permitted.
The products shall be maintained at 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F). Extraction water shall be collected for analysis
at a minimum of two time points: after Day 1 (representing 14 d of conditioning and 1 d of acute exposure),
and after the final exposure terminating on Day 90 (representing 14 d of conditioning, 1 d of acute exposure,
and 90 d of chronic exposure). The exposure water shall be changed at least weekly during the interval
between the initial and final exposures and on at least four days during the final week of exposure.
4.5.7.2 Hot applications
4.5.7.2.1 Intermittent hot water exposure
Products that are intended to be in intermittent contact with hot water shall undergo the cold application
exposure according to Section 4.5.7.1. At the initiation of each exposure that will be collected for analysis,
the product shall be exposed at the selected elevated temperature, either 60 ± 2 C (140 ± 4 F) or
82 ± 2 C (180 ± 4 F), for 30 ± 5 min. The product shall then be exposed at 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F) for the
duration of the exposure period. The exposure water shall not be decanted prior to the completion of the
exposure period.
NOTE 1 — Table 4.3 provides an example multiple time point conditioning / exposure protocol. Alternate
protocols shall be permitted as long as the requirements of Section 4.5.7.2.1 are met.
23
NOTE 2 — The stated duration of the conditioning period at the hot temperature does not include any time
needed to elevate the product sample or exposure vessel to the required exposure temperature.
At the discretion of the manufacturer, direct measurement of a Day 90 extraction shall be permitted. At the
initiation of each exposure that will be collected for analysis, the products shall be exposed at the selected
elevated temperature, either 60 ± 2 C (140 ± 4 F) or 82 ± 2 C (180 ± 4 F), for 30 ± 5 min. The product
shall then be exposed at 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F) for the duration of the exposure period. The exposure water
shall not be decanted prior to the completion of the exposure period. Extraction water shall be collected for
analysis at a minimum of two time points: after Day 1 (representing 14 d of conditioning and 1 d of acute
exposure), and after the final exposure terminating on Day 90 (representing 14 d of conditioning, 1 d of
acute exposure, and 90 d of chronic exposure). The exposure water shall be changed at least weekly during
the interval between the initial and final exposure and on at least 4 d during the final week of exposure.
4.5.7.2.2 Continuous hot water exposure
Products that are intended to be in continuous contact with hot water shall be maintained at the selected
elevated temperature, either 60 ± 2 C (140 ± 4 F) or 82 ± 2 C (180 ± 4 F) for 19 d. During the
19-d period, the exposure water shall be changed at least 12 times with a minimum period of 24 ± 1 h
between water changes. At five of these water changes, extraction water shall be collected for analysis
after a 24-h exposure. For extrapolation and normalization purposes, the number of hours elapsed since
the most recent water change (or sample collection) and the number of days elapsed since the initiation of
the exposure shall be recorded at the time of each extraction water collection.
NOTE — Table 4.3 provides an example multiple time point conditioning / exposure protocol. Alternate
protocols shall be permitted as long as the requirements of Section 4.5.7.2.2 are met.
At the discretion of the manufacturer, direct measurement of a Day 90 extraction shall be permitted. The
products shall be maintained at the selected elevated temperature, either 60 ± 2 C (140 ± 4 F) or
82 ± 2 C (180 ± 4 F). Extraction water shall be collected for analysis at at least two time points: after
Day 1 (representing 14 d of conditioning and 1 d of acute exposure), and after the final exposure terminating
on Day 90 (representing 14 d of conditioning, 1 d of acute exposure, and 90 d of chronic exposure). The
exposure water shall be changed at least weekly during the interval between the initial and final exposure
and on at least 4 d during the final week of exposure.
4.5.8 Collection and preservation of extraction water
Immediately after exposure, extraction waters collected for analysis shall be poured into previously
prepared sample containers for storage until analysis, as specified in Section N-1.6.
4.6 Analysis
4.6.1 Extraction waters shall be analyzed with the methods listed in Section N-1.7.
4.6.2 Samples requiring analysis for RVCM shall be evaluated according to the method in Section N-1.7.
4.7 Normalization of contaminant concentrations
4.7.1 General
The concentration of analytes detected in the extraction water shall be multiplied by a calculated
normalization factor (NF) to account for differences between laboratory and field surface area-to-volume
ratios. The normalization factor shall be based on calculations and assumptions relevant to the end use of
the product.
The general formula for the derivation of the normalization factor is described in the following equations:
24
NF = N1 × N2
SAF VL
N1 = ×
SAL VF(static)
VF(static)
N2 =
VF(flowing)
Where:
SAL = surface area exposed in the laboratory

VL = volume of extraction water used in the laboratory
VF(static) = volume of water to which the product is exposed under static conditions
VF(flowing) = volume of water to which the product is exposed under flowing conditions during a
period of time equivalent to the laboratory test
When the length of the exposure being normalized is other than 16 h in length, the normalized value shall
be adjusted to reflect a 16-h exposure (e.g., multiply the normalized value by 0.7 when a 24-h exposure
was used). The nominal diameter of the product shall determine which assumptions are used for
normalization (see Tables 4.4 and 4.5). The actual inner diameter of the product shall be used for the
normalization calculations of surface area and volume.
NOTE — Adjustment of the normalized contaminant concentration for the duration of the exposure period
shall consider the extraction kinetics of the contaminant under evaluation. For contaminants that do not exhibit
linear extraction kinetics, adjustment for the duration of exposure shall be done in accordance with the
demonstrated kinetics of the contaminant or shall not be applied if this information is not available.
4.7.2 Products other than pipe
4.7.2.1 Fire sprinklers for multipurpose plumbing systems
Fire sprinklers intended for use in multipurpose plumbing systems (serving both drinking water and fire
protection needs) shall be evaluated for acceptance based upon a use assumption of one unit per 0.43 L.
Fire sprinkler fittings shall be evaluated in accordance with Section 4.7.2.2.
NOTE 1 — The evaluation of fire sprinkler system components is only intended to apply to those used in
“multipurpose plumbing systems”. The evaluation of potential extractants from fire sprinkler components from
nondrinking water systems is not addressed under this Standard.
NOTE 2 — Fire sprinkler use assumption based on system design requirements in NAPF 13 D 12 Criterion of
one unit per 0.43 L based on use in a network of 1/2 in PEX piping and the volume of water contained in
12 ft of pipe. This assumes installation of fittings with three ports (minimum number) and 4 ft of pipe associated
with each port (accounts for the one port on each side of an 8 ft pipe which is the minimum distance required
between sprinklers).
4.7.2.2 Products other than fire sprinklers
The SAF shall be calculated from the assumed length of pipe corresponding to the segment of the system
in which the product is used (e.g., 100 ft of pipe in the service line or 280 ft of pipe in the residence). The
VF(static) component of the N1 term shall be the volume of water contained within the assumed length of pipe.
12 NFPA 13D. Installation of Sprinkler Systems: One and Two Family Dwellings and Manufactured Homes, National
Fire Protection Association, 2010. <www.nfpa.org>
25
For fittings, the actual inner diameter of the pipe used with the fittings shall be used to calculate both SAF
and VF(static). PVC, CPVC and PP transition fittings with stainless steel or copper alloy inserts (except for
stainless steel or copper alloy inserts intended for use with PEX tubing), unions and repair couplings are
specfically excluded from this evaluation.
For PVC, CPVC and PP transition fittings with stainless steel or copper alloy inserts (except for stainless
steel or copper alloy inserts intended for use with PEX tubing), unions and repair couplings, the SAF shall
be the wetted surface area of a single product. The VF(static) component of the N1 term shall be the volume
of water a single product contains when filled to capacity, except that VF(static) shall equal 1 L (0.26 gal) for
all products that contain less than 1 L (0.26 gal) of water when filled to capacity.
NOTE — These products shall be evaluated in this manner because the materials (stainless steel or copper
alloy or repair coupling material) will not repeat within the piping system. When a material does repeat within
the system, it shall be evaulated as a pipe or fitting, as appropriate. PVC, CPVC and PP transition fittings with
a stainless steel or copper alloy insert intended for use with PEX tubing are excluded because the remainder
of the PEX system may also be plumbed with stainless steel or copper alloy fittings. Thus, the stainless steel
or copper alloy material would repeat throughout the PEX system.
4.7.3 Sample calculations for normalization of products in Section 4 are provided in Table 4.6.
4.7.4 Selection of normalization conditions
Pipe and fitting products with a nominal diameter greater than or equal to 10 cm (4 in) shall be normalized
to the flowing condition. Pipe and fitting products with a nominal diameter of less than 10 cm (4 in) shall be
normalized to the static condition when the value of N2 is ≤ 0.1. Pipe and fitting products with a nominal
diameter of ˂ 10 cm (4 in) shall be normalized to the flowing condition when the value of N2 is ˃ 0.1.
4.7.5 Multiple time point exposure calculations
Laboratory values from each time point at which extractant water was collected (a minimum of five data
points shall be required for extrapolation) shall be normalized as indicated in Section 4.7.1, depending on
product end use. A decay curve of these normalized contaminant concentrations in relation to elapsed
exposure time shall be plotted. Contaminant concentrations shall be determined for two time points as
follows: at Day 1 (representing 14 d of conditioning and 1 d of acute exposure) and at Day 90 (representing
14 d of conditioning, 1 d of acute exposure, and 90 d of chronic exposure) shall be extrapolated from this
curve (see Section 4.5.7).
If direct measurement of a Day 90 exposure has been performed, laboratory values from each time point
at which extractant water was collected (a minimum of two time points as defined in Sections 4.5.7.1 and
4.5.7.2) shall be normalized as indicated in Section 4.7.1, depending on product end use.
4.8 Evaluation of contaminant concentrations
4.8.1 Contaminants measured in a single time point extraction
For pipe and fitting products, normalized static contaminant concentrations shall be no greater than their
respective MCLs or TACs, and normalized flowing contaminant concentrations shall be no greater than
their respective SPACs calculated in accordance with NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously Annex A).
4.8.2 Contaminants measured in a multiple time point extraction
Normalized Day 1 contaminant concentrations shall not exceed the STEL as defined in NSF/ANSI/CAN
600 (previously Annex A, Section A.5).
Normalized extrapolated or directly measured Day 90 contaminant concentrations shall not exceed the
limits defined in Section 4.8.1.
26
4.8.3 Residual vinyl chloride monomer (RVCM)
The average RVCM concentration shall be less than or equal to 3.2 mg/kg as evaluated in the product wall.
Table 4.1
Example single time point conditioning schedule
Conditioning
Elapsed time Comment
time
Exposure water is decanted and discarded; the exposure vessel or
24 ± 1 h 1d
product is refilled with exposure water and conditioning is continued.
24 ± 1 h 2d
24 ± 1 h 3d
24 ± 1 h 4d
72 ± 1 h 7d
24 ± 1 h 8d
24 ± 1 h 9d
24 ± 1 h 10 d
24 ± 1 h 11 d
Exposure water is decanted and discarded; conditioning is
72 ± 1 h 14 d
terminated.
Table 4.2
Single time point exposure schedule
Exposure time Elapsed time1 Comment

Extraction water is decanted and discarded;
24 ± 1 h 15 d
the exposure vessel or product is refilled with
(optional) (optional)
exposure water and exposure is continued.
Extraction water is decanted and discarded;
24 ± 1 h 16 d
the exposure vessel or product is refilled with
(optional) (optional)
exposure water and exposure is continued.
17 d
Extraction water is collected for analysis; the
16 h (15 d if the two optional exposure
exposure is terminated.
periods are not elected)
1 Elapsed time indicated includes the 14 d of conditioning preceding the exposure.
27
Table 4.3
Example multiple time point conditioning / exposure schedule
Exposure time Elapsed time Sample collection

Extraction water is collected for analysis at completion of the
24 ± 1 h 1d exposure period; the product or exposure vessel is refilled with
exposure water and the exposure is continued.
Extraction water is decanted and discarded; the product or exposure
24 ± 1 h 3d
vessel is refilled with exposure water and the exposure is continued.
72 ± 1 h 7d
24 ± 1 h 9d
24 ± 1 h 10 d exposure period; the product or exposure vessel is refilled with
96 ± 1 h 14 d
24 ± 1 h 15 d exposure period; the product or exposure vessel is refilled with
72 ± 1 h 18 d
24 ± 1 h 19 d
exposure period; the exposure is terminated.
28
Table 4.4
Pipes – Normalization factors and assumptions
Product nominal Exposure N2 (flowing

Assumptions N1
diameter type condition)
— water is exposed to the same in-product 1 1
noncopper pipe material from the treatment plant to
nominal the service line; and calculated
≥ 10 cm (4 in) in-vessel according to 1
— a 16-h exposure period is Section 4.7.1
evaluated.
— a 16-h exposure period is calculated
evaluated; in-product 1 according to
10 cm (4 in) Section 4.7.1
— residential water usage is 681
> nominal
L (180 gal) per 24 h; and calculated calculated
≥ 1.3 cm (0.5 in)
in-vessel according to according to
— 100 ft of service line from water
Section 4.7.1 Section 4.7.1
main to residence.
— a maximum run of 7.6 m (25 ft) calculated
of small diameter product is in-product 1 according to
installed; Section 4.7.1
— for products with an internal
volume less than 1 L (0.26 gal),
VF(static) is set equal to 1 L;
nominal
< 1.3 cm (0.5 in) — a 16-h exposure period is calculated calculated
evaluated; in-vessel according to according to
Section 4.7.1 Section 4.7.1
— residential water usage is 681
L (180 gal) per 24 h; and
— 280 ft per residence (140 ft
each for hot and cold sides).
— utilized as main distribution in-product 1 0.55
copper pipe lines within buildings;1 calculated
≥ 10 cm (4 in) — a 16-h exposure period is in-vessel according to 0.55
evaluated. Section 4.7.1
1The N2 value for copper products used as main distribution lines in buildings was calculated based on the static
volume of a piping network of up to 20 mi and an average flow of 100 gpm.
29
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
Table 4.5
Fittings (installed at regular intervals) – Normalization factors and assumptions
Product nominal Exposure N2 (flowing

Assumptions N1
diameter type condition)
— water is exposed to the same material from the treatment plant to the in-product 0.02 1
service line;
nominal calculated according
≥ 10 cm (4 in) — fittings represent 2% of the distribution system surface area; and in-vessel to Section 4.7.1 and 1
— a 16-h exposure period is evaluated. multiplied by 0.02
0.02, 0.06, or 0.03,
— fittings represent 2% of the piping system for products 10 cm (4 in) depending on product calculated
> nominal ≥ 2.5 cm (1.0 in) (rigid and flexible systems); in-product diameter and end use according to
— fittings represent 6% of the piping system surface area for products (flexible or rigid Section 4.7.1
2.5 cm (1.0) in > nominal ≥ 1.3 cm (0.5 in) (rigid systems)1; system)
10 cm (4 in) calculated according
> nominal — fittings represent 3% of the piping system surface area for products to Section 4.7.1 and
≥ 1.3 cm (0.5 in) 2.5 cm (1.0) in > nominal ≥ 1.3 cm (0.5) in (flexible systems)1; multiplied by 0.02,
calculated
— a 16-h exposure period is evaluated; 0.06, or 0.03,
in-vessel according to
depending on product
— residential water usage is 681 L (180 gal) per 24 h; and Section 4.7.1
diameter and end use
— 100 ft of service line from water main to residence. (flexible or rigid
system)
— a maximum run of 7.6 m (25 ft) of small diameter product is installed; 0.06 or 0.03,
calculated
depending on product
— fittings represent 6% of the residential system surface area for rigid in-product according to
end use (flexible or
piping systems;1 Section 4.7.1
rigid system)
— fittings represent 3% of the residential system surface area for flexible calculated according
nominal
piping systems;1 to Section 4.7.1 and
< 1.3 cm (0.5 in)
multiplied by 0.06 or calculated
— a 16-h exposure period is evaluated; in-vessel 0.03, depending on according to
— residential water usage is 681 L (180 gal) per 24 h; and product end use Section 4.7.1
(flexible or rigid
— 280 ft of pipe per residence (140 ft each for hot and cold sides). system)
1 For products that may be used with either rigid or flexible systems, fittings shall be assumed to represent 6% of the piping system surface area.
30
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
Table 4.6
Example normalization calculations
Parameters Calculation
In-product exposure of a 30.5 cm (1 ft) length of 15.2 cm (6 in) i.d. pipe
SAF = 1,459 cm2 (226 in2)
normalized
SAL = 1,459 cm2 (226 in2) 226 in2 1.5 gal laboratory
flowing = × × 1 ×
VF(static) = 5.6 L (1.5 gal) 226 in2 1.5 gal concentration
concentration
VL = 5.6 L (1.5 gal)
In-vessel exposure of a 2.5 cm (1 in) i. d. pipe
SAF /VF(static) = 1,575 cm2/1 L
normalized
(924 in2/1 gal) 924 in2 0.2 gal laboratory
static = × ×
SAL= 247 in2 (1,594 cm2) 247 in2 1 gal concentration
concentration
VL = 0.2 gal (0.8 L)
In-product exposure of a 63.5 cm (25 ft) length of 0.6 cm (0.25 in) i.d. pipe
SAF = 1,520 cm2 (235.6 in2)
SAL = 1,520 cm2 (235.6 in2) normalized
235.6 in2 0.064 gal laboratory
VF(static) = 0.24 L (0.064 gal) – static = × ×
235.6 in2 0.26 gal concentration
default to 1 L (0.26 gal) concentration
VL = 0.24 L (0.064 gal)
In-product exposure of a 25.4 (10 in) long 15.2 (6 in) i.d. fitting
SAF = 1,216.1 cm2 (188.5 in2)
normalized
SAL = 1,216.1 cm2 (188.5 in2) 188.5 in2 1.2 gal laboratory
flowing = × × 1 × 0.02 ×
VF(static) = 4.6 L (1.2 gal) 188.5 in2 1.2 gal concentration
concentration
VL = 4.6 L (1.2 gal)
In-vessel exposure of a 1.3 cm (0.5 in) i.d. fitting used with flexible piping systems
normalized
(1,885 in2/1 gal) 1885 in2 0.2 gal laboratory
static = × × 0.03 ×
SAL = 1,594 cm2 (247 in2) 247 in2 1 gal concentration
concentration
VL = 0.8 L (0.2 gal)
In-vessel exposure of a 0.6 cm (0.25 in) i.d. fitting used with rigid piping systems
SAF /VF(static) = 908 in2/1 gal
(1,523 cm2/1 L)
normalized
SAL = 865 in2 (5,581cm2) 236 in2 0.4 gal laboratory
static = × × 0.06 ×
VF(static) = 0.064 gal (0.24 L) – 865 in2 0.26 gal concentration
concentration
default to 0.26 gal (1 L)
VL = 0.4 gal (1.3 L)
In-vessel exposure of a 1.3 cm (0.5 in) i.d. fitting used as a repair coupling
(1,885 in2/1 gal)
normalized
VF(static) = 0.003 L (0.0009 gal) 1.6 in2 0.4 gal laboratory
static = × ×
default to 1 L (0.26 gal) 865 in2 0.26 gal concentration
concentration
SAL = 5,581cm2 (865 in2)
VL = 1.3 L (0.4 gal)
NOTE — Definitions for SAF, SAL, VF(static),VF(flowing), and VL are found in Section 4.7.1.
31
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
5 Barrier materials
5.1 Scope
The requirements of this section apply to products and materials intended to form a barrier providing
containment of drinking water or to prevent drinking water contact with another surface. The products and
materials that are covered include, but are not limited to, coatings and paints applied to fittings, pipes,
mechanical devices and nonresidential storage tanks including the interior surface of tank covers; linings,
liners, bladders and diaphragms; and constituents of concrete and cement-mortar (e.g., portland and
blended hydraulic cements, admixtures, sealers, and mold release agents). These products and materials
can be field-applied, factory-applied, precast, or cast-in-place.
Concrete aggregate sampling is required only if the method for testing for individual concrete components
is used. Aggregate sampling is not required if concrete cylinders are tested for the constituents in portland
and hydraulic cements.
5.2 Definitions
5.2.1 admixture: A material other than water, aggregates, hydraulic cement, and fiber reinforcement
used as an ingredient of concrete or mortar and added to the batch immediately before or during its mixing.
5.2.2 aggregate: Granular material, such as sand, gravel, or crushed stone used with a cementing
medium to form hydraulic-cement concrete or mortar.
5.2.3 barrier material: A material in contact with drinking water that serves a containment or separation
purpose.
5.2.4 blended hydraulic cement: A hydraulic cement consisting of two or more inorganic constituents
(at least one of which is not portland cement or portland cement clinker) that separately or in combination
contribute to the strength-gaining properties of the cement.
5.2.5 coating / paint: A material applied to a surface where a direct bond to the substrate is formed.
5.2.6 concrete: A composite material that consists essentially of a binding medium within which are
embedded particles or fragments of aggregate; in hydraulic-cement concrete, the binder is formed from a
mixture of hydraulic cement and water.
5.2.7 diaphragm / bladder: A flexible membrane that separates the surrounding media from the drinking
water.
5.2.8 field applied paint / coating systems: A paint/coating applied to product after it is installed.
5.2.9 factory applied paint / coating systems: A paint/coating applied to to new product at a
manufacturing site.
5.2.10 form / mold release agent: A material applied to the inside of a form or mold used to cast
concrete or cement-mortar, which prevents adhesion of the concrete or cement-mortar to its surface.
5.2.11 hydraulic cement: A cement that sets and hardens by chemical interaction with water and that
is capable of doing so under water.
5.2.12 immediate return to service paint / coating systems: immediate return to service paint /
coating systems are intended to be applied to an existing pipe for rehabilitation purposes and intended to
be returned to service 0 to 48 h following the final cure.
32
5.2.13 liners / linings: Prefabricated materials applied, bonded, or attached to a surface that is subject
to direct / indirect contact with drinking water.
5.2.14 mortar: A mixture of water, cement, and sand.
5.2.15 portland cement: A hydraulic cement (usually containing calcium sulfate) produced by
pulverizing portland cement clinker (a partially fused substance consisting primarily of hydraulic calcium
silicates).
5.2.16 potable water contact area of tanks: The potable water contact areas of tanks shall include
both the area normally submerged during use as well as the areas where water may condense and fall
back into the tank such as ceilings.
5.2.17 sealer: A liquid that is applied as a coating to the surface of hardened concrete or cement-mortar,
either to prevent or decrease the penetration of liquid or gaseous media during service exposure.
5.3.1 Product labeling
Products or product containers shall be marked and include, at a minimum, product identification, batch
number, or date of manufacture. When it is not feasible to mark the product or material, the manufacturer
shall maintain identification records.
5.3.2 Paints and coatings
For all paints and coatings, the manufacturer shall submit detailed use instructions for the laboratory
preparation and application that are representative of their published use instructions for factory or field
applications. Use instructions shall specify the appropriate preparation and application procedures,
including order of application for multiple layer systems, substrate preparation (including use of specific
primer), subcomponent mixing ratio, induction time, thinning, application method, application thickness(es),
curing schedule,and final cure time prior to water immersion. Coating systems that are composed of multiple
products (e.g., primer, intermediate coat(s), and top coat, including any thinners) shall be evaluated as an
applied system. Use instructions indicating the coating / paint will rehabilitate existing pipe and that the
water system can be returned to service within 48 h following the final cure shall be evaluated as immediate
return to service paint / coating systems.
Public listing for a coating / paint shall include application procedures including order of application for
multiple layer systems, use of a specific primer if one is used, subcomponent mixing ratio, thinning,
application method, application thickness(es), curing schedule and final cure time and temperature prior to
water immersion. Paint / coating system intended to be applied to pipe shall be designated as “certified for
use on new pipe” or “certified for use on pipe intended for immediate return to service”.
When required for evaluation, a sample of the product or material equivalent to that used in field applications
shall be obtained.
A single sample can represent a product line of similar formulations (e.g., different colors of the same
coating product line) when:
— the sample selected for testing contains all of the formulation ingredients of toxicological concern
(see Section 3.2) at concentrations equal to or greater than the products it is selected to represent;
33
— product application conditions for the sample selected for testing (e.g., application thickness(es),
cure times, solvent concentrations) are equal to or more severe than the products it is selected to
represent; and
— for multiple component formulations, the mixing ratio(s) of the selected sample is(are) identical to
that of the products it represents.
5.4.1 Cement samples
Cement samples, weighing a minimum of 9 kg (20 lb), shall be collected in accordance with the applicable
sections of ASTM C 183.5 To minimize contamination, all sample collection tools shall be cleaned and
wiped with isopropyl alcohol before use. Collected samples shall be placed in moisture-proof containers.
To minimize organic contamination, sample containers shall not be filled near a running motor or any type
of exhaust system.
5.4.2 Concrete cylinder samples
Concrete test cylinders for the evaluation of cast-in-place or precast concrete structures shall be submitted
with specific information on the composition of the concrete mix design for the specific installation, including
the specific sources of cement, aggregate, admixtures, and any other additives. Specific information on the
tank dimensions and water storage capacity shall also be provided. Concrete batch tickets, collected at the
site of production, shall serve as evidence of the concrete mix actually used in the structure being evaluated.
5.4.3 Other barrier materials
Samples of barrier materials shall be collected at the point of manufacture.
An analytical summary shall be prepared for each product. The analytical summary shall consist of the
formulation-dependent analytes identified through the formulation review (see Section 3.2) and the
applicable product-specific analytes listed in Table 3.1.
5.5.2 Preparation of test samples
5.5.2.1 Test samples shall be prepared such that a minimum surface area-to-volume ratio of 50 cm2/L
(29 in2/gal) is achieved during the exposure, and so that the entire surface to be exposed is covered by
exposure water. For concrete aggregate evaluations, the media shall be tested at a laboratory evaluation
ratio no less than the field use level calculated in accordance with Section 5.7.2. Samples shall be rinsed
with cold tap water and then in reagent water, meeting the requirements of Section N-1.9.2.1 unless
manufacturer’s instructions direct otherwise.
5.5.2.2 Field-applied paint and coating systems
Field-applied paint and coating systems shall be applied in accordance with the detailed use instructions
(see Section 5.3.2) under the supervision of the testing laboratory. Products shall be applied to a glass slide
when appropriate. Products requiring a reactive substrate shall be applied to the appropriate alternate
substrate. Coating products shall be applied using application conditions as specified by the manufacturer
in the detailed use instructions, e.g., the highest recommended percentage of thinner, the shortest curing
period between coats or layers, the maximum recommended film thickness per coat, and the shortest final
curing period prior to immersion. Products shall be cured within ± 4 °C of the specified cure temperature.
For exothermic coatings with a maximum field use thickness in excess of 120 mil (3.0 mm), an additional
evaluation at the manufacturer’s minimum recommended field use thickness shall be conducted.
The maximum dry film thickness per coat attested to by the testing laboratory shall be based on the average
34
per coat dry film thickness evaluated. When samples are prepared using an airless plural component
system the system shall be operated at the midpoint of the coating manufacturer’s recommended pressure
and temperature range.
NOTE — The practical application of coatings may result in spots of coating thicknesses in excess of the
maximum dry film thickness per coat attested to by the testing laboratory. Guidance on acceptable variations
from the maximum dry film thicknesses is provided in The Society for Protective Coatings Steel Structures
Painting Manual Volume 2. Reference Paint Application Specification No. 2 (SSPC-PA2)8 where the average
of spot measurements on each 10 m2 (100 ft2) area shall not exceed the specified maximum thickness, and
no single spot measurement shall be more than 120% of it. In that document, spot measurements are defined
as the average of at least three gauge readings within a 1.5-in (4-cm) diameter circle.
Multiple layer paint and coating systems that require the application of distinct coating product formulations
in sequence shall be applied in a stepped manner so as to expose all layers. Multiple coats of the same
product (of the same color) applied in sequence shall not constitute multiple layers and shall not be applied
in a stepped manner. Multiple coats of the same product (of different colors) applied in sequence shall not
constitute multiple layers and shall not be applied in a stepped manner, unless deemed necessary by the
testing laboratory to address potential health effects concerns from the differences in color formulations.
Stepped coating systems shall be applied per the dimensions in Table 5.1.
5.5.2.3 Factory-applied paint and coating systems
Paint and coating systems requiring factory application, factory curing, or both shall be prepared and
applied in accordance with the detailed use instructions (see Section 5.3.2) under the supervision of the
testing laboratory. Products shall be applied to a glass slide when appropriate. Products requiring a reactive
substrate shall be applied to the appropriate alternate substrate. Coating products shall be applied using
application conditions as specified by the manufacturer in the product use instructions, e.g., the highest
recommended percentage of thinner, the shortest curing period between coats or layers, the maximum
recommended film thickness per coat. Products shall be cured within ± 4 °C of the specified cure
temperature, however temperature control is not required between the end of cure and immersion for
factory applied coatings. For exothermic coatings with a maximum field use thickness in excess of
120 mil (3.0 mm), an additional evaluation at the manufacturer’s minimum recommended field use thickness
shall be conducted. The maximum dry film thickness per coat attested to by the testing laboratory shall be
based on the average per coat dry film thickness evaluated.
NOTE — The practical application of coatings may result in spots of coating thicknesses in excess of the
maximum dry film thickness per coat attested to by the testing laboratory. Guidance on acceptable variations
from the maximum dry film thicknesses is provided in The Society for Protective Coatings Steel Structures
Painting Manual Volume 2. Reference Paint Application Specification No. 2 (SSPC-PA2)8 where the average
of spot measurements on each 10 m2 (100 ft2) area shall not exceed the specified maximum thickness, and
no single spot measurement shall be more than 120% of it. In that document, spot measurements are defined
as the average of at least three gauge readings within a 1.5-in (4-cm) diameter circle.
Multiple layer paint and coating systems, which require the application of distinct coating product
formulations in sequence, shall be applied in a stepped manner so as to expose all layers. Multiple coats
of the same product (of the same color) applied in sequence shall not constitute multiple layers and shall
not be applied in a stepped manner. Multiple coats of the same product (of different colors) applied in
sequence shall not constitute multiple layers and shall not be applied in a stepped manner, unless deemed
necessary by the testing laboratory to address potential health effects concerns from the differences in
color formulations. Stepped coating systems shall be applied per the dimensions in Table 5.1.
NOTE — It is recognized that a coating system may be applied using a combination of factory and field
application techniques. This is considered acceptable as long as the coating system is tested to the
manufacturer’s recommended application conditions, as specified in Sections 5.5.2.2 and 5.5.2.3.
35
5.5.2.4 Products requiring cement mortar cubes
Test sample mortar cubes shall be prepared in accordance to the applicable sections of ASTM C 109. 5 Mix
water shall meet reagent water requirements (see Section N-1.9.2.1). Sand shall be washed in accordance
with the procedures in ASTM C 778.5 Mixing tools and other items coming into contact with the mortar shall
be washed with soap and water, rinsed with tap water, rinsed with reagent water, and rinsed with isopropyl
alcohol. The mortar shall be placed in polyethylene or polypropylene lined molds; no form release agents
shall be used. Specimens shall be removed from the molds after 24 h and placed in glass or polyethylene
beakers and covered with an inverted watch glass supported on glass Rebel hooks (or other devices to
prevent air seal of the vessel) and placed for 28 d ± 12 h, or fewer as specified by the manufacturer, in a
moist cabinet meeting the requirements of ASTM C 511.5 The specimens shall be removed from the moist
cabinet and air dried at 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F) and 50 ± 5% relative humidity for 7 d.
5.5.2.4.1 Portland and hydraulic cements
Test cubes for portland and blended hydraulic cements shall be prepared in accordance with
Section 5.5.2.4.
5.5.2.4.2 Admixtures
These products shall be added to the cement-mortar or concrete mixture using the manufacturer’s highest
recommended admixture dosage. The test samples shall be prepared as described in Section 5.5.2.4.
5.5.2.4.3 Sealers
These products shall be applied per manufacturer’s recommendations to the test cubes prepared in
accordance with Section 5.5.2.4. The coated cubes shall be allowed to cure for the manufacturer’s
recommended time period.
5.5.2.4.4 Form and mold release agents
These products shall be applied per manufacturer specifications to the mold used during the preparation of
the test cubes (see Section 5.5.2.4).
5.5.2.5 Concrete water storage tanks
Concrete test cylinders (4 in × 8 in) shall be prepared according to ASTM C 315 or ASTM C 192,5 and moist
cured in an ASTM C 5115 cabinet for a minimum of 3 d. Cylinder molds shall be manufactured of virgin
materials free of detectable concentrations of any interfering contaminants.
Exposure water selection shall be determined by the analytes of interest identified on the analytical
summary (see Section 5.5.1). Exposure water(s) shall be selected in accordance with Section N-1.2.5.
5.5.4 Conditioning (optional)
Test samples shall be conditioned immediately after curing. This conditioning procedure simulates the
disinfection of water mains and storage tanks prior to placing into service, and is based on
AWWA Standards C651-05 and C652-02.6
36
Coatings intended for pipes and fittings can be conditioned as follows:
a) Prepare 50 mg/L free available chlorine solution using sodium hypochlorite (NaClO – reagent grade
or equivalent).
b) Using a spray bottle, spray the previously rinsed test samples, wetting all surfaces to be exposed.
c) Let the test samples stand for at least 3 h.
d) Place the test samples in racks, rinse with cold tap water, and rinse with reagent water, meeting
the requirements of Section N-1.9.2.1.
Coatings intended for water storage tanks or multiple uses (tanks, pipes, other) may be conditioned as
follows:
a) Prepare 200 mg/L free available chlorine solution using sodium hypochlorite (NaClO – reagent
grade or equivalent).
b) Using a spray bottle, spray the previously rinsed test samples, wetting all surfaces to be exposed.
c) Let the test samples stand for at least 30 min.
d) Place the test samples in racks, rinse with cold tap water, and rinse with reagent water, meeting
the requirements of Section N-1.9.2.1.
Products may also be disinfected per manufacturer’s use instructions.
5.5.5 Exposure protocols
For all test samples, exposure shall commence immediately following the conditioning step. If immediate
exposure is not possible, the test samples shall be dried in a laminar flow hood and exposed within 4 h.
Successful evaluation at an elevated exposure temperature shall preclude testing at a lower exposure
temperature. A separate sample shall be exposed for each type of exposure water selected in
Section 5.5.3.
The exact surface area-to-volume ratio achieved during the exposure shall be recorded.
5.5.5.1 Cold application
Cold application product samples, as designated by the manufacturer, shall be placed in an exposure
vessel and completely covered with exposure water of the applicable pH (see Section 5.5.3). The exposure
vessel shall be placed in a 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F) environment for the duration of the exposure period.
5.5.5.2 Domestic hot application
Products that are intended for domestic hot applications as designated by the manufacturer (e.g., for use
in single-family dwellings) shall be placed in an exposure vessel and completely covered with exposure
water of the applicable pH (see Section 5.5.3). The exposure vessel shall be placed in a 60 ± 2 C
(140 ± 4 F) environment for the duration of the exposure period.
5.5.5.3 Commercial hot application
Products that are intended for commercial hot applications, as designated by the manufacturer, (e.g., for
use in multiple-family dwellings, restaurants, hospitals) shall be placed in an exposure vessel and
completely covered with exposure water of the applicable pH (see Section 5.5.3). The exposure vessel
shall be placed in an 82 ± 2 C (180 ± 4 F) environment for the duration of the exposure period.
37
5.5.5.4 Single time point exposure protocol
When normalized contaminant concentrations from the product are expected to be less than their
acceptable concentrations (see NSF/ANSI/CAN 600, Section 3 [previously Annex A of this Standard]) when
tested at a single time point (e.g., flexible membrane liners), the product shall be exposed according to the
single time point exposure protocols in Table 5.2, (tanks), and Tables 5.3 and 5.4 (pipes). Coatings intended
for mulitple uses for tank, pipe or other applications shall be exposed per Table 5.2. Extraction water
samples shall be collected at the conclusion of the final exposure period. For paint / coating systems
intended for immediate return to service, the first four days of the exposure for tanks and the first two days
of the exposure for pipes will be eliminated and the water samples shall be collected at the conclusion of
the first 24-h period for tanks, and the first 16 h period for pipes.
5.5.5.5 Multiple time point exposure protocol
concentration (see NSF/ANSI/CAN 600, Section 3 [previously Annex A of this Standard]) when evaluated
as a single time point (see Section 5.5.5.4), determination of the contaminant leaching rate as a function of
time shall be considered. The relationship between contaminant concentration(s) and time shall be
determined and plotted using a minimum of five data points. Table 5.5 summarizes the multiple time point
exposure sequence. For contaminants of interest that do not require over time testing, extraction water
shall be collected following the third exposure period (elapsed time 5 d). For paint / coating systems
intended for immediate return to service, the first four days of the exposure will be eliminated and the water
samples shall be collected at the conclusion of the first 24-h period following conditioning.
products shall be exposed at the selected application temperature (e.g., 23 ± 2 oC; 60 ± 2 oC; 82 ± 2 oC) for
the full duration of the exposure. Extraction water shall be collected for analysis at a minimum of two time
points: after Day 1 and after the final exposure terminating on Day 90. The exposure water shall be changed
at least weekly during the interval between the initial and final exposure and on at least 4 d during the final
week of exposure.
NOTE — Day 1 is defined as the time point at which extractant water for all contaminants is collected for
analysis (5 d of elapsed time). Day 90 is defined as 90 d following this time point (95 d of elapsed time).
Immediately following the exposure period, the extraction water shall be poured into previously prepared
sample containers for storage as detailed in Section N-1.6, until analysis. Extraction water for solvent
analysis shall be collected in a sample bottle containing sodium thiosulfate in a quantity sufficient to
neutralize any residual chlorine, if applicable.
5.6 Analysis of extraction water
Extraction waters shall be analyzed with the methods listed in Section N-1.8.
5.7 Normalization
5.7.1 Normalization for tanks / storage vessels
5.7.1.1 The following equation shall be used to calculate the normalized concentration of each
contaminant for tanks or other storage vessels:
normalized laboratory SAF VL 24 h

contaminant = contaminant × × ×
concentration concentration VF SAL hours of exposure
38
Where:
SAF
= surface area to volume ratio for the specified tank capacity, as defined in Table 5.6
VF
be adjusted to reflect a 24-h exposure.
Products used as barriers for tanks or storage vessels shall use the surface area-to-volume ratios shown
in Table 5.6. Surface area-to-volume ratios for products used as barriers in tanks or storage vessels with a
capacity other than those shown in Table 5.6 shall be determined on a case-by-case basis, as described
in Section 5.7.1.2.
NOTE — Due to the potential for condensation to form on the interior surfaces of water storage tank and
reservoir covers, which may leach contaminants and then drip into the water tank or reservoir, the interior
surface of these covers shall be considered water contact materials. Table 5.6 and Section 5.7.1.2 thus include
the surface area of the roof (ceiling) in the calculation of the water contact surface area to volume ratio of the
tank or storage vessel.
5.7.1.2 Calculation of the surface area-to-volume ratio for tanks or storage vessels
The following assumptions shall be used in determining the surface area-to-volume ratio for each nominal
tank capacity:
— the tank has a smooth interior surface;

— the tank is cylindrical in shape;
— the tank is installed in a vertical position; and
— the roof (ceiling) of the tank is in contact with drinking water.
The following equation shall be used to calculate the surface area-to-volume ratio for tanks or storage
vessels of capacities that do not appear in Table 5.6:
Volume in gallons:
Y 0.66 1
(0.1702 × ) × (X + )
X 2
surface area-to-volume ratio (in2 /L) = 119.5 ×
Y
Where:
X = the height / diameter ratio of the tank or storage vessel

Y = the volume (in gallons) of the tank or storage vessel
5.7.2 Normalization for concrete aggregate
The following equation shall be used to calculate the normalized concentration of each contaminant for
concrete aggregate evaluations. Table 5.8 provides examples of calculated aggregate field use assmptions
for several reservoir capacities.
normalized laboratory
aggregate field use assumption (g/L)
contaminant = contaminant x
laboratory evaluation ratio (g/L)
concentration concentration
39
Where:
ratio of concrete
aggregate correlation of concrete
structure’s wetted aggregate mass
field use volume to evaluated
= surface area to x x per volume of
assumption concrete surface area
structure’s volume concrete (g/in3)
(g/L) (in3/in2)
(in2/L)
— ratio of concrete structure’s wetted surface area to structure’s volume: The surface area-to-volume
ratios shown in Table 5.6 shall be used. Surface area-to-volume ratios for products used as barriers in
tanks or storage vessels with a capacity other than those shown in Table 5.6 shall be determined on a
case-by-case basis, as described in Secion 5.7.1.2;
— correlation of concrete volume to evaluated concrete surface area: 0.1 (in3/in2);
NOTE — The 0.1 in3/in2 value accounts for 100% of the aggregate exposed within the top 0.1 in of
concrete.
— aggregate mass per volume of concrete (g/in3): Concrete mix design specific value:
NF = N1 × N2
SAF VL
N1 = ×
SAL VF(static)
VF(static)
N2 =
VF(flowing)
Where:
VF(static) = volume of water to which the product is exposed under static conditions
VF(flowing) = volume of water to which the product is exposed under flowing conditions during a period
of time equivalent to the laboratory test
be adjusted to reflect a 24-h exposure (e.g., multiply the normalized value by 24/72 when a 3-d exposure
was used). Products used as barriers for pipes shall use the surface area-to-volume ratios shown in
Table 5.7.
Pipe and fitting coatings with a nominal diameter ≥ 10 cm (4 in) shall be normalized to the flowing condition.
Pipe and fitting coatings with a nominal diameter of ˂ 10 cm (4 in) shall be normalized to the static condition
when the value of N2 is ≤ 0.1. Pipe and fitting coatings with a nominal diameter of ˂ 10 cm (4 in) shall be
normalized to the flowing condition when the value of N2 is ˃ 0.1.
5.7.3 Over time exposure calculations
Laboratory values from each time point for which extractant water was collected (minimum of five data
points required) shall be normalized as indicated in Sections 5.7.1 or 5.7.2, depending on product end use.
40
A decay curve of these normalized contaminant concentrations in relation to elapsed exposure time shall
be plotted. A contaminant concentration at Day 90 of exposure shall be extrapolated from this data.
NOTE — Day 1 is defined as the time point at which extractant water for all contaminants is collected for
analysis (5 d of elapsed time). Day 90 is defined as 90 d following this time point (95 d of elapsed time).
5.8.1 Contaminants measured at a single time point
Normalized contaminant concentrations for tanks shall be no greater than their respective SPACs
determined in accordance with NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously Annex A). For pipe and fitting products,
normalized static contaminant concentrations shall be no greater than their respective MCLs, or TACs, and
normalized flowing contaminant concentrations shall be no greater than their respective SPACs calculated
in accordance with NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously Annex A).
5.8.2 Contaminants measured over time
Normalized Day 1 contaminant concentrations shall not exceed the STEL as defined in NSF/ANSI/CAN
600, Section 3.3 (previously Annex A, Section A.5). Extrapolated Day 90 contaminant concentrations shall
not exceed their respective SPACs for tank products determined in accordance with NSF/ANSI/CAN 600
(previously Annex A). For pipe and fitting products extrapolated Day 90 normalized static contaminant
concentrations shall not exceed their respective MCLs, or TACs, and normalized flowing contaminant
concentrations shall not exceeed their respective SPACs determined in accordance with NSF/ANSI/CAN
600 (previously Annex A).
Table 5.1
Paint and coating system sample preparation
Panel surface area exposed for

Number of layers in system Layer
each layer
one layer ― entire panel
primer layer 1/
3
two layer 2/
top layer 3
primer layer 1/
6
three layer intermediate layer 1/

3
top layer 1/
2
primer layer 1/
12
first intermediate layer 1/

6
four layer 1/
second intermediate layer 4
top layer 1/
2
NOTE — A layer is one or more coats of the same coating material.
41
Table 5.2
Single time point exposure sequence for tank products
Length of exposure Elapsed time Sample collection

24 ± 1 h 1d discard extractant water and refill
extractant water collected for analysis at
24 ± 1 h 5d
conclusion of exposure period
NOTE 1 — Sample exposures are sequential: decant and discard extraction water, refill container, and continue
exposure.
NOTE 2 — For paint / coating systems intended for immediate return to service, the first four days of the exposure
will be eliminated and the water samples shall be collected at the conclusion of the first 24-h period following
conditioning.
Table 5.3
Example single time point conditioning schedule for pipes and related product coatings
Condtioning Elaspsed
Comment
time time
24 ± 1 h 1d
24 ± 1 h 2d
24 ± 1 h 3d
24 ± 1 h 4d
72 ± 1 h 7d
24 ± 1 h 8d
24 ± 1 h 9d
24 ± 1 h 10 d
24 ± 1 h 11 d
Exposure water is decanted and discarded, and conditioning is
72 ± 1 h 14 d
terminated.
NOTE — For paint / coating systems intended for immediate return to service, the conditioning time is eliminated.
42
Table 5.4
Single time point exposure protocol for pipe and related product coatings
Exposure time Comment

Exposure water is decanted and discarded; the exposure vessel or product is
24 ± 1h
refilled with exposure water and the exposure is continued.
Exposure water is decanted and discarded; the exposure vessel or product is
24 ± 1h
refilled with exposure water and the exposure is continued.
16 ± 1h Exposure water is collected for analysis.
NOTE — For paint / coating systems intended for immediate return to service, the first two days of exposure are
eliminated
Table 5.5
Multiple time point exposure sequence
Length of exposure Elapsed time Sample collection

24 ± 1 h 1d extractant water collected for analysis
6±1d 11 d discard extractant water and refill
24 ± 1 h 12 d extractant water collected for analysis
NOTE — Sample exposures are sequential: decant required volume for analysis when indicated, discard any
remaining extraction water, refill container, and continue exposure.
Table 5.6
Surface area-to-volume ratios for tanks or storage vessels
Surface area-to-
Nominal capacity (gal)1 Surface area (ft2)2 Length / diameter ratio
volume ratio (in2/1 L)
5 5.3 5.0 40.4
10 8.4 5.0 32.0
25 15.5 5.0 23.6
50 22.0 3.0 16.8
75 28.9 3.0 14.6
100 35.0 3.0 13.3
200 55.1 2.9 10.5
300 71.3 2.7 9.0
400 85.8 2.6 8.2
43
Table 5.6
Surface area-to-volume ratios for tanks or storage vessels
Surface area-to-
Nominal capacity (gal)1 Surface area (ft2)2 Length / diameter ratio
volume ratio (in2/1 L)
500 99.0 2.5 7.5
600 110 2.3 7.0
700 121 2.2 6.6
800 132 2.1 6.3
900 141 1.9 5.9
1,000 150 1.8 5.7
1,500 196 1.8 5.0
2,000 238 1.8 4.5
3,000 312 1.8 4.0
4,000 378 1.8 3.6
5,000 438 1.8 3.3
6,000 495 1.8 3.1
7,000 548 1.8 3.0
8,000 600 1.8 2.9
9,000 648 1.8 2.7
10,000 696 1.8 2.6
20,000 1,104 1.8 2.1
30,000 1,447 1.8 1.8
40,000 1,753 1.8 1.7
50,000 2,034 1.8 1.6
60,000 2,297 1.8 1.5
70,000 2,545 1.8 1.4
80,000 2,782 1.8 1.32
90,000 3,010 1.8 1.27
100,000 3,228 1.8 1.23
200,000 5,125 1.8 0.97
250,000 5,946 1.8 0.90
500,000 9,439 1.8 0.72
750,000 12,370 1.8 0.63
1,000,000 14,980 1.8 0.57
1,500,000 19,630 1.8 0.50
2,000,000 23,780 1.8 0.45
5,000,000 43,810 1.8 0.33
7,500,000 57,400 1.8 0.29
10,000,000 69,530 1.8 0.26
1 US gallons.
2 Surface area calculations include the sides, floor, and roof (ceiling) of a tank.
44
Table 5.7
Surface area-to-volume ratios for pipe
Nominal pipe diameter Surface area-to-volume

(inches) ratio (in2/1 L)
0.5 488
0.75 326
1 244
1.25 195
1.5 163
1.75 140
2 122
2.25 109
2.5 97.6
2.75 88.8
3 81.4
3.5 69.7
4 61.0
4.5 54.2
5 48.8
5.5 44.4
6 40.7
6.5 37.6
7 34.9
8 30.5
9 27.1
10 24.4
11 22.2
12 20.3
13 18.8
14 17.4
15 16.3
16 15.3
17 14.4
18 13.6
19 12.8
20 12.2
21 11.6
22 11.1
23 10.6
24 10.2
25 9.8
36 6.8
48 5.1
45
Table 5.7
Surface area-to-volume ratios for pipe
Nominal pipe diameter Surface area-to-volume

(inches) ratio (in2/1 L)
60 4.1
72 3.4
84 2.9
97 2.5
108 2.3
120 2.0
Table 5.8
Example aggregate field use assumptions
NSF/ANSI/CAN 61, Table 5.6 Calculated field use1 assumption for

Nominal reservoir
surface area-to-volume mass aggregate per reservoir
capacity (gallons)
ratio (in2/L) volume (g/L)
1,000 5.7 18
10,000 2.6 8.2
100,000 1.23 3.9
250,000 0.90 2.8
1 Based on example concrete with a designed weight of 150 lb/ft3 and an aggregate content representing 80% of that
weight.
6 Joining and sealing materials

6.1 Coverage
This section covers materials that join or seal pipes and related products (e.g., tanks); protective (barrier)
materials; and mechanical devices that contact drinking water.
6.2 Definitions
6.2.1 flux: A formulation intended to remove traces of surface oxides, to promote wetting, and to protect
surfaces to be soldered or brazed from oxidation during heating.
6.2.2 gaskets and sealing materials: Materials used to fill a hole or joint to prevent leakage.
6.2.3 joining materials: Materials that form a bond when used to put parts together.
6.2.4 lubricant: A substance interposed between two surfaces for the purpose of reducing the friction or
wear between them.
6.3 Material and extraction testing requirements
Samples for testing shall be prepared as specified by the manufacturer's written instructions, and exposed
as outlined in Annex N-1. Any contaminants extracted shall have normalized concentrations no greater
than the limits specified in NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously Annex A).
46
6.4 Items of special significance
The manufacturer shall supply written information relative to the product's intended end uses and
applications.
7 Process media
7.1 Scope
The requirements in this section apply to process media products intended for the reduction of dissolved or
suspended materials present in drinking water. The products that are covered include, but are not limited
to, process media used in the following processes: ion exchange, adsorption, oxidation, aeration, and
filtration.
Requirements in this section for regenerated / reactivated media are intended to apply to regeneration /
reactivation companies that provide services for water systems, and are not intended to apply to water
systems that produce potable water, regenerate or reactivate their own media, and do not sell, barter, trade
or pass their media to another water system. Products and facilities that are specifically covered by the
requirements for regenerated / reactivated media include:
— off-site regeneration / reactivation facilities that are independent from the water utility; and
— on-site regeneration facilities that are not owned and controlled by the water utility.
Products and facilities that are specifically exempt from these requirements for regenerated / reactivated
media include:
— off-site and on-site regeneration / reactivation facilities that are owned by the water utility and is
processing media for only that water utility’s use; and
— on-site regeneration by any party where the media is not removed from its original vessel, and the
equipment is dedicated and the utility assumes responsibility for the maintenance of all supplies and
equipment.
7.2 Definitions
7.2.1 adsorption: The retention of a gas, liquid, solid, or dissolved material onto the surface of a solid.
7.2.2 adsorption media: A process media material upon which a gas, liquid, solid, or dissolved material
will be retained.
7.2.3 aeration: The process of bringing water into contact with air in order to expedite the transfer of gas
between the two phases.
7.2.4 aeration packing media: Media used in aerators to increase the surface area of the liquid being
processed, resulting in increased liquid-to-air contact and improved gas transfer.
7.2.5 commingled media: A mixture of spent media from different spent media sources. Reactivated /
regenerated media from a single source that is mixed with virgin media is not considered to be commingled.
7.2.6 filtration: The process of passing a dilute liquid suspension through filter media to reduce the
concentration of suspended or colloidal matter.
7.2.7 filtration media: Process media through which a liquid is passed for the purpose of filtration.
47
7.2.8 ion exchange: A chemical process in which ions are reversibly interchanged between a liquid and
a solid.
7.2.9 ion exchange resins: Process media consisting of insoluble polymers having functional groups
capable of exchanging ions.
7.2.10 low-density process media: Process media such as diatomaceous earth, perlite, or other
media, which have a bulk density of < 500 g/L and are used for filtration purposes.
7.2.11 oxidative media: Process media that chemically facilitate oxidation on the media surface and
thereby enhance removal of ions from water.
7.2.12 potable / food grade reactivation / regeneration facility: A reactivation / regeneration facility
where all process equipment in contact with spent media is used exclusively to handle media used to treat
products designated for human consumption, which does not include pharmaceutical related applications.
If the facility is part of a larger media facility that handles nonpotable / nonfood grade media, the potable /
food grade reactivation facility shall have separate entry and shall not allow transport between the facility
and the nonpotable / nonfood grade portion. Any media classified as hazardous under the Resource
Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) or by US state or Canadian provincial, or territorial regulations is
excluded from reactivation / regeneration in a potable/food grade reactivation facility.
7.2.13 process media: Water insoluble material used to reduce the concentration of dissolved or
suspended substances in water through such operations as ion exchange, aeration, adsorption, oxidation,
and filtration.
7.2.14 reductive media: Process media that chemically facilitate reduction on the media surface and
thereby enhance removal of ions from water.
7.2.15 reactivation: A controlled thermal process operating at a temperature and gas environment
sufficient to pyrolyze adsorbates from spent activated carbon and restore adsorption capacity.
7.2.16 regeneration: The periodic restoration of an adsorptive media (excluding activated carbon) back
to useable form by employing a chemical regenerant to displace contaminants removed during the
treatment process.
7.2.17 spent media: Media that has been in service and is no longer able to produce a desired effluent
quality.
7.3.1 Manufacturer use instructions
Media that require conditioning, dosing, use of filtration aids or specific recommended use concentrations,
shall contain manufacturer use instructions on the product packaging or other technical literature. For
process media products that are dosed (e.g., powdered activated carbon [PAC]), use instructions shall
include the maximum dose at which the product can be acceptably used (as determined by evaluation to
the requirements of this section).
7.3.2 Product labeling
Process media product containers shall facilitate traceability to the production location and shall, at a
minimum, contain the following information:
— manufacturer's name and address;

— production location identifier;
— product identification (product type and, when applicable, trade name);
48
— net weight or net volume;

— when applicable, mesh or sieve size;
— lot number; and
— when appropriate, special handling, storage, and use instructions.
7.3.2.1 Additional labeling and literature requirements for reactivated / regenerated media
Product packaging, literature shipped with the product, and certification listings for reactivated / regenerated
media shall explicitly identify the product as reactivated or regenerated. Labeling of media from commingled
sources shall identify the product as commingled.
7.3.3 Additional requirements for reactivated / regenerated media
Only reactivation / regeneration facilities and equipment used to handle spent and reactivated / regenerated
media, classified as potable and/or food grade, shall be used. Transportation containers, including storage
vessels on vehicles, transfer hoses and other equipment in contact with the media, shall be suitably
protected from environmental contamination and suitably cleaned, by evidence of wash-out tickets that are
presented to the purchaser or certifying agency on demand.
Samples from each reactivated / regenerated batch of media shall be retained at the facility for a period of
at least 2 yr, and be made available for analysis by the purchaser or a certification organization. Retained
samples shall contain at least twice the weight in Table 7.2.
Commingled spent media shall be of comparable type and function.
Reactivation / regeneration facilities shall have written verification from each water system on a
standardized form provided by the facility that each shipment of spent media to be processed meets the
following criteria:
— the spent media shall have been used only for drinking water applications;
— the spent media supplier is a public water system as defined by US EPA regulations
(40 CFR § 141.2),3 or equivalent regulations in Canada or other countries where applicable;
— the spent media shall not be a RCRA hazardous waste as defined by 40 CFR Part 261; 3
— the spent media is not classified as a hazardous waste in the facility’s state, province, or
territory; and
— the spent media shall not have knowingly been exposed to:
— activated carbon: polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) or dioxins;13 or
— other media: herbicides, pesticides, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), dioxins or

1,2 dibromo-3 chloropropane (DBCP).
The form shall also contain:
— the name and address of the water system supplying the spent media;
— the identification of the type of media;
— manufacturer or previous regeneration / reactivation facility of the original media;
13 Criteria are derived from AWWA B605: Reactivation of Granular Activated Carbon.
49
— trade designation of the original media;
— mesh size;
— compliance of the original media with this Standard;
— characterization of all regulated contaminants and other contaminants of concern that the media
was exposed to; and
— a signed statement of attestation of the above.
7.3.4 Product line evaluation
When a line of products is manufactured to the same material formulation and contains identical ingredients,
product evaluation shall be preferentially conducted on the product form that has the highest surface
area-to-volume ratio (smallest particle size). Products of a lower surface area-to-volume ratio (larger particle
size) shall be considered to have met the requirements of this section when a higher surface
area-to-volume ratio product, belonging to the same line of products and having an identical use, has been
demonstrated to meet the requirements of this section.
A representative sample of the media shall be reduced to three test samples, each of a sufficient quantity
for the extraction procedures described in Section 7.5. The three test samples shall be placed and stored
in airtight, moisture-proof, sealed glass containers. If a glass container is inappropriate, containers made
from some other inert material recommended by the manufacturer shall be used. Each container shall be
clearly labeled with product name, type of sample, manufacturer name, sampling data, production location,
lot number, and the name of the individual who collected the sample. One sample shall be used for
exposure and analysis; the remaining two samples shall be retained for re-evaluation purposes.
An analytical summary shall be prepared for each product. The analytical summary shall consist of the
formulation-dependent analytes identified in accordance with Section 3.3 and the applicable
product-specific minimum test batteries listed in Table 7.1.
7.5.2 Wetting
POE system media receive wetting as specified in Section 7.5.5.4.
Process media that receive conditioning shall be immersed completely (wetted) in reagent water prior to
conditioning and exposure. The weight of the sample to be wetted shall be at least equal to the amount of
media required to perform the exposure at the specified weight-to-volume ratio (see Tables 7.2 and 7.3).
NOTE — For example, a media for which 2 L (0.53 gal) of extractant water is required to perform the selected
analyses, and the media is exposed at 25 g/L, a minimum of 50 g of media is wetted.
For low-density process media, 0.5 L (0.13 gal) of the process media shall be wetted; the weight of this
volume of media shall be measured and recorded prior to wetting.
Following the specified wetting period, the sample shall be completely drained and the water discarded.
50
7.5.2.1 Granular activated carbon (GAC)
GAC test samples shall be wetted for 16 ± 1 h.
7.5.2.2 Other process media products
All other process media that receive conditioning shall be wetted for 60 ± 10 min.
7.5.3 Conditioning (backwashing)
POE system media receive conditioning as specified in Section 7.5.5.4.
7.5.3.1 Filtration and adsorption media
Wetted filtration or adsorption media (excluding diatomaceous earth, perlite, and PAC products, and other
media of < 0.25 mm diameter) shall be placed in a conditioning chamber (a glass column with a minimum
inner diameter of 2 in). The amount of media conditioned shall be sufficient to meet or exceed its specific
weight per volume ratio (see Table 7.2) and to generate sufficient exposure water to complete the selected
analyses. Reagent water shall be directed slowly upward through the conditioning system until the entire
amount of media is flooded. The media shall then be backwashed at a flow rate that fluidizes the media or
attains sufficient transport velocities to remove extraneous particulate matter; the maximum wetted media
expansion rates for various process media products are indicated in Table 7.3. Filtration and adsorption
media shall be subjected to the prescribed backwash for 30 ± 2 min.
7.5.3.2 Diatomaceous earth, perlite, PAC, and other process media
Diatomaceous earth, perlite, PAC, and all other process media with functions other than filtration or
adsorption shall not be conditioned unless the manufacturer’s use instructions stipulate a specific
conditioning protocol.
7.5.3.3 Special postconditioning procedures for sand and anthracite products
Upon completion of the backwash, 1% to 1.5% of the sand or anthracite column (by height) shall be scraped
away and discarded.
All exposure water that is being used to determine compliance to this Standard shall be prepared fresh
daily and stored in a closed container.
7.5.4.1 Adsorption media
Adsorption media shall be exposed in a pH 5 sodium dihydrogen phosphate buffer, prepared by mixing
0.1 M NaH2PO4, 0.04 M MgCl2, and reagent water that meets the requirements of Section N-1.9.2.1, at a
ratio of 1:1:18, respectively.
7.5.4.2 Nonadsorptive media used in POE devices
Media used in POE devices shall be exposed, based on a formulation review and determination of the most
severe condition(s), to one or more appropriate extraction waters as detailed in Section N-1.9 and
Table N-1.3 for all other wetted materials.
7.5.4.3 All other process media
All other process media shall be exposed in reagent water, meeting the requirements of Section N-1.9.2.1.
51
7.5.5 Exposure protocols
Table 7.2 contains the weight per volume ratios for exposure of process media.
7.5.5.1 Adsorption media
7.5.5.1.1 Media of < 0.25 mm in diameter
Immediately after completion of wetting, the media sample shall be exposed in an appropriately sized
vessel. The amount of media exposed per volume of exposure water (see Section 7.5.4.1) shall be sufficient
to meet or exceed its specific weight per volume ratio according to Table 7.2, and to generate sufficient
exposure water to complete the selected analyses. The vessel shall be covered and placed on a magnetic
stirrer for 60 ± 5 min. Immediately after the exposure period, the liquid portion of the exposure shall be
passed through a Whatman14 #41 filter and a 0.45 μ filter, and the resulting filtrate shall be collected. The
solid portion of the exposed sample remaining on the filter shall be dried and weighed, and used to calculate
the evaluation dose.
7.5.5.1.2 Media of ≥ 0.25 mm in diameter
Immediately after completion of conditioning, the media sample shall be exposed in an appropriately sized
vessel. The amount of media exposed per volume of exposure water (see Section 7.5.4.1) shall be sufficient
to meet or exceed its specific weight per volume ratio in Table 7.2 and to generate sufficient exposure water
to complete the selected analyses. The contents of the vessel shall be mixed to ensure that the entire
sample is in contact with the exposure water. The vessel shall be sealed with polytetrafluoroethylene
(PTFE), and the sample shall be exposed according to the schedule outlined in Table 7.4. The
weight-to-volume ratio shall be recorded at the time of exposure and shall represent the evaluation dose.
7.5.5.2 Filtration media, ion exchange resins, synthetic media, and all other process media
Immediately after completion of wetting, or conditioning if applicable, the media sample shall be exposed
in an appropriately sized vessel. The amount of media exposed per volume of exposure water
(see Section 7.5.4) shall be sufficient to meet or exceed its specific weight per volume ratio in Table 7.2
and to generate sufficient exposure water to complete the selected analyses. The contents of the vessel
shall be mixed to ensure that the entire sample is in contact with the exposure water. The vessel shall be
sealed with PTFE, and the sample shall be exposed according to the schedule outlined in Table 7.4. The
weight-to-volume ratio shall be recorded at the time of exposure and shall represent the evaluation dose.
7.5.5.3 Aeration packing media
Aeration packing media shall be exposed in appropriately sized vessels at a surface area-to-volume ratio
greater than or equal to its manufacturer’s recommended field surface area-to-volume ratio and in a volume
of exposure water sufficient to complete the selected analyses. The vessel shall be sealed with PTFE, and
the sample shall be exposed according to the schedule outlined in Table 7.4.
NOTE — The volume of extraction water can be proportionately increased if an additional amount of media
was prepared in order to complete the selected analyses.
7.5.5.4 POE system media
POE system media shall be exposed at a weight to volume ratio greater than or equal to the maximum
value recommended by the manufacturer for the ratio of the weight of media (as shipped) per unit void
volume (UVV) of a POE system.
14 Whatman PLC. 27 Great West Road, Brentford, Middlesex TW8 9BW, UK. <www.whatman.com>
52
7.5.5.4.1 POE system media shall be placed in a suitable exposure vessel and shall be installed, flushed,
and conditioned in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions using the exposure water specified in
Section 7.5.4 at an initial inlet static pressure of 340 kPa (50 psig).
7.5.5.4.2 After media are flushed and conditioned in accordance with Section 7.5.5.4.1, the exposure
vessel shall be refilled with the exposure water specified in Section 7.5.4 and maintained for 24 h at a
temperature of 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F). The exposure vessel shall then be flushed with 5 unit volumes, refilled,
and maintained for a second 24 h at an ambient temperature of 23 ± 2 °C (73 ± 4 °F). The exposure vessel
shall again be flushed with 5 unit volumes, refilled, and maintained for a third period of 24 h at a temperature
of 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F). At the end of the third 24-h exposure, the extraction water sample shall be collected
in accordance with Section 7.5.6. The volume collected from an exposure vessel shall be the UVV of the
vessel. If a larger volume is required for analysis, multiple exposure vessels shall be used.
Immediately after exposure, extraction waters shall be poured into previously prepared sample containers
for storage until analysis, as specified in Section N-1.6.
7.6 Analysis
Extraction waters including exposure water samples and exposure water controls and reagent water used
for wetting and conditioning shall be analyzed with the methods listed in Section N-1.7.
7.7 Normalization
The concentration of analytes present in the extraction water shall be multiplied by calculated normalization
factors to account for differences between the actual laboratory evaluation ratio and the weight per volume
ratio in Table 7.2.
7.7.1 Process media with manufacturer’s recommended use concentration
The concentration reported by the laboratory shall be normalized with the following equation:
manufacturer’s use concentration(mg/L)
contaminant = contaminant ×
laboratory evaluation ratio (mg/L)
This equation shall be used to normalize media that is sold with use specifications indicating a maximum
use concentration (MUC) which can be calculated as follows:
[(1ft2 ) × (bed depth ft) × (density g/cm3 ) × (28,320 cm3 /ft3 ) × (1,000 mg/g)]
MUC =
[(minimum flow rate gal/min)(60 min/hr)(1 h)]
7.7.2 Process media except for activated carbon media and aeration packing media (without
manufacturer’s use concentration)
weight per volume ratio (mg/L)
This equation shall be used to normalize filtration media, ion exchange resins, synthetic media, and other
media to the weight per volume ratios listed in Table 7.2.
53
7.7.3 Activated carbon media for non-POE system applications (without manufacturer’s use
concentration)
normalized laboratory 250 mg/L

contaminant = contaminant × laboratory evaluation
concentration concentration ratio (mg/L)
Equation 2 shall be used to normalize activated carbon media (granular or powdered) to a weight per
volume ratio of 250 mg/L.
7.7.4 Filter precoat media (e.g., perlite, diatomaceous earth) for non-POE system applications
manufacturer’s use concentration(mg/L)
Equation 3 shall be used to normalize dosed media (except PAC) to the manufacturer’s recommended
MUC.
7.7.5 Aeration packing media
The concentration reported by the laboratory shall be normalized with the following equation (Equation 4):
SAF VF
contaminant = contaminant × ×
SAL VF(flowing)
Where:
SAL = surface area attained during laboratory exposures;
VL = volume of exposure water used during laboratory exposures;
SAF = surface area of the product under field conditions; and
VF(flowing) = minimum volume of water to which the product is exposed in the field under flowing
conditions during a period of time equivalent to the laboratory evaluation.
NOTE — When manufacturer use instructions indicate that the aeration product can be subjected to
static conditions in the field, normalized concentrations shall be modified to reflect the static condition.
For the static condition, the VF(flowing) parameter shall be substituted with VF(static), which is equal to the
volume of water contacting the media under static conditions in the field.
7.7.6 Process media for POE systems
manufacturer’s recommended use concentration (mg/L)
contaminant = contaminant x
54
The concentration of contaminants known to be associated with any nonmedia materials or ingredients that
could not be dissociated from the media, or materials that would have been released into the effluent of the
system in the absence of the physical barrier provided by the media (e.g., the binder used to produce
carbon blocks), shall require additional normalization to account for differences between laboratory
exposed surface areas and those normally wetted under normal use conditions. This normalization
adjustment shall be performed in accordance with Section N-1.8.
NOTE — For instance, carbon block end caps may have more wetted surface area exposed without the carbon
block attached to normal system components.
7.8.1 For process media, normalized contaminant concentrations shall be no greater than their
respective SPACs, determined in accordance with NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously Annex A).
7.8.2 For aeration packing media and POE media that require evaluation to the static condition, the
normalized static contaminant concentrations shall be no greater than their respective MCLs or TACs,
determined in accordance with NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously Annex A).
Table 7.1
Product-specific minimum test batteries for process media products
Analytes for
Analytes for virgin
Product Primary use regenerated /
media
reactivated media
metals,1 nickel,
activated alumina adsorption see footnote 2
and aluminum
metals,1 GC/MS
aluminum silicates
filtration (base neutral acid scans), see footnote 2
(e.g., zeolites)
and radionuclides
metals,1 GC/MS metals,3 GC/MS
impregnated
adsorption (base neutral acid scans), (base neutral acid scans),
aluminum silicates
and radionuclides VOCs and radionuclides
metals,1 GC/MS
anthracite filtration see footnote 2
(base neutral acid scans)
diatomaceous earth filtration metals1 and radionuclides see footnote 2
1
metals, GC/MS
garnet filtration see footnote 2
metals,3 GC/MS4
granular activated metals,1 GC/MS4
adsorption (base neutral acid scans),
carbon (GAC) (base neutral acid scans)
and radionuclides
metals,1 GC/MS
gravel filtration see footnote 2
metals,1 GC/MS
ilmenite filtration (base neutral acid scans), see footnote 2
and radionuclides
ilmenite adsorption (base neutral acid scans), (base neutral acid scans),
metals,3 GC/MS
(base neutral acid scans),
ion residual monomer, other
ion exchange resins VOCs and radionuclides,
exchange formulation dependent
other formulation
dependent
55
Table 7.1
Product-specific minimum test batteries for process media products

(base neutral acid scans), (base neutral acid scans),
impregnated ion
adsorption and radionuclides, VOCs and radionuclides,
exchange resins
residual monomer, other other formulation
formulation dependent dependent
oxidative media metals, 3 GC/MS
metals,1 GC/MS
(e.g., manganese oxidation (base neutral acid scans),
green sand) VOCs and radionuclides
metals,1 GC/MS
perlite filtration (base neutral acid scans), see footnote 2
and radionuclides
powdered activated metals,1 GC/MS
adsorption see footnote 2
carbon (PAC) (base neutral acid scans)
metal-based media
(e.g., granular iron,
adsorption (base neutral acid scans), (base neutral acid scans),
iron oxide, titanium
dioxide, etc.)
metals,1 GC/MS
sand filtration see footnote 2
synthetic media aeration, filtration formulation dependent see footnote 2
1 Metals: antimony, arsenic, barium, beryllium, cadmium, chromium, copper, lead, mercury, selenium, thallium.
2 These products are not typically regenerated or reactivated at remote locations. Therefore a minimum test battery
has not been established. A full formulation review would be required for these products if they are evaluated under
this Standard.
3 Metals(for reactivated and regenerated media): antimony, arsenic, barium, beryllium, cadmium, chromium, copper,
lead, mercury, selenium, thallium, aluminum, manganese, nickel, silver, tin, vanadium, zinc.
4 GC/MS (base neutral acid scans) required if documentation identifying process controls intended to ensure complete
activation/reactivation is not available.
56
Table 7.2
Process media exposure weight per volume ratios
Media type Weight per volume1

≥ manufacturer’s recommended
media with manufacturer’s use instructions
use concentration2
adsorption media: —
activated alumina 625 ± 25 g/L
GAC and PAC 25 ± 5 g/L
anthracite and gravel:3 —
≤ 3/8-in diameter particles 625 ± 25 g/L
> 3/8-in diameter particles 1250 ± 25 g/L
filter precoat media 10 times the manufacturer’s
(e.g., perlite, diatomaceous earth) recommended use concentration
filtration media other than anthracite or gravel 625 ± 25 g/L
ion exchange resins 625 ± 25 g/L
synthetic media 625 ± 25 g/L
manufacturer’s recommended
point-of-entry (POE) system media
use concentration4
1 Weight per volume of the product on an “as shipped” basis.
2 Media with manufacturer’s recommended use concentration shall be exposed at this use concentration or higher.
3 For the size range specified, not more than 8% by weight shall be either finer than or coarser than the designated
size limit (AWWA B100-96).
4For POE application media, this shall be the maximum value recommended by the manufacturer of the ratio of the
weight of media1 per ‘unit void volume’ of a POE system.
Table 7.3
Maximum conditioning expansion rates for
filtration and adsorption media
Maximum laboratory
Media type expansion rate of wetted
media (by height) (%)
activated alumina 25 ± 5%
aluminum silicates
25 ± 5%
(zeolites)
anthracite 25 ± 5%
garnet 30 ± 5%
granular activated carbon
30 ± 5%
(GAC)
gravel 10 ± 5%
ilmenite 30 ± 5%
manganese greensand 30 ± 5%
sands 20 ± 5%
57
Table 7.4
Exposure schedule for process media of ≥ 0.25 mm in diameter
Time Temperature Comment

Exposure water is drained / decanted and discarded;
60 ± 5 min 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F)
the exposure vessel is refilled and exposure is continued.
Exposure water is drained / decanted and discarded;
60 ± 5 min 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F)
the exposure vessel is refilled and exposure is continued.
60 ± 5 min 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F) Exposure water is collected and filtered for analyses.
8 Mechanical devices
8.1 Coverage
This section covers devices, components, and materials used therein, that are used in treatment /
transmission / distribution systems, and are in contact with drinking water intended for human ingestion,
drinking water treatment chemicals, or both. Examples are listed in Table 8.1. POU drinking water treatment
devices are not covered by the requirements in this section.
8.2 Definitions
8.2.1 cold water application: A product application that is intended to result in continuous exposure to
water of ambient temperature. Products are tested for an end use temperature of 23 ± 2 °C (73 ± 4 °F).
8.2.2 commercial hot water application: A product application that is intended to result in continuous
or intermittent exposure to water that has been raised from ambient temperature. Intermittent exposure is
82 ± 2 °C (180 ± 4 °F).
8.2.3 domestic hot water application: A product application that is intended to result in continuous or
intermittent exposure to water that has been raised from ambient temperature. Intermittent exposure is
60 ± 2 °C (140 ± 4 °F).
8.2.4 in-line device: A device (used to measure or control the flow of water) installed on a service line
or building distribution system downstream of the water main and upstream of endpoint devices.
8.2.5 manifold: A device with an inlet and four or more outlets used to direct water to multiple fixtures or
end use devices within a residence. Manifolds are characterized by the number of ports, which are outlets
perpendicular to the manifold trunk or body.
8.2.6 building distribution system: A continuous system of piping and related fittings, beginning at the
tap on the main, that is intended to convey potable water to points of usage.
8.3 Device, component, or material requirements
8.3.1 General
Devices, components, or materials shall be considered to have met the requirements of this section if at
least one of the following conditions is met:
— the devices, components, or materials covered under this section are tested and evaluated
according to the procedures specified in Sections N-1.4 and N-1.8; or
58
— the devices, components, or materials meet the requirements of Section 8.3.2.
When all components or materials, or both, of a device meet the requirements of this section, the device
shall also meet the requirements of this section. When all materials of a component meet the requirements
of this section, the component shall also meet the requirements of this section.
8.3.2 Evaluation of devices, components, or materials tested to other sections of this Standard
Devices, components, or materials that have been tested to other sections of the Standard shall meet the
following criteria:
— they shall be made of the same alloy(s), composition(s), or formula(s);
— they shall have undergone analogous manufacturing processes;
— they shall have been tested at a temperature that meets or exceeds the required exposure
temperature in Section N-1.4;
— they shall have been conditioned for a period of time not more than 14 d, and exposed for a period
of time not less than 12 h for in-line devices or 24 h for other mechanical devices; and
— the concentration(s) of the extracted contaminant(s) shall be normalized to the requirements of

Section N-1.8.
8.3.3 Metallic contaminants
When a device or component is qualified through the separate testing of two or more components, the
normalized concentrations for each specific metallic contaminant from individual components shall be
summed. The total of the normalized metallic contaminant concentrations shall meet the requirements of
Section N-1.8.
8.4 In-line devices, components, and materials
Samples for the testing of in-line devices, components, and materials (see Section 8.1) shall be selected
according to the requirements of Sections N-1.2.3 and N-1.4.1. Extraction waters shall be selected
according to Section N-1.2.5. In-line product samples shall be conditioned as indicated in Section N-1.4.3.
After conditioning, the samples shall be exposed as indicated in Section N-1.4.4.1 and Table N-1.8.
Normalization shall be as specified in Sections N-1.8.3 and N-1.8.4, as applicable.
8.4.1 Brass or bronze containing in-line devices
The evaluation of brass or bronze containing in-line devices for contaminants other than lead shall require
exposure of at least one sample in accordance with Section 8.4.
The evaluation of brass or bronze containing in-line devices for lead under the pH 8 conditions shall be
exposed in at least triplicate (more if specified by the manufacturer) if the test representative holds ≤ 2 L
and has a dry weight ≤ 15 kg (33 lb). If specified by the manufacturer, the test representative that holds
more than 2 L, or has a dry weight in excess of 15 kg (33 lb) may also be exposed in a quantity greater
than 1.
The extraction waters from triplicate exposures shall be either combined to one sample for all contaminant
analysis or shall be analyzed individually and results averaged. If more than three samples are exposed,
the waters from each sample shall be analyzed individually for lead and results averaged. Averaging of
results shall be performed prior to normalization. When one or more of the individual results is found to be
nondetectable, the reporting limit shall be used to represent the unit results when averaging.
59
The normalized average result for lead shall be less than or equal to the TAC (5 µg/L). In addition, the
normalized lead results of individual units exposed shall not exceed 15 µg/L.
NOTE — With this procedure, the average result is used when determining compliance with the standard for
all contaminants. It also assures no individual unit exposed exceeds the standards lead criteria in effect prior
to 2012-07-01 for in-line devices (15 µg/L).
8.5 POE systems, components, and media
8.5.1 POE systems
Samples for the testing of POE systems shall be selected according to the requirements of Sections
N-1.2.3 and N-1.4.1. Extraction waters shall be selected according to Section N-1.2.5. Samples shall be
installed, conditioned, and exposed as indicated in Section N-1.4.4.2. Normalization shall be as specified
in Sections N-1.8.3 and N-1.8.4, as applicable.
8.5.2 POE system components and materials
The evaluation of POE components that require exposure under pressure to ensure evaluation of all
normally wetted surfaces shall be performed according to Section 8.5.1.
For all other POE components and materials, samples for the testing shall be selected according to the
requirements of Sections N-1.2.3 and N-1.4.1. Extraction waters shall be selected according to
Section N-1.2.5. Samples shall be conditioned as indicated in Section N-1.4.3. Following conditioning, the
samples shall be exposed as indicated in Section N-1.4.4. Normalization shall be as specified in
Sections N-1.8.3 and N-1.8.4, as applicable.
Brine systems and brine system components (e.g., brine tanks, salt grids float valves) of POE systems shall
not require extraction testing.
8.5.3 POE system media
Media used in POE systems submitted for evaluation separately from a complete POE system shall be
evaluated to the requirements of Section 7. Media used in POE systems submitted for evaluation as part
of a complete POE system shall be evaluated to the requirements of Section 8.5.1.
Evaluations of softener regeneration salts are performed under NSF/ANSI/CAN 60.
8.6 Chemical feeders and generators
Samples for the testing of chemical feeders and generators shall be selected according to the requirements
of Sections N-1.2.3 and N-1.4.1. Chemical feeder and generator samples shall be conditioned as indicated
in Section N-1.4.3. Following conditioning, the samples shall be exposed as indicated Section N-1.4.4.3.
Normalization shall be as specified in Section N-1.8.5.
8.6.1 Solid chemical feeders
Solid chemical feeders shall be evaluated only with the specific types of chemical formulations and forms
that are recommended by the feeder manufacturer. The specific chemical formulation shall also comply
with the requirements of NSF/ANSI/CAN 60. The manufacturer shall include information regarding the
specific chemical and form for which the product is certified and shall also include a warning in their
installation, maintenance and operating instructions or dataplate, regarding the dangers of misuse that
could result from using the wrong chemical or form, and whether or not such use would render the warranty
invalid.
60
8.6.2 Cu/Ag generator electrodes
In addition to the evaluation of the chemical generator under Section 8.6, the electrodes for Cu/Ag generator
shall be evaluated for potential nonsilver and noncopper contaminants in accordance with Section
N-1.4.4.3.3.
The normalized concentration of contaminants shall be calculated in accordance with Section N-1.8.5.1
and shall be no greater than their respective SPACs, determined in accordance with NSF/ANSI/CAN 600
(previously Annex A).
8.6.3 Chemical feeders and generators for building water systems
In addition to evaluating the contribution of chemical contaminants to drinking water, chemical feeders for
building water systems shall be evaluated for the control of the intentionally dosed chemical(s) to prevent
exceeding the manufacturers stated maximum use level (MUL), which shall not exceed the TAC of the
chemical in accordance with NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously Annex A):
— the device label shall identify the MUL for the dosage of the treatment chemical;
— a direct means of controlling chemical feed or generation shall be provided;
— the product use instructions shall identify a recommended monitoring frequency for measuring the
concentration of the dosed chemical(s) at each representative outlet, or designated sample point(s) as
indicated by the authority having jurisdiction; and
— product use instructions and literature referencing NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 shall specify that:
“NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 addresses health effects only and does not address the disinfection efficacy of
the product.”
8.7 Other mechanical devices, components, and materials
Samples for the testing of all other mechanical devices, components, and materials shall be selected
according to the requirements of Sections N-1.2.3 and N-1.4.1. Extraction waters shall be selected
according to Section N-1.2.5. Other mechanical product samples shall be conditioned as indicated in
Section N-1.4.3. Following conditioning, the samples shall be exposed as indicated in Section N-1.4.4.4
and Table N-1.9. Normalization shall be as specified in Sections N-1.8.3, N-1.8.4, and N-1.8.6, as
applicable.
8.7.1 Fire hydrants
The evaluation and normalization of fire hydrants shall be based off of the products wetted surfaces while
not in use for fire related uses and maintanence. For both wet barrel designs and base valve designs
(dry barrel), the evaluation should only include those materials in contact with water when valve(s) are
closed.
The following table is a generic listing of the types of devices covered in this section of the Standard. This
table is not intended to be a complete list of all types of mechanical devices. Inclusion of a product does
not indicate either a use endorsement of the product or an automatic acceptance under the provisions of
this Standard.
61
Table 8.1
Examples of mechanical devices
chemical feeders
— dry feeders (e.g., pellet droppers) switches and sensors
(e.g., water level, pressure, temperature, pH)
pressure gas injection systems pumps
valves and related fittings
vacuum injection systems fire hydrants
(transmission / distribution system)
disinfection / generators treatment devices used in water treatment facilities
— chlorine dioxide (excludes point-of-use (POU) devices)
— hypochlorite — aeration technologies
— ozone — clarifiers
— ultraviolet — electrodialysis technologies
electrical wire — microfiltration technologies
(e.g., submersible well pump wire) — mixers
— point-of-entry (POE) drinking water treatment
unit systems
— reverse osmosis technologies
pumps
— screens
— strainers
— ultrafiltration technologies
in-line devices – building distribution system
— backflow preventers — meter stops
— building valves — pressure regulators
— check valves — pressure tanks
— compression fittings — service saddles
— corporation stops — strainers
— curb stops — valves and fittings
— expansion tanks — manifolds
— meter couplings — water meters
in-line devices specifically excluded
— boiler feed valves
— drilling and tapping machines
— temperature and pressure relief valves
— valves with hose thread outlets
— water meter test benches
example POE drinking water treatment systems for evaluation under this Standard
— water softeners
— iron filters
— whole house/building mechanical sediment filters
— whole house/building GAC chlorine reduction filters
— whole house UV systems
example drinking water treatment units that shall not be evaluated as POE under this Standard
— faucet mount filters
— plumbed-in to separate tap
— pour-through pitchers
— refrigerator filters
62
9 Mechanical plumbing devices

9.1 Coverage
This section covers mechanical plumbing devices, components, and materials that are typically installed
within the last liter of the distribution system (endpoint devices) and are intended to dispense water for
human ingestion. In-line devices are excluded from this section. POU and POE water treatment devices
are excluded.
9.1.1 Endpoint devices specifically included in the coverage of this section are:
— remote chillers;
— lavatory faucets (e.g., centersets, widespread, mini-spread, and basin cocks), except as exempted
in Section 9.1.2;
— bar faucets;
— kitchen faucets (e.g., top mounts and wall mounts);
— hot and cold water dispensers;
— drinking fountains, drinking fountain bubblers, and water coolers;
— glass fillers;
— residential refrigerator ice makers;
— flexible plumbing connectors and flexible risers intended for potable water applications;
— supply stops and endpoint control valves; and
— commercial kitchen devices (see Section 9.2.3), limited to the following:
— pot and kettle fillers (see Section 9.2.7);

— devices with extended standpipes or risers (see Section 9.2.5); and
— prerinse assemblies that include an auxiliary spout or other outlet.
NOTE 1 — Only the commercial kitchen devices listed above shall be evaluated using the 18.9 L
(5 gal) normalization.
NOTE 2 — The base device to which the prerinse component is added shall be considered a commercial
kitchen device only if it meets the definition of either a pot and kettle filler (see Section 9.2.7) or a device
with extended standpipes or risers (see Section 9.2.5).
9.1.2 Endpoint devices specifically exempted from the coverage of this section are:
— bath and shower valves, shower heads of all types, and Roman tub valves;
— all drains;
— backflow prevention devices;
— flexible plumbing connectors and flexible risers not intended for potable water applications
(e.g., washing machines, dishwashers, etc.);
63
— prerinse assemblies that do not include an auxiliary spout or other outlet; and
— all endpoint devices that are not specifically intended to dispense water for human consumption,
for example:
— utility, laundry, laboratory, bidet, and shampoo faucets;

— faucets with a hose thread spout end or with a quick disconnect end;
— faucets that are self-closing or metering;
— electronically activated nonkitchen faucets; or
— hand wash stations.
9.1.3 Endpoint devices that are exempted from the scope of this section shall be permitted to be
evaluated at the option of the manufacturer. With the exception of exempted prerinse assemblies, all
exempted devices shall be evaluated using the 1-L (0.26-gal) draw. Exempted prerinse assemblies shall
be evaluated using the 18.9-L (5-gal) draw.
9.2 Definitions
9.2.1 cold mix volume adjustment factor (CMV): The cold water volume of a device divided by the
total water volume of the device.
9.2.2 cold water volume: The volume of water contained within the portion of a device that is normally
contacted by cold water (from inlet to outlet) when the device is connected to hot and cold water supplies
under normal operating conditions. The volume excludes the volume of water contained within the portion
of the device that is normally contacted only by hot water.
9.2.3 commercial kitchen device: An endpoint device whose sole application is the delivery of water
for food preparation in commercial kitchens.
9.2.4 consumer-facing: The manner in which a product label feature is experienced, directed, or seen
by a customer.
9.2.5 endpoint device: A single device typically installed within the last 1 L (0.26 gal) of the water
distribution system of a building.
9.2.6 extended standpipe or riser device: An endpoint device that includes a vertical component
having a minimum height of 41 cm (16 in) measured from the deck to the outlet of the endpoint device, and
whose sole application is the delivery of water for food preparation in commercial kitchens.
9.2.7 in-line device: A device (used to measure or control the flow of water) installed on a service line
or building distribution system downstream of the water main and upstream from endpoint devices.
9.2.8 pot and kettle filler: An endpoint device whose sole application is the delivery of water to fill pots
and kettles in commercial kitchens.
9.2.9 prerinse assembly: An endpoint device with a hose and spray whose application is water delivery
for the rinsing of tableware in commercial kitchens.
9.2.10 remote chiller: A device designed to deliver chilled water, typically installed in a remote location
to enhance aesthetics, that is connected to the spigot(s) / spout(s) by pipe / tubing and is generally installed
within the last 1 L (0.26 gal) of the water distribution system of a building.
9.2.11 water distribution system (building): A continuous system of piping, devices, and related
fittings, beginning after the water meter and water meter setting equipment, that is intended to convey
potable water in a building to points of usage.
64
9.3 Device, component, or material requirements
9.3.1 General
Devices, components, or materials shall be considered to have met the requirements of this section if at
least one of the following conditions is met:
— the devices, components, or materials covered under this section are tested and evaluated
according to procedures specified in Sections N-1.5 and N-1.8; or
— the devices, components, or materials meet the requirements of Section 9.3.2.
When all components or materials, or both, of a device meet the requirements of this section, the device
shall also meet the requirements of this section. When all materials of a component meet the requirements
of this section, the component shall also meet the requirements of this section.
9.3.2 Evaluation of devices, components, or materials tested to other sections of this Standard
Devices, components, or materials that have been tested to other sections of this Standard shall:
— be made of the same alloy(s), composition(s), or formula(s);
— have undergone analogous manufacturing processes;
— have been tested at a temperature that meets or exceeds the required exposure temperature in
Section N-1.5;
— have been conditioned for a period of time not more than 19 d and exposed for a period of time not
less than 16 h; and
— have the concentration(s) of the extracted contaminant(s) normalized to the requirements of

Section N-1.8.
9.3.3 Metallic contaminants
When a device or component is qualified through the separate testing of two or more components, the
normalized concentrations for each specific metallic contaminant from individual components shall be
summed. The total of the normalized metallic contaminant concentrations shall meet the requirements
of Section 9.5.
9.4 Exposure and normalization
Samples for testing shall be prepared and exposed, and the extractant water analyzed as required in
Section N-1.5. The number of samples tested shall be determined as outlined in Section N-1.5.
Exposure of endpoint samples, except for hot water dispenser samples, shall be performed at 23 ± 2 C
(73 ± 4 F).
For kitchen faucets with side spray components, the side spray component shall be prepared and exposed
simultaneously with the remainder of the device. At the option of the manufacturer, a separate exposure
may be performed for the side spray component.
The concentration of extracted contaminants shall be normalized to end use conditions according to the
normalization procedure outlined in Section N-1.8 for endpoint devices, components, and materials. All
endpoint devices, components, and materials other than commercial kitchen devices shall be evaluated
using the highest surface area-to-volume product as the test sample, and shall be normalized using the
65
1-L (0.26-gal) first draw. Commercial kitchen devices shall be evaluated using the highest surface
area-to-volume product as the test sample, and shall be normalized using the 18.9-L (5-gal) first draw.
9.5 Evaluation of normalized contaminant concentrations
9.5.1 Evaluation of lead
For endpoint devices other than commercial kitchen devices, supply stops, flexible plumbing connectors,
and miscellaneous components, the lead test statistic Q shall not exceed 5 μg when normalized for the
1-L (0.26-gal) first draw sample. For commercial kitchen devices, the lead test statistic Q shall not exceed
5 μg when normalized for the 18.9-L (5-gal) first draw sample. For supply stops, flexible plumbing
connectors, and miscellaneous components, the lead test statistic Q shall not exceed 3 μg when normalized
for the 1-L (0.26-gal) first draw sample.
For kitchen faucets that have been exposed simultaneously with the side spray component, the lead test
statistic Q value for the entire assembly shall not exceed 5 μg. When the kitchen faucet and the side spray
component have been exposed separately, the lead test statistic Q value for the faucet and side spray shall
be added and shall not exceed 5 μg.
9.5.1.1 Optional lower lead requirements
The following are optional evaluation criteria available for endpoint devices to demonstrate compliance with
a lower lead leaching criteria. Product shall also comply with the full requirements of NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 to
be deemed compliant to this section.
9.5.1.1.1 Evaluation requirements
For endpoint devices other than supply stops, flexible plumbing connectors, and miscellaneous
components, the test statistics Q or R calculated in accordance with Section N-1.8.9 shall not exceed 1 µg.
For supply stops, flexible plumbing connectors, and miscellaneous components, the lead test statistic Q
shall not exceed 0.5 µg.
9.5.1.1.2 Product labeling requirements
Attested compliance of product to the lower lead leaching criteria of this section shall be noted in the
certification listing. Consumer-facing product packaging or labeling shall also indicate this compliance by
identifying the standard and Q level attested according to Section 9.5.1.1.1 (e.g., “NSF/ANSI/CAN 61:
Q ≤ 1” or “NSF/ANSI/CAN 61: Q ≤ 0.5”).
9.5.2 Evaluation of nonlead contaminants
For endpoint devices other than commercial kitchen devices, the normalized concentration of a nonlead
contaminant shall not exceed its SPAC (calculated in accordance with NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously
Annex A) when normalized for the 1-L (0.26-gal) first draw sample. For commercial kitchen devices, the
normalized concentration of a nonlead contaminant shall not exceed its SPAC when normalized for the
18.9-L (5-gal) first draw sample.
For kitchen faucets that have been exposed simultaneously with the side spray component, the normalized
concentration of a nonlead metal contaminant for the entire assembly shall not exceed its SPAC. When the
kitchen faucet and the side spray component have been exposed separately, the normalized concentration
of a nonlead metal contaminant for the faucet and side spray shall be added and shall not exceed its SPAC.
66
10 Instructions and information

When product literature, instructions, or information for a POE drinking water treatment unit system shows
conformance with the materials safety requirements of this Standard as attested by a certification agency,
and when the POE treatment system is not likewise certified by that same agency for drinking water
contaminant reduction performances, such literature, instructions, and information shall state in comparable
proximity and with comparable prominence either:
— the name of the entity that has tested and substantiated the claimed contaminant reduction
performances for that water treatment product; or
— that the product is not certified for contaminant reduction performance by the certification agency.
The following is an example of an accepted option:
Point-of-Entry System Tested and Certified by [Name of Certifier]

Certifier’s under NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 for Materials Safety Requirements Only.
Mark Not Certified for Contaminant Reductions or Structural Integrity by
[Name of Certifier]
67
Normative Annex 1
(formerly Annex B)
Product / material evaluation
N-1.1 Background
Products / materials to be evaluated shall be prepared and exposed, and the extraction medium (e.g., water
or chemical) analyzed, as described in this annex. Examples of products / materials covered by this annex
are shown in Table N-1.1.
Table N-1.2 in this annex outlines the various preparation and exposure methods for the products /
materials covered by the annex.
The analytical methods included are based on contaminants that are likely to be present when established
methods of production are used and the materials are derived from known sources. Modifications to the
analytical procedures shall be permitted when products / materials are created with alternate methods or
have originated from alternate sources.
N-1.2 General evaluation requirements

N-1.2.1 General
The requirements described in this section are general requirements and apply to all products / materials
covered by NSF/ANSI/CAN 61, Annex N-1. Sections N-1.3 to N-1.5 describe specific preparation,
conditioning, and exposure sequences unique to individual product/material categories.
N-1.2.2 Quality assurance (QA) and quality control (QC) and safety
The methods included in Sections N-1.3 to N-1.5 have been written for trained chemical laboratory
personnel. Appropriate QA procedures and safety precautions shall be followed.
N-1.2.3 Samples
N-1.2.3.1 Material evaluation
A representative sample of the material (in either material sample or finished product form) shall be
exposed.
N-1.2.3.2 Finished product evaluation
— samples of the finished product (e.g., pipe, fitting, or device) shall be exposed except in the
following specific instances:
— concrete cylinders, cubes, or other concrete surrogate samples shall be permitted to be

evaluated on behalf of concrete lined pipes and other concrete-based products;
— coatings, applied to an appropriate substrate, shall be permitted to be evaluated on behalf of

products whose entire water contact surface is covered by the coating; and
69
— finished products shall be permitted to be evaluated using material samples if finished product
evaluation is impractical for one or more of the following reasons:
— an internal volume greater than 20 L (5.3 gal);

— a weight greater than 34 kg (75 lb); or
— in situ manufacture of the finished product.
Material samples shall be permitted to be evaluated on behalf of a finished product if, and only if, no
chemical or physical difference exists between the material sample and the material as represented in the
finished product. All material samples shall be produced using all the same manufacturing processes as
the finished product.
N-1.2.4 Washing
To remove any extraneous debris or contamination that occurred during shipping and handling, samples
shall be rinsed with cold tap water prior to testing, followed by a rinse with reagent water meeting the
requirements of Section N-1.9.2.1, unless the manufacturer's instructions direct otherwise. If the exterior of
a product is exposed, any printed markings (e.g., ink markings) shall be removed.
N-1.2.5 Extraction waters
Samples shall be exposed, based on a formulation review and determination of the most severe
condition(s), to the required extraction waters as detailed in Table N-1.3, except for mechanical plumbing
devices (see Section N-1.5.5). The characteristics and preparation of the waters are described in Section
N-1.9.
The test water formulations as provided in Section N-1.9 shall be used without the addition of free available
chlorine when testing high flow devices (or their components) exclusively used at public water treatment
facilities and typically installed prior to chlorination.
NOTE — Some materials used in these devices may be damaged by chlorine and test waters that include
chlorine would not be representative of field use conditions for this use type.
N-1.2.5.1 Exceptions
The manufacturer shall have the option specifically to request a change in the extraction water used, based
on the intended application or the materials used in the device / product, provided that the manufacturer’s
use instructions indicate the use limitations.
N-1.2.5.2 Mechanical devices used in contact with drinking water treatment chemicals
These devices and materials shall be exposed to the chemicals and chemical mixtures that have been
specified by the manufacturer.
N-1.2.6 Product exposure
Samples shall be evaluated either "in-the-product / device” or in an exposure vessel.
N-1.2.6.1 Exposure in the product / device
When practical, products / devices shall be evaluated so that only the (exposed) wetted surface is exposed
to extraction medium.
70
N-1.2.6.2 Exposure in vessels
Samples that are not evaluated as described in Section N-1.2.6.1 shall be exposed to the extraction medium
in containers composed of a material that is inert to the exposure water and with polytetrafluoroethylene
(PTFE) lined lids, with no headspace.
Products exposed in vessels shall be exposed so that the surface area-to-volume ratio described in the
appropriate section (N-1.3 to N-1.5) shall be maintained.
N-1.2.6.3 Residual vinyl chloride monomer (RVCM)
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) pipe products / materials shall be
evaluated for RVCM. RVCM shall be determined in the product wall, rather than by extraction, in
accordance with Section N-1.7.
N-1.2.7 Material exposure
Materials shall be exposed according to the protocol outlined for the materials' specified end use(s). If a
material is intended for use in the manufacture of products covered under more than one section of this
Standard, the most stringent exposure condition shall be followed (e.g., temperature or surface area-to-
volume ratio). Materials intended to be processed by more than one method (e.g., injection molding,
extrusion, or stamping) shall be tested in each of the processed forms.
N-1.2.7.1 Exposure of a material sample
A materials manufacturer shall have the option to request that a material be tested as a material sample
(e.g., plaque, sheet) if, and only if, there is no chemical or physical difference in the material characteristics
between the material sample and the material as it is used in covered applications. If the material is intended
to be used only for the manufacture of products falling under the scope of a single section of this Standard,
the material shall be exposed under the conditions set forth in the corresponding section of this annex. The
normalized contaminant concentrations shall meet the requirements of NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously
Annex A).
N-1.2.7.2 Exposure in product form
A materials manufacturer shall have the option to request that a material be tested in the form of a finished
product according to the protocol set forth in the appropriate section(s) of this annex.
N-1.2.7.3 Surface area-to-volume ratio (s/v)
When a material is tested in the form of a material sample or in product form, the dimensions of the material
or the product sample tested, and the extraction medium volume, shall be recorded and the laboratory
tested surface area-to-volume ratio calculated. When necessary, laboratory extraction results shall be
adjusted to reflect the difference between laboratory and field surface-to-area volume ratios.
N-1.2.8 Exposure conditions
Exposure begins immediately after washing or the appropriate conditioning.
N-1.2.8.1 Control samples
Exposure controls shall be prepared using the same extraction water and in the same manner as product
samples, but no product shall be added. Any uncoated substrate or other nonproduct components or
materials of test assemblies shall be included. Exposure controls shall be processed with all samples.
71
The control samples shall be evaluated for all target analysis as the product samples. The results for the
control samples analysis shall be subtracted from the results for the correponding product sample analysis
prior to normalization.
N-1.2.8.2 Sequential exposure
Tests for evaluation shall be conducted using a sequential exposure procedure. There shall be no
significant time interval between exposures (decant, discard, fill, continue exposure). The products shall be
exposed depending on the intended end use application, as described in the appropriate section
(N-1.3 to N-1.5). Analyses shall be performed only on the final extraction medium, unless otherwise noted.
N-1.3 Joining and sealing materials

N-1.3.1 Sample requirements
Test samples of joining and sealing materials shall be prepared so that, upon exposure, a minimum surface
area-to-volume ratio of 15 cm2/L (8.8 in2/gal) is obtained. Materials used at higher surface-to-volume ratios
in the field shall be exposed at or above the actual use ratio. Test samples for the various types of joining
and sealing materials are described in Table N-1.4.
N-1.3.2 Preparation
Samples shall be prepared so that the entire surface to be exposed is covered by extraction water. Products
(as appropriate) shall be applied to a glass panel in a manner consistent with the manufacturer's published
instructions. Products requiring a reactive substrate (i.e., where glass is inappropriate), shall be applied to
an appropriate alternate substrate.
N-1.3.2.1 Gasket materials
Gasket materials shall be cut to the appropriate size as described in Section N-1.3.1.
N-1.3.2.2 Caulks, greases, lubricants, and sealants
Caulks, greases, lubricants, and sealants shall be applied to a glass panel in such a manner that an even
film, consistent with end use, is exposed and the surface area-to-volume ratio described in Section N-1.3.1
is maintained. The slides shall be allowed to air dry or cure according to the manufacturer's published
instructions.
N-1.3.2.3 Adhesives and cements
N-1.3.2.3.1 Adhesives and cements intended for joining pipe and fittings shall be prepared as pipe and
fittings joints assembled in accordance with the manufacturer’s use instructions. The joints shall be
produced using 1/2-in nominal diameter pipe (or tubing) and fittings, or the minimum size specified by the
manufacturer, if that size is greater. Unless the manufacturer’s use instructions state otherwise, PVC pipe
and fitting joints shall be assembled per ASTM D2855 5 and CPVC pipe and fitting joints assembled per
Appendix XI of ASTM F493.5 If the manufacturer’s use instructions recommend the use of a primer, testing
shall incorporate the use of a primer. Unless the manufacturer’s use instructions state otherwise, joints shall
be allowed to air cure for 48 ± 2 h at room temperature prior to washing, conditioning, and exposure
in-product.
N-1.3.2.3.2 Adhesives and cements not intended for joining pipes and fittings shall be prepared in a
manner consistent with the manufacturer’s use instructions. These products shall be applied to glass panels
(or the manufacturer’s intended substrate) so that an even film, consistent with end use, is exposed at a
field surface area-to-volume ratio greater than or equal to that of a typical installation. Unless the
72
manufacturer’s use instructions indicate otherwise, the slides shall be allowed to air cure for 48 ± 2 h at
room temperature prior to washing, conditioning, and exposure in-vessel.
N-1.3.2.4 Solders
These products shall be prepared by placing the solder in a ceramic combustion boat (96 × 12 × 10 mm).
The amount of solder used shall be sufficient to cover the bottom of the boat. The boat (with solder) shall
then be placed in a muffle furnace that has been set to a temperature hot enough to melt the solder within
2 min). The boat shall be allowed to cool and the solder piece removed.
N-1.3.2.5 Fluxes
Fluxes shall be prepared by applying a thin film to a copper sheet of the appropriate size as described in
Section N-1.3.1. The copper sheet shall then be placed on a hot plate that has been heated to 300 C
(572 F) ± 15 °C. The copper sheet (with flux) shall be allowed to heat for 90 ± 5 s. The copper sheet shall
be allowed to cool prior to exposure.
NOTE — Placement of aluminum foil over the hot plate is recommended to minimize the potential for
contamination during sample preparation. The foil should be placed carefully to not create creases or folds
that might interfere with the heat transfer.
N-1.3.3 Conditioning for joining and sealing materials intended for joining pipe and fittings
After washing (see Section N-1.2.4), and prior to exposure, product / material samples shall be conditioned
to simulate pre-use flushing and disinfection procedures. The samples shall be exposed for evaluation
immediately after conditioning. Joining and sealing materials shall be conditioned at the temperature
appropriate for the intended end use. The product samples shall be conditioned in accordance with
Section 4.5.5 for single time point evaluations and Section 4.5.7 for multiple time point evaluations.
N-1.3.4 Conditioning for all other joining and sealing materials
After preparation, the test samples shall be washed as described in Section N-1.2.4.
N-1.3.5 Exposure for joining and sealing materials intended for joining pipe and fittings
Exposure shall begin immediately after conditioning. The samples shall be exposed to the appropriate
extraction water according to Section N-1.2.5, based on end use or application. The product samples shall
be exposed in accordance with Section 4.5.6 for single time point evaluations or in accordance with
Section 4.5.7 for multiple time point evaluations. The extraction water shall be collected for analysis as
described in Section N-1.6.
N-1.3.6 Exposure for all other joining and sealing materials
After conditioning, these materials shall be exposed in the appropriate extraction water (see Section
N-1.2.5) in accordance with the intended end use application as described below. The extraction water
samples shall be collected as described in Section N-1.6.
N-1.3.6.1 Cold application
Products to be evaluated for cold applications shall be exposed using the sequence in Table N-1.5.
N-1.3.6.2 Hot application samples
Products to be evaluated for hot applications shall be exposed using the sequence in Table N-1.6.
73
N-1.3.7 Multiple time point protocol
exposure level and Day 90 concentration shall meet the total allowable concentration (TAC) / single product
allowable concentration (SPAC) respectively. When extrapolation is used, the relationship between
contaminant concentration and time shall be determined and plotted using a minimum of five data points.
products shall be exposed at the selected application temperature (e.g., 23 ± 2 °C; 60 ± 2 °C; 82 ± 2 °C)
for the full duration of the exposure. Extraction water shall be collected for analysis at a minimum of two
time points: after Day 1 and after the final exposure terminating on Day 90. The exposure water shall be
changed at least weekly during the interval between the initial and final exposure and on at least 4 d during
the final week of exposure.
N-1.4 Mechanical devices

N-1.4.1 Samples
Samples shall consist of the entire device, portion(s) / component(s) of the device, or a specimen of the
material(s). The manufacturer shall have the option to request that the samples represent a product line of
varying sizes, as described below. When it is necessary to calculate normalization factor(s), the wetted
exposed surface area of the sample shall be calculated and recorded prior to testing.
N-1.4.1.1 Entire device
A single device shall represent a product line of varying sizes when:

— materials have undergone the same manufacturing process (e.g., casting or extrusion);
— designs are analogous; and
— it has the greatest exposed wetted surface area-to-volume ratio.
The wetted surface area-to-volume ratio shall be calculated as SAF /VF(static), with SAF equal to the surface
area exposed in the field, and VF(static) equal to the volume of water to which the device is exposed under
the static condition. The surface area-to-volume ratio for a device with an internal volume of less than
1 L (0.26 gal) shall be calculated with the assumption that VF(static) is equal to 1 L (0.26 gal).
NOTE 1 — For a product line of varying sizes with volumes of less than 1 L (0.26 gal), the device with the
largest wetted surface area will be the device with the greatest exposed surface area-to-volume ratio.
NOTE 2 — Design differences such as external and internal threaded outlets shall not be considered
analogous.
NOTE 3 — For internal threaded products, SAF shall be equal to the normally wetted surface area of the
product including 25% of the threaded area(s). The capacity of the product shall be equal to the volume of
74
water contacted by the wetted surface area of the product including the volume contained within 25% of the
threaded area(s). When the product capacity is less than 1 L (0.26 gal), VF(static) shall equal 1 L (0.26 gal).
When the product capacity is equal to or greater than 1 L (0.26 gal), VF(static) shall be equal to the capacity.
N-1.4.1.2 Component
A component shall represent a product line of varying sizes when:

— materials have undergone the same manufacturing process, e.g., casting or extrusion;
— designs are analogous; and
— it has the greatest exposed wetted surface area-to-volume ratio.
The wetted surface area-to-volume ratio shall be calculated as SAF /VF(static), with SAF equal to the surface
area exposed in the field, and VF(static) equal to the volume of water to which the component is exposed
under the static condition. The surface area-to-volume ratio for a component with an internal volume of less
than 1 L (0.26 gal) shall be calculated with the assumption that VF(static) is equal to 1 L (0.26 gal).
NOTE 1 — For a product line of varying sizes with volumes of less than 1 L (0.26 gal), the component with
the largest wetted surface area will be the component with the greatest exposed surface area-to-volume ratio.
NOTE 2 — Design differences such as external and internal threaded outlets shall not be considered
analogous.
N-1.4.1.3 Material
The material shall be representative of that used in the component or device. Materials shall be evaluated
using a minimum surface area-to-volume ratio of 50 cm2/L.
N-1.4.2 Sample preparation
Prior to conditioning and exposure, the samples shall be washed as described in Section N-1.2.4, unless
the manufacturer's instructions direct otherwise. When required, the device shall be properly prepared per
the manufacturer's recommendations.
N-1.4.2.1 To the extent possible, test samples shall be prepared so that the laboratory surface area-to-
volume ratio is equal to or greater than the surface area-to-volume ratio at which the product is intended to
be used in the field. When the use of test assemblies is required, they shall be constructed in a manner as
to not cover an otherwise wetted surface. Test assembly end closures that marginally increase the volume
of the test assembly beyond the volume at which the product is intended to be used in the field may be
used. Components and materials added to the test sample to form the test assembly shall be present in
the control sample.
N-1.4.2.2 Metal and metal-containing product samples that are connected to pipe or tubing products
under normal installation conditions shall be attached to lengths of pipe or tubing of the appropriate nominal
diameter for the extraction test. When preparing a test sample in this manner, the assembly shall be
designed such that the volume of the test sample plus the attached pipe or tubing is equal to the VF(static) for
the product when the unit volume exceeds 1 L. If the unit volume of the product being tested is less than
1 L, the attached pipe volume combined with the product volume shall be equal to 1 L (± 5%) for the test
sample.
75
When the test sample contains internal threaded outlets, 75% of the threaded surface area(s) shall be
covered by insertion of a threaded component of the appropriate diameter to produce a watertight seal.
The threaded component shall also be present in the control sample.
Assemblies should be made of relatively inert materials and designed in a manner that eliminates or
minimizes the occurence of the same contaminant being present in the control and the test sample
whenever possible. The control shall be made of the same material and exposed at the same surface area
to volume ratio as the test sample.
Threaded products shall be assembled by threading a pipe material which has been cut to an appropriate
length equal to the VF(static). For products being tested that are less than 1 liter, the attached pipe volume
combined with the product volume shall be equal to 1 L (± 5%) for the test sample. When preparing a
product which has a soldered joint, the control shall be prepared using the same solder and extension
material as the test sample. Products with quick connect fitting ends are most easily assembled by attaching
polyethylene tubing, cut to the appropriate length and diameter using the same polyethylene tubing for the
control.
Nonmetal product samples that are connected to pipe or tubing products under normal installation
conditions may be prepared as described for metal and metal-containing product samples. Nonmetal
containing products may also be prepared so that the laboratory surface area-to-volume ratio is equal to
(± 5%) or greater than the surface area-to-volume ratio at which the product is intended to be used in the
field.
Components (e.g., gaskets or O-rings) of a mechanical device that are wetted under normal operating
pressures but are not wetted under the conditions of a static exposure shall be tested separately from the
assembly in an “in vessel” exposure. The laboratory surface area for the “in vessel” exposure shall be, at a
minimum, ten-fold greater than the wetted surface area of the product to ensure that the reporting level of
the analysis, when normalized, is equal to or less than the pass/fail criteria for all contaminants. The result
of the “in vessel” exposure shall then be normalized to the applicable surface area of the product.
N-1.4.3 Conditioning
Conditioning shall be conducted either in the device or in a vessel. Table N-1.7 provides examples of typical
exposures for the various products covered by this section. The test samples shall be conditioned in
accordance with Section 4.5.5 for single time point evaluations and Section 4.5.7 for multiple time point
evaluations. Chemical feeders and generators are conditioned per manufacturer’s instructions.
N-1.4.4 Exposure
N-1.4.4.1 In-line device samples
After conditioning, the samples shall be exposed as described in Table N-1.7 in the appropriate extraction
media (Section N-1.2.5). Samples shall be exposed in accordance with Section 4.5.6 for single time point
evaluations and Section 4.5.7 for multiple time point evaluations. The extraction water shall be collected for
analysis as described in Section N-1.6.
N-1.4.4.1.1 Manifolds with a single water chamber are exposed as per Section N-1.4.4.1.
N-1.4.4.1.2 Dual chamber manifolds with two noncontiguous water chambers are functionally two
separate devices. Dual chamber style manifolds may be exposed at two different temperatures, such that
the cold water chamber is exposed at 23 °C (73 °F) and the hot water chamber is separately exposed at
the appropriate hot water temperature.
N-1.4.4.1.3 For thermal expansion tanks, the exposure shall be at the selected temperature, either
60 ± 2 C (140 ± 4 F) or 82 ± 2 C (180 ± 4 F) unless the manufacturer’s use instructions restrict installation
of the tank to the cold water side of the water heater. For cold-side restricted thermal expansion tanks,
76
the exposure water shall be preheated to 38 ± 2 C (100 ± 4 F) prior to initiating each of the exposures in
Table N-1.8 and the product exposure allowed to cool to 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F) over the course of the
exposure period.
NOTE — Studies have shown that the maximum temperature observed in thermal expansion tanks placed
on the cold water side of water heaters is approximately 38 C (100 ºF) and that the temperature declines
during the static periods that follow.
N-1.4.4.2 POE systems and system components requiring exposure under pressure
N-1.4.4.2.1 The system or component(s) of a system shall be installed and flushed in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions using the exposure water specified in Section N-1.2.5 at an initial inlet static
pressure of 340 kPa (50 psig).
N-1.4.4.2.2 After flushing, the system or component(s) shall be conditioned in accordance with the times
and temperatures specified in Section N-1.4.3 and exposed in accordance with the times and temperatures
specified in Section N-1.4.4.1, each using the exposure water specified in Section N-1.2.5 at an initial inlet
static pressure of 340 kPa (50 psig).
N-1.4.4.2.3 At the conclusion of the third exposure period, the sample volume shall be collected. The
entire unit volume shall be collected in a suitable collection vessel, and subsamples for analysis obtained
from this volume. When additional extraction water is needed to complete all analyses, additional samples
shall be exposed.
N-1.4.4.2.4 Systems with adsorptive or absorptive media shall be tested with and without the media.
Testing without media shall include removal of the adsorptive or absorptive media from the system, as well
as the removal of any nonmedia materials or ingredients that cannot be dissociated from the media or
materials that would be released into the effluent of the system in the absence of the physical barrier
provided by the media.
NOTE — An example is the binder used to produce carbon blocks. Normalization for changes in wetted
surface area from the normal configuration should be taken into account. Carbon block end caps, for example,
will have more wetted surface area exposed without the carbon block attached, and an appropriate adjustment
in the end caps included in the exposure shall be made .
When these units are evaluated with the media removed, the evaluation shall be as specified in
Sections N-1.4.4.2.1 through N-1.4.4.2.3. When these units are evaluated with the media, the evaluation
shall be as specified in Section 7.5.5.4.
N-1.4.4.3 Chemical feeder and generator exposure
N-1.4.4.3.1 Complete devices
Complete devices shall be operated per manufacturer’s instructions until target dose levels are achieved.
The unit is then turned off for a minimum of a 4 h period at 23 ± 2 °C (73 ± 4 °F). If it will take longer than
1 h to collect a volume of chemical equivalent to the system volume, it is acceptable to reduce the 4 h
exposure period so that the entire hold time and collection time is equivalent to 5 h. If it will take longer than
4 h to collect the system volume, the unit shall be turned off for a minimum of a 1 h period prior to collection
of the entire system volume. For devices that normally operate at lower or higher temperatures, the
exposure shall be at the normal operating temperature. The extractant shall be collected in a vessel
appropriate for shipping and storage. For chemical feeders, a sample of the chemical prior to feeding shall
be collected if possible. For chemical generators, samples of the raw precursor chemicals if applicable shall
be collected. For all devices where the extractant is a mixture of water and the chemical(s), a sample of the
influent water shall be collected and preserved as described in Section N-1.6. The extractant shall be
prepared in accordance with the preparation methods in NSF/ANSI/CAN 60. Samples of the chemicals
prior to feeding samples of raw materials, and influent water samples, shall be analyzed for background
77
levels of contaminants only if, after normalization, the concentration of a contaminant(s) exceeds the SPAC
(see Section N-1.8.5).
N-1.4.4.3.2 Components of chemical feeders and generators exposure
The samples shall be exposed to the appropriate drinking water treatment chemical or chemical mixture for
a minimum of 4 h (or for a longer period as recommended by the manufacturer) at 23 ± 2 °C (73 ± 4 °F).
For devices that normally operate at lower or higher temperatures, the exposure shall be at the normal
operating temperature. The extractant shall be collected in a vessel appropriate for shipping and storage.
For chemical feeder component, a sample of the chemical prior to feeding shall be collected if possible. For
chemical generators, samples of the raw precursor chemicals if applicable shall be collected. For all devices
where the extractant is a mixture of water and the chemical(s), a sample of the influent water shall be
collected and preserved as described in Section N-1.6. The extractant shall be prepared in accordance with
the preparation methods in NSF/ANSI/CAN 60. Samples of the chemicals prior to feeding samples of raw
materials, and influent water samples, shall be analyzed for background levels of contaminants only if, after
normalization, the concentration of a contaminant(s) exceeds the SPAC (see Section N-1.8.5).
N-1.4.4.3.3 Cu/Ag generator electrodes
In addition to the evaluation of the chemical generator under Section N-1.4.4.3.1, the electrodes for a Cu/Ag
generator shall be evaluated for potential nonsilver and noncopper contaminants.
N-1.4.4.3.3.1 Sampling
It is acceptable to obtain samples from components by various methods, such as drilling, turning, sawing,
or milling. Where possible, blend material from a minimum of three areas taken at random locations across
the electrode, so as to obtain a sample that is representative of the properties of the entire unit. With the
exception of very large parts, test pieces should be drilled or sawn completely through in order to avoid
over- or underrepresentation of the center portion.
N-1.4.4.3.3.2 Sample preparation
Dissolve a minimum of 1.0 g of sample in accordance with US EPA SW-84649 Method 3050B, Method
3052, or equivalent. It is permissible to employ other applicable sample preparation methods, provided that
adequate performance is demonstrated for the analytes and matrices of interest.
Analysis of the dissolved sample for the analytes of interest shall be performed in accordance with
Section 7.
N-1.4.4.4 Other mechanical devices
After conditioning, other mechanical devices shall be exposed using the appropriate extraction media
(see Section N-1.2.5) as indicated in Table N-1.7. Samples shall be exposed in accordance with Section
4.5.6 for single time point evaluations and Section 4.5.7 for multiple time point evaluations with the
exception of using Table N-1.9 in lieu of Table 4.2. The extraction water shall be collected for analysis as
described in Section N-1.6.
exposure level and Day 90 concentration shall meet the TAC/SPAC respectively. When extrapolation is
78
used, the relationship between contaminant concentration and time shall be determined and plotted using
a minimum of five data points.
products shall be exposed at the selected application temperature (e.g., 23 ± 2 oC; 60 ± 2 oC; 82 ± 2 oC) for
the full duration of the exposure. Extraction water shall be collected for analysis at a minimum of two time
points: after Day 1 and after the final exposure terminating on Day 90. The exposure water shall be changed
at least weekly during the interval between the initial and final exposure and on at least 4 d during the final
week of exposure
N-1.5 Mechanical plumbing devices

N-1.5.1 Samples
Samples shall consist of the entire device, portion(s) / component(s) of the device, or a specimen of the
materials(s) of the device. The samples shall be permitted to represent a product line of varying sizes, as
described in Sections N-1.5.1.1 and N-1.5.1.2. When it is necessary to calculate normalization factor(s),
the wetted surface area of the sample shall be determined. When materials and components are tested
using in-vessel exposure, the actual wetted surface area and the volume of water in the extraction vessel
shall be determined.
N-1.5.1.1 Device
A single device shall represent a product line of varying sizes when the following requirements are met:

— design and manufacturing processes are analogous; and
— it has the greatest wetted surface area-to-volume ratio.
The surface area-to-volume ratio for an endpoint device, other than a commercial kitchen device, shall be
calculated with the assumption that the device volume is 1 L (0.26 gal). The surface area-to-volume ratio
for a commercial kitchen device shall be calculated with the assumption that the device volume is
18.9 L (5 gal).
N-1.5.1.2 Component
A component shall represent a product line of varying sizes when the following requirements are met:

— design and manufacturing processes are analogous; and
— it has the greatest wetted surface area-to-volume ratio.
The surface area-to-volume ratio for a regular endpoint component shall be calculated with the assumption
that the component volume is 1 L (0.26 gal).
N-1.5.1.3 Material
The material shall be representative of that used in the component or device. Material samples not related
to a specific component or device can also be evaluated.
79
N-1.5.2 Washing
The device shall be flushed for 15 min with tap water under pressure, then rinsed with three volumes of
reagent water that meets the requirements of Section N-1.9.2. Alternate preparation of the device shall be
performed when required by published manufacturer's instructions. Components and materials shall be
washed according to Section N-1.2.4.
N-1.5.3 Conditioning
Conditioning of the sample shall be performed in the sample or in a vessel. Endpoint devices, components,
and materials shall be conditioned by rinsing with three volumes of extraction water (specified in
Section N-1.5.5) at room temperature 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F). The units or exposure vessels shall be filled
with extractant water and held until the start of the exposure sequence for a period not to exceed 72 h.
N-1.5.4 Exposure
After conditioning, the sample shall be exposed to extraction water according to the applicable scheme
detailed in Sections N-1.5.4.1 through N-1.5.4.3. Reflecting the sample's intended use, samples shall be
exposed to extraction waters at the specified temperatures for the entire duration of the exposure. Exposure
shall be limited to 23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F) except for instant hot water dispensers, in which case the
manufacturer's specified thermostat setting shall be used.
Evaluation of endpoint devices, components, and materials for contaminants other than lead shall require
exposure of at least one sample according to the timetable of Figure 1. The number of products to be tested
shall be specified by the manufacturer. When one sample is tested at a single time point, the normalized
contaminant concentrations from exposure on Day 19 shall be compared to their respective SPACs. If more
than one sample is tested at a single time point, the geometric mean of normalized contaminant
concentrations from exposure on Day 19 shall be compared to their respective SPACs.
Evaluation of endpoint devices, components and materials for the contaminant lead shall require exposure
of at least three devices (more if specified by the manufacturer), according to the timetable of Figure 1. It is
recommended that product lines thought to be marginally acceptable, and those that leach levels of lead
approaching the maximum allowable level, should be tested for more than the minimum number of
products. The rationale for selecting a number greater than three products is provided in Section N-1.8.9.
On Days 3, 4, 5, 10, 11, 12, 17, 18, and 19, the 16 h dwell extractant water shall be collected. The lead test
statistic Q shall be determined as described in Section N-1.8.9.
When additional extraction water is needed to complete all analyses, additional samples shall be exposed.
N-1.5.4.1 Exposure sequence for endpoint devices
The device shall be inverted and filled with extraction water and held according to Figure 1 during the
exposure sequence. Hot water dispensers shall be heated to operating temperature, then exposed following
the sequence in Figure 1 at the elevated temperature.
The final exposure water shall be collected and preserved in accordance with applicable analytical methods.
When tested at a single time point, only the contaminant levels present in the 16 h dwell samples shall be
used to evaluate the product's leaching characteristics.
For endpoint devices, the exposure sequence in Figure 1 shall be conducted and the Days 3, 4, 5, 10, 11,
12, 17, 18, and 19 lead dosages shall be determined.
N-1.5.4.2 Exposure sequence for components and materials
The exposure procedures provided in Section N-1.5.4.1 shall be followed. Samples shall be tested at a
surface area-to-volume ratio at least as high as the ratio that exists in the device.
80
N-1.5.5 Extraction water
The extraction water shall be prepared by combining:
— 25 mL of 0.4M sodium bicarbonate;
— chlorine stock solution per Section N-1.9.2.4;
— reagent water meeting the requirements of Section N-1.9.2.1 (make up to 1 L), and adjust pH as
needed using 0.1M HCl.
This water shall have a pH of 8.0 ± 0.5, alkalinity of 500 ± 25 ppm, dissolved inorganic carbon of
122 ± 5 ppm, and 2 ± 0.5 ppm of free available chlorine.
All exposure water that is being used to determine conformance to this Standard shall be prepared fresh
daily and stored in a closed container.
exposure level and Day 90 concentration shall meet the TAC/SPAC respectively. When extrapolation is
used, the relationship between contaminant concentration and time shall be determined and plotted using
a minimum of five data points.
products shall be exposed at 23 ± 2 °C with the except for instant hot water dispensers, in which case the
manufacturer’s specified thermostat setting shall be used. Extraction water shall be collected for analysis
at a minimum of two time points: after Day 1 and after the final exposure terminating on Day 90. The
exposure water shall be changed at least weekly during the interval between the initial and final exposure
and on at least 4 d during the final week of exposure.
N-1.6 Collection and preservation of extraction media after exposure

Immediately after the exposure period, the extraction media shall be poured into sample bottles previously
prepared as detailed in Table N-1.10 for storage until analysis. The procedures described in Table N-1.10
are based on collection methods included in Manual For The Certification of Laboratories Analyzing
Drinking Water (EPA-570/9-82-002) and Standard Methods For The Examination of Water and
Wastewater4 (most recent edition).
81
N-1.7 Analysis methods

N-1.7.1 General
This section is divided into five parts: metals, organics (other than RVCM and solvent), radionuclides,
RVCM, and solvents analyses. The specific analyses performed shall be formulation-dependent.
Each testing organization shall periodically review the analytical methods it uses to ensure that applicable
advances in analytical methodologies are instituted.
N-1.7.2 Definitions
N-1.7.2.1 identified compound with standard: A compound identification made based on the daily
analysis (initial or continuing calibration) of an authentic standard of an analyte. Retention time and mass
spectrum are used for qualitative determination of the analyte. A calibration curve is used for quantitative
determination of the analyte.
N-1.7.2.2 identified compound without standard: A compound identification based on mass spectral
matches between the analyte and mass spectral libraries (commercial or private), or on spectral
interpretation by a qualified chemist, or both. The quantitative determination is made through direct
correlation between the analyte response and the nearest internal standard response.
N-1.7.2.3 matrix spike: An aliquot of a sample matrix fortified with a known quantity of analyte.
N-1.7.2.4 method detection limit (MDL): As defined in 40 CFR Part 136,3 Appendix B, the minimum
concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the substance
concentration is greater than zero. The MDL is determined from analysis of a minimum of seven aliquots
of standard (known quantity of analyte in reagent matrix) at concentrations that are in the range of the
estimated detection limit.
N-1.7.2.5 method validation: Verification of an analytical procedure performed by determining the

method detection limit (see Section N-1.7.2.4).
N-1.7.2.6 reporting limit (RL): The lowest concentration of analyte that can be reliably reported.
N-1.7.2.7 unknown: An analyte for which an identification cannot be determined. Information on

chemical class, functional group(s), and chemical structure may be determined by spectral interpretation.
N-1.7.3 Metals analysis
Analyses for metals shall be performed, except as otherwise provided for herein, in accordance with
currently accepted US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Methods (see 40 CFR Part 141 3 and
Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA 600/4-79-0209). When no EPA Method is
provided, analyses shall be performed in accordance with Standard Methods for the Examination of Water
and Wastewater4 (most current edition). If neither of these two documents addresses the required
parameters and matrix, or if an alternate method is desired, method validation shall be completed prior to
the application of the method (see Section N-1.7.2.5).
N-1.7.4 Organics analysis
N-1.7.4.1 General requirements for analysis of organics
Analyses for organics shall be performed, except as otherwise provided for herein, in accordance with
currently accepted EPA Methods (see 40 CFR Part 1413 and Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and
Wastes, EPA 600/4-79-0209). When no EPA Method is provided, analyses shall be performed in
accordance with Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater 4 (most current edition).
82
If neither of these two documents addresses the required parameters and matrix, or if an alternate method
is desired, method validation shall be completed prior to the application of the method (see Section
N-1.7.2.5).
N-1.7.4.2 Gas chromatography / mass spectroscopy (GC/MS) analysis
N-1.7.4.2.1 General requirements for GC/MS analysis
The minimum instrument operation requirements for GC/MS analysis shall be in accordance with US EPA
Method 6259 (US EPA-600/4-84-053. Methods for Organic Chemical Analysis of Municipal and Industrial
Wastewater, June 1984) with the following modifications:
— the average chromatographic peak area of each internal standard in the calibration curve shall be
determined. The chromatographic peak area of each internal standard in the continuing calibration shall
be greater than 50% and not more than 200% of that average;
— while a continuing calibration check (CCC) is performed, concentrations of 10% of the target
compounds for each analysis (e.g., base/neutral, base/neutral/acid, or acid) shall be allowed to fall
outside the range of 70% to 130% (outlier) of the true value. None of the concentrations shall be allowed
to fall below 50% or above 200% of the true value. If a positive sample analyte result is identified for
any outlier, a second CCC shall be performed. If the second CCC determines the sample analyte result
no longer to be an outlier, the sample shall be reanalyzed. However, if the second CCC also determines
the analyte to be an outlier, a new calibration curve shall be determined and the sample shall be
reanalyzed;
— if commercially available mass spectral libraries are utilized, a minimum size of 100,000
compounds shall be required; and
— the testing laboratory shall report the compounds detected during GC/MS analysis as one of the
following:
— identified compound with standard (see Section N-1.7.2.1);

— identified compound without standard (see Section N-1.7.2.2); or
— unknown (see Section N-1.7.2.7).
N-1.7.4.2.2 Requirements for identified compounds with standards via GC/MS analysis
Contaminants that have been identified and quantified by comparison to authentic standards shall be
normalized in accordance with the requirements of this Standard (see Section N-1.8). The normalized
contaminant concentration shall be compared to the acceptable exposure concentration as determined in
accordance with NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously Annex A).
N-1.7.4.2.3 Requirements for identified compounds without standards via GC/MS analysis
Contaminants that have been identified and quantified by comparison to a known mass spectrum, or by
spectral interpretation by a qualified chemist, or both, shall be normalized in accordance with the
requirements of this Standard (see Section N-1.8). The normalized contaminant concentration shall be
compared to the acceptable exposure concentration as determined in accordance with NSF/ANSI/CAN 600
(previously Annex A). In addition, the product manufacturer shall assist the testing laboratory in the
identification of an authentic standard for the compound and an appropriate analytical method, if applicable,
so that confirmatory identification and quantification can be performed.
83
N-1.7.4.2.4 Requirements for unknowns via GC/MS analysis
Contaminants that are detected by GC/MS analysis, but are not identified and quantified against a known
mass spectrum or authentic standard, shall be evaluated as follows:
a) The product material formulation(s) shall be reviewed for potential identification of the unknown
contaminant(s) as an ingredient or byproduct.
b) The manufacturer shall be notified and requested to provide supporting information that enables
identification of the unknown contaminant(s).
c) Structure activity relationships (SAR) shall be utilized when sufficient structural identification of the
unknown contaminant(s) can be made.
d) Alternative methods of analysis that may identify the unknown contaminant(s) shall be considered.
Contaminants that can be identified after performing one or more of the above steps shall be normalized in
accordance with the requirements of this Standard (see Section N-1.8). The normalized contaminant
concentration shall be compared to the acceptable exposure concentration as determined in accordance
with NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously Annex A). In addition, the product manufacturer shall assist the testing
laboratory in the identification of an authentic standard for the compound and an appropriate analytical
method, if applicable, so that confirmatory identification and quantification can be performed.
Contaminants detected by GC/MS analysis for which no identification can be made after performing the
above steps shall not be considered in the determination of product compliance to this Standard. When
unknown contaminants are detected in the extractant water, the testing laboratory shall report the analytical
results to the product manufacturer.
NOTE — The product manufacturer should assist the testing laboratory in a continuing effort to identify the
unknown contaminant(s) until specific identification is achieved.
N-1.7.4.3 Polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbon (PNA) analysis
Analysis for polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons (PNAs) shall be in accordance with EPA Method 525.2
(US EPA-600/4-79-020,9 Methods for the Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, March 1983).
N-1.7.4.4 Phenol and minimally substituted phenols
Analysis for phenol and minimally substituted phenols shall be in accordance with EPA Method 420.2
(US EPA-600/4-79-020,9 Methods for the Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, March 1983). Analysis
for maximally substituted phenols shall be performed by GC/MS base/acid scan (see Section N-1.7.4.2).
N-1.7.4.5 Nitrosamine analysis
Analysis for N-nitrosodimethylamine, N-nitrosomethylethylamine, N-nitrosodiethylamine,

N-nitrosodi-n-propylamine, N-nitrosopyrrolidine, N-nitrosomorpholine, N-nitrosopiperidine, and
N-nitrosodi-n-butylamine shall be in accordance with US EPA Method 521 (US EPA-600/R-05/0549) or an
alternate validated method with equivalent sensitivity.
Analysis for N-nitrosodiphenylamine shall be performed in accordance with US EPA Method 521
(US EPA-600/R-05/0549) or in accordance with US EPA Method 625 (US EPA-600/4-84-0539), Methods
for Organic Chemical Analysis of Municipal and Industrial Wastewater, June 1984 as described in
Section N-1.7.4.2.1.
84
N-1.7.5 Radionuclides analysis
Analyses for radionuclides shall be performed in accordance with Prescribed Procedures for Measurement
of Radioactivity in Drinking Water, EPA-600/4-80-032.9 When no EPA Method is provided, analyses shall
be performed in accordance with Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater 4 (most
current edition). If neither of these two documents addresses the required parameters and matrix, or if an
alternate method is desired, method validation shall be completed prior to the application of the method
(see Section N-1.7.2.5).
N-1.7.5.1 Potassium-40 correction for gross beta
If the normalized concentration for gross beta exceeds the health effects evaluation criteria, analysis shall
be completed for the naturally occurring potassium-40 beta particle activity from the same or equivalent
sample used for the gross beta particle activity. As indicated in the Code of Federal Regulations
(CFR 40 § 141.26(b)(4)),15 the potassium-40 beta particle activity (pCi/L) is calculated by multiplying
elemental potassium concentrations (in mg/L) by a factor of 0.82. The gross beta particle and photon activity
attributable to potassium-40 is then subtracted from the total gross beta particle activity value. The
potassium-40 corrected gross beta particle and photon activity shall be compared against the health effects
evaluation criteria.
N-1.7.5.2 Requirements for gross beta speciation
When the potassium-40 corrected gross beta particle and photon activity exceeds a normalized
concentration of 15 pCi/L, the beta emitting radioisotopes shall be speciated. Speciation testing is required
for all radioisotopes at risk of exceeding the health effects evaluation criteria. Appendix I in US EPA
Implementation Guidance for Radionuclides (2002) details a list of radioisotopes and associated doses
(in pCi/L) to produce a 4 mrem/y dose.16 The US EPA Implementation Guidance for Radionuclides (2002)17
provides example calculations to determine the fractional contribution in mrem/yr dose for each speciated
radioisotope. The fractional contributions shall be summed for comparison to the health effects evaluation
criteria.
N-1.7.6 RVCM analysis
N-1.7.6.1 General requirements for RVCM analysis
This method covers the analysis of RVCM in PVC and CPVC potable water products using gas
chromatography (GC). Method sensitivity is 0.5 ppm (mg/kg) when analyzing 0.5 g of plastic material, using
flame ionization detector (FID).
N-1.7.6.2 Extraction of samples for RVCM analysis
PVC and CPVC products shall be evaluated for RVCM in the product wall. The RVCM concentration shall
be determined in the wall, rather than in the extraction water, because very low levels of vinyl chloride
cannot be as reliably detected in the extraction water.
15
Code of Federal Regulations, Monitoring Frequency and Compliance Requirements for Radionuclides in Community
Water Systems, Title 40, Section 141.26.
16 US EPA Implementation Guidance for Radionuclides, Appendices A – J, Appendix I Comparison of Derived Values
of Beta and Photon Emitters
17US EPA Implementation Guidance for Radionuclides, Section II-B.2 Violation/Compliance Determination of Gross
Beta and Photon Emitters
85
N-1.7.6.2.1 Sample preparation for RVCM analysis
PVC and CPVC samples shall be prepared as described in the following procedure. All samples shall be
prepared in duplicate.
a) Chop a section of PVC or CPVC product sample into coarse pieces.
b) Weigh 0.500 ± 0.005 g of chopped sample pieces into a 20-mL glass vial.
NOTE — The weights of the sample and the duplicate should not differ by more than 0.005 g.
c) Add 10 mL of N,N-dimethylacetamide (DMAC) (distilled in glass) to the sample bottle, seal and
cap.
d) Shake sample bottle at least 30 min on a reciprocating shaker.
N-1.7.6.2.2 Standards for RVCM analysis
Both a standard stock solution and a secondary dilution standard shall be prepared for the RVCM analysis,
using vinyl chloride gas (99.9%) and DMAC.
N-1.7.6.2.3 Standard stock solution for RVCM
The standard stock solution shall be prepared as follows:
a) Pipette approximately 9.8 mL of DMAC into a 10-mL volumetric flask.
b) Allow the flask to stand unstoppered until the wetted surface has dried.
c) Weigh the flask and stopper to the nearest 0.1 mg and record the weight.
d) Fill a 50-mL valved gas-tight syringe with vinyl chloride gas to the 50 mL mark.
e) Lower the needle to 5 mm above the meniscus of the DMAC and slowly introduce the standard
above the surface.
f) Immediately reweigh the flask and contents and record the weight.
g) Dilute to volume with DMAC, stopper, and mix.
h) Transfer the solution into a PTFE sealed screw-cap vial.
I) Store at -10 °C to -20 °C (14 °F to -4 °F).
j) Calculate stock standard solution with respect to a 0.500-g sample as follows:
(gram of vinyl chloride) (1 × 106 )

= ppm (mg/kg)(mg/d)
0.500 g
N-1.7.6.2.4 Secondary dilution standard for RVCM analysis
Using the stock standard solution, a secondary dilution in DMAC shall be prepared that is representative of
a concentration suitable for making calibration standards and spikes.
86
N-1.7.6.3 Apparatus for RVCM analysis
The following apparatus shall be used for RVCM analysis:
— GC equipped with a mL headspace sampling system, 80 C (176 F) oil bath, FID, data recording
system, and autosampler;
— column: 6 ft × 2 mm ID glass column packed with 1% SP-1000 on Carbopack B 60/80 mesh.

Equivalent columns shall be permitted as long as the column provides maximum separation from
interferences and the ability to meet established accuracy and precision;
— GC conditions: The analysis shall be performed using an oven temperature program whereby the
initial temperature of approximately 70 C (158 F) is held for 5 min, increased at 70 C/min (158 F/min)
to approximately 220 C (428 F), and held until DMAC elutes (total run time about 16 min);
— the injector, detector, and sample loop temperature shall be held at approximately 200 C, 275 C,
and 80 C, (392 F, 527 F, and 176 F) respectively; and
— the helium carrier gas shall have a flow rate of 20 mL/min. The headspace shall have a flow rate of
5 mL/min. The hydrogen and air flows for the flame shall be approximately 30 and 400 mL/min,
respectively.
NOTE — All of these flow rates will vary somewhat between GCs to optimize separation and response.
The above are given only as guidelines.
N-1.7.6.4 RVCM analysis
The sample and standards prepared in Sections N-1.7.6.2.1 and N-1.7.6.2.2 shall be loaded into an auto
sampler and equilibrated to 80 C (176 F) for 10 min prior to analysis.
N-1.7.6.5 Quality control (QC) for RVCM analysis
Duplicate analysis shall be performed on each sample. Duplicate spiked samples shall be run at the rate
of one set per ten samples. An instrument standard shall be run with every ten analyses (fifth sample), and
a reagent blank is required for each sample set. QC charts shall be developed and maintained and used
as a check on the analytical system.
N-1.7.6.6 Evaluation and pass/fail criteria for RVCM analysis
PVC and CPVC products with an RVCM concentration of ≤ 3.2 mg/kg shall be considered acceptable.
This acceptance criterion was determined using the equation described below:
MW = 4⁄r [D⁄π]0.5 [(t + t0 )0.5 - t 0.5 ] MP
Where:
MW = RVCM diffused into water (mg/L)

MP = RVCM concentration in the PVC wall (mg/kg)
NOTE — A factor of 1.4 corrects for the ratio of density of water to PVC.
r = pipe radius (cm)

D = diffusivity constant
87
Where:
D = D0 × e(-17,000/RT)
R = gas constant 1.987 K-1
T = temperature (K)
D0 = 3.7 cm2/s (319680 cm2/d)
t0 = diffusion time period (d)
t = product age at beginning of the diffusion time (d)
30 C = 303 K
The calculations shall be as follows:
MW = 4⁄r [D⁄π]0.5 [(t + t0 )0.5 - t 0.5 ] (MP × 1.4 kg/L)
MW
MP = 0.5
4 r
⁄ [D ⁄ π ] [(t + t0 )0.5 - t 0.5 ] (1.4 kg/L)
0.0002 mg/L
MP =
(3.15)(0.000235)(0.061)(1.4 kg/L)
MP = 3.2 mg/kg
NOTE — The following assumptions were used in the preceding calculations:
— 30-d-old product is tested equivalent to 1-in inner pipe diameter;

— t0 = 16 h (0.67 d); and
— MW = 0.2 μg/L (0.0002 mg/L).18
N-1.7.7 Solvent analysis
This section outlines the general procedure for determining solvent levels in the extraction water. The
method described below is based on direct injection GC with FID. In some instances, an enhancement step
(e.g., purge and trap [cold or heated] or headspace analysis) shall be required to complete the analysis.
The choice of enhancement shall be dependent on the desired detection levels of the solvent of interest.
The method sensitivity for direct injection is approximately 100 μg/L (0.1 mg/L) for selected solvents.15
N-1.7.7.1 General requirements for solvent-containing materials
These products shall be evaluated to determine the solvent leaching rates over time, if applicable. The
relationship between contaminant concentration and time shall be determined by plotting a minimum of
five points. In many instances, direct injection shall be sufficient only for the early testing period. When
direct injection is no longer adequate for determining a concentration, a more sensitive method shall be
required (i.e., purge and trap).
N-1.7.7.2 Apparatus for solvent analysis
The recommended apparatus shall be a GC equipped with an FID, temperature programming, data
recording system, and an autosampler. A purge and trap (with and without heat) system and headspace
sampling system shall also be available.
NOTE — The analysis conditions may require adjustment relative to the specific solvent or solvent system
being evaluated.
18This concentration is based on the US EPA MCL for vinyl chloride (2 μg/L or 0.002 mg/L), and since the
SPAC = 1/10 MCL, the SPAC = 0.2 μg/L, or 0.0002 mg/L.
88
N-1.7.7.3 QC for solvent analysis
Duplicate matrix spike samples shall be run at the rate of one set per ten samples or fewer. An instrument
standard shall be run with every ten samples, and a reagent blank shall be required for each daily analysis.
QC charts shall be developed, maintained, and used as a check on the analytical system.
N-1.8 Normalization
N-1.8.1 General
This section provides the calculations used to determine the level of contaminants projected "at the tap"
based on the level of contaminants identified during laboratory analysis. The normalized contaminant
concentration shall be compared to the requirements established in NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 (previously
Annex A).
N-1.8.2 Definitions
N-1.8.2.1 residential products: Products used in buildings.
N-1.8.2.2 service line products: Products used from the water main to building plumbing systems.
N-1.8.2.3 multiple user service line products: Products used between the water main and multiple
family residences or commercial buildings.
N-1.8.2.4 water main (distribution) products: Products used in locations other than buildings or service
lines.
N-1.8.2.5 multiple-installation products: Products present in the drinking water system at regularly
repeating intervals.
N-1.8.3 Normalization factor
To account for any differences in surface area-to-volume ratios between laboratory and actual field use
conditions, an adjustment or conversion using the equation below may be needed:
NF = N1 × N2
SAF VL
N1 = ×
SAL VF(static)
VF(static)
N2 =
VF(flowing)
Where:
VF(static) = volume of water to which the product is exposed in the field for the static condition
89
VF(flowing) = volume of water to which the product is exposed in the field under flow conditions during
a period of time equivalent to the laboratory test
N-1.8.3.1 Static condition
The contaminant concentration shall be adjusted to reflect differences in surface area-to-volume

relationships between laboratory and field exposures under static conditions. This calculation shall use the
N1 term defined in Section N-1.8.3. The N2 term shall always equal one when calculating normalized static
concentrations.
For multiple-installation products (e.g., pipes, fittings, and joining and sealing products used with pipes and
fittings), the VF(static) component of the N1 term shall be the volume of water contained within the assumed
length of pipe corresponding to the segment of the system in which the product is used
(e.g., 100 ft of pipe in the service line or 280 ft of pipe in the residence).
For valves, water meters, service saddles, backflow preventers and other products not present in the
system at regularly repeating intervals, the VF(static) component of the N1 term shall be the volume of water
a product holds (on its own) when filled to capacity; VF(static) shall equal 1 L (0.26 gal) for all products that,
when filled to capacity, hold (on their own) less than 1 L (0.26 gal) of water.
NOTE 1 —Table N-1.11 details the assumptions and resulting N1 factors for typical product categories.
N-1.8.3.2 Flowing conditions
In addition to the static condition, the contaminant concentration shall also be adjusted to reflect differences
between laboratory and field exposures under flowing conditions. For this calculation, N2 will vary
depending on use. For those products not having specific flowing N2 factors outlined in Table N-1.11,
product literature or operational procedures shall be consulted.
NOTE —Table N-1.11 details the assumptions and resulting N2 values for typical product categories.
N-1.8.4 Normalization of service line and residential products
N-1.8.4.1 For all service line and residential products, with the exception of mechanical plumbing devices
covered under Section 9, a single normalized static concentration shall be determined for each
contaminant.
NOTE — For residential and service line products, the static condition is the most conservative normalization,
since the N2 values for these products are ≤ 0.1.
N-1.8.4.2 For in-line devices, with the exception of expansion tanks, pressure tanks, and POE
components, media, or systems, the static normalized contaminant concentration shall be multiplied by an
additional normalization factor, N3. The factor N3 = 1/DF, where DF is equal to the ratio of the contaminant
concentration in the device to the contaminant concentration at the tap. The value of N3 for in-line devices
shall be 0.33.
N-1.8.4.3 Dual chamber manifolds with two noncontiguous water chambers shall be individually
normalized for the hot and cold chambers when each chamber is seperately exposed.
N-1.8.4.4 For all in-line devices, normalized contaminant concentrations shall be adjusted to a 12-h
exposure when the final exposure is other than 12 h in length.
90
NOTE — For example, when the final exposure for an in-line device is 16 h, the normalized contaminant
concentrations shall be multiplied by a factor of 12/16.
N-1.8.4.5 For POE systems, VF(static) shall be equal to system void volume.
N-1.8.4.6 For POE components, VF(static) shall be equal to 1/3 the volume of the smallest tank for which the
component is being evaluated for use, plus the volume of the component.
NOTE — POE system tanks hold media displacing much of the tanks’ void volume. The 1/3 is to account for a
common design difference between a system’s “unit void volume” and “void volume” (volume with and without
media respectively) that provides “freeboard” or open space to allow the media to expand during the
regeneration cycles of media use.
N-1.8.5 Normalization for chemical feeders and generators
Chemical feeders and generators, feeder components, and the materials used therein present a special
case because the materials are in contact with a concentrated chemical, which is then diluted at the
prescribed feed rate, rather than in direct contact with water.
In addition to the equation in Section N-1.8.3, the following normalization factor shall be used to estimate
the normalized concentration of a contaminant in the finished drinking water:
NF = N1 × N2 × N4
Where:
N4 = VTC/VWT
VTC = volume of concentrated treatment chemical contacted or generated by the device during a
period of time equivalent to the laboratory test
VWT = volume of raw water treated with the concentrated chemical when dosed at the prescribed
feed rate during a period of time equivalent to the laboratory test
N-1.8.5.1 Normalization of Cu/Ag electrode contaminants
The following normalization equation shall be used to estimate the normalized concentration of a
contaminant in finished drinking water (mg/L) based on the concentration of the contaminant in the
electrode (mg/kg).
NOTE — This normalization uses a worst-case approach by assuming that all contaminants in the electrode
are released to the treated drinking water and remain in solution. It also assumes that the contaminant is
liberated from the electrode as the copper is being released and therefore proportionate to the electrodes
copper content and dosage rate to water.
normalized contaminant content of electrode

(mg/kg) copper maximum dose
concentration = ×
level of generator (mg/L)
(mg/L) copper content of electrode (mg/kg)
91
Example:
— manufacturer’s recommended maximum dose level for copper = 0.80 mg/L

— analysis of 2-g coring = 1,300 mg copper, 600 mg silver, 0.040 mg arsenic
— copper content = 1,300 mg/0.00200 kg = 650,000 mg/kg
— arsenic content = 0.040 mg/0.00200kg = 20 mg/kg
— arsenic contribution to water = 0.000020 mg/L
0.000020 = (20/650,000) × 0.80
N-1.8.6 Normalization for other products
The normalization factors described below shall be applied to products and materials not covered in
Sections N-1.8.4 and N-1.8.5. For these products, a single normalized concentration (either static condition
or flowing condition, whichever is most conservative) shall be determined for each contaminant.
For products that have a flowing N2 value ≤ 0.1, the static condition shall be the most conservative
condition. For products that have a flowing N2 value ˃ 0.1, the flowing condition shall be the most
conservative condition. Normalization factors that are not included in Table N-1.11 shall be determined on
a case-by-case basis using the equation in Section N-1.8.3. Where a product is available in various sizes,
the product with the highest surface area-to-volume ratio (typically the smallest diameter) shall be
evaluated. For products, components, or materials that may be used in any of the four end use categories
in Table N-1.11, qualifying by use of the largest normalization factor shall qualify other use categories.
Table N-1.11 in this annex details the assumptions and resulting N1 and N2 values for various product
categories.
N-1.8.6.1 Water main valves and fire hydrants
Water main valves and fire hydrants connected to water main ≥ 4 in shall be normalized with the assumption
of twenty products per mile of pipe. An example normalization calculation is provided in Table N-1.11 for
water main valves.
N-1.8.7 Normalized concentration
The concentration of a contaminant in the finished drinking water shall be estimated using the following
calculation:
normalized concentration = (laboratory concentration) × (normalization factor)
N-1.8.7.1 Static condition
The normalized contaminant concentration under static conditions shall be compared to the EPA MCL or
the calculated TAC (as specified in NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 [previously Annex A]), and shall be less than or
equal to the MCL or TAC.
N-1.8.7.2 Flowing condition
The normalized contaminant concentration under flowing conditions shall be compared to the SPAC
(as specified in NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 [previously Annex A]), and shall be less than or equal to the SPAC.
N-1.8.7.3 Barrier materials containing solvents
Products / materials containing solvents shall be exposed so that the solvent leaching rates over time are
determined. The relationship between normalized contaminant concentrations and time shall be determined
and plotted with a minimum of five points. The normalized contaminant concentrations shall be compared
to the STEL as specified in NSF/ANSI/CAN 600, Section 3.3 (previously Annex A, Section A.5).
92
N-1.8.7.4 Joining and sealing materials containing solvents
The manufacturer shall have the option of initiating additional exposure testing to determine contaminant
concentrations over time for solvent-containing materials. The relationship between contaminant
concentrations and time shall be determined, and plotted with a minimum of five points. The normalized
contaminant concentrations shall be calculated and then compared to the STEL as specified in
NSF/ANSI/CAN 600, Section 3.3 (previously Annex A, Section A.5).
N-1.8.8 Normalization for endpoint devices, components, and materials
N-1.8.8.1 Normalization for lead
For endpoint products other than commercial kitchen products, each laboratory concentration shall be
normalized using the equation in Section N-1.8.3 where: VF(static) = 1 L (0.26 gal) when the volume of the
device is less than 1 L (0.26 gal), and N2 = 1, and shall be multiplied by the cold mix volume adjustment
factor (see Section 9.2.1).
For commercial kitchen products, each laboratory concentration shall be normalized using the equation in
Section N-1.8.3 where VF(static) = 18.9 L (5 gal) and N2 = 1 and shall be multiplied by the CMV adjustment
A parametric data evaluation (Section N-1.8.9) shall be used to evaluate the test results for lead.
When a device or component has been tested for lead through separate exposure of two or more
components or materials, the values of the test statistic Q for each exposure shall be summed. The summed
test statistic Q shall be evaluated against the criteria in Section N-1.8.9.
N-1.8.8.2 Normalization for all analytes except lead
For endpoint products other than commercial kitchen products, the laboratory concentration shall be
normalized using the equation in Section N-1.8.3 where: VF(static) = 1 L (0.26 gal) when the volume of the
device is less than 1 L (0.26 gal), and N2 = 1, and shall be multiplied by the CMV adjustment factor
(see Section 9.2.1).
For commercial kitchen products, each laboratory concentration shall be normalized with the equation in
Section N-1.8.3 where: VF(static) = 18.9 L (5 gal) and N2 = 1, and shall be multiplied by the CMV adjustment
When one sample is tested, the normalized contaminant concentrations from exposure on Day 19 shall be
compared to their respective SPACs. If more than one sample is tested, the geometric mean of normalized
contaminant concentrations from exposure at Day 19 shall be compared to their respective SPACs.
N-1.8.9 Parametric data evaluation
The term "product" connotes "endpoint devices, components, and materials." The procedure for the
evaluation of lead leaching from these products is based on testing a sampling of products to determine
the lead leaching dosage of the product line. A derived test statistic determines whether the product line is
acceptable under this Standard. The calculations assume that the lead dosage leached from the product is
lognormally distributed.
The number of products to be tested shall be specified by the manufacturer, though a minimum of three is
required. It is recommended that product lines thought to be marginally acceptable (those that leach higher,
but acceptable, dosages of lead) be tested for more than the minimum number of products. For each of the
products tested, the "product dosage" Di is derived from the test data as detailed in Section N-1.8.9.2.
These dosages are used to calculate the test statistic Q, which determines whether the product line is
acceptable. Q is an exact 90% upper confidence bound on the 75th percentile product dosage.
93
In the event of a product failure, there is provision for a single retest. Retest results shall be combined with
those from the initial test. The accumulated product dosages shall be used to calculate the retest statistic,
R, which determines whether the product line is acceptable. R is an exact 99% upper confidence bound on
the 75th percentile product dosage.
N-1.8.9.1 Test data
The analytical protocol described in Section N-1.5.4 generates nine measured lead dosages (on Days 3,
4, 5, 10, 11, 12, 17, 18, and 19) leached from each of the products sampled from a particular product line.
The number of products tested is defined as n. The test data are described as (9 × n) data values of xij
(ith product measured on the jth day) and are shown in Table N-1.12. These are used to calculate the product
dosage Di, for each of the tested products.
These data are used to calculate the statistics Q and R for the initial test and retest, respectively.
N-1.8.9.2 Calculations
The test statistic depends upon the log-dosage mean and standard deviation. These values are derived as
follows. Calculate the natural log-transformed value Yij = ln(Xij) of the original data values. For each of the
products tested, calculate the product dosage Di across the nine measured days, where:
Di = eYi
and
(Yi3 + Yi4 + Yi5 + Yi10 + Yi11 + Yi12 + Yi17 + Yi18 + Yi19 )

Yi =
9
Calculate the log-dosage mean of Yi and the log-dosage standard deviation of Yi for each product, where:
∑ni=1 Yi
log-dosage mean =
n
and
∑ni=1 (Yi −Ȳ)2

log-dosage standard deviation = √
(n -1)
N-1.8.9.3 Initial test statistic
The test statistic Q shall be determined as:

S
Q = eȲ ∙ ek1 ∙
where the log-dosage mean, Ȳ, and the log-dosage standard deviation, S, are determined using the
procedures described in Section N-1.8.9.2. The value of k1 depends upon the sample size.
Table N-1.13 in this annex presents the value of k1 for a range of sample sizes. The acceptability of the
product line depends upon the value of the test statistic and product type.
For end-point devices other than supply stops, flexible plumbing connectors, and miscellaneous
components:
— case I: If Q ≤ 5 μg, the product line has tested as acceptable; or

— case II: If Q > 5 μg, the product line has tested as unacceptable.
94
For supply stops, flexible plumbing connectors, and miscellaneous components:
— case I: If Q ≤ 3 μg, the product line has tested as acceptable; or

— case II: If Q > 3 μg, the product line has tested as unacceptable.
When a device or component has been tested for lead through separate exposure of two or more
components or materials, the summed value of the test statistic Q shall be compared to the preceding
criteria.
N-1.8.9.4 Retest statistic
The retest statistic R shall be determined as:
̅ S
R = e Y ∙ ek2∙
where the log-dosage mean, Ȳ, and the log-dosage standard deviation, S, are determined using the
procedures described in Section N-1.8.9.2. The value of k2 depends upon the sample size. Table N-1.14
presents the value of k2 for a range of sample sizes. The acceptability of the product line depends upon the
values of the retest statistic and product type.
— case I: If R ≤ 5 μg, the product line has tested as acceptable; or

— case II: If R > 5 μg, the product line has tested as unacceptable.
— case I: If R ≤ 3 μg, the product line has tested as acceptable; or

— case II: If R > 3 μg, the product line has tested as unacceptable.
N-1.9 Extraction water preparation

N-1.9.1 Chemical characteristics
Four extraction waters shall be available for exposure:
1) pH = 5 ± 0.3, with 2 ± 0.5 mg/L free available chlorine and 100 mg/L hardness
2) pH = 6.5 ± 0.3, with 2 ± 0.5 mg/L free available chlorine and 100 mg/L hardness
3) pH = 10 ± 0.3, with 2 ± 0.5 mg/L free available chlorine
4) pH = 8 ± 0.3, alkalinity of 500 ± 25 mg/L, dissolved inorganic carbon of 122 ± 5 mg/L, and
2 ± 0.5 mg/L of free chlorine.
All exposure water that is used to determine compliance to this Standard shall be used within 24 hours of
preparation and stored in a closed container.
NOTE — The hardness values above are expected concentrations based on buffer additions and are not
intended to be a specification.
95
N-1.9.2 Reagents
N-1.9.2.1 Reagent water
Reagent water shall be produced through one or more of the following treatment processes: distillation,
reverse osmosis, ion exchange, or other equivalent treatment processes. The reagent water shall have the
following general water characteristics:
— electrical resistivity, minimum 18 MΩ-cm at 25 °C (77 °F); and

— total organic carbon (TOC) maximum 100 μg/L.
For each specific analyte of interest, the reagent water shall not contain the target analyte at a concentration
greater than half the designated analytical report limit of that analyte. If trace organic contaminants may be
present at levels greater than half the designated analytical report limit of that target analyte, it is permissible
to treat the reagent water with TOC destructive UV (185 nm) to reduce those contaminants to acceptable
concentrations. This UV treatment often results in a decrease in electrical resistivity of the reagent water to
below 18 MΩ-cm, which is allowed in this circumstance.
N-1.9.2.2 Phosphate buffer stock solutions (0.1 M)
Phosphate buffer stock solutions shall be prepared as follows: Dissolve 13.89 g sodium dihydrogen
phosphate monohydrate in reagent water, dilute to 1.0 L (0.26 gal), and mix thoroughly. Prepare fresh
weekly. This buffer shall be used with only the magnesium hardness reagent.
N-1.9.2.3 Magnesium hardness stock solution (0.04 M)
Magnesium hardness stock solution shall be prepared by dissolving 8.13 g magnesium chloride
hexahydrate in reagent water, diluting to 1.0 L (0.26 gal), and mixing thoroughly. The solution shall be
prepared fresh weekly.
N-1.9.2.4 Chlorine stock solution (0.025 M)
Chlorine stock solution shall be prepared as follows: Dilute 7.3 mL reagent grade sodium hypochlorite
(5% NaClO) to 200 mL with reagent water. Store in tightly stoppered amber reagent bottle protected from
light and stored at 20 C (68 F). Prepare fresh weekly.
N-1.9.2.4.1 Determining chlorine stock solution strength
The strength of the chlorine stock solution shall be determined by diluting 1.0 mL to 1.0 L (0.26 gal) with
reagent water. The solution shall be analyzed immediately for free available chlorine. This determination
shall be referred to as A.
N-1.9.2.4.2 Determining amount of chlorine stock solution required to obtain 2 ppm residual
chlorine
To determine the volume of the chlorine stock solution necessary to add to the extraction water to obtain
2.0 mg/L free available chlorine residual, the following formula shall be used:
2.0 × B
mL stock solution =
A
Where:
A = chlorine equivalent per mL of chlorine stock solution (determined above)

B = liters of extraction water
96
N-1.9.2.5 Calcium hardness stock solution (0.04 M)
Calcium hardness stock solution shall be prepared by dissolving 4.44 g anhydrous calcium chloride in
reagent water, diluting to 1.0 L (0.26 gal), and mixing thoroughly. The solution shall be prepared fresh
weekly.
N-1.9.2.6 Sodium bicarbonate buffer (0.04 M)
Sodium bicarbonate buffer shall be prepared by dissolving 3.36 g sodium bicarbonate in reagent water and
diluting to 1.0 L (0.26 gal), mixing thoroughly. The solution shall be prepared fresh weekly.
N-1.9.2.7 Sodium hydroxide solution (0.1 M)
Sodium hydroxide solution shall be prepared by dissolving 4.0 g of sodium hydroxide in reagent water,
diluting to 1.0 L (0.26 gal), and mixing well.
N-1.9.2.8 Sodium borate solution (0.05 M)
Sodium borate solution shall be prepared by dissolving 19.07 g of sodium borate decahydrate
(Na2B4O7 ּ 10 H2O) in reagent water, diluting to 1.0 L (0.26 gal), and mixing well.
N-1.9.3 pH 5 water
pH 5 extraction water shall be prepared to contain 2 ± 0.5 mg/L free available chlorine. Stock reagent
solutions in the amounts shown in Table N-1.15 shall be diluted to the desired water volume with reagent
water. The pH shall be adjusted to pH 5 ± 0.3 using 0.1M HCl or 0.1 M NaOH as needed.
N-1.9.4 pH 6.5 water
pH 6.5 water shall be prepared to contain 2 ± 0.5 mg/L free available chlorine. Stock reagent solutions in
the amounts shown in Table N-1.15 shall be diluted to the desired water volume with reagent water.
The pH shall be adjusted to pH 6.5 ± 0.3 using 0.1 M HCl.
NOTE — It is recommended that the pH 6.5 water be protected from exposure to air during its formulation and
use to minimize pH drift. Unused exposure water should be maintained under a nitrogen blanket, and product
samples should be plugged or tightly covered to minimize exposure to air.
N-1.9.5 pH 8 water (conditioning)
pH 8 conditioning water shall be prepared to contain 2 ± 0.5 mg/L free available chlorine. Stock reagent
water. The pH shall be adjusted to pH 8 ± 0.3 using 0.1 M HCl or 0.1 M NaOH as needed.
N-1.9.6 pH 10 water
pH 10 extraction water shall be prepared to contain 2 ± 0.5 mg/L free available chlorine. Stock reagent
water. The pH shall be adjusted to pH 10 ± 0.3 using 0.1 M HCl or 0.1 M NaOH as needed.
N-1.9.7 pH 8 water
The extraction water shall be prepared by combining:
— 25 mL of 0.4 M sodium bicarbonate;
— chlorine stock solution per Section N-1.9.2.4; and
97
— reagent water meeting the requirements of Section N-1.9.2.1 (make up to 1 L), and adjust pH as
needed using 0.1 M HCl.
98
Chemical concentrations, form, and amounts of ingredients can be adjusted such that the final pH 8 test water meets the extraction water
characteristics as outlined in Section N-1.9.1, bullet 5.
Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri
Test
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Day
C C C C C C C C C
W/C 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
< 72 16 16 16 16 64 16 16 16 16 64 16 16 16 16
Key
W/C = washing and conditioning
< 72 = dwell between conditioning and exposure sequence (maximum: 72 h)
2 = dump and fill 2 h intervals
16 = 16 h dwell (overnight)
16 = 16 h dwell for data
C = collect prior day’s 16 h dwell
64 = 64 h dwell (weekend)
Figure 1
Exposure sequence for mechanical plumbing device
99
Table N-1.1
NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 products
Joining and sealing materials Mechanical devices

adhesives chemical feeders
brazing materials dry feeders (e.g., pellet droppers)
fluxes pressure gas injection systems
solders pumps
caulks vacuum injection systems
gaskets disinfection / generators
lubricants chlorine dioxide
O-rings hypochlorite
packing ozone
primers ultraviolet
sealants electrical wire
— submersible well pumps
— pumps
— switches and sensors (e.g., water level, flow, pressure, temperature)
valves, related fittings, and fire hydrants (transmission / distribution
—
system)
— water process treatment devices
— aeration equipment
— clarifiers
— electrodialysis
— microfiltration
— mixers
— reverse osmosis
— screens
— strainers
— ultrafiltration
100
Table N-1.2
Exposure summary
Type of
Annex N-1
samples
Category reference Required preparation Product exposure
(surface
Section
area)
— some products applied to
an appropriate substrate
cold exposure = 24, 24, 24 h
joining and — some products cut to at 23 C (73 F)
sealing N-1.3 15 cm2/L appropriate size
materials hot exposure = 1, 1, 1 h
— washed to remove debris at 82 C (180 F)
accumulated during shipping
and handling
entire device, conditioning period prior to
mechanical component, wash to remove debris exposure (2 wk maximum)
N-1.4
devices or material accumulated during shipping cold exposure = 24, 24, 24 h
specimen1 at 23 C (73 F)
1 A material specimen shall be exposed using a minimum surface area-to-volume ratio or 50 cm2/L.
101
Table N-1.3
Extraction water selection
X = Required extraction water selection

Reagent
Analyte of pH 5 pH 10 pH 6.5 pH 8
Material type by Section water1
interest (see (see (see (see
(see
Section Section Section Section
Section
N-1.9.3) N-1.9.6) N-1.9.4) N-1.9.7)
N-1.9.3)
Sections 4, 5, 6, and 8
metals X2 — — X —
brass and bronze surfaces
organics — — — X —
copper pipe other than
metals X3 — X3 X —
C12200 and copper alloy
fittings used exclusively to
join copper pipe
copper (C12200) pipe, metals X4 — — X —
tubing, and fittings organics — — — X —
cementitious and asphaltic metals X X — — —
materials organics — — — X —
metals X — — X —
all other wetted surfaces
1 Placeholder for eventual citing of test waters used for process media currently contained in Section 7.
2Compliance with copper criteria is not required under the pH 5 test waters as long as the requirements in Section
4.5.3.4 are also met.
3The pH 6.5 test water may be used in replacement of the pH 5 test water provided the requirements in
Section 4.5.3.3 are also met.
4 Metals analysis with the pH 5 test water is not required provided the requirements in Section 4.5.3.2 are also met.
Table N-1.4
Test samples joining and sealing materials
Material Typical form

adhesives and cements intended for joining pipe
applied to assembled pipe and fitting joints
and fittings
adhesives and cements not intended for joining pipe
applied to glass panels
and fittings
caulks, greases, lubricants, sealants applied to glass panels
flux applied to copper sheet and heated
gasket materials ASTM D3182 tensile sheets or finished product
solders and solder / flux combinations product heated in ceramic combustion boats
102
Table N-1.5
Exposure sequence for cold applications
Exposure Elapsed
Exposure temperature Comment
time time
extraction water is decanted and discarded; the
23 ± 2 °C (73 ± °F) 24 ± 1 h 1d exposure vessel or product is refilled with exposure
water and exposure is continued
23 ± 2 °C (73 ± 4 °F) 24 ± 1 h 2d exposure vessel or product is refilled with exposure
23 ± 2 °C (73 ± 4 °F) 24 ± 1 h 3d extraction water is collected for analysis
Table N-1.6
Exposure sequence for hot applications
Exposure Elapsed
Exposure temperature Comments
time time
60 ± 2 °C (140 ± 4 °F) or
60 ± 5 min 1h exposure vessel or product is refilled with exposure
82 ± 2 °C (180 ± 4 °F)
60 ± 2 °C (140 ± 4 °F) or
60 ± 5 min 2h exposure vessel or product is refilled with exposure
82 ± 2 °C (180 ± 4 °F)
60 ± 2 °C (140 ± 4 °F) or
60 ± 5 min 3h extraction water is collected for analysis
82 ± 2 °C (180 ± 4 °F)
Table N-1.7
Product exposure1
Product In the product In a vessel Other

aeration equipment X — material exposed in a vessel
chemical feeders X — material exposed in a vessel
clarifiers — — material exposed in a vessel
disinfection equipment — — material exposed in a vessel
electrical wire — X —
in-line devices X — —
membranes/cartridges X — —
mixers — — materials exposed in a vessel
pumps X — —
reverse osmosis X — —
screens — X —
strainers X — —
switches/sensors X — —
valves X — —
1 For the purposes of this table, product may represent either the entire device or a component. These are the typical
exposure conditions. However, products may be exposed in any fashion provided that the exposure is consistent with
requirements in Section N-1.2.
103
Table N-1.8
In-line device exposure sequence
In-line device Elapsed time1 in-

Temperature Comments
exposure time line devices
Extraction water is decanted and
discarded; the exposure vessel or
23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F) 24 h 24 h
product is refilled with exposure
water and exposure is continued.
23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F) 24 h 48 h
Extraction water is collected for
23 ± 2 C (73 ± 4 F) 12 to 16 h 60 to 64 h analysis; the exposure is
terminated.
1 Elapsed time does not include the initial 14-d conditioning period.
Table N-1.9
Other mechanical device exposure sequence
Exposure time Elapsed time1

Temperature other mechanical other mechanical Comments
devices devices
23 ± 2 °C (73 ± 4 °F) 24 h 24 h
23 ± 2 °C (73 ± 4 °F) 24 h 48 h
Extraction water is collected for
23 ± 2 °C (73 ± 4 °F) 24 h 72 h analysis; the exposure is
terminated.
1 Elapsed time does not include the initial 14-d conditioning period.
104
Table N-1.10
Extractant water collection and preservation
Contaminant Preservative Container Storage

1-L (32-oz) amber glass bottles ≤ 6 °C (43 °F),
herbicide none
with PTFE lid but not frozen
metals, including Conc. HNO3 to pH 125-mL (4-oz) HDPE bottles
room temp
mercury < 2 (1.25 mL) with PTFE lid
miscellaneous 500-mL (16-oz) amber bottle ≤ 6 °C (43 °F),
none
organics with PTFE lid but not frozen
500-mL (16-oz) amber glass bottle ≤ 6 °C (43 °F),
pesticides none
H2SO4 to pH 250-mL (8-oz) amber glass bottle ≤ 6 °C (43 °F),
phenols
< 2 (2.50 mL) with PTFE lid but not frozen
1-L (32-oz) glass bottle ≤ 6 °C (43 °F),
phthalate none
with PTFE lid (in duplicate) but not frozen
polyaromatic 1-L (32-oz) glass bottle ≤ 6 °C (43 °F),
none
hydrocarbon (in duplicate) but not frozen
1-L (32-oz) polyethylene bottle
radionuclides 10.0 mL HNO3 room temperature
(in duplicate)
125-mL (4-oz) amber bottle ≤ 6 °C (43 °F),
solvents none
total kjeldahl nitrogen H2SO4 to pH < 2
total organic carbon none
non-Section 9
exposure for volatile 40-mL amber glass vial ≤ 6 °C (43 °F),
HCl
organic chemicals with PTFE lid but not frozen
(VOCs)
Section 9 exposure sodium thiosulfate
40-mL amber glass vial ≤ 6 °C (43 °F),
for volatile organic (a few grains to
chemicals (VOCs) neutralize the chlorine)
105
Table N-1.11
Additional normalization factors, assumptions, and examples
N2 (flowing
Product nominal Exposure Probable
Assumptions N1 normalization
diameter (n.d.) type end use1
only)
calculated in
— water is exposed to the same material from the
n.d. > 4 in in-the-vessel water main accordance with 1
treatment plant to the service line
Section N-1.8.3
Example: In-the-vessel water main joining and sealing material
Assumptions:
— product is a joining and sealing material applied to a 6-in nominal diameter pipe and was exposed in a vessel;
— 0.5-in joining and sealing material width is exposed to water;
— 20-ft-long pipe (used to derive VF(static) and SAF) and 1 joint per 20-ft length; and
— the ratio of SAL to VL was recorded and reported by the laboratory.
SAF = 60.77 cm2 (9.42 in2) SAL = 15 cm2 (2.3 in2)
VF(static) = 111 L (29.3 gal) VL = 1 L (0.26 gal)
SAF VL 9.42 0.26

N1 = × = × = 0.036
SAL VF(static) 2.33 29.4
N2 = 1
Comments:
Concentrations reported by the laboratory would be multiplied by 0.036 to obtain a normalized static concentration. The resulting normalized static
concentration would be multiplied by 1 (N2 = 1) to obtain the normalized flowing concentration.
1
Probable end use and corresponding assumptions are related to the nominal diameter of the product.
106
Table N-1.11
N2 (flowing
only)
— two user connections per service line and
180 gal/d/user
calculated in
multiple user — distance from water main to residential connections =
n.d. = 4 in in-the-vessel accordance with 0.13
service line 72 ft and therefore VF(static) = 47 gal; flow rate equals 360
Section N-1.8.3
gal/d and therefore VF(flow) = 360 gal
— five joints per multiple user service line
Example: in-the-vessel multiple user service line joining and sealing materials
Assumptions:
— product is a joining and sealing material applied to a 4-in nominal diameter pipe and was exposed in a vessel;
— 0.5-in joining and sealing material width is exposed to water;
— five joints per multiple user service line;
— 72 ft of the pipe is present in the multiple user service line and therefore VF(static) = 47 gal (178 L); and
SAF = 40.6 cm2 (6.3 in2) × 5 = 202.6 cm2 (31.4 in2) SAL = 15 cm2 (2.3 in2)
VF(static) = 178 L (47 gal) VL = 1 L (0.26 gal)
SAF VL 31.4 0.26

N1 = × = × = 0.076
SAL VF(static) 2.33 47
VF(static) 47
N2 = = = 0.13
VF(flow) 360
Comments:
concentration would be multiplied by 0.13 to obtain the normalized flowing concentration.
1 Probable end use and corresponding assumptions are related to the nominal diameter of the product.
107
Table N-1.11
N2 (flowing
only)
— joining / sealing materials applied to 1-in nominal
diameter pipe
— 1 user connection per service line and 180 gal/d/user
calculated in
— distance from water main to residence = 100 ft and
4 in > n.d. > 1 in in-the-vessel service line accordance with 0.023
therefore Vf(static) = 4.08 gal
Section N-1.8.3
— flow rate equals 180 gal/d and therefore
VF(flow) =180 gal
— 10 joints are present on the service line
Example: in-the-vessel service line joining and sealing materials
Assumptions:
— an in-the-vessel exposure was conducted;
— product is used to join 1-in nominal diameter pipe;
— 0.5-in width of the joining and sealing material comes in direct contact with water;
— 100 ft of the pipe is present in the service line and therefore VF(static) = 4.08 gal;
— 10 joints are present on the service line; and
SAF = 10.1 cm2 (1.57 in2) × 10 = 101.3 cm2 (15.7 in2) SAL = 15 cm2 (2.3 in2)
VF(static) = 15.44 L (4.08 gal) VL = 1 L (0.26 gal)
SAF VL 15.7 0.26

N1 = × = × = 0.44
SAL VF(static) 2.3 4.08
VF(static) 4.08
N2 = = = 0.023
VF(flow) 180
Comments:
108
Table N-1.11
N2 (flowing
only)
— joining / sealing materials applied to 0.5 in nominal diameter
pipe
— length of pipe in the residence = 280 ft (140 ft cold side and calculated in
140 ft hot side) and therefore VF(static) =2.86 gal (1.43 gal hot and accordance
1 in > n.d. ≥ 0.5 in in-the-vessel residential 0.016
1.43 gal cold) with Section
N-1.8.3
— flow rate equals 180 gal/d and therefore VF(flow) = 180 gal
— 200 joints are present in the residential system
Example: in-the-vessel residential joining and sealing material
Assumptions:
— an in-the-vessel exposure was conducted;
— product is a joining and sealing material used to join 1/2-in nominal diameter pipe;
— 0.25 in-width of the joining and sealing material comes in direct contact with water;
— 280 ft of pipe is present in the residence (used to derive VF(static) and SAF);
— the ratio of SAL to VL was recorded and reported by the laboratory; and
— 200 joints are present in the residential system.
SAF = 2.54 cm2 (0.393 in2) × 200 = 507 cm2 (78.6 in2) SAL = 65 cm2 (10 in2)
VF(static) = 10.83 L (2.86 gal) VL = 1 L (0.26 gal)
SAF VL 78.6 0.26

N1 = × = × = 0.73
SAL VF(static) 10 2.86
VF(static) 2.86
N2 = = = 0.016
VF(flow) 180
Comments:
109
Table N-1.11
N2 (flowing
only)
— twenty 4 in valves per mile (5,280 ft)
n.d. ≥ 4 in in-the-product water main 1 0.002
— a width of 6 in is exposed for each valve
Example: in-the-product water main valve
Assumptions:
— product is a 4-in nominal diameter valve used on pipe with a nominal diameter of 4 in;
— an in-the-product exposure was conducted; and
— for each valve, a width of 6 in comes in direct contact with water.
SAF = 484 cm2 (75 in2) SAL = 484 cm2 (75 in2)
VF(static) = 1.24 L (0.327 gal) VL = 1.24 L (0.327 gal)
SAF VL 75 0.327
N1 = × = × =1
SAL VF(static) 75 0.327
N2 = volume of 20 valves = 6.52 = 0.002

volume of 1 mi of pipe = 3,447
Comments:
Laboratory concentrations would be multiplied by 0.002 and compared to the SPAC.
110
Table N-1.11
N2 (flowing
Assumptions N1 normalization N3
only)
— when product holds less than 1 L
(0.26 gal) under static conditions,
VF(static) = 1 L = 0.26 gal
— when product holds less than 1 L calculated in
service line or
4 in > n.d. ≥ 0.5 in in-the-product (0.26 gal) under static conditions and accordance with 0.0015 0.33
residential
contains metal components, extensions Section N-1.8.3
are added to bring the exposure volume to
1 L.
— VF(flow) = 180 gal
Example: in-the-product service line valve
Assumptions:
— product is a 0.5-in nominal diameter valve with a length of 2 in;
— an in-the-product exposure was conducted;
— VF(static) = 1 L because the valve holds less than 1 L of water when filled to capacity under static conditions; and
— extensions are added to bring the exposure volume close to 1 L.
SAF = 20.26 cm2 (3.14 in2) SAL = 20.26 cm2 (3.14 in2)
VF(static) = 1 L (0.26 gal) VL = 0.98 L (0.26 gal)
SAF VL 3.14 0.98

N1 = × × dispersion factor (N3) = × × 0.33 = 0.32
SAL VF(static) 3.14 1
VF(static) 0.26
N2 = = = 0.0015
VF(flow) 180
Comments:
Laboratory concentrations would be multiplied by 0.32 to obtain the normalized static concentration. The resulting normalized static concentration
would be multiplied by 0.0015 to obtain the normalized flowing concentration.
111
Table N-1.12
Data available for determination of lead test statistic
Measured lead dosage on day

Product #
3 4 5 10 11 12 17 18 19
1 X1 3 X1 4 X1 5 X1 10 X1 11 X1 12 X1 17 X1 18 X1 19
2 X2 3 X2 4 X2 5 X2 10 X2 11 X2 12 X2 17 X2 18 X2 19
3 X3 3 X3 4 X3 5 X3 10 X3 11 X3 12 X3 17 X3 18 X3 19
n Xn 3 Xn 4 Xn 5 Xn 10 Xn 11 Xn 12 Xn 17 Xn 18 Xn 19
Table N-1.13
Values of k1 for determining test statistic Q
Sample size k1 Sample size k1 Sample size k1

3 2.60281 19 1.05769 35 0.94208
4 1.97224 20 1.04590 36 0.93783
5 1.69779 21 1.03510 37 0.93377
6 1.53987 22 1.02517 38 0.92990
7 1.43526 23 1.01598 39 0.92618
8 1.35984 24 1.00747 40 0.92262
9 1.30234 25 0.99954 41 0.91921
10 1.25672 26 0.99213 42 0.91592
11 1.21943 27 0.98520 43 0.91277
12 1.18824 28 0.97869 44 0.90973
13 1.16167 29 0.97256 45 0.90680
14 1.13870 30 0.96677 46 0.90397
15 1.11859 31 0.96130 47 0.90125
16 1.10080 32 0.95612 48 0.89861
17 1.08491 33 0.95120 49 0.89607
18 1.07063 34 0.94653 50 0.89361
112
Table N-1.14
Values of k2 for determining retest statistic R
Sample size k2 Sample size k2 Sample size k2

6 2.84809 21 1.39862 36 1.18574
7 2.49072 22 1.37611 37 1.17721
8 2.25337 23 1.35548 38 1.16907
9 2.08314 24 1.33647 39 1.16130
10 1.95433 25 1.31889 40 1.15387
11 1.85297 26 1.30257 41 1.14676
12 1.77079 27 1.28738 42 1.13994
13 1.70259 28 1.27319 43 1.13340
14 1.64491 29 1.25989 44 1.12711
15 1.59536 30 1.24740 45 1.12107
16 1.55224 31 1.23565 46 1.11526
17 1.51431 32 1.22455 47 1.10966
18 1.48063 33 1.21407 48 1.10425
19 1.45048 34 1.20413 49 1.09904
20 1.42329 35 1.19470 50 1.09401
Table N-1.151
1 L volume of extraction water
pH Solution #1 Solution #2 Chlorine stock solution

5 25 mL of 0.1 M NaH2PO4 25 mL of 0.04 M MgCl2 see Section N-1.9.2.4
6.5 25 mL of 0.04 M NaHCO3 25 mL of 0.04 M CaCl2 see Section N-1.9.2.4
8 (conditioning) 25 mL of 0.04 M NaHCO3 25 mL of 0.04 M CaCl2 see Section N-1.9.2.4
10 50 mL of 0.1 M NaOH 50 mL of 0.05 M Na2B4O7 see Section N-1.9.2.4
1 Volumes are per 1.0 L of extraction water produced.
113
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
Normative Annex 2
(formerly Annex C)
Acceptable materials
N-2.1 Purpose
This annex defines the evaluation process for materials that have been submitted for qualification as
acceptable materials.
N-2.2 Evaluation of acceptable materials

A material shall be designated as an “acceptable material” in Table N-2.1 if it has a standard material
formulation or specification (e.g., ASTM); has undergone extraction testing that demonstrates that the
material does not contribute any contaminant in excess of its acceptable level as determined by this
Standard (see Section N-2.3); and is accompanied by adequate documentation (see Section 3.4).
N-2.3 Extraction testing

Thirty randomly selected samples from a variety of manufacturers of the material, in a specific form
(e.g., pipe or tube), shall undergo extraction testing. All the samples shall have been manufactured using
the same production process. Selection of analytical testing shall be performed in accordance with
Section 3.3. The samples shall be exposed at the maximum surface area-to-volume ratio for which
acceptance is being sought. Depending on the specific form of the material, the samples shall be evaluated
with the extraction protocol, normalization formulas and assumptions, and evaluation criteria contained in
the applicable sections of this Standard.
N-2.4 Documentation
The material’s evaluation shall be supported by the following documentation:
— the published material formulation or specification to which the material is fabricated;
— literature that comprehensively addresses the production process, raw material sources, and all
other factors that could potentially affect the composition and variability of the material; and
— information and data that summarize the results from the laboratory extraction of the thirty randomly
selected samples, including data from a detection limit study, quality control (QC) data run concurrently
with the samples, a description of the methods and instrumentation used, and a verification that the
laboratory in which the extraction testing was conducted is certified for drinking water analysis by the
regulatory agency having authority.
A final report that outlines the manner in which these requirements have been met shall be prepared.
115
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
Table N-2.1
Standard Surface
Specific End use
Material (product) area-to- Composition
designation temperature
reference volume ratio
percent composition:
carbon (0.08 max.)
manganese (2.00 max.)
ASTM A312 phosphorus (0.05 max.)
UNS S30400 3,484 cm2/L 30 C (86 F)
ASTM A269 sulfur (0.030 max.)
(Type 304) (540 in2/L) 23 C (73 F)
ASTM A240 silicon (1.00 max.)
nickel (8.00 to 11.0)
chromium (18.0 to 20.0)
iron (balance)
carbon (0.035 max.)
UNS S30403 3,484 cm2/L 30 C (86 F)
ASTM A269 sulfur (0.030 max.)
(Type 304L) (540 in2/L) 23 C (73 F)
ASTM A240 silicon (1.00 max.)
nickel (8.00 to 13.0)
iron (balance)
carbon (0.08 max.)
phosphorus (0.05 max.)
ASTM A312
UNS S31600 3,484 cm2/L 30 C (86 F) sulfur (0.030 max.)
ASTM A269
stainless (Type 316) (540 in2/L) 23 C (73 F) silicon (1.00 max.)
ASTM A240
steel nickel (10.00 to 14.0)
molybdenum (2.0 to 3.0)
iron (balance)
carbon (0.035 max.)
ASTM A312
UNS S31603 3,484 cm2/L 30 C (86 F) sulfur (0.030 max.)
ASTM A269
(Type 316L) (540 in2/L) 23 C (73 F) silicon (1.00 max.)
ASTM A240
nickel (10.0 to 15.0)
iron (balance)
carbon (0.030 max.)
UNS S32205 ASTM A789 3,484 cm2/L sulfur (0.020 max.)
23 C (73 F)
(Type 2205) ASTM A790 (540 in2/L) silicon (1.0 max.)
ASTM A815 nickel (4.5 to 6.5)
nitrogen (0.14 to 0.20)
116
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
Table N-2.1
Standard Surface
Specific End use
Material (product) area-to- Composition
designation temperature
reference volume ratio
carbon (0.03 max.)
ASTM A240
sulfur (0.02 max.)
UNS S32003 ASTM A789 3,484 cm2/L
23 C (73 F) silicon (1.00 max.)
(Type 2203) ASTM A790 (540 in2/L)
nickel (3.0 to 4.0)
ASTM A815
iron (balance)
carbon (0.040 max.)
manganese (4.0 to 6.0
max.)
UNS S32101 ASTM A789 3,484 cm2/L sulfur (0.03 max.)
23 C (73 F)
(Type 2101) ASTM A790 (540 in2/L) silicon (1.0 max.)
ASTM A815 nickel (1.35 to 1.70)
stainless
copper (0.10 to 0.80)
steel
carbon (0.030 max.)
ASTM A240
sulfur (0.030 max.)
UNS S32304 ASTM A789 3,484 cm2/L
23 C (73 F) silicon (1.00 max.)
(Type 2304) ASTM A790 (540 in2/L)
nickel (3.0 to 5.5)
ASTM A815
copper (0.05 to 0.60)
carbon (0.030 max.)
ASTM A240
sulfur (0.010 max.)
UNS S32202 ASTM A789 3,484 cm2/L
23 C (73 F) silicon (1.00 max.)
(Type 2202) ASTM A790 (540 in2/L)
nickel (1.00 to 2.80)
ASTM A815
molybdenum (0.45 max.)
iron (balance)
117
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
Informative Annex 1
(formerly Annex A)
Toxicology review and evaluation procedures
The information contained in this Disclaimer is not part of this American National Standard (ANS)
and has not been processed in accordance with ANSI’s requirements for an ANS. Therefore, this
Disclaimer may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process.
In addition, it does not contain requirements necessary for conformance to the Standard.
The toxicological review and evaluation procedures for substances imparted to drinking water through
contact with drinking water system components were removed from NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 Annex A and
reestablished in NSF/ANSI/CAN 600. Annex A was retired from NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 in December 2018.
119
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
Informative Annex 2
(formerly Annex D)
Normative drinking water criteria
The drinking water evaluation criteria for the determination of product compliance with the health effects
requirements were removed from NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 Annex D and reestablished in NSF/ANSI/CAN 600.
Annex D was retired from NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 in December 2018.
121
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
Informative Annex 3
(formerly Annex E)
Informational drinking water criteria
The revisions and tables containing the informational drinking water criteria previously listed under
Annex E are now listed under NSF/ANSI/CAN 600.
123
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
Informative Annex 4
(formerly Annex F)
Revisions to the evaluation of lead
In 2006, the DWA Lead Task Group developed proposed changes designed to increase the public health
protection of the Standard relative to the evaluation of lead leaching. The requirements were approved by
the Drinking Water Additives Joint Committee for inclusion in the Standard as normative requirements
effective July 1, 2012. Details of the revisions were maintained in Annex F of the 2007a through 2011
versions of the standard and include:
— reduction of the TAC for lead from 15 µg/L to 5 µg/L;
— reduction of the SPAC for lead from 1.5 µg/l to 0.5 µg/L;
— reduction of Q (and R) Statistic criteria from 11 to 5 for all Section 9 devices other than supply
stops, flexible plumbing connectors, and miscellaneous components; and
— reduction of Q (and R) Statistic criteria from 11 to 3 for supply stops, flexible plumbing connectors,
and miscellaneous components.
125
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
Informative Annex 5
(formerly Annex G)
Weighted average lead content evaluation procedure to a 0.25% lead requirement
The procedures for determining the lead content of drinking water system components were removed from
NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G and reestablished in NSF/ANSI 372. Annex G was retired from NSF/ANSI 61 in
October 2013 (i.e., three years after the initial adoption of NSF/ANSI 372, as outlined in Annex G).
127
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
Informative Annex 6
(formerly Annex H)
Water quality criteria considerations for piping materials in contact with drinking water
I-6.1 Background
While NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 is designed to provide standardized evaluation conditions for the assessment of
drinking water products, the test waters used in the standard cannot represent all chemistries of actual
drinking water that products may encounter during use. Metallic and nonmetallic materials in contact with
some drinking water qualities can have interactions with surfaces accelerating leaching or byproduct
release.
This annex is supplemental to local building and plumbing codes and is intended to provide information to
assist in identifying water chemistry conditions under which the various materials may experience leaching
or byproduct release of regulated contaminants at or above acceptable levels in drinking water. Due to the
numerous variables in water chemistry, premise plumbing design, and system interaction, waters having
these characteristics do not always cause excessive leaching or byproduct release; however, the risk in
these waters is elevated and the consumer / specifier should either:
— consult with local water provider / utility or public health authority to determine the local water quality
(parameters such as pH, alkalinity, PO4 dosage, etc.) that may impact materials in contact with drinking
water; or
— perform testing or analyses to verify that such materials do not pose a risk of exceeding drinking
water quality standards in the subject system; or
— put appropriate water chemistry modifications / treatment in place to remediate the water chemistry
conditions.
The reader is advised to investigate suitable performance when products using these materials are being
considered for use in water chemistries as provided in the following sections.
The materials listed below are not the only materials that under variable drinking water parameters may
leach regulated contaminants in excess of regulatory guidelines. Criteria for additional materials may be
added to this annex as they become available.
I-6.2 Criteria (by material type)

I-6.2.1 Copper (C12200)
Copper leaching or by-product release would not be suspect if the pH is greater than or equal to 7.0 and if
the water system is utilizing orthophosphate dosing for corrosion control with a PO4 residual greater than
3.3 mg PO4/L.
System operators, installers, and owners should install water treatment, adjust water quality, install
alternate materials, or verify that copper leaching or by-product release is not exceeding acceptable levels
when any of the following water quality conditions exist.
129
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
If the water system is using no orthophosphate treatment for corrosion control, or is maintaining an
orthophosphate residual less than 3.3 mg PO4/L, and:
— pH less than 6.5 in all systems;
— pH between 6.5 and 7.0 in a system with disinfection / oxidative treatment;
— pH between 7.0 and 7.5 in a system with disinfection / oxidative treatment and alkalinity greater
than 200 mg CaCO3/L; and
— pH greater than 7.5 in a system with disinfection / oxidative treatment and alkalinity greater than
250 mg CaCO3/L.
For systems conveying waters that fall within these conditions, there is an increased risk of copper leaching
or by-product release into the drinking water in excess of US EPA health-based maximum contaminant
level goal (MCLG) of 1.3 mg/L (US EPA, 1991, 2015). These water chemistry conditions have been
correlated with the potential for elevated copper release, based on a broad consensus of international
research and observation (Schock and Lytle, 2011).
I-6.2.2 Galvanized steel
The following formula is provided as a means identifying water compositions where corrosion rates for
galvanized steel may be acceptable (reference: 4MS Common Approach):
Criteria:
— pH ≥ 7.5 or free CO2  11 mg/L; and

— alkalinity ≥ 150 mg CaCO3/L; and
— S1 < 2; and
— calcium ≥ 20 mg/L; and
— conductivity  600 μS/cm at 25 °C; and
— S2 <1 or S2 > 3.
Where:
c[(Cl- )/35] + c[(NO3 - )/62] + 2 c[(SO4 2- )/96]

S1 =
c[(HCO3 - )/61]
c[(Cl- )/35] + 2 c[(SO4 2- )/96]

S2 =
c[(NO3 - )/62]
Notes:
— concentrations (c) in mg/L; and

— guidance on HCO3- derivation from pH & alkalinity follows the examples below.
130
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
Table I-6.1
Examples of galvanized steel calculation
Example water #1 Example water #2

pH 7.54 Cl- 34 mg/L pH 7.6 Cl- 53 mg/L
192 mg 245 mg
alkalinity NO3- 9 mg/L alkalinity NO3- 1 mg/L
CaCO3/L CaCO3/L
calcium 62 mg/L SO42- 56 mg/L calcium 92 mg/L SO42- 106 mg/L
340
250 µS/cm
conductivity HCO3- 84 mg/L conductivity µS/cm at HCO3- 78 mg/L
at 25 ˚C
25 ˚C
✓ pH ≥ 7.5 or free CO2  11 mg/L ✓ pH ≥ 7.5 or free CO2  11 mg/L
✓ AND alkalinity ≥ 150 mg CaCO3/L ✓ AND alkalinity ≥ 150 mg CaCO3/L
- -
Cl- NO3 SO2- Cl- NO3 SO2-
( )+( ) +2 ( 4 ) ( )+( ) +2 ( 4 )
35 62 96 35 62 96
S1 = - AND S1 = -
HCO3 HCO3
AND ( ) S1 < 2 ( )
61 61
S1 < 2 34 9 56 53 1 106
( ) + ( ) +2 ( ) ( ) + ( ) +2 ( )
35 62 96 35 62 96
S1 =  S1 = 2.92 mg/L S 1 =
84 78
( ) (S1 > 2) ( )
61 61
✓ S1 = 1.66 mg/L (0.97)+(0.15)+(1.17) (1.51)+(0.016)+(2.21)
(S1 < 2) S1 = S1 =
(1.38) (1.28)
2.29 (Does not meet 3.74
S1 = criteria) S1 =
1.38 1.28
✓ AND calcium > 20 mg/L ✓ AND calcium > 20 mg/L
✓ AND conductivity < 600 μS/cm at 25°C ✓ AND conductivity < 600 μS/cm at 25 °C
Cl- SO2- Cl- SO2-
( ) +2 ( 4 ) ( ) +2 ( 4 )
35 96 35 96
S2 = - S2 = -
NO3 NO3
AND ( ) AND ( )
62 62
S2 <1 or S2 > 3 34 56 S2 <1 or S2 > 3 53 106
( ) +2 ( ) ( ) +2 ( )
35 96 35 96
S2 = S2 =
9 1
( ) ( )
62 62
✓ S2 = 14.27 mg/L (0.97)+(1.17) ✓ S2 = 232.5 mg/L (1.51)+(2.21)
(S2 > 3) S2 = (S2 > 3) S2 =
(0.15) (0.016)
2.14 3.72
S2 = S2 =
0.15 0.016
Water #1 has a composition where corrosion rates for Water #2 has a composition where corrosion rates for
galvanized steel may be acceptable. galvanized steel may NOT be acceptable.
131
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
I-6.3 Determining HCO3- concentration from alkalinity using Standard Methods

4500-CO2 Carbon Dioxide (Editorial revisions, 2011)
Applicable for waters which:
— have a total alkalinity due almost entirely to hydroxides, carbonates, or bicarbonates;
— do not contain the salts of weak acids (other than carbonic acid) or those acids are present in
extremely small amounts; and
— do not exceed 500 mg/L of total dissolved solids.
Further some treatment processes such as superchlorination and coagulation can significantly affect pH
and total alkalinity values of a poorly buffered water of low alkalinity and low total dissolved mineral content.
This calculation is also limited for use at a single temperature of 25 ˚C. In such instances where the
previously mentioned guidelines are exceeded this calculation may not be applicable (from Standard
Methods 4500, Section D.2.a. bicarbonate alkalinity equation):
CaCO3 T - 5.0 × 10(pH-10)

HCO3 - as mg =
L 1 + 0.94 × 10(pH-10)
Where:
T = total alkalinity, mg CaCO3/L
Example water
total alkalinity (as CaCO3) 60 mg/L
pH 8.7
CaCO3 T - 5.0 × 10(pH-10)

HCO3 - as mg =
L 1 + 0.94 × 10(pH-10)
60 mg/L - 5.0 × 10(8.7-10)

HCO3 - =
1 + 0.94 × 10(8.7-10)
60 mg/L - 0.25
HCO3 - =
1 + 0.047
59.75 mg/L
HCO3 - =
1.047
HCO3 - = 57 mg/L
132
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
References
4MS Common Approach: Acceptance of Metallic Materials used in Products in Contact With Drinking
Water, 6th Revision, May 27, 2016. <www.umweltbundesamt.de/en/topics/water/drinking-water/distributing-
drinking-water/approval-harmonization-4ms-initiative#undefined>
Schock, M. and Lytle, D. (2011). Chapter 20: Internal corrosion and deposition control. In: J.K. Edzwald
(ed.), Water quality and treatment: a handbook on drinking water. 6th edition. McGraw Hill and American
Water Works Association, Denver, Colorado.
US EPA (1991) 40 CFR Parts 141 and 142, Maximum Contaminant Level Goals and National Primary
Drinking Water Regulations for Lead and Copper; Final Rule. US Environmental Protection Agency,
Washington, DC. 56 FR 26460, June 7, 1991.
US EPA. (2015). National Primary Drinking Water Regulations. US Environmental Protection Agency.
Accessed on September 10, 2015 at: <www.epa.gov/ground-water-and-drinking-water/national-primary-
drinking-water-regulations>
133
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
Informative Annex 719

Revisions to the evaluation of lead
The information contained in this Disclaimer is not part of this American National Standard (ANS) and has not
been processed in accordance with ANSI’s requirements for an ANS. Therefore, this Disclaimer may contain
material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process. In addition, it does not contain
requirements necessary for conformance to the Standard.
I-7.1 Background
At the 2017 annual meeting of the Joint Committee on Drinking Water Additives – System Components, the issue
was raised that many states and cities are now conducting aggressive monitoring programs for lead in schools and
day care centers. The EPA and CDC have determined that no amount level of lead is acceptable. The American
Academy of Pediatrics has called for regulations limiting exposure of lead in drinking water for schools and day care
centers to no more than 1 part per billion. However, most school monitoring is done using the EPA 3Ts program
guidance, which uses 250 mL first draw samples, not 1 L as is used by the Lead and Copper rule. This has been
the basis for the Q value used for NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 Section 9, after normalization to 1 L. A task group was formed
to investigate implementing a special higher-stringency certification level for products to be used in schools,
day care centers, and for consumers desiring the additional level of protection. The task group considered the
following approaches: a lower Q value, an additional requirement for the average lead release of test samples
Day 3, or both. In 2018, a second task group was formed to develop proposed criteria for the option they decided
to pursue.
After an initial ballot was proposed for the new, optional requirement, concerns were raised over actions that have
been initiated by the state of California and possibly others to mandate a lower Q value. At the 2019 Joint Committee
meeting, members concurred that the committee should take a proactive approach to make this optional
requirement mandatory after a transition period to allow manufacturers sufficient time to comply.
NOTE — Due to the significant impact of these changes, the Joint Committee on Drinking Water Additives – System
Components established an extended effective date for the current optional requirement to become mandatory.
The 01/01/2024 effective date was selected provide manufacturers a reasonable time to reengineer products to meet
the new requirements, to have them tested, and to make them available in the marketplace. Manufacturers and certifiers
are encouraged to actively pursue conformance to the new requirement prior to 01/01/2024.
I-7.2 Incorporation of revisions into Standard

The optional requirements for lower lead leaching shall be removed and the revisions in this annex shall be
incorporated into the body of this Standard on January 1, 2024. This date is based on the date of product
manufacture.
I-7.3 Revisions
9.5.1 Evaluation of lead
For endpoint devices other than commercial kitchen devices, supply stops, flexible plumbing connectors, and
miscellaneous components, the lead test statistic Q shall not exceed 5 1 µg when normalized for the
1 L (0.26 gal) first draw sample. For commercial kitchen devices, the lead test statistic Q shall not exceed 5 1 µg
when normalized for the 18.9 L (5 gal) first draw sample. For supply stops, flexible plumbing connectors,
19The information contained in this annex has been processed in accordance with ANSI and SCC requirements for public review
and consensus ballot. The requirements were approved by the Joint Committee on Drinking Water Additives – System
Components for inclusion in the Standard as normative requirements effective January 1, 2024.
135
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
and miscellaneous components, the lead test statistic Q shall not exceed 3 0.5 µg when normalized for the 1 L
(0.26 gal) first draw sample.
For kitchen faucets that have been exposed simultaneously with the side spray component, the lead test statistic
Q value for the entire assembly shall not exceed 5 1 µg. When the kitchen faucet and the side spray component
have been exposed separately, the lead test statistic Q value for the faucet and side spray shall be added and shall
not exceed 5 1 µg.
9.5.1.1 Optional lower lead requirements
The following are optional evaluation criteria available for endpoint devices to demonstrate compliance with a lower
lead leaching criteria. Products shall also comply with the full requirements of NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 in order to be
deemed compliant to this section.
9.5.1.1 Evaluation requirements
For endpoint devices other than supply stops, flexible plumbing connectors, and miscellaneous components, the
test statistics Q or R calculated in accordance with N-1.8.9 shall not exceed 1 µg. For supply stops, flexible plumbing
connectors, and miscellaneous components, the lead test statistic Q shall not exceed 0.5 µg.
9.5.1.2 9.5.1.1 Product labeling requirements
Attested compliance of product to the lower lead leaching criteria of this section Standard shall be noted in the
certification listing. Consumer-facing product packaging or labeling shall also indicate this compliance by identifying
the standard and Q level attested according to Section 9.5.1.1.1 (e.g., “NSF/ANSI/CAN 61: Q ≤ 1” or
“NSF/ANSI/CAN 61: Q ≤ 0.5”).
Rationale: As product can remain in the marketplace for extended periods of time, the marking
requirements in this section need to be maintained to enable differentiation between product meeting these
requirements versus those in an earlier version of the standard and a higher Q criterion. When the NSF 61
Joint Committee has determined that sufficient time has passed and this labeling requirement for the Q is
no longer warranted the ballot process can be followed to pursue its removal.
.
.
.
N-1.8.9.3 Initial test statistic
.
.
.
For end-point devices other than supply stops, flexible plumbing connectors, and miscellaneous components:
— case I: If Q ≤ 5 1 μg, the product line has tested as acceptable; or

— case II: If Q > 5 1 μg, the product line has tested as unacceptable.
— case I: If Q ≤ 3 0.5 μg, the product line has tested as acceptable; or

— case II: If Q > 3 0.5 μg, the product line has tested as unacceptable.
.
.
.
136
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
N-1.8.9.4 Retest statistic

.
.
.
— case I: If R ≤ 5 1 μg, the product line has tested as acceptable; or
— case II: If R > 5 1 μg, the product line has tested as unacceptable.
— case I: If R ≤ 3 0.5 μg, the product line has tested as acceptable; or

— case II: If R > 3 0.5 μg, the product line has tested as unacceptable.
137
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
Interpretation Annex
The information contained in this Annex is not part of this American National Standard (ANS) and
has not been processed in accordance with ANSI’s requirements for an ANS. Therefore, this Annex
may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process.
Interpretation #1: Normative Annex 2 (formerly Annex C) – Acceptable materials
Requestor’s interpretation of the Section:
CDA is interested in performing testing on a number of ‘lead-free’ brass rod alloys for potential inclusion
as ‘acceptable materials’ according to the requirements of NSF/ANSI/CAN Standard 61, 2019,
Annex C for use as a material for Section 9 products. Prior to having the materials tested, there are a
couple of points we need clarified to assure that if we proceed with this extensive testing that our
approach would be acceptable. As such, I would greatly appreciate your assistance in providing an
interpretation and answering a few questions outlined below.
Annex C is fairly straightforward with many of the requirements, but there are a few points that we
would like to be confident that we understand:
1) Section N-2.3 (formerly Section C.3) states, “Thirty randomly selected samples from a variety
of manufacturers of the material…” We consider the following variables to be most significant in
manufacturing finished parts from lead-free brass rods: the manufacturer of the brass rods, the
brass rod production lot, and the machine shop that machines the brass rods into finished parts.
a) If we selected a combination of the above variables for each alloy to make our 30 samples
for testing, will it meet the requirement of “thirty randomly selected samples?”
b) Do we understand this requirement appropriately? For your benefit we would describe

the variables as follows:
⎯ brass rod manufacturer: The company that converts raw materials (e.g., brass/copper
scrap, virgin elements) into brass rods
⎯ production lot (per ASTM B249): Product of one cast bar from a single melt charge, or
one continuous casting run that has been continuously processed and subject to inspection
at one time
⎯ machine shop: The company that takes brass rods and machines them (e.g., drilling,
lathing, milling) into finished parts
2) Section N-2.4 (formerly Section C.4) states in the second bulleted point, “literature that
comprehensively addresses the production process…”
a) If we replaced the term “addresses” with “describes” does the requirement have the same
meaning? If not, could you please clarify what is meant by “addresses?”
3) Our goal would be to have the materials tested and arrive at the greatest surface area to volume
ratio that the test results would allow. To do so we would like to use a test sample that is
6 inches long with an inside diameter of 0.327 inches. If the Q result was 0.1 we would anticipate
that we could list a surface area of 60 square inches/L for finished products and
30 square inches/L for components since the Q statistic calculated would be below the proposed
criteria of 1 µg and 0.5 µg respectively.
139
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
a) Can you please confirm this calculation is correct? The reason we chose 6 inches was for
practical aspects of handling the samples and for the efficient use of raw materials.
4) We are intending to test 6 inch rod segments that have had the centers drilled out with one end
machined with interior threads. The test samples would have a piece of plastic threaded with the
sample exposing 1/3 of the threads. Our reason for making the sample with an internal thread on
one end is to simulate the worst-case processed sample with the hope that these materials would
be exempt from testing if used within the approved surface area.
a) Do you think this is necessary and would it help our manufacturers?
Interpretation decision:
The assumptions made for approved stainless steel materials under Annex N-2 (formerly Annex C
noted above) cannot necessarily be applied to brass rod alloys due to differences in manufacturing.
Of note, stainless steel does not contain lead and as such may not be subject to the same variability
as brasses containing even small amounts of lead. The proposed testing method and sampling plan
should be submitted to the Joint Committee as a separate issue paper prior to undertaking any testing.
1. The requirement as described above has not been interpreted correctly. Section 3.4 of
NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 states that “Products manufactured... However, extraction testing for
contaminants contributed by processes specific to a production site shall be considered
formulation-dependent analytes.” The interpretation of this section would indicate that qualification
testing for inclusion in Annex N-2 would include samples from manufacturers of brass rods but
exclude those from machine shops. Since machine shops include processes (machining, drilling,
etc.) that could contribute to increased leaching of contaminants (i.e., lead), from the finished parts.
Differences in machine shops would be covered under certification testing of the final machined
parts.
2. It is agreed that the term “describes” is consistent with meaning of “addresses” in the context
of the statement in Section N-2.4 (formerly Section C.4 as described above).
3. Since NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 applies to the finished products and not raw materials, this calculation
would need to be addressed in the testing proposal and agreed upon by the Joint Committee.
4. This methodology should be submitted to the Joint Committee along with the proposal (and in
consideration of the response under #1) in an issue paper.
Interpretation #2: Sections N-1.2.3 and N-1.4.1 (Section 8 sample requirements)
Requestor’s interpretation of the Section:
We have a client who is looking for clarification on the sample requirements for extraction testing to
multiple pH waters for products under section 8. The standard does not explicitly state whether a single
sample may be reused for multiple pH exposures or if a new sample must be used for each pH, so
client is interpreting this to mean that one sample can be used multiple times.
We are seeking clarification on whether or not a single sample may be used for the exposure testing
for multiple pH level tests.
140
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 – 2021
Interpretation decision:
Although not explicitly stated in the standard, the intent of the exposure testing under NSF/ANSI/CAN
61 is that a new product sample (i.e., a newly manufactured product that has not previously been
installed or undergone any exposure) should be used for each of the multiple pH level tests. Leaching
from materials often decreases over time, and thus testing a sample that has already been exposed to
water (via installation or prior testing) would result in a less conservative test than one performed on
“new” product.
Furthermore, the standard does provide clear instructions on the timelines for conditioning and
exposure of products. For example, conditioning for mechanical devices is described in Section N-1.4.3
(which points back to section 4.5.5), and the exposure sequence is summarized in Tables N-1.8 and
N-1.9. These sections explain the requirement for 14 days of conditioning and 3 days for exposure. If
you were to perform conditioning/exposure of the same sample at multiple pH in series, then the second
exposure would have undergone more “conditioning” than directed by the standard (because it would
have been conditioned/exposed for 14 + 3 days in the first pH exposure, plus an additional 14 + 3 in
the subsequent exposure).
France Lemieux
Chair, Joint Committee on Drinking Water Additives – System Components
141
Standards20
The following Standards established and adopted by NSF as minimum voluntary consensus Standards are used internationally:
Std. # Standard title
2 Food Equipment
3 Commercial Warewashing Equipment
4 Commercial Cooking, Rethermalization, and Powered Hot Food Holding and Transport Equipment
5 Water Heaters, Hot Water Supply Boilers, and Heat Recovery Equipment
6 Dispensing Freezers
7 Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers
8 Commercial Powered Food Preparation Equipment
12 Automatic Ice Making Equipment
13 Refuse Processors and Processing Systems
14 Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials
18 Manual Food and Beverage Dispensing Equipment
20 Commercial Bulk Milk Dispensing Equipment
21 Thermoplastic Refuse Containers
24 Plumbing System Components for Recreational Vehicles
25 Vending Machines for Food And Beverages
29 Detergent and Chemical Feeders for Commercial Spray-Type Dishwashing Machines
35 High Pressure Decorative Laminates for Surfacing Food Service Equipment
37 Air Curtains for Entranceways in Food and Food Service Establishments
40 Residential Wastewater Treatment Systems
41 Non-liquid Saturated Treatment Systems
42 Drinking Water Treatment Units – Aesthetic Effects
44 Residential Cation Exchange Water Softeners
46 Evaluation of Components and Devices Used in Wastewater Treatment Systems
49 Biosafety Cabinetry – Design, Construction, Performance, and Field Certification
50 Equipment for Swimming Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs, and Other Recreational Water Facilities
51 Food Equipment Materials
52 Supplemental Flooring
53 Drinking Water Treatment Units – Health Effects
55 Ultraviolet Microbiological Water Treatment Systems
58 Reverse Osmosis Drinking Water Treatment Systems
59 Mobile Food Carts
60 Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals – Health Effects
61 Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects
62 Drinking Water Distillation Systems
140 Sustainable Carpet Assessment
169 Special Purpose Food Equipment and Devices
170 Glossary of Food Equipment Terminology
173 Dietary Supplements
177 Shower Filtration Systems – Aesthetic Effects
20The information contained in this list of Standards is not part of this American National Standard (ANS) / National Standard of
Canada (NSC) and has not been processed in accordance with ANSI’s / SCC’s requirements for an ANS/NSC. Therefore, this
Standards page may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process. In addition, it does
not contain requirements necessary for conformance to the Standard.
184 Residential Dishwashers

Conformity Assessment Requirements for Certification Bodies that Certify Products Pursuant to
223
NSF/ANSI 60 Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals – Health Effects
244 Drinking Water Treatment Units Supplemental Microbiological Water Treatment Systems – Filtration
245 Wastewater Treatment Systems – Nitrogen Reduction
305 Personal Care Products Containing Organic Ingredients
321 Goldenseal Root (Hydrastis canadensis)
330 Glossary of Drinking Water Treatment Unit Terminology
332 Sustainability Assessment for Resilient Floor Coverings
336 Sustainability Assessment for Commercial Furnishings Fabric
342 Sustainability Assessment for Wallcovering Products
347 Sustainability Assessment for Single-Ply Roofing Membranes
350 Onsite Residential and Commercial Water Reuse Treatment Systems
350-1 Onsite Residential and Commercial Greywater Treatment Systems for Subsurface Discharge
358-1 Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings for Water-Based Ground-Source “Geothermal” Heat Pump Systems
358-2 Polypropylene Pipe and Fittings for Water-Based Ground-Source “Geothermal” Heat Pump Systems
Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe and Fittings for Water-based Ground-Source (Geothermal) Heat
358-3
Pump Systems
Polyethylene of Raised Temperature (PE-RT) Tubing and Fittings for Water-based Ground-Source
358-4
(Geothermal) Heat Pump Systems
359 Valves for Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Water Distribution Tubing Systems
360 Wastewater Treatment Systems – Field Performance Verification
363 Good Manufacturing Practices (GMP) for Pharmaceutical Excipients
372 Drinking Water Treatment System Components – Lead Content
375 Sustainability Assessment for Water Contact Products
385 Disinfection Mechanics
391.1 General Sustainability Assessment Criteria for Professional Services
401 Drinking Water Treatment Units – Emerging Compounds / Incidental Contaminants
416 Sustainability Assessment for Water Treatment Chemical Products
418 Effluent Filters – Field Longevity Testing
419 Public Drinking Water Equipment Performance – Filtration
426 Environmental Leadership and Corporate Social Responsibility Assessment of Servers
437 Glossary of Wastewater Technology Terminology
455-1 Terminology for the NSF 455 Portfolio of Standards
455-2 Good Manufacturing Practices for Dietary Supplements
455-3 Good Manufacturing Practices for Cosmetics
455-4 Good Manufacturing Practices for Over-the-Counter Drugs
456 Vaccine Storage
457 Sustainability Leadership Standard for Photovoltaic Modules and Photovoltaic Inverters
Conformity Assessment Requirements for Certification Bodies that Certify Pool Chemicals Pursuant to
505 NSF/ANSI/CAN 50: Equipment and Chemicals for Swimming Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs, and Other
Recreational Water Facilities
600 Health Effects Evaluation and Criteria for Chemicals in Drinking Water
14159-1 Hygiene Requirements for the Design of Meat and Poultry Processing Equipment
Hygiene Requirements for the Design of Hand-held Tools Used in Meat and Poultry Processing
14159-2
Equipment
Hygiene Requirements for the Design of Mechanical Belt Conveyors Used in Meat and Poultry
14159-3
Processing Equipment
NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 - 2021

Health Effects Evaluation and Criteria
for Chemicals in Drinking Water
NSF International, an independent, not-for-profit,
nongovernmental organization, is dedicated to
being the leading global provider of public health
and safety-based risk management solutions
while serving the interests of all stakeholders.
This Standard is subject to revision.

Contact NSF to confirm this revision is current.
Users of this Standard may request clarifications and

interpretations, or propose revisions by contacting:
Chair, Joint Committees on Drinking Water Additives

c/o NSF International
789 North Dixboro Road, PO Box 130140
Ann Arbor, Michigan 48113-0140 USA
Phone: (734) 769-8010 Fax: (734) 769-0109
Email: info@nsf.org
Web: <www.nsf.org>
NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021


Standard Developer
NSF International
ICS 13.060.20; 71.100.80
Designated as an ANSI Standard

April 9, 2021
American National Standards Institute
Designated as a National Standard of Canada

April 9, 2021
Standards Council of Canada
i
Prepared by
The NSF Joint Committees on Drinking Water Additives
Recommended for adoption by

The NSF Council of Public Health Consultants
Adopted by
NSF International
October 2018
Revised August 2019 Revised June 2021
Published by
NSF International
PO Box 130140, Ann Arbor, Michigan 48113-0140, USA
For ordering copies or for making inquiries with regard to this Standard, please reference the designation
“NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021.”
Cette Norme Nationale du Canada est disponible en versions Franҫaise et Anglaise.
Copyright 2021 NSF International
Previous editions © 2019, 2018
Unless otherwise specified, no part of this publication may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and microfilm, without permission in writing from
NSF International.
Printed in the United States of America.
ii
Disclaimers1
NSF International (NSF), in performing its functions in accordance with its objectives, does not assume or
undertake to discharge any responsibility of the manufacturer or any other party. The opinions and findings
of NSF represent its professional judgment. NSF shall not be responsible to anyone for the use of or reliance
upon this Standard by anyone. NSF shall not incur any obligation or liability for damages, including
consequential damages, arising out of or in connection with the use, interpretation of, or reliance upon this
Standard. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard to judge the suitability of the ANS/NSC for the
user’s purpose.
NSF Standards provide basic criteria to promote sanitation and protection of public health and the
environment. Provisions for mechanical and electrical safety have not been included in this Standard
because governmental agencies or other national standards-setting organizations provide safety
requirements.
Participation in NSF Standards development activities by regulatory agency representatives (federal, state,
and local) shall not constitute their agency's endorsement of NSF or any of its Standards.
Preference is given to the use of performance criteria measurable by examination or testing in

NSF Standards development when such performance criteria may reasonably be used in lieu of design,
materials, or construction criteria.
The illustrations, if provided, are intended to assist in understanding their adjacent standard requirements.
However, the illustrations may not include all requirements for a specific product or unit, nor do they show
the only method of fabricating such arrangements. Such partial drawings shall not be used to justify
improper or incomplete design and construction.
At the time of this publication, examples of programs and processes were provided for general guidance.
This information is given for the convenience of users of this standard and does not constitute an
endorsement by NSF International. Equivalent programs and processes may be used.
Unless otherwise referenced, the annexes are not considered an integral part of NSF Standards. The
annexes are provided as general guidelines to the manufacturer, regulatory agency, user, or certifying
organization.
iii
Contents
1 General ................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Purpose ......................................................................................................................................... 1
2 Definitions ............................................................................................................................................... 1
3 Toxicology review and evaluation procedures ....................................................................................... 6

3.1 General requirements ................................................................................................................... 6
3.2 Data requirements for published risk assessments ...................................................................... 6
3.3 Data requirements for new or updated risk assessments ............................................................ 8
3.4 Data requirements for evaluating short-term exposures ............................................................ 10
3.5 Risk estimation for published assessments ................................................................................ 10
3.6 Risk estimation using new and updated risk assessments ........................................................ 11
3.7 Risk estimation for short-term exposure (STEL calculation) ...................................................... 20
3.8 Guidelines for the use of read-across approaches to establishing drinking water criteria ......... 21
3.9 Key elements of a risk assessment for drinking water additive chemicals ................................. 27
4 Normative drinking water criteria .......................................................................................................... 41

4.1 General ....................................................................................................................................... 41
4.2 US EPA and Health Canada drinking water criteria ................................................................... 41
4.3 Joint Peer Review Steering Committee (JPRSC) reconciled criteria ......................................... 41
4.4 Externally peer-reviewed drinking water criteria ......................................................................... 42
4.5 NSF International drinking water criteria (not externally peer-reviewed).................................... 42
4.6 Drinking water criteria based on US EPA guidance concentrations ........................................... 42
4.7 TOE chemical list ........................................................................................................................ 42
Informative Annex 1 References for toxicology review and evaluation procedures ............................... 181
v
Foreword2
The purpose of this Standard is to define the toxicological review and evaluation procedures for the
evaluation of substances imparted to drinking water through contact with drinking water system components
(and drinking water additives). It is intended to establish the human health risk, if any, of the substances
imparted to drinking water under the anticipated use conditions of the product. Table 4.1 contains evaluation
criteria for the determination of product compliance to the health effects requirements of drinking water
standards in which this Standard is cited, including NSF/ANSI/CAN 60 and NSF/ANSI/CAN 61. This
information was previously published under NSF/ANSI 60, Annexes A and C, and NSF/ANSI 61,
Annexes A and D. In 2018, NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 was developed to increase the accessibility of this
information and create a single source for the multiple drinking water standards that reference these criteria.
This edition of the Standard contains the following revision:
Issue 5
This revision adds a definition for reference concentration (RfC) in Section 2; updates the drinking water
intake rates under Section 3; and updates Table 4.1 pass/fail values for contaminants and revises footnote
7 to reference new optional lower lead Q value under NSF/ANSI/CAN 61.
This Standard was developed by the NSF Joint Committees on Drinking Water Additives using the
consensus process described by the American National Standards Institute and the Standards Council of
Canada’s Requirements and Guidance. At the time of approval, the Joint Committees consisted of 9 public
health / regulatory, 20 industry, 10 product certifier / testing lab, and 8 user representatives.
This Standard has been designated as a National Standard of Canada (NSC) in compliance with
requirements and guidance set out by the Standards Council of Canada (SCC).
This Standard and the accompanying text are intended for voluntary use by certifying organizations, regu-
latory agencies, and/or manufacturers as a basis of providing assurances that adequate health protection
exists for covered products.
Suggestions for improvement of this Standard are welcome. This Standard is maintained on a Continuous
Maintenance schedule and can be opened for comment at any time. Comments should be sent to:
Chair, Joint Committees on Drinking Water Additives at standards@nsf.org, or c/o NSF International,
Standards Department, PO Box 130140, Ann Arbor, Michigan 48113-0140, USA.
vii
SCC Foreword3
A National Standard of Canada is a standard developed by a Standards Council of Canada (SCC)

accredited standards development organization, in compliance with requirements and guidance set out by
the SCC. More information on National Standards of Canada can be found at <www.scc.ca>.
SCC is a Crown corporation within the portfolio of Innovation, Science and Economic Development (ISED)
Canada. With the goal of enhancing Canada’s economic competitiveness and social well-being, SCC leads
and facilitates the development and use of national and international standards. SCC also coordinates
Canadian participation in standards development, and identifies strategies to advance Canadian
standardization efforts.
Accreditation services are provided by SCC to various customers, including product certifiers, testing
laboratories, and standards development organizations. A list of SCC programs and accredited bodies is
publicly available at <www.scc.ca>.
ix
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
NSF/ANSI/CAN Standard

1 General
1.1 Purpose
The following information defines the toxicological review and evaluation procedures for the evaluation of
substances imparted to drinking water through contact with drinking water system components (and
drinking water additives). It is intended to establish the human health risk, if any, of the substances imparted
to drinking water under the anticipated use conditions of the product. Table 4.1 of this Standard contains
evaluation criteria that have been determined according to the requirements of this Standard.
2 Definitions
2.1 acute toxicity: Effects that occur immediately or develop rapidly after a single administration of a
substance. Acute toxicity may also be referred to as immediate toxicity (US EPA, 2011a).
2.2 allergic reaction: Adverse reaction to a chemical resulting from previous sensitization to that
chemical or to a structurally similar one (US EPA, 2011a).
2.3 analogue approach: The term analogue approach is used when read-across is employed between
a few, very structurally similar substances for which it is not possible to establish a trend or a regular pattern.
As a result of the structural similarity, a given (toxicological or other) property of one substance (the source)
is used to predict the same property for another substance (the target), for which this property is not
available. The outcome of a study conducted with the source substance is read-across for all investigated
parameters to the target substance. A worst-case approach may also be used (ECHA, 2017). Examples
have been published by the EC (2004, 2007).
2.4 benchmark dose (BMDL) (lower 95% confidence limit): The lower 95% confidence limit on the
dose that would be expected to produce a specified response in X% of a test population. This dose may be
expressed as BMDLX (adapted from Barnes et al., 1995). The lowest, relevant BMDLx from a dataset can
be considered a potential point-of-departure compared to available NOAEL and LOAEL values.
NOTE — For the purposes of this Standard, the BMDL shall be calculated at the 10% response level for
quantal data and one control standard deviation for continuous data, unless the data support a different
response level and justification is provided. For example, a frank effect, such as neurotoxicity or a fetal effect,
often warrant a lower benchmark response level, such as 5%.
2.5 chemical-specific adjustment factor (CSAF) approach: a method to incorporate quantitative,

chemical-specific data on interspecies differences or human variability in either toxicokinetics or
toxicodynamics (mode of action) into the risk assessment by modifying the relevant default UF
(i.e., interspecies or intraspecies UF) (IPCS, 2005 and US EPA, 2014a).
1
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
2.6 chronic effect: An effect that occurs as a result of repeated or long-term (chronic) exposures
(US EPA, 2011a).
2.7 chronic exposure: Repeated exposure by the oral, dermal, or inhalation route for more than
approximately 10% of the life span in humans (more than approximately 90 days to 2 years in typically used
laboratory animal species) (US EPA, 2011a).
2.8 chronic toxicity: The capability of a substance to cause adverse human health effects as a result of
chronic exposure (US EPA, 2011a).
2.9 computational models: Computerized predictive tools that are sometimes referred to as “in silico”
models (US EPA, 2012a).
2.10 continuous data: A measurement of effect that is expressed on a continuous scale, e.g., body weight
or serum enzyme levels (US EPA, 1995).
2.11 critical effect: The first adverse effect, or its known precursor, that occurs as the dose rate
increases (US EPA, 2011a). This can include a group of effects observed at the lowest dose among those
evaluated and the effect(s) are statistically- and/or biologically-significant compared to control groups.
2.12 data-derived extrapolation factor (DDEF): The process of replacing default toxicokinetics or
toxicodynamics subfactors for interspecies or intraspecies (i.e., human variability) uncertainty by numerical
values, the magnitude of which are based on specific data (US EPA, 2014a). DDEFs can be derived for a
single agent or chemical, for a class of chemicals with shared chemical or toxicological properties, or for a
group of chemicals that share a mode or mechanism of action or TK characteristics.
2.13 dosimetric adjustment factor (DAF): A numerical value or animal / human dose metric ratio used
to extrapolate laboratory animal exposure concentrations to human equivalent exposure concentrations
(US EPA, 2011). DAF can be based on allometric scaling of body weight or other justified chemical-specific
data and is generally described as addressing interspecies differences in chemical disposition or
toxicokinetics.
2.14 ED10: Effective dose 10; a dose estimated to cause a 10% response in a test population
(US EPA, 1996).
2.15 flowing normalization conditions: Mathematical normalization procedures that reflect field
exposure scenarios for chemical contaminants from specific water distribution products under conditions of
continuous water flow, as distinguished from normalization procedures to account for static conditions.
These normalizations are described in NSF/ANSI/CAN 60 and NSF/ANSI/CAN 61.
2.16 genetic toxicity: Direct interaction with DNA that has the potential to cause heritable changes to
the cell.
2.17 human equivalent dose (HED): An estimate of the animal exposure of interest (e.g., NOAEL or
POD) translated to a biologically-motivated common scale for use in derivation of the RfD (US EPA, 2011b).
The preferred approach is to use a PBPK. If a PBPK model (or data to develop such model) is not available,
a CSAF or DAF supported by chemical-specific data should be considered. If inadequate data are available
to derive a CSAF or DAF, the default approach of interspecies allometric scaling of BW 3/4 power should
be used, when relevant.
2.18 irreversible toxicity: Toxic effects to a tissue that cannot be repaired (US EPA, 2011a).
2.19 LD50: The dose of a chemical taken by mouth or absorbed by the skin which is expected to cause
death in 50% of the treated test animals.
2
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
2.20 LED10: Lowest effective dose 10; the lower 95% confidence limit on a dose estimated to cause a
10% response in a test population (US EPA, 1996).
2.21 local toxicity: Effects that occur at the portal of entry or site of first contact between the biological
system and the toxicant (US EPA, 2011a).
2.22 lowest observed adverse effect level (LOAEL): The lowest exposure concentration at which
statistically or biologically significant increases in frequency or severity of effects are observed between the
exposed population and its appropriate control group (US EPA, 2011a).
2.23 margin of exposure (MOE): The LED10 or other POD, such as a NOAEL, divided by the
environmental dose of interest (US EPA, 1996a).
2.24 maximum contaminant level (MCL): The maximum concentration of a regulated contaminant that
is permitted in a public drinking water supply, as defined under the Federal Safe Drinking Water Act.
NOTE — If the manufacturer requests review to relevant alternate regulatory requirements, the certifying
agency can consider alternative regulatory levels, e.g., Canadian maximum acceptable concentrations
(MACs).
2.25 mode of action: Understanding how chemicals perturb normal biological function; the key steps in
the toxic response after chemical interaction at the target site that is responsible for the physiological
outcome or pathology of the chemical (US EPA, 2012a).
2.26 no observed adverse effect level (NOAEL): An exposure concentration at which no statistically
or biologically significant increases in the frequency or severity of adverse effects are observed between
an exposed population and its appropriate control. Some physiological effects may be produced at this
concentration, but they are not considered as toxicologically significant or adverse, or as precursors to
adverse effects (US EPA, 2011a).
2.27 nonregulated substance: A substance for which a statutory concentration limit does not exist.
2.28 peer review: A documented critical review of a scientific or technical work product conducted by
qualified individuals or organizations who are independent of those who performed the work, but who are
collectively equivalent or superior in technical expertise to those who performed the work. It includes an
in-depth assessment of the assumptions, calculations, extrapolations, alternate interpretations,
methodology, acceptance criteria, and conclusions pertaining to the work product and the documentation
that supports the conclusions reached in the report. Peer review is intended to ensure that the work product
is technically adequate, competently performed, properly documented, and satisfies established
requirements (US EPA, 2015b).
2.29 physiologically-based pharmacokinetic model (PBPK): A model that estimates the dose to a
target tissue or organ by taking into account the route of exposure, rate of absorption into the body,
distribution among target organs and tissues, metabolism, and excretion (US EPA, 2011a).
2.30 point of departure (POD): A data point or an estimated point that can be considered to be in the
range of observation. The standard POD preferably is the LED10, which is the lower 95% confidence limit
on a dose associated with 10% extra risk (adapted from Barnes et al., 1995). If a LED10, such as a BMDL10
is not available or cannot be estimated, a NOAEL or LOAEL can be considered.
2.31 qualitative risk assessment: An estimation of the risk associated with the exposure to a
substance using a nonquantitative methodology.
2.32 quantal data: A dichotomous measure of effect; each animal is scored “normal” or “affected” and
the measure of effect is the proportion of scored animals that are affected (US EPA, 1995).
3
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
2.33 quantitative risk assessment: An estimation of the risk associated with the exposure to a
substance using a methodology that employs evaluation of dose response relationships.
2.34 range of extrapolation: Doses that are outside of the range of empirical observation in animal
studies, human studies, or both (adapted from Barnes et al., 1995).
2.35 range of observation: Doses that are within the range of empirical observation in animal studies,
human studies, or both (adapted from Barnes et al., 1995).
2.36 read-across: Technique of filling data gaps. To “read-across” is to apply data from a tested
chemical (i.e., analog) for a particular property or effect (cancer, reproductive toxicity, etc.) to a similar
untested chemical. The read-across technique is often applied within groups of similar chemicals
assembled for assessment using either analog approach (grouping based on a very limited number of
chemicals) or category approach (grouping based on a larger number of chemicals) (US EPA, 2012a).
2.37 reference concentration (RfC): An estimate (with uncertainty spanning perhaps an order of
magnitude) of a continuous inhalation exposure to the human population (including sensitive subgroups)
that is likely to be without an appreciable risk of deleterious effects during a lifetime (US EPA, 2011b).
2.38 reference dose (RfD): An estimate (with uncertainty spanning approximately an order of
magnitude) of a daily exposure to the human population (including sensitive subgroups) that is likely to be
without an appreciable risk of deleterious effects during a lifetime (US EPA, 2011).
2.39 regulated substance: A substance for which a quantitative human health risk assessment has
been performed and utilized in promulgation of a statutory concentration limit for drinking water.
2.40 relative source contribution (RSC): Estimation of the relative contribution of the substance from
the media of interest (e.g., ingested tap water) to the total exposure from all sources, including air and food,
for the purpose of calculating evaluation criteria for noncarcinogens (US EPA, 1991). The contribution of
tap water from preparation of food with tap water that is not ultimately ingested with the food should be
considered when determining the RSC.
2.41 reversible toxicity: Toxic effects that can be repaired, usually by a specific tissue’s ability to
regenerate or mend itself after chemical exposure (US EPA, 2011a) and that are applicable primarily for
short-term exposure scenarios.
2.42 short-term exposure: Repeated exposure duration greater than 24 hours up to 30 days
(US EPA, 2011a).
2.43 short-term exposure level (STEL): A maximum concentration of a contaminant that is permitted
in drinking water for an acute exposure calculated in accordance with Section 3 of this Standard.
2.44 single product allowable concentration (SPAC): The maximum concentration of a contaminant
in drinking water that a single product is allowed to contribute as defined by Section 3 of this Standard.
2.45 source substance: In a read-across approach, a toxicity endpoint for one substance (target
substance) of unknown toxicity is predicted based on empirical data for the same endpoint from (an)other
substance(s), (source substance(s)). Consequently, the read-across approach is considered property
(i.e., endpoint-specific (adapted from ECHA, 2017)). Synonyms: analog or surrogate substance.
2.46 static normalization conditions: Mathematical normalization procedures that reflect field
exposure scenarios for chemical contaminants from specific water distribution products that can be subject
to static periods (i.e., nonflowing) of water flow, as distinguished from normalization procedures to account
for flowing conditions. These normalizations are described in NSF/ANSI/CAN 60 and NSF/ANSI/CAN 61.
4
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
2.47 subchronic exposure: Repeated exposure by the oral, dermal, or inhalation route for more than
30 days, up to approximately 10% of the life span in humans (more than 30 days up to approximately
90 days in typically used laboratory animal species) (US EPA, 2011a).
2.48 systemic toxicity: Effects that are elicited after absorption and distribution of a toxicant from its
entry point to its target tissue (US EPA, 2011a).
2.49 target substance: In a read-across approach, a toxicity endpoint for one substance (target
substance) of unknown toxicity is predicted based on empirical data for the same endpoint from (an)other
substance(s), (source substance(s)). Consequently, the read-across approach is considered property
(i.e., endpoint)-specific (adapted from ECHA, 2017).
2.50 threshold of toxicological concern (TTC): A concept that refers to the establishment of tiered
levels of exposure for chemicals, based on the presence or absence of chemical functional groups below
which there would be no appreciable risk to human health. The concept proposes that these low levels of
exposure with negligible risk can be identified for many chemicals, including those of unknown toxicity,
based on knowledge of their chemical structures (Kroes et al., 2004). The TTC concept has been recently
reviewed and updated by EFSA/WHO (2016).
2.51 total allowable concentration (TAC): The maximum concentration of a nonregulated contaminant
allowed in a public drinking water supply as defined by Section 3 of this Standard.
2.52 toxicodynamics: Variations in the inherent sensitivity of a species or individual to

chemical-induced toxicity, resulting from differences in host factors that influence the toxic response of a
target organ to a specified dose (TERA, 1996).
2.53 toxicokinetics: Variations in absorption, distribution, metabolism, and excretion (ADME) of a

compound that account for differences in the amount of parent compound or active metabolite(s) available
to a target organ (TERA, 1996).
2.54 treatment technique: A technology or one or more procedures used to control the concentration
of a substance in a drinking water supply when it is neither technically nor economically feasible to ascertain
the concentration of the substance (US Safe Drinking Water Act, 1996).
2.55 uncertainty factor (UF): One of several, generally 10-fold, default factors used in operationally
deriving the RfD and RfC from experimental data. The factors are intended to account for (1) variation in
susceptibility among the members of the human population (i.e., inter-individual or intraspecies variability);
(2) uncertainty in extrapolating animal data to humans (i.e., interspecies uncertainty); (3) uncertainty in
extrapolating from data obtained in a study with less-than-lifetime exposure (i.e., extrapolating from
subchronic to chronic exposure); (4) uncertainty in extrapolating from a LOAEL rather than from a NOAEL;
and (5) uncertainty associated with extrapolation when the database is incomplete (US EPA, 2011b).
2.56 use of models: A mathematical function with parameters that can be adjusted so that the function
closely describes a set of empirical data. A mathematical or mechanistic model is usually based on
biological or physical mechanisms and has model parameters that have real-world interpretations.
Statistical or empirical models are curve-fitted to data where the math function used is selected for its
numerical properties and accuracy. Extrapolation from mechanistic models (e.g., pharmacokinetic
equations) usually carries higher confidence than extrapolation using empirical models (e.g., logit)
(US EPA, 1994).
2.57 weight-of-evidence: The extent to which the available biomedical data support the hypothesis that
a substance causes cancer or other toxic effects in humans (adapted from US EPA, 2011a).
5
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
3 Toxicology review and evaluation procedures

(previously Annex A of NSF/ANSI 60 and 61)
The following general procedure shall be used to evaluate drinking water substances under this Standard:
a) A determination shall be made as to whether a published (publicly available in printed or electronic

format) and peer reviewed quantitative risk assessment for the substance is available.
b) When a quantitative risk assessment is available, the reviewer shall determine whether the
assessment is currently used in the promulgation of a drinking water regulation or published health
advisory for the substance (see the requirements of Section 3.2):
— if the assessment is used in the promulgation of a drinking water regulation, the SPAC shall be
derived from the regulatory value(s); or
— if the assessment is not the basis of a drinking water regulation, the assessment and its
corresponding RfD shall be reviewed for its appropriateness in evaluating the human health risk of
the drinking water substance.
NOTE — When reviewing an assessment used in the promulgation of a drinking water regulation, it
is recommended that the regulatory authority be contacted to verify the currency of the assessment
under consideration.
c) If a published and peer reviewed quantitative risk assessment is not currently available for the
substance, the TAC and SPAC shall be derived after review of the available toxicology data for the
substance (see Section 3.3). The quality and quantity of toxicity data available for the substance shall
determine whether the evaluation is performed using a qualitative risk assessment approach (see
Section 3.3.2) or a quantitative risk assessment approach (see Section 3.3.3);
— when the data requirements for qualitative risk assessment are satisfied (see Section 3.3.2 and
Table 3.1), a qualitative risk assessment shall be performed according to Section 3.6; or
— when the data requirements for quantitative risk assessment are satisfied (see Section 3.3.3
and Table 3.2), a quantitative risk assessment shall be performed according to Section 3.6.
Figure 1 provides an overview of the toxicity data review requirements of this Standard.
3.2 Data requirements for published risk assessments
3.2.1 General requirements
Evaluation of all published risk assessments shall include review of the written risk assessment document
and a determination of whether additional toxicity data exist that were not considered in the assessment. If
additional toxicity data are identified that were not considered in the risk assessment, the risk assessment
shall be updated in accordance with Section 3.3.
The following shall be documented when utilizing an existing risk assessment:
— the source of the risk assessment;
— identification and discussion of any data or current risk assessment methodology not addressed by
the assessment; and
6
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
— comparison and contrast of the existing risk assessment to the requirements of Section 3.3 with
respect to selection of UFs or other assumptions.
3.2.2 Substances regulated by US EPA or Health Canada
If a substance is regulated under the US EPA's National Primary Drinking Water Regulations and the
US EPA has finalized a MCL or other means of regulation such as a treatment technique (see Section
2.53), no additional collection of toxicological data shall be required prior to performance of the risk
estimation. Where Health Canada has finalized a maximum allowable concentration (MAC), no additional
toxicological evaluation shall be required prior to performance of the risk estimation. Refer to Section 3.5.1
SPAC calculation for regulated substances. Table 4.1 contains normative drinking water criteria which
include regulatory values (MCL or MAC) and their corresponding SPACs, as indicated in the the “source of
supporting documentation” column in Table 4.1. This list includes consensus evaluation criteria for those
substances that are regulated by both countries.
3.2.3 Substances regulated by other agencies
If a substance is regulated by agencies including the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) (Code of
Federal Regulations, Title 21 Food and Drug Regulations), or state, national, or international regulatory
bodies other than those specified in Section 3.2.2, the relevance of the regulation to drinking water shall be
evaluated. This evaluation shall include a review of the quantitative risk assessment that supports the
regulation, and a determination of whether additional toxicity data exist that have not been considered in
the current assessment. No additional collection of toxicological data shall be required when the regulation
provides sufficient information for performance of the risk estimation (see Section 3.5.1 SPAC calculation
for regulated substances). If additional toxicity data are identified which were not considered in the current
risk assessment, a revised risk assessment incorporating those data shall be performed as indicated in
Sections 3.3 and 3.6.
3.2.4 Evaluation of multiple published risk assessments
When multiple published assessments are available for a specific substance, the available assessments
shall be reviewed and a rationale shall be provided for the selection of the assessment considered to be
the most appropriate for the evaluation of human exposure through drinking water. Factors used to
determine the appropriate assessment shall include, but not be limited, to the following:
— completeness and currency of the data review of each assessment;

— technical competence of the organization(s) which sponsored the assessment; and
— species and route(s) of exposure for which the assessment was performed.
When multiple published risk assessments are reviewed and are determined to be of equivalent quality, the
following hierarchy shall be used to select the appropriate assessment, based on sponsoring organization:
— US EPA;
— Health Canada;
— international bodies such as the World Health Organization (WHO) or the International Programme
on Chemical Safety (IPCS);
— European bodies such as the Drinking Water Inspectorate (DWI) and Kiwa; and
— entities such as other federal or state regulatory agencies, private corporations, industry
associations, or individuals.
7
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
3.3 Data requirements for new or updated risk assessments
3.3.1 General requirements
When considering the types of data required for new or updated risk assessments, articulation of the
problem formulation may inform the approach to be utilized for the risk assessment (US EPA, 2014b).
For each substance requiring a new or updated risk assessment, toxicity data to be considered shall
include, but not be limited to, assays of genetic toxicity, acute toxicity (1- to 14-day exposure), short-term
toxicity (14- to 28-day exposure), subchronic toxicity (90-day exposure), reproductive toxicity,
developmental toxicity, immunotoxicity, neurotoxicity, chronic toxicity (including carcinogenicity), and
human data (clinical, epidemiological, or occupational) when available. To more fully understand the toxic
potential of the substance, supplemental studies shall be reviewed, including, but not limited to, mode or
mechanism of action, pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics, sensitization, endocrine disruption, and other
endpoints, as well as studies using routes of exposure other than ingestion. Structure activity relationships,
physical and chemical properties, and any other chemical-specific information relevant to the risk
assessment shall also be reviewed.
Toxicity testing shall be performed in accordance with the most recent adopted toxicity testing protocols
such as those described by the Organization For Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD),
the US EPA, and the US FDA. All studies shall be reviewed for compliance with Good Laboratory Practice
(21 CFR, Part 58 / 40 CFR Part 792).
NOTE — Review of the study according to the approach suggested in Klimisch, et al., 1997, may also be used
to determine the quality of reported data.
A key aspect of the problem formulation is to describe the intention of the risk assessment as well as the
approach to be utilized (US EPA, 2014b). For this Standard, intentions of the risk assessment may include,
but are not limited to, the following:
⎯ preparation of a new drinking water risk assessment where no other toxicity reviews or prior risk
assessments have been identified in the available scientific literature;
⎯ preparation of a new drinking water risk assessment with existing toxicity review(s) available; or
⎯ preparation of an updated drinking water assessment to incorporate new data or methodology since
completion of the prior risk assessment.
Primary literature references shall be obtained and reviewed for critical studies whenever possible;
however, toxicology data obtained from secondary sources may be relied upon in either new or updated
risk assessments if the primary literature reference is unavailable. For supporting toxicity data outside of
identified critical studies, the utilization of toxicity data derived from existing secondary sources may be
considered appropriate.
For the purpose of this Standard, a secondary source may be defined as a document or database which
contains a summary of factual toxicity data from a published or nonpublished primary study. Examples of
secondary sources may include, but are not limited to, organizational publications (e.g., US EPA,
Health Canada, ATSDR, etc.), toxicity review articles in which relevant toxicity data are summarized, or
toxicity data obtained from online toxicity databases (e.g., European Chemicals Agency).
Toxicology data obtained from the secondary source shall be reviewed to assess both the quality of the
secondary source as well as quality of the primary study summarized within the secondary source. In both
cases, professional judgement is required to determine if there is sufficient information available to assess
the adequacy of the method and quality of the study, and if the data are sufficiently robust to allow an
independent characterization of hazard and risk for a given endpoint. Factors in the assessment of the
secondary source may include, but are not limited to, whether that secondary source has been
8
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
peer-reviewed (preference should be given to authoritative or regulatory bodies such as defined in

Section 3.2.4), knowledge expert qualifications of the investigator or reviewer, and general completeness
of the primary study summary. The quality of the primary study itself as cited within the secondary source
shall be reviewed by assessing the available study procedural details as compared to the most recently
adopted toxicity testing protocols (as described above) or by using the approach as suggested by Klimisch
et al. (1997). If the secondary source has assigned a reliability rating (e.g., a Klimisch score) to the primary
study, such reliabilty rating may also be considered in assessing the quality of the primary study data.
The potential limitations of toxicology data obtained from secondary sources shall be described within the
risk assessment.
NOTE — Citation of secondary sources should be in the following form: (primary source, year; as cited by
secondary source, year).
A weight-of-evidence approach shall be employed in evaluating the results of the available toxicity data.
This approach shall include considering the likelihood of hazard to human health and the conditions under
which such hazard may be expressed. A characterization of the expression of such effects shall also be
included, as well as the consideration of the substance’s apparent mode of action. The quality and quantity
of toxicity data available for the substance shall determine whether the evaluation is performed using a
qualitative risk assessment approach (see Section 3.2.2) or a quantitative risk assessment approach
(see Section 3.2.3).
3.3.2 Data requirements for qualitative risk assessment
Toxicity testing requirements for the qualitative risk assessment procedure are defined in Table 3.1.
A minimum data set consisting of a gene mutation assay and a chromosomal aberration assay shall be
required for the performance of a qualitative risk assessment. Modifications in the specified toxicity testing
requirements (inclusions or exclusions) shall be permitted when well supported by peer reviewed scientific
judgment and rationale.
NOTE — Modifications may include, but are not limited to, the following types of considerations: alternate
assays of genetic toxicity and supplemental toxicity studies other than those specified.
Required studies and available supplemental studies shall be reviewed in order to perform a qualitative risk
estimation in accordance with Section 3.6.2.
3.3.3 Data requirements for quantitative risk assessment
Toxicity testing requirements for the quantitative risk assessment procedure are defined in Table 3.2.
A minimum data set consisting of a gene mutation assay, a chromosomal aberration assay, and a
subchronic toxicity study shall be required for the performance of a quantitative risk assessment. The
required studies and preferred criteria are defined in Table 3.2. Modifications to the minimum data set shall
be permitted when well-supported by peer reviewed scientific judgment and rationale.
NOTE — Modifications may include, but are not limited, to acceptance of studies using alternate routes of
exposure, alternate assays of genetic toxicity, and supplemental toxicity studies other than those specified.
Required studies, additional studies, and available supplemental studies shall be reviewed in order to
perform a quantitative risk estimation in accordance with Section 3.6.3.
Additional studies for the evaluation of reproductive and developmental toxicity (as specified in Table 3.2)
shall be required to be reviewed when:
— results of the required minimum data set studies and any supplemental studies indicate toxicity to
the reproductive or endocrine tissues of one or both sexes of experimental animals; or
9
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
— the compound under evaluation is closely related to a known reproductive or developmental

toxicant.
3.4 Data requirements for evaluating short-term exposures
Extractants from products used in contact with drinking water may be elevated initially, but rapidly decline
with continued product contact with water. Examples include, but are not limited to, solvent-containing
coatings and solvent cements. Short-term exposure paradigms, appropriate for potentially high initial
substance concentrations, shall be used to evaluate potential acute risk to human health of short-term
exposures. The short-term exposure period shall be defined as the first 14 days of in-service life of the
product.
Sound scientific judgment shall be used to determine whether calculation of a STEL is appropriate for a
given contaminant. The NOAEL or LOAEL for the critical short-term hazard of the substance shall be
identified. The following types of studies shall be considered for identification of short-term hazard:
— short-term (less than 90-day duration) toxicity study in rodents or other appropriate species with a
minimum 14-day post-treatment observation period, clinical observations, hematology and clinical
chemistry, and gross pathology (preferably an oral study in rodents);
— reproduction or developmental assays (for substances having these endpoints as the critical
effects); or
— subchronic 90-day study in rodents or other species (preferably an oral study in rats).
The critical study shall be used to calculate a STEL in accordance with Section 3.7.
Selection of UFs for calculation of a STEL shall consider the quality and completeness of the database for
assessing potential short-term effects. Selection of UFs shall also consider data that quantify interspecies
and intraspecies variations. Other parameters that shall be considered in the determination of a STEL
include identification of any sensitive subpopulations, the potential for adverse taste and odor, and solubility
limitations at the calculated STEL. The STEL shall be calculated using assumptions to protect for a child’s
exposure to the contaminant in the absence of data that demonstrate, or a different life stage, such as
infants or pregnancy, adults are more sensitive than children. In the absence of appropriate data to calculate
a STEL, see Section 3.6.1.2. If multiple short-term critical effects (i.e., points-of-departure) exist relative to
different life-stages, multiple STEL derivations reflecting the relevant point(s)-of-departure and their
associated life-stage specific exposure assumptions should be included, with the lowest STEL, or that most
supported by available evidence, selected. Note that selection of UFs is specific for each point-of-departure.
STEL shall not exceed the TAC for nonmetallic contaminants regulated by the US EPA and established by
Health Canada.
3.5 Risk estimation for published assessments
Calculation of the SPAC is intended to account for the potential contribution of a single substance by
multiple products or materials in the drinking water treatment and distribution system. In any given drinking
water treatment and distribution system, a variety of products and materials may be added to or contact the
treated water prior to ingestion. The SPAC calculation is intended to ensure that the total contribution of a
single substance from all potential sources in the drinking water treatment and distribution system does not
exceed its acceptable concentration.
3.5.1 SPAC calculation for regulated substances
To calculate the SPAC, an estimate of the number of potential sources of the substance from all products
in the drinking water treatment and distribution system shall be determined. The SPAC shall be calculated
as follows:
10
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
[promulgated regulatory value ( mg⁄L )]

SPAC (mg⁄L) =
[estimated number of drinking water sources]
If available, the unrounded estimated risk estimation that the promulgated regulatory value is based on
shall be used in the calculation of the SPAC. In the absence of specific data regarding the number of
potential sources of the substance in the drinking water treatment and distribution system, the SPAC shall
be calculated as 10% of the promulgated regulatory value. The calculated SPAC shall be rounded to one
significant figure, unless it is based on a regulatory value with more than one significant figure. In that case
the SPAC shall be rounded to the same number of significant figures as the regulatory value.
3.5.2 SPAC calculation for other published risk assessments
Review of the risk assessment shall include evaluation of the risk estimation, if one is provided. If the
existing risk estimation has been performed in a manner consistent with the procedures in Section 3.6.3 for
noncarcinogenic or carcinogenic endpoints, the SPAC shall be calculated as follows:
[existing risk estimation ( mg⁄L )]

SPAC (mg⁄L) =
The unrounded value of the estimated risk estimation shall be used in the calculation of the SPAC. In the
absence of specific data regarding the number of potential sources of the substance in the drinking water
treatment and distribution system, the SPAC shall be calculated as 10% of the existing risk estimation. The
calculated SPAC shall be rounded to one significant figure.
If the existing risk estimation is not consistent with Section 3.6.3, or a risk estimation is not provided, a TAC
and SPAC shall be calculated for the substance according to the procedures in Section 3.6.3.
3.6 Risk estimation using new and updated risk assessments
The method of risk estimation used for new and updated risk assessments shall be determined by the
quantity and quality of toxicity data identified for the contaminant of concern (see Section 3.3). When
available toxicity data are insufficient to perform the qualitative or quantitative risk assessments, or when
toxicity data are available, but the normalized contaminant concentration does not exceed the applicable
threshold of evaluation (TOE) value, a TOE shall be determined for the substance according to
Section 3.6.1, if applicable. For all other data sets, the risk estimation shall be performed according to
Section 3.6.2 or 3.6.3.
3.6.1 Threshold of evaluation (TOE)
The following thresholds of evaluation shall be considered when available toxicity data do not meet the
minimum requirements to perform a risk estimation using either the qualitative or quantitative approaches.
Application of the TOE shall also be considered for the evaluation of normalized contaminant concentrations
which do not have existing risk assessments, and which do not exceed the defined TOE concentrations. In
this case, a qualitative review of the available data shall be performed to determine whether adverse health
effects can result at the TOE exposure concentrations defined in Section 3.6.1.1.
3.6.1.1 TOE for chronic exposure
Performance of a risk assessment shall not be required for an individual substance having a normalized
concentration less than or equal to the following TOE values:
— static normalization conditions:
— toxicity testing shall not be required for an individual substance having a normalized
concentration less than or equal to the TOE value of 3 μg/L.
11
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
— flowing normalization conditions:
— toxicity testing shall not be required for an individual substance having a normalized
concentration less than or equal to the TOE value of 0.3 μg/L.
These TOE values shall not apply to any substance for which available toxicity data and sound scientific
judgment such as structure activity relationships indicate that an adverse health effect may result at these
exposure concentrations.
3.6.1.2 TOE for short-term exposure
If an appropriate short-term toxic effect is not identified by the available data, the initial (Day 1) laboratory
concentration shall not exceed 10 μg/L. This TOE value shall not apply to any chemical for which available
toxicity data and sound scientific judgment, such as structure activity relationships, indicate that an adverse
health effect can result at the 10 μg/L concentration upon short-term exposure to the chemical.
3.6.2 TAC determination for qualitative risk assessment
TACs for qualitative risk assessments shall be determined as indicated in Table 3.3.
3.6.3 TAC calculation for quantitative risk assessment
The procedure used to calculate the TAC for a new risk assessment (including qualitative assessments that
are updated upon generation of new data) shall be determined by the toxicologic endpoint identified as the
critical effect (see Section 2.11). For a substance having a noncarcinogenic endpoint, a TAC shall be
calculated according to Section 3.6.3.1. For a substance having carcinogenic potential, a TAC shall be
calculated according to Section 3.6.3.2.
The minimum data set for the quantitative risk assessment (as defined in Section 3.3.3 and Table 3.2) shall
first be evaluated for genotoxic potential according to the requirements of Table 3.3. Based on the review
of genotoxic potential, the need for supplemental studies or chronic toxicity and carcinogenesis data shall
be determined.
3.6.3.1 Assessment of noncarcinogenic endpoints
For noncarcinogenic endpoints, the TAC shall be calculated using either the NOAEL/LOAEL procedure
outlined in Section 3.6.3.1.2, or the benchmark dose (BMDL) procedure outlined in Section 3.6.3.1.3, as
appropriate. The rationale for the selection of the procedure shall be provided in the assessment.
NOTE — Selection of the appropriate TAC calculation procedure will depend on the characteristics of the data
set identified for the substance. Simple data sets consisting of a small number of studies may be best
evaluated using the procedure in Section 3.6.3.1.2. Complex data sets consisting of several studies, or which
involve reproduction or developmental endpoints may be best evaluated using the BMDL procedure in
Section 3.6.3.1.3. The appropriateness of the fit of the data to the BMDL shall also be considered.
3.6.3.1.1 Calculation of HEDs
Selected NOAEL/LOAEL/BMDL values from animal studies shall be converted to HEDs using a
cross-species body weight scaling approach to account for interspecies differences in toxicokinetics (based
on US EPA, 2011c). This is the current default method to convert data between animal and human species
for both cancer and noncancer endpoints, and should be used when physiologically-based toxicokinetics
(PBPK) modeling is not feasible and no chemical-specific interspecies adjustment factors (e.g., CSAFs,
DDEFs) data on interspecies weight conversion are available (US EPA, 2014a). When benchmark dose
modeling is to be used, the HEDs shall be calculated, using study-specific body weight data when available,
prior to modeling to determine the BMDL.
12
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
The HED conversion is conducted by use of body weight (BW) 3/4 scaling and the reduction of the overall
interspecies UF default value from 10 to 3 to account for remaining uncertainty in toxicodynamics (see
Section 3.6.3.1.3.2):
HED = Critical Dosea × (BWa /BWh)1/4
Where:
HED = Human equivalent dose of the critical effect dose level (i.e., NOAEL h, LOAELh or BMDLh)
Critical Dosea = Effect dose level established in animal studies (i.e., NOAELa, LOAELa or BMDLa)
BWh = Average human body weight, which is 80 kg by default (US EPA, 2011a, 2015a)
BWa = Mean animal body weight, which is either reported in the animal studies or the default value
specified by the US EPA (1988)
NOTE — There are limitations to the HED conversion approach. Under the following circumstances,
the default BW3/4 scaling approach is not applicable (US EPA, 2011c), and use of the
NOAEL/LOAEL/BMDL in combination with an UF of 10 for interspecies extrapolation (in addition to
other requisite UFs) should be used:
⎯ when metabolic pathways are saturated;
⎯ when toxicity is a consequence of exposure to a very reactive parent compound or

metabolite that is not removed from the site of formation by biological processes, but chemically
reacts with cellular constituents;
⎯ when toxicity is a caused by direct action of the chemical or metabolites on tissues of the
gastrointestinal tract;
⎯ when scaling to the body weights of young infants and children (< 6 months old) to derive
an acute RfD or short-term guidance value intended to apply to a population that includes young
infants and children, due to the comparatively slower clearance of xenobiotics during this period
and limited available toxicokinetics data;4 and
⎯ under conditions of an acute exposure with the focus of the occurrence of immediate and
severe or lethal effects, unless the operative physiological processes are comparable between
acute and chronic exposure scenarios.
3.6.3.1.2 NOAEL or LOAEL approach
The substance data set shall be reviewed in its entirety, and the highest NOAELHED for the most appropriate
test species, relevant route of exposure, study duration, mechanism, tissue response, and toxicological
endpoint shall be identified. If a NOAELHED cannot be clearly defined from the data, the lowest LOAELHED
for the most appropriate test species, relevant route of exposure, and toxicological endpoint shall be utilized.
The general procedure for calculating the TAC using this approach is as follows:
a) Determine the critical study and effect from which the NOAELHED or LOAELHED will be identified
according to the following hierarchy (US EPA, 1993 and Dourson et al., 1994):
4 In
instances when extrapolation from a young laboratory animal to a young human are desirable; key developmental
processes must be matched in a species-dependent manner (US EPA, 2011c).
13
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
— adequate studies in humans;
— adequate studies in animal models most biologically relevant to humans (e.g., primates), or
that demonstrate similar pharmacokinetics to humans;
— adequate studies in the most sensitive animal species (the species showing an adverse effect
at the lowest administered dose using an appropriate vehicle, an adequate study duration, and a
relevant route of exposure); and
— effects that are biologically relevant to humans.
b) Calculate the RfD according to the following equation (based on US EPA, 1993):
[NOAELHED or LOAELHED(mg⁄kg⁄d)] [number of days dosed per week]

RfD (mg⁄kg⁄d) = ×
UF 7d
NOTE — When other than daily dosing was used in the critical study, the RfD calculation shall be adjusted
to reflect a daily dosing schedule.
c) Calculate the TAC based on the RfD with adjustment for significant contribution(s) of the substance
from sources other than drinking water according to the following equation:
RfD (mg/kg-d) × RSC

TAC (mg⁄L) =
IRADULT (L/kg-d)
The calculated TAC shall be rounded to one significant figure.
Where:
NOAELHED = Highest NOAEL for the critical effect in the most appropriate species identified
after review of data set; if a NOAELHED is not defined, the LOAELHED shall be used with a
corresponding adjustment in the UF (see Table 3.4)
UF = Total uncertainty factor (see Table 3.4)
RSC = Relative source contribution: Apply the US EPA (2000) Exposure Decision Tree to
determine the RSC. If the data are available to quantify the relative drinking water contribution
of a substance, a chemical-specific RSC shall be calculated. In the absence of data to
determine significant contribution(s) of the substance from other sources, a default drinking
water contribution of 20% shall be applied (US EPA, 1991). The calculation to determine the
RSC considering all sources can be figured as follows:
Exposure water
RSC = × 100%
Exposure sum of all pathways
IRADULT = Adult ingestion rate of 0.034 L/kg-d as indicated in the US EPA Exposure Factors
Handbook (US EPA, 2019).5
3.6.3.1.3 Benchmark dose approach
The BMDL for the substance shall be calculated by modeling the substance’s dose response curve for the
critical effect in the region of observed responses. The benchmark response (BMR) concentration shall be
5 Based on 90th percentile intake, consumers only, direct and indirect community water; NHANES 2005-2010;
Table 3-21; rounded (US EPA, 2019).
14
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
determined by whether the critical response is a continuous endpoint measurement or a quantal endpoint
measurement. The BMR shall be calculated at the 10% response level, as appropriate.
The general procedure for calculating the TAC using the BMDL is as follows:
a) Calculate the RfD according to the following equation:
BMDL HED ( mg⁄kg⁄d ) [number of days dosed per week]

RfD (mg⁄kg⁄d) = ×
UF 7d
NOTE — When other than daily dosing was used in the critical study, the RfD calculation shall be adjusted
to reflect a daily dosing schedule.
b) Calculate the TAC based on the RfD with adjustment for significant contribution(s) of the substance
from sources other than water according to the following equation:
RfD (mg/kg-d) × RSC

TAC (mg/L) =
IRADULT (L/kg-d)
The calculated TAC shall be rounded to one significant figure.
Where:
BMDLHED = The lower confidence limit on the dose that produces a specified magnitude of
change (e.g., 10%) in a specified adverse response (BMDL10).
UF = Total uncertainty factor (see Table 3.4)
RSC = Relative source contribution: Apply the US EPA (2000) Exposure Decision Tree to
determine the RSC. If the data are available to quantify the relative drinking water contribution
of a substance, a chemical-specific RSC shall be calculated. In the absence of data to
determine significant contribution(s) of the substance from other sources, a default drinking
water contribution of 20% shall be applied (US EPA, 1991). The calculation to determine the
RSC considering all sources can be figured as follows:
Exposure water
RSC = × 100%
Exposure sum of all pathways
IRADULT = Adult ingestion rate of 0.034 L/kg-d as indicated in the US EPA Exposure Factors
Handbook (US EPA, 2019).6
3.6.3.1.4 Selection of uncertainty factors (UFs)
UFs used for the risk estimation shall include consideration of the areas of uncertainty listed in Table 3.4.
A default value of 10 shall be used for individual areas of uncertainty when adequate data are not available
to support a data-derived UF. Selection of the values of each UF shall consider the following criteria
(adapted from Dourson et al., 1996).7
6Based on 90th percentile intake, consumers only, direct and indirect community water; NHANES 2005-2010; Table
3-21; rounded (US EPA, 2019).
7 The Food Quality Protection Act (FQPA) of 1996 reemphasized the review and evaluation of toxicity data for the
protection of children’s health. The US EPA has been very responsive to this initiative and published a document
outlining the use of an UF for children’s protection and other database deficiencies (US EPA, 2002b). Currently, this
factor is applied to pesticide evaluations only. In addition, publications by Renwick (1993) and the International
Programme on Chemical Safety (IPCS) (2005) suggest the use of specific data in lieu of default values for UFs. The
use of data-derived UFs, or judgment, as replacements to default values of 10-fold for each area of uncertainty is
15
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
3.6.3.1.4.1 Human variability
Selection of the human variability factor shall be based on the availability of data that identify sensitive
subpopulations of humans. If sufficient data are available to quantitate the toxicokinetic and toxicodynamic
variability of humans (see Sections 2.52 and 2.51), factor values of 3, 1, or a value determined from the
data shall be considered. In the absence of these data, the default value of 10 shall be used.
3.6.3.1.4.2 Interspecies variability
Selection of the interspecies variability factor shall be based on the availability of data that allow for a
quantitative extrapolation of animal dose to the equivalent human dose for effects of similar magnitude or
for a NOAEL. This includes scientifically documented differences or similarities in physiology, metabolism
and toxic response(s) between experimental animals and humans. If sufficient data are available to
quantitate the toxicokinetic and toxicodynamic variabilities between experimental animals and humans
(see Sections 2.52 and 2.51), factor values of 3, 1, or CSAF(s) for toxicokinetics or toxicodynamics
determined from the data shall be considered. In the absence of these data, the default value of 10 shall
be used.
3.6.3.1.4.3 Subchronic to chronic extrapolation
Selection of the factor for subchronic to chronic extrapolation shall be based on the availability of data that
allow for quantitative extrapolation of the critical effect after subchronic exposure to that after chronic
exposure. Selection shall also consider whether NOAELs differ quantitatively when different critical effects
are observed after subchronic and chronic exposure to the compound. When the critical effect is identified
from a study of chronic exposure, the factor value shall be 1. When sufficient data are available to quantitate
the difference in the critical effect after subchronic and chronic exposure, or when the principal studies do
not suggest that duration of exposure is a determinant of the critical effects, a factor value of 3 or a value
determined from the data shall be considered. In the absence of these data, the default value of 10 shall
be used.
3.6.3.1.4.4 Database sufficiency
Selection of the factor for database sufficiency shall be based on the ability of the existing data to support
a scientific judgment of the likely critical effect of exposure to the compound. When data exist from a
minimum of five core studies (two chronic bioassays in different species, one two-generation reproductive
study, and two developmental toxicity studies in different species), a factor value of 1 shall be considered.
When several, but not all, of the core studies are available, a factor value of 3 shall be considered. When
several of the core studies are unavailable, the default value of 10 shall be used.
3.6.3.1.4.5 LOAEL to NOAEL extrapolation
Selection of the factor for LOAEL to NOAEL extrapolation shall be based on the ability of the existing data
to allow the use of a LOAEL rather than a NOAEL for noncancer risk estimation. If a well-defined NOAEL
is identified, the factor value shall be 1. When the identified LOAEL is for a minimally adverse or reversible
toxic effect, a factor value of 3 shall be considered. When the identified LOAEL is for a severe or irreversible
toxic effect, a factor value of 10 shall be used.
3.6.3.2 Assessment of carcinogenic endpoints
Risk assessment for carcinogenic endpoints shall be performed using the linear approach, the nonlinear
approach, or both, consistent with the proposed US EPA Cancer Risk Assessment Guidelines
(US EPA, 2005a). For substances that have been identified as known or likely human carcinogens
(as defined by these guidelines), a dose response assessment shall be performed. This dose response
encouraged by several federal and international agencies and organizations (Meek, 1994; Dourson, 1994; US EPA,
2014a).
16
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
assessment shall include analysis of dose both in the range of observation (animal and human studies) and
in the range of extrapolation to lower doses.
3.6.3.2.1 Analysis in the range of observation
Curve-fitting models shall be selected based on the characteristics of the response data in the observed
range. The model shall be selected, to the extent possible, based on the biological mode of action of the
substance taken together in a weight of evidence evaluation of the available toxicological and biological
data. The selected model shall be used to determine the LED10, which will either be the POD (see Section
2.30) for linear low dose extrapolation or the basis of the margin of MOE analysis (see Section 2.23) for a
nonlinear assessment.
NOTE — See Figure 1 for a graphical representation of this analysis.
The following types of models shall be considered, as appropriate to the mode of action of the substance
under evaluation, the availability of adequate data, and the current state of risk assessment approaches:
— statistical or distribution models:
— log-probit;
— logit; or
— Weibull.
— mechanistic models:
— one-hit;
— multi-hit;
— multi-stage; or
— cell kinetic multi-stage.
— model enhancement and dose scaling:
— time to tumor response;

— physiologically based toxicokinetic models;
— biologically based dose-response models; or
— surface area conversion.
If none of the available models provide a reasonable fit to the dataset, the following shall be considered to
see if lack of fit can be resolved (US EPA, 1995):
— interference at higher dose concentrations from competing mechanisms of toxicity that are a
progressive form of the response of interest;
— saturation of metabolic or delivery systems for the ultimate toxicant at higher dose concentrations;
and
— interference at higher dose concentrations due to toxic effects unrelated to the response of interest.
NOTE — When adjusting for these possibilities does not provide a reasonable fit, one suggested approach is
to delete the high dose data and refit the models based on the lower dose concentrations since these doses
are the most informative of the exposure concentrations anticipated to be encountered by humans.
17
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
3.6.3.2.2 Analysis in the range of extrapolation
The choice of procedure for low dose extrapolation shall be based on the biological mode of action of the
substance. Depending upon the quantity and quality of the data, and upon the conclusion of the weight of
evidence evaluation, the following procedures shall be used: linear, nonlinear, or linear and nonlinear.
3.6.3.2.2.1 Linear analysis
The linear default assumption shall be used when the toxicological data support a mode of action due to
DNA reactivity or another mode of action which is anticipated to be linear in nature. It shall also be used
when no data are available to justify an alternate approach. For linear extrapolation, a straight line is
constructed from the POD on the dose response curve to the zero dose / zero response point.
3.6.3.2.2.2 Nonlinear analysis
The nonlinear default assumption shall be used when the toxicological data are sufficient to support the
assumption of a nonlinear mechanism of action, and no evidence for linearity is available. An MOE analysis
shall be used for nonlinear assessment. The MOE shall be calculated by dividing the POD by the human
exposure concentration of interest.
3.6.3.2.2.3 Linear and nonlinear analysis
Linear and nonlinear assessments shall be provided when the weight of evidence or the mode of action
analysis indicates differing modes of action for different target tissues, or to evaluate the implications of
complex dose response relationships. Where the results of linear and nonlinear evaluations differ, the range
of estimates shall be discussed, along with a justification for the estimate used in evaluation of the
substance.
3.6.3.3 Determination of the TAC for carcinogenic endpoints
The selected model shall be used to determine the dose equivalent to the LED10. For linear analyses, the
TAC shall be determined by linear extrapolation of the LED 10 to the origin of the dose response curve for
the selected level of risk (e.g., 10-5). For nonlinear analyses, the TAC shall be equal to the human exposure
concentration of interest that represents the selected MOE (LED10 / exposure of interest). For both types of
analyses, the level of risk or MOE shall be selected in accordance with the US EPA Guidelines for
Carcinogen Risk Assessment (US EPA, 2005a).
3.6.3.3.1 Determination of the TAC for carcinogens with a mutagenic mode of action
For carcinogens acting through a mutagenic mode of action, potency adjustment factors shall be applied
as appropriate to determine unit risk by postnatal life stage according to US EPA (2005b) guidance, and
the TAC shall be calculated using the total lifetime risk. These procedures shall not be applied for
nonmutagenic carcinogens or when the mode of action is unknown (US EPA, 2005a), when there are
sufficient data to calculate a chemical-specific early life cancer slope factor, if the cancer slope factors are
derived from studies that incorporate exposures during early life, or when early life adjustment is not
otherwise appropriate biologically, such as if a metabolite of the chemical is the ultimate carcinogen
(US EPA, 2005a; MDH, 2010). When appropriate, the individual age group-adjusted unit risks (Unit Riskage)
associated with relevant time periods shall be calculated according to the equation below:
CSF (kg-d) 1 mg exposure (y) p.a.

Unit Riskage = × IR (L/kg-d) × × ×
mg 1000 µg 70y 1
18
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Where:
0.1
CSF (Cancer slope factor) =
BMDL10
IR = Ingestion rate for the corresponding age group: water ingestion pertaining to the individual
life stage shall be referenced from the 90th percentile in Table 3-19 and Table 3-21 of the US EPA’s
Exposure Factors Handbook (US EPA, 2019)
exposure = Number of years in each age group
p.a. = Potency adjustment factor, specific to the age group
The age groupings and default potency adjustment factors reported by US EPA (2005b) shall be used in
the calculation of the Unit Riskage, unless chemical-specific data are available to directly assess cancer
susceptibility from early-life exposure:
⎯ for exposures before 2 years of age (i.e., spanning a 2-year time interval from the first day of birth
up until a child’s second birthday), a 10-fold adjustment;
⎯ for exposures between 2 and < 16 years of age (i.e., spanning a 14-year time interval from a child’s
second birthday up until their sixteenth birthday), a 3-fold adjustment; and
⎯ for exposures after turning 16 years of age, no adjustment.
The lifetime age-adjusted Unit Risk (Unit Riskage) is the sum of individual Unit Riskage values:
Σ individual Unit Riskage = lifetime Unit Riskage
The age-adjusted TAC in drinking water at the 10-5 level shall be derived using the Unit Riskage:
10-5
TACage =
Unit Riskage (µg/L)-1
The ingestion rate, exposure duration, and potency adjustment values reported in the US EPA’s Exposure
Factors Handbook8 (2019) are listed in Table 3.5 along with the calculated Unit Risk age values for each age
group. Applying the information of all the early life stages specified in Table 3.5 the default life-stage
adjustment algorithm is simplified below and can be used for derivation of the TAC:
10-5 10-5
TACage (10-5 risk level, µg/L) = =
Lifetime Unit Riskage 8 × 10-5 CSF
Therefore, the simplified:
0.13
TACage (10-5 risk level, µg/L) =
CSF
For comparison, the default age-adjusted TAC is approximately 2.3 times lower than the unadjusted TAC,
which is calculated as below:
8Ingestion rates are referenced as 90th percentile, consumers only, direct and indirect community water from Chapter
3 (US EPA, 2019); exposure duration and potency adjustment factors from Table 1-3 of Chapter 1 (US EPA, 2011a).
19
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
10-5 × 103 (µg/mg) 0.3

TAC (10-5 risk level, µg/L) = -1
=
CSF (mg/kg-d) × IRadult (L/kg-d) CSF
Where:
0.1
CSF (Cancer slope factor) = Generally based on a risk of 10%
BMDL10
IRADULT = Adult ingestion rate of 0.034 L/kg-d (based on US EPA, 2019).
NOTE — Although some regulatory agencies (e.g., California EPA) intend to apply early postnatal
life stage adjustment procedure to all carcinogens, regardless of the mechanisms of action, unless
chemical-specific data indicate the contrary, the US EPA specifies that this procedure should not be
used for nonmutagenic carcinogens or when the mode of action is unknown (US EPA, 2005a). In
addition, if there are sufficient data to calculate a chemical-specific early life cancer slope factor, or
if the cancer slope factors are derived from studies that incorporate exposures during early life, the
above methods should not be used (MDH, 2010). In addition, care should be taken early life
adjustment is not otherwise appropriate biologically, such as if a metabolite of the chemical is the
ultimate carcinogen, since children do not always metabolize the parent chemical as well as adults.
See US EPA (2005a, page 2-29).
3.6.4 SPAC calculation for new or updated risk assessments
Calculation of the SPAC is intended to account for potential contribution of a single substance by multiple
products or materials in the drinking water treatment and distribution system. In any given drinking water
treatment and distribution system, a variety of products and materials may be added to or contact the
treated water prior to ingestion. The SPAC calculation is intended to ensure that the total contribution of a
single substance from all potential sources in the drinking water treatment and distribution system does not
exceed its acceptable concentration.
3.6.4.1 SPAC determination for qualitative risk assessment
The SPAC for qualitative risk assessments shall be equal to the value of the TAC.
3.6.4.2 SPAC determination for quantitative risk assessment
To calculate the SPAC, an estimate of the number of potential sources of the substance from all products
in the drinking water treatment and distribution system shall be determined. The SPAC shall be calculated
as follows:
TAC ( mg⁄L )
SPAC (mg⁄L) =
The unrounded value of the TAC shall be used in the calculation of the SPAC. In the absence of specific
data regarding the number of potential sources of the substance in the drinking water treatment and
distribution system, the SPAC shall be calculated as 10% of the TAC. The calculated SPAC shall be
rounded to one significant figure.
3.7 Risk estimation for short-term exposure (STEL calculation)
The STEL shall be calculated using the following equation:
[NOAELHED , BMDLHED , or LOAELHED ( mg⁄kg⁄d )] number of days dosed per week

STEL (mg⁄L) = =
UF × IR (L/kg-d) 7d
20
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
NOTE — When other than daily dosing was used in the critical study, the STEL calculation shall be
adjusted to reflect the dosing schedule.
The calculated STEL shall be rounded to one significant figure.
Where:
NOAELHED = Highest NOAELHED for the critical effect in a study of less than or equal to 90 day
duration (see Section 3.4); or BMDLHED for the critical effect; if a NOAELHED is not defined, the
LOAELHED shall be used with a corresponding adjustment to the UF (see Table 3.4); when HED
derivation is not applicable, the NOAEL, LOAEL, or BMDL shall be used with an interspecies UF
of 10 (see Sections 3.6.3.1.2, 3.6.3.1.3, and Table 3.4).
UF = Uncertainty factor (total) based upon the applicability of the test data in extrapolating to actual
conditions of human exposure (see Table 3.4); also referred to as safety factors.
IR = Ingestion rate is the assumed average daily drinking water consumption in liters per kg per
day equating to the 90th percentile, consumers only, community water intake (US EPA, 2019),
generally 0.15 L/kg-d for a child (0 to 12 mo of age), 0.033 L/kg-d for a pregnant woman,
0.054 L/kg for a lactating woman, 0.032 L/kg for a woman of child-bearing age, and 0.034 L/kg-d
for an adult. The default water consumption shall reflect that of a child, in the absence of data that
demonstrates that adults, pregnant or lactating women are more sensitive than a child.9
3.8 Guidelines for the use of read-across approaches to establishing drinking water criteria
This Standard provides a TOE to be utilized when the required toxicity data to perform qualitative or
quantitative risk assessment (see Section 3.3) are unavailable, or when the required data are available, but
the normalized contaminant concentrations do not exceed the TOE concentrations (see Section 3.6.1).
However, normalized contaminant concentrations for chemicals that do not meet minimum data
requirements may exceed the TOE concentrations. In this case, it may be possible to determine evaluation
criteria for the substance using a read-across approach, based on the known toxicities of other chemicals
of similar structure, and/or metabolic fates, physicochemical properties, and functionality. Those criteria can
then be used as surrogates to the TAC and SPAC established on the basis of chemical-specific information.
Read-across entails the use of relevant information from analogous substances (the “source” information)
to predict properties for the “target” substance(s) under consideration. Further discussion on the information
required to justify a read-across approach is provided in the subsections below.
Authoritative guidelines for read-across approaches are available (ECHA, 2008; ECHA, 2017;
OECD, 2014a); thus, this section is intended to summarize the most important aspects of these guidelines
that are relevant for establishing drinking water criteria. The above guidelines should be consulted in
scenarios where further detail or guidance is required.
3.8.1 Guidelines for a category-based read-across approach
The term “category approach” is used when read-across is employed between several substances that
have structural similarity (ECHA, 2017). As a result of the structural similarity, the toxicological properties
will either all be similar or follow a regular pattern. When feasible, the category approach is generally
preferred to the analog approach (see Section 3.8.2) in a read-across assessment as it incorporates a
relatively large amount of data from several (as opposed to one) substances, thereby increasing the
robustness of the conclusion(s) derived for the target substance(s).
9Ingestion rates are taken from chapter 3 of US EPA Exposure Factors Handbook (2019) as follows: child (0 to
12 months): 1994-1996, 1998 CSFII data, Table 3-19; pregnant, lactating or women of child-bearing age: 1994-1996,
1998 CSFII data, Table 3-75; and adults: NHANES 2005-2010, Table 3-21.
21
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
3.8.1.1 Establishment of the chemical category
If the target substance has already been classified into a chemical category by an authoritative source
(such sources may include the US EPA’s High Production Volume Challenge Program, OECD Cooperative
Chemicals Assessment Programme, OECD QSAR Toolbox, or Health Canada’s Chemical Management
Plan), it may be sufficient to refer to the existing category and results that have already been agreed upon
by the relevant program. Otherwise, the chemical category shall consist of chemicals whose
physicochemical and/or human health properties are likely to be similar or follow a regular pattern, usually
as a result of structural similarity. The similarities may be based on the following:
⎯ common functional groups (e.g., aldehyde, epoxide, ester, specific metal ion);
⎯ common constituents or chemical classes, (may include overall structural trend or moiety, carbon
chain length, degree of linearity or branching, or impurity profile);
⎯ common precursors and/or likelihood of common breakdown products by physical and/or biological
processes which result in structurally similar degradation products; and
⎯ an incremental and constant change in a structural attribute across the category (e.g., a chain
length category).
The identified category should have clear boundaries (i.e., an applicability domain) which may be based on
the inclusion / exclusion of relevant functional group(s) and/or exclusion of substances whose chain lengths
fall outside a predetermined range that is relevant to the mode of action. Every effort should be made to
incorporate all substances with relevant data that fit within the applicability domain; while the identification
of individual members of a category is often based on obvious structural similarities, QSAR-based software
tools may also be useful to identify additional substances that may fit within the identified category. The
chemical category and the chemical, physical, and toxicological attributes of each member of the category
should be fully described. A full description should include the following attributes:
⎯ the IUPAC chemical name, CAS number and chemical structure for each category member, where
possible;
⎯ a discussion of the structural similarities and differences among the members of the category;
⎯ a data matrix of physical-chemical properties, comparing the relevant experimental or predicted

attributes of the source substances with corresponding experimental or predicted attributes of the target
substance. Physical-chemical properties to be highlighted are listed in Section 3.9.2;
⎯ a description of how category members were selected and how the applicability domain of the
category was established; and
⎯ the data gap(s) that the analogue(s) will be used to predict.
In addition to the above, a separate data matrix should be created to summarize the known toxicological
endpoints for each member of the category, based on the results of a literature search for each member.
The data matrix can summarize both quantitative toxicological properties (i.e., LC50s or NOAELs for repeat-
dose studies), or qualitative properties (i.e., absence or presence of mutagenicity); and should additionally
highlight cases in which no data are available. Both data matrices should be constructed with the category
members arranged in a suitable order (for example, according to molecular weight) and should ideally
reflect any trends or progression seen within the category.
22
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
3.8.1.2 Justification for the chemical category
Since the category-based read-across approach is based on a hypothesis that substances with similar
structural and physicochemical attributes will have toxicological properties that are similar or vary in a
predictable manner, the substances within the established chemical category should have similar
physicochemical and toxicological characteristics, or they should vary in a predictable manner with respect
to structural variation (i.e., exhibit a trend). Any significant deviations from the described similarity or trend
in one or more of these characteristics among substances within the category could call into question the
validity of the established chemical category and should be explained. The presence of such a deviation
from the predicted similarity or trend among category members does not necessarily preclude the use of
the category approach; however, it may warrant a more conservative approach to the read-across as
discussed in Section 3.8.1.3. In addition, (Quantitative) Structural Activity Relationships ((Q)SARS) may be
used to address data gaps for physicochemical attributes when forming or justifying a category, or to help
identify additional category members (Section 3.8.3).
Structural and physicochemical similarity alone are usually insufficient to justify a category approach; thus,
data related to mode of action and/or absorption, distribution, metabolism, and excretion (ADME) properties
are typically also required. For example, a thorough discussion of any information related to the mode of
action (including toxicokinetic and toxicodynamic data, and identification of the target organ(s)), common
to the category members, and how it might influence the similarity or predicted variation in the toxicological
properties across the category, will significantly strengthen the justification for the category approach.
Specifically, the common mechanism of toxicity should be described and linked to the structures of the
category members. Additionally, variations in quantitative toxicological effects may occur in a predictable
manner due to differences in kinetics and/or potency among the substances. Alternatively, the proposed
mode of action might predict no biologically significant quantitative differences in the effects caused by
exposure to the category members.
Likewise, the justification for the category approach is strengthened if several substances within the
category are predicted to be biotransformed in vivo into identical and/or similar substances, provided that
adequate data on ADME characteristics (including rates of formation of the biotransformation products) are
available to provide convincing evidence that common compound(s) are formed from category members,
and that the target organ(s) of the common biotransformation compound(s) are the same. To that end, a
full discussion of the relevant ADME pathway is required, and the proposed pathway should be supported
by high quality studies in rodents or humans. Furthermore, the identities of the predicted common
metabolites and their mode of action must be clearly defined and discussed, respectively. Other ADME
properties should be addressed as well; for example, the magnitude of the exposure of the target organ to
the parent substances may vary among substances in the category, and several additional noncommon
metabolites may occur for some category members but not others. These potential variations should all be
considered when justifying a category approach based on common metabolites.
3.8.1.3 Application of the category-based read-across approach to fill data gaps or establish a
class-based evaluation level (CBEL)
If the objective of the read-across approach is to address a genotoxicity data gap (i.e., mutagenicity or
clastogenicity), the known genotoxicity of category members can be used to predict presence or absence
of genotoxicity for the target. The presence or absence of structural alerts associated with genotoxicity in
the target compound and category members should also be noted. Read-across of a negative genotoxicity
finding is generally more difficult than read-across of a positive finding. For example, in order to justify
read-across of a negative finding for in-vitro genotoxicity, all the tested category members should be
classified as nonmutagenic and/or clastogenic based on the weight-of-evidence from studies of acceptable
quality. In cases where genotoxicity data are not available for all substances within a category, professional
judgment should be applied in determining whether adequate data are available to make the determination
of negative genotoxicity for the target substance without further testing.
Alternatively, a category approach can be used to establish a single set of drinking water criteria to be
applied to all substances within the category (i.e., class-based evaluation level, or CBEL). If drinking water
23
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
criteria have already been established for one or more members of the category, the CBEL shall not exceed
the lowest MCL or TAC and SPAC identified for the chemical(s) of known toxicity in the category. Sources
of drinking water criteria shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
— US EPA regulatory values and other risk assessments, including MCLs, health advisories, and
Integrated Risk Information System (IRIS) entries;
— Health Canada risk assessments;
— risk assessments previously performed to the requirements of Section 3 (previously NSF/ANSI 61,
Annex A);
— state or provincial drinking water standards and guidelines; and
— WHO or other international drinking water standards and guidelines.
If drinking water criteria are not available for any substances within the established category, then for each
toxicological endpoint, the most conservative experimental value among the category members should be
applied to the target substance(s). The RfD for the target substance will therefore be based on the most
sensitive endpoint, and the most conservative POD (e.g., NOAEL, BMDL10) of all substances within the
category. The data requirements for single substances (see Table 3.2) also apply to the category as a
whole, and for each endpoint, professional judgment should be applied in determining whether adequate
data are available for read-across.
A CBEL shall be used as a surrogate for the TAC and SPAC for each chemical of unknown toxicity that
meets the specifications of the defined chemical category (see Section 3.8.1.1), until such time as sufficient
toxicity data are available to determine chemical-specific evaluation criteria for that substance. The CBEL
shall not be applied to any substance for which available data and sound scientific judgment, such as
structure-activity relationship considerations, indicate that adverse health effects may result at the
established class-based evaluation criteria concentrations. If, after a chemical class is defined and its
evaluation criteria established, a substance of greater toxicological significance is identified within the class,
the class-based evaluation criteria shall be re-evaluated and revised to the acceptable concentrations of
the new substance. Therefore, read-across assessments that are based on a CBEL approach should be
re-evaluated periodically as new data become available for either the target chemical or the surrogate(s).
NOTE — It is recommended that documentation supporting class-based evaluation criteria be subject to the
external peer-review requirements of Section 3.9.15.
3.8.2 Guidelines for an analogue-based read-across approach
When read-across is employed between structurally similar substances, the term “analogue approach” is
used (ECHA, 2017). As a result of the structural similarity, a given toxicological property of one substance
(the source) is used to predict the same property for another substance (the target). Thus, the outcome of
a study conducted with the source substance is read-across to the target substance for the investigated
endpoint(s), provided that the relevancy of the selected analogue for each endpoint of concern has been
justified. The simplest case of an analogue approach is read-across from a single source substance to a
target substance. If an analogue approach uses more than one source or target substance, the assessment
of the read-across approach has to be repeated for each source and/or target substance.
The choice of whether to pursue a category-based or analogue-based approach to data gap filling is
situational and dependent on the data available, although a category approach is sometimes preferred
because it incorporates data from a range of substances rather than just one or a few. Thus, before pursuing
an analogue approach, it should be established whether the target substance is already a member of an
existing category (see Section 3.8.1.1). If so, then it may be sufficient to refer to the existing category and
results that have already been agreed upon by the relevant program.
24
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
3.8.2.1 Selecting the analogue substance(s)
(Quantitative) structural activity relationships ((Q)SARs) may be used to identify potential analogues for
utilization in a read-across approach to filling data gaps in cases where insufficient data on mode of action
and/or ADME properties are available to justify a more informed decision on analogue selection (see also
Section 3.8.3). (Q)SAR models that identify structural similarity in terms of a Tanimoto score or similar
quantitative measurement (i.e., VEGA, Toxmatch, etc.) can strengthen the robustness of the analogue
selection, although the use of SARs with qualitative search algorithms may be acceptable provided that
scientific rationale can be provided for the choice of analogue(s) in lieu of a quantitative justification. In
cases where one or more functional groups or moieties of the target substance suggest a certain metabolic
pathway, metabolic simulators such as the one available in the OECD QSAR Toolbox, may be useful to
predict biotransformation product(s) suitable for use as analogue(s). In any case, the justification for the
choice of (Q)SAR model(s) as well as the selected analogue(s) should be made explicit. A list of useful
software tools for analogue identification is provided below (not all-inclusive):
⎯ ChemID Plus Structural Similarity Search;

⎯ Danish QSAR Database;
⎯ OECD QSAR Toolbox;
⎯ Toxmatch;
⎯ US EPA Analog Identification Methodology (AIM);
⎯ US EPA Toxicology Estimation Software Tool (TEST); and
⎯ Virtual Models for Evaluation of Chemicals within a Global Architecture (VEGA).
Professional judgment is required in order to interpret the results of these tools, and the selection of the
most appropriate tool(s) may depend on the endpoint(s) of concern. Generally, the selected analogue will
be the substance with the highest degree of structural and anticipated functional (i.e., biological) similarity
to the target with adequate experimental data to fill the data gap(s) of concern.
Alternatively, if there is information available on the ADME properties and/or the mode of action of the target
substance, a more informed decision can be made on the selection of the analogue. For example, the
selected analogue could be a substance that is known to follow a similar metabolic pathway, or may itself
be a biotransformation product of the target substance, as long as the metabolite yield and alternative
pathways of metabolism are taken into consideration. A selected analogue may similarly be a substance
that is known or predicted to induce toxicity via the same mechanism(s) and target organ. Analogues
selected in these manners may not always be the closest possible analogues in terms of structural similarity.
If two or more analogues are to be used in the read-across, they should be selected in a manner by which
the target is ‘bracketed’ by the analogues in terms of structural characteristics and physicochemical
properties, so that data gaps are filled by interpolation rather than extrapolation. Also note that if many
potential analogues are identified based on the approaches described above, a category based read-across
approach should be considered instead (see Section 3.8.1).
3.8.2.2 Justification for the selected analogue
For all assessments that are based on an analogue read-across approach, the following items should be
included:
⎯ the IUPAC chemical name, CAS number and chemical structure for the selected analogue;
⎯ a discussion of the structural similarities and differences between the target and the analogue;
⎯ a table comparing the experimental or predicted physical-chemical properties of the target and
analogue substances, physical-chemical properties to be highlighted are listed in Section 3.9.2;
⎯ a description of how the analogue was selected; and
25
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
⎯ the data gap(s) that the analogue(s) will be used to predict.
The physicochemical properties of the target and analogue substances should be similar, and any
substantial differences in one or more of these properties must be explained while addressing any potential
impacts on predicted toxicological characteristics. If two are more analogues are utilized in the read-across,
then the physicochemical properties of the target should be intermediate with respect to the selected
analogues.
All relevant toxicological data for the analogue substance should be thoroughly described, and studies that
address toxicological endpoints to be read-across to the target should be guideline-compliant with any
deviations or methodological shortcomings addressed. If the selected analogue is thought to have a similar
mode of action as the target, then the common underlying mechanism of toxicity should be fully described
and linked to the structural similarities between the analogue and target. In particular, the mode of action
discussion should address the structural differences between the target and the analogue and how these
differences might impact the toxicological outcome. Furthermore, if the read-across approach is intended
to fill a genotoxicity data gap, then the mode of action discussion should also address any potential
differences between the target and analogue in terms of their ability to bind to cellular proteins and DNA.
If the selected analogue is a known biotransformation product of the target substance (or vice versa), or if
the selected analogue is known to have biotransformation product(s) that are the same or similar to the
target, then a full discussion of the relevant ADME pathway is also required, and the proposed pathway
should be supported by high quality studies in rodents or humans. The ADME discussion should also
address any potential differences in the magnitude of the exposure of the target organ to the parent
substance and the biotransformation product(s), and whether any additional metabolites may form from the
target substance that are not formed from the analogue substance. In particular, if the target substance is
the parent compound, the ability of the parent compound to rapidly metabolize into the analogue substance
must be addressed, since longer exposure durations to the parent (target) compared to the metabolite
(analogue) introduces a greater degree of uncertainty to the read-across justification.
If two or more analogues are to be used in the read-across, then the justification described above should
be repeated for each analogue.
3.8.2.3 Application of the analogue-based read-across approach to fill data gaps
Generally, in a well-supported read-across approach incorporating a single analogue substance, the

toxicological endpoint(s) of concern can be read-across from the analogue substance to the target
substance in order to fill the relevant data gap(s). Read-across involving only a single analogue, particularly
when the read-across involves an absence of an effect, requires the most robust justification with respect
to Section 3.8.2.2. If two or more analogues are incorporated, then typically for each endpoint, the most
conservative result among the analogues is read-across to the target substance, unless a result from a
“less conservative” analogue can be supported based on the mode of action and/or ADME discussion.
3.8.3 Guidelines for the use of (quantitative) structural activity relationship ((Q)SAR) models
According to ECHA (2008), SARs and QSARs are theoretical models that are used to predict in a qualitative
or quantitative manner the physicochemical, toxicological and environmental fate properties of chemical
substances on the basis of their structural properties. Whereas a SAR is a qualitative correlation between
the presence of certain functional groups or moieties and properties or activities of interest, QSARs are
mathematical models often based on statistical correlations, relating one or more quantitative parameters
derived from the chemical structure to a quantitative measurement of interest. Both SARs and QSARs
based on relevant and reliable models can be useful in searching for potential analogue substances in a
read-across approach or for screening purposes in cases where a data gap is present or when
supplementation to experimental data is deemed useful. For all toxicological, physicochemical, and
environmental endpoints, experimental results always take precedence over predictions based on (Q)SAR
results. Therefore, (Q)SAR-based predictions should only be considered in cases where no data on the
relevant endpoint(s) are available or where supplementation of existing experimental data is deemed useful.
26
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
The use of (Q)SAR models for analogue identification is described in Section 3.8.2.1. A discussion of the
use of (Q)SAR models for identifying structural alerts for hazard screening and for filling data gaps is
provided below.
3.8.3.1 Use of (Q)SARs in hazard screening and identification of structural alerts
The presence of certain functional groups or moieties, or structural alerts, within the chemical structure of
a compound may be associated with a toxicological hazard. These structural alerts often suggest increased
potential of DNA and/or protein binding, formation of reactive oxygen species, or other biological effect(s)
which could increase carcinogenic, genotoxic, and/or reproductive and developmental toxicity potential,
among others. The use of SARs is a recognized method for the identification of structural alerts in
concordance with professional judgment (ECHA, 2008). The identification of structural alert(s) and their
corresponding toxicological hazard can be particularly useful in cases where a screening assessment of
carcinogenic potential needs to be made to clear a substance to TOE levels (Section 3.6.1). For example,
if no toxicological data are available for the target substance or its potential analogues, the presence of one
or more structural alerts that are associated with an adverse toxicological effect may indicate that the
application of the TOE thresholds is not appropriate, or vice-versa. In the former case, the use of other
internationally recognized hazard screening protocols, such as the TTC approach (Kroes et al., 2004), may
be utilized to proposed drinking water criteria that are not in excess of the TOE threshold. (Q)SAR software
programs currently available for this purpose include the OECD QSAR Toolbox, OncoLogic ® (for
carcinogenicity only), ToxTree, and Virtual Models for Evaluation of Chemicals within a Global Architecture
(VEGA).
3.8.3.2 Use of (Q)SARs for data gap filling
Experimental data from the target substance or from analogue substances shall always take precedence
over (Q)SAR-based predictions when drawing conclusions pursuant to establishing drinking water criteria.
However, the use of such predictions may, in limited cases, be applied toward addressing data gaps. For
example, data gap filling using QSAR-based predictions may occur when experimental data for certain
physicochemical, ecotoxicological, or environmental fate properties are not available for a compound or its
analogue(s) and a predicted value is required (ECHA, 2008). With respect to toxicological endpoints, the
use of (Q)SAR models by itself cannot serve to fulfill the data requirements for a qualitative or quantitative
risk assessment, although QSAR-based predictions may be used to support experimental data. For
example, (Q)SAR-based predictions serve to assess the reliability of experimental data (i.e., to support the
choice of an experimental value from a range of values), to support an analogue approach (i.e., to predict
endpoints for substances with similar chemical structures to the target and analogue) or to provide
supporting information on toxicokinetics (ECHA, 2008). All (Q)SAR based predictions for toxicological
endpoints should be interpreted with caution and evaluated for reliability; in particular, the substances used
in the model training sets should be reviewed and the target substance should be within the model’s
applicability domain. (Q)SAR software programs currently available for this purpose include ECOSAR (for
aquatic toxicity endpoints only), Estimation Program Interface Suite (EPISUITE) (for physicochemical and
environmental fate properties only), OECD QSAR Toolbox, and Virtual Models for Evaluation of Chemicals
within a Global Architecture (VEGA).
3.9 Key elements of a risk assessment for drinking water additive chemicals
This section establishes the minimum criteria for the documentation of the data review performed on each
drinking water additive chemical that requires a new or updated assessment. The assessment shall include,
but not be limited to, evaluation of the elements detailed in this section.
3.9.1 Abstract
A summary shall be provided of the following:
— overview of the key toxicology studies;
27
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
— rationale for the selection of the critical effect and the corresponding NOAEL or other endpoint for
calculation;
— major assumptions used in the assessment and areas of uncertainty; and
— presentation of the RfD, TAC, SPAC and STEL values.
3.9.2 Physical and chemical properties
The assessment shall define the following parameters for the substance, as applicable:
— chemical formula, structure, CAS number, and molecular weight;

— physical state and appearance;
— melting point or boiling point;
— vapor pressure;
— solubility in water;
— density;
— organoleptic properties (taste and odor thresholds);
— dissociation constant (pKa); and
— partition coefficients (octanol / water, air / water).
3.9.3 Production and use
The assessment shall review the method(s) of production of the substance, whether it is a synthetic or a
naturally occurring substance, and the principal uses of the chemical. This includes any use as a water
treatment chemical or a food additive (direct or indirect) and its presence in such products as medicines,
personal care products or cosmetics.
3.9.4 Analytical methods
For each identified analytical method for the substance, the following shall be summarized:
— analytical matrix;
— sample preparation, if applicable;
— method of analysis;
— type of detector or the wavelength for spectroscopic methods; and
— detection limit.
3.9.5 Sources of human and environmental exposure
The assessment shall describe the substance’s natural occurrence, if any, and its presence in food or other
media. Human exposure from drinking water, food, and air shall be described, including occupational
exposures. The major source(s) and route(s) of human exposure shall be identified.
3.9.6 Comparative kinetics and metabolism
All references describing the ADME of the substance shall be reviewed. Both human data (when available)
and animal data shall be included.
3.9.7 Effects on humans
A summary of each relevant reference documenting human exposure to the substance that is used in the
hazard assessment shall be provided. These exposures can include both case reports of incidental human
exposure to the substance, and epidemiological studies, which explore the association between human
exposure and specific toxic endpoints. Primary literature references shall be reviewed whenever possible.
28
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Supporting data or other studies not utilized in the hazard assessment can be summarized in tabular form.
3.9.8 Effects on laboratory animals and in vitro test systems
A summary of each key study of the substance in experimental animals or in vitro test systems that is used
in the hazard assessment shall be provided. The references used shall meet established toxicity study
guidelines, as defined in Section 3.3.1, or any deficiencies shall be clearly identified. Studies shall include,
but are not limited to the following: single exposure, short-term exposure (repeated dose study of < 28 day),
long-term and chronic exposure (repeated dose study of ≥ 28 day), genotoxicity, reproduction and
developmental toxicity, immunotoxicity, and neurotoxicity. Primary literature references shall be reviewed
whenever possible.
Supporting data or other studies not utilized in the hazard assessment can be summarized in tabular form.
3.9.9 Effects evaluation
The effects evaluation is intended to provide an overall summary of the data reviewed for the substance
and describe its mode / mechanism of action, if possible. This evaluation also serves to define the level of
hazard represented by exposure to the substance at relevant human concentrations. This evaluation shall
contain three major elements: hazard identification (assessment), dose-response assessment, and
exposure assessment (NRC, 1983).
3.9.9.1 Hazard identification
The hazard identification (assessment) shall identify and discuss the following issues:
— the key data that define the basis of the concern to human health;
— the characterization of the substance as carcinogenic or noncarcinogenic, the basis for this
characterization, and the critical effect(s);
— the extent to which this characterization is a function of study design (e.g., adequate number of
doses used, effects noted only at highest dose, study performed at the maximum tolerated dose);
— the conclusions of the key study(ies) and whether they are supported or conflicted by other data;
— the significant data gaps for the substance and any relevant nonpositive data;
— the available human data (case reports or epidemiological studies), and how they support or do not
support the conclusions from the key study(ies);
— the mechanism by which the substance produces the adverse effect(s) noted in the key study, and
whether this mechanism is relevant to humans; and
— the summary of the hazard assessment including confidence in the conclusions, alternate
conclusions which may also be supported by the data, significant data gaps, and the major assumptions
used in the assessment.
3.9.9.2 Dose-response assessment
The dose-response assessment shall identify and discuss the following issues:
— the data used to define the dose-response curve, and in which species the data were generated;
— if animal data were used, whether the most sensitive species was evaluated;
29
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
— if human data were used, whether positive and negative data were reported;
— whether the critical data were from the same route of exposure as the expected human exposure
(drinking water), and if not, discuss whether pharmacokinetic data are available to extrapolate between
routes of exposure;
— for noncarcinogens, the methodology employed to calculate the RfD and the selection of the UFs
which were used;
— for carcinogens, the dose-response model selected to calculate the LED10 and the rationale
supporting its selection; and
— document the RfD calculation (see Section 3.6.3).
3.9.9.3 Exposure characterization
The exposure characterization shall identify and discuss the following issues:
— the most significant source(s) of environmental exposure to the substance, and the RSC of each;
— the population(s) most at risk of exposure, and identify highly exposed or sensitive subpopulations;
and
— any issues related to cumulative or multiple exposures to the substance.
3.9.10 Risk characterization
3.9.10.1 Confidence in the assessment
A narrative description of the overall confidence in the risk assessment shall be included. The confidence
in the risk assessment is considered to be inversely related to the degree of scientific uncertainty in the
underlying analysis (Beck et al., 2016; NRC, 2009). The narrative should incorporate a discussion of the
specific elements of scientific uncertainty that inform the overall confidence in the risk assessment
(Beck et al., 2016).
Major elements of scientific uncertainty may be considered to include, but not limited to, the following;
database completeness, quality of key study(ies), severity and relevance of the critical effect, quality of the
dose-response analysis and consideration of sensitive subpopulations (Beck et al., 2016).
In assessing the database completeness, the types of toxicity data (e.g., human, animal, mode of action)
as well as data gaps that may have improved the derived risk values should be emphasized. This approach
should take into consideration issues such as the types of endpoints evaluated, life-stages evaluated,
duration, timing, route of exposure, and the potential for latent effects and/or reversibility of effects
(US EPA, 2002a).
The assessment of study quality shall include a discussion of the key toxicity studies as compared with the
most recently adopted toxicity testing protocols (as described in Section 3.3.1). Particular emphasis should
be placed on deviations from protocols that may have the potential to alter the selected POD. Additional
consideration should be given to situations where key toxicity data were obtained from secondary sources
as opposed to the primary source. The potential limitations of using toxicity data obtained from secondary
sources should be reviewed within the narrative.
Following consideration of the elements of scientific uncertainty within the risk assessment, a concluding
statement regarding the overall confidence (e.g., low, medium, high) in the derived risk values shall be
included along with the critical research needs that could increase confidence if a future, updated risk
assessment is warranted.
30
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
3.9.10.2 TAC derivation
The TAC derivation shall contain an explanation of all factors contributing to the TAC calculation, including
adjustment for sources of the substance other than water. The TAC calculation shall be based on the oral
RfD calculated during the dose response assessment in Section 3.9.9.2. The TAC calculation shall include
adjustment for significant contributions of the substance from sources other than water, e.g., food and air.
In the absence of data to determine the relative source contribution of a substance, a default drinking water
contribution of 20% shall be applied.
3.9.10.3 STEL derivation
When a STEL is calculated for a substance, the calculation shall be based on the NOAEL or LOAEL of the
selected study (as defined in Section 3.4) with adjustment for body weight and daily water consumption of
the protected individual, including any sensitive subpopulations. The default body weight and water
consumption shall reflect that of a bottle-fed infant, in the absence of data which demonstrate that children,
adults, or pregnant women are more sensitive to the substance than infants. A rationale for the selection of
UFs used in the calculation shall also be provided.
3.9.11 Risk management (SPAC derivation)
The TAC calculation shall form the basis of the SPAC calculation. The SPAC is equal to the TAC for
qualitative risk assessments. For quantitative risk assessments, the SPAC shall be calculated as a
percentage of the TAC value, based on the estimated total number of sources of the substance in the
drinking water treatment and distribution system. In the absence of these data, the SPAC shall be calculated
as 10% of the TAC value (default multiple source factor of 10 to account for other sources of the substance
in drinking water).
3.9.12 Risk comparisons and conclusions
A review of other evaluations of the substance performed by other organizations (international, national,
state or provincial agencies, or other entities) shall be provided. Consistencies and differences between
evaluations shall be noted. Any uncertainties in these evaluations shall be discussed. A summary of the
overall risk of the substance shall be made, including a discussion about compounds of comparable risk
(e.g., similar structure, chemical class) when possible.
3.9.13 References
An alphabetized list of all reviewed citations (both cited and not cited in the assessment) shall be provided
in an established format such as that described in The Chicago Manual of Style.
3.9.14 Appendices
Supporting documents, complex calculations, data summary tables, unique definitions, and other pertinent
information shall be included in appendices to the document.
3.9.15 Peer review
Risk assessments performed to the requirements of this Standard shall undergo external peer review
(US EPA, 2015b) by toxicology experts representing the regulatory, academic, independent or industrial
sectors, with the exception of the following:
— substances evaluated using the TOE (see Section 3.6.1);
31
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
— substances evaluated to a TAC of 10 μg/L using the qualitative approach based on chemical-
specific data that are clearly negative and concluded to be nongenotoxic 10 (see Sections 3.3.2 and
3.6.2); and
— nonregulatory criteria that have already undergone peer review, such as, but not limited to, those
shown in Table 3.6.
Only peer-reviewed risk assessments conducted by regional, national, or international authoritative bodies
according to current best practices may be used to derive TACs, SPACs, and STELs. Each assessment
under consideration shall be individually reviewed to determine if it is current and meets the requirements
of this Standard. Prior to use of any peer-reviewed risk value, a literature search shall be performed to
ensure that the risk-based value is still current. At a minimum, the literature search shall be performed to
identify relevant publications issued since publication of the risk-based value. The risk assessment methods
used by the organization for the assessment shall be reviewed to determine if they are equivalent to those
outlined in this Standard. This includes consideration of the key study, POD, and UF selection to ensure
consistency with current practices, as well as interpretation of sensitive effects (e.g., to determine if scientific
consensus on interpretation has changed), as well as a review of risk assessment methodology for
consistency with this Standard (e.g., minimum dataset, default body weights, life-stage adjustment,
dosimetric adjustment). When possible, appropriate adjustments should be made to account for any
deviations or deficiencies in the assessment.
An abbreviated risk assessment report should be prepared to indicate that the existing assessment is
relevant to drinking water and to document the results of the updated literature search (e.g., failed to find
any new data that would impact the assessment, or new data or methodology have been incorporated or
addressed).
In order to comply with this Standard’s requirements, additional steps may need to be taken to derive TACs,
SPACs, and STELs from sources shown in Table 3.6, including:
⎯ incorporation of life-stage adjustment factors for chemicals with mutagenic modes of action;
⎯ incorporation of dosimetric adjustment;
⎯ adjustment from a body weight or intake rate that differs from the default body weight designated
by this Standard; and
⎯ transformation of µg/d risk-based values (e.g., NRSL, MADL) to µg/L drinking water levels.
If the review of the assessment determines that there are significant deviations from this Standard that are
unable to be resolved with additional steps as those described above, the assessment is not suitable for
derivation of a TAC, SPAC, and STEL, and a new risk assessment shall be prepared in accordance with
this Standard.
10 Qualitative assessments based on read-across to satisfy the minimum data requirement and/or that include
professional judgment related to the weight of evidence interpretation of mixed or equivocal genotoxicity data may
necessitate peer review.
32
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Has risk assessment

Yes been performed? No
(see Section 3.2)
Review toxicity data

Yes Is the risk estimation No and determine risk
consistent with assessment approach
Section 3.6? (see Section 3.3)
Determine TAC Chemical class-based

Qualitative approach Threshold of
and SPAC from evaluation criteria Quantitative approach
(see Sections 3.6.2 evaluation approach
risk estimation approach (see Section 3.6.3)
and 3.6.4.1) (see Section 3.6.1)
(see Section 3.5) (see Section 3.8)
Determine TAC and SPAC Determine TAC and SPAC

from risk estimation Yes Is the critical effect a No from risk estimation
(see Section 3.6.3.1 and noncarcinogenic endpoint? (see Sections 3.6.3.3
3.6.4.2) and 3.6.4.2)
Figure 1
Toxicity data review process
33
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Extrapolation Range Observed Range
)
ose
Response
D
n
it o
Human Lim
e)
e
nc
at
Exposure of e
m
fid
sti
Interest on
lE
( C
tra
en
(C
10%
ar
ed Line
ject
Pro
0%
LED
LED10
10
ED
ED10
10
Legend
Legend
MOE ED
ED – see
10 10 - seeSection
annex 2.14
A, A.2.4
MOE
LED - see annex A, A.2.7
– see Section 2.20
LED10 10
Dose MOE - see annex A, A.2.9
Dose MOE – see Section 2.23
Figure A2 - Graphical presentation of data and extrapolations (U.S. EPA, 1996a)

Figure 2
Graphical presentation of data and extrapolations (US EPA, 1996a)
34
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 3.1
Qualitative risk assessment data requirements
Study type Preferred criteria

Required studies
bacterial reverse mutation assay performed with and without
exogenous metabolic activation using Salmonella typhimurium
gene mutation assay1 (preferred strains are TA97, TA98, TA100, TA102, TA1535, and
TA1537) or Escherichia coli (preferred strains are WP2 uvrA or
WP2 uvrA [pKM101])
chromosomal aberration assay1 metaphase analysis in mammalian cells and without exogenous
(in vitro preferred) metabolic activation
in vivo metaphase analysis or micronucleus assay in mammalian species
Supplemental studies
mouse lymphoma assay, SCE,2 UDS,3 HGPRT,4 DNA binding
supplemental genotoxicity studies
(post labeling assay)
bioaccumulation potential octanol / water partition coefficient
pharmacokinetics ADME data in humans, other mammalian species, or both
structural / functional assessment structure / activity relationship analysis
acute or short-term toxicity5 1- to 14-day study or 14- to 28-day study using oral exposure route
cell proliferation / cell cycle assays proliferating cell nuclear antigen (PCNA)
sensitization guinea pig intradermal injection
in vivo gene mutation assay transgenic gene mutation assays
receptor binding / transcriptional activation assays, frog
endocrine disruption assays
metamorphosis assay, steroidogenesis assay
human data epidemiological, occupational, or clinical studies
1 The gene mutation assay and the chromosomal aberration assay (in vitro or in vivo) shall constitute the minimum
data set required to perform a qualitative risk assessment. When one or both in vitro genotoxicity studies are positive,
the in vivo assay shall be required to be reviewed.
2 Sister chromatid exchange assay; SCEs are not considered to be mutagenic effects because the exchange is
assumed to be reciprocal with no gain, loss, or change of genetic material. However, they do indicate that the test
material has interacted with the DNA in a way that may lead to chromosome damage. In in vitro studies, SCEs do not
provide adequate evidence of mutagenicity, but do identify the need for definitive chromosomal aberration studies.
When evidence of in vitro clastogenicity exists, the induction of SCEs is often used as evidence of likely in vivo
clastogenic activity because the in vitro aberration data demonstrate the clastogenic activity of the compound and the
in vivo SCE data demonstrate that the compound interacted with the DNA in the target tissue.
3 Unscheduled DNA synthesis assay.
4 Hypoxanthine guanine phosphoribosyl transferase assay.
5Minimum reported parameters shall include clinical observations, hematology and clinical chemistry, and gross
pathology.
35
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 3.2
Quantitative risk assessment data requirements

Required studies
bacterial reverse mutation assay performed with and without
exogenous metabolic activation using Salmonella typhimurium
gene mutation assay1 (preferred strains are TA97, TA98, TA100, TA102, TA1535, and
TA1537) or Escherichia coli (preferred strains are WP2 uvrA or
WP2 uvrA (pKM101)
chromosomal aberration assay1 metaphase analysis in mammalian cells and without exogenous
(in vitro preferred) metabolic activation
in vivo metaphase analysis or micronucleus assay in mammalian species
subchronic toxicity 1 90-day assay in rodent species by oral route of exposure
Additional studies (required as indicated)
reproduction assay2 two-generation reproductive assay in a rodent species
teratology study (two species, one rodent and one nonrodent, are
developmental assay2
preferred)
chronic study 3 two year bioassay in rodent species by oral route of exposure
Supplemental studies
mouse lymphoma, SCE,4 UDS,5 HGPRT,6 DNA binding
supplemental genotoxicity studies
(post labeling assay)
bioaccumulation potential octanol / water partition coefficient
pharmacokinetics ADME data in humans, other mammalian species, or both
structural / functional assessment structure / activity relationship analysis
acute or short-term toxicity7 1- to 14-day or 14- to 28-day study using oral exposure
cell proliferation / cell cycle assays proliferating cell nuclear antigen (PCNA)
sensitization guinea pig intradermal injection
in vivo gene mutation assay transgenic gene mutation assays
receptor binding / transcriptional activation assays, frog
endocrine disruption assays
metamorphosis assay, steroidogenesis assay
human data epidemiological, occupational, or clinical studies
1The gene mutation assay, the chromosomal aberration assay (in vitro or in vivo), and the subchronic toxicity study
shall constitute the minimum data set required to perform a quantitative risk assessment. When one or both in vitro
genotoxicity studies are positive, the in vivo assay shall be required to be reviewed.
2 It is recommended that results of a screening assay, such as OECD No. 422, Combined repeated dose toxicity
study with reproduction / developmental toxicity screening test, or data from other repeated dose assays which include
histopathological examination of the reproductive tissues of each sex be reviewed prior to a determination that these
assays are required for evaluation.
3 A chronic study with evaluation of carcinogenic endpoints is required when review of the minimum data set
concludes that the substance is likely to be a human health hazard at exposures of 10 μg/L or less.
4 Sister chromatid exchange assay; SCEs are not considered to be mutagenic effects because the exchange is
assumed to be reciprocal with no gain, loss, or change of genetic material. However, they do indicate that the test
material has interacted with the DNA in a way that may lead to chromosome damage. In in vitro studies, SCEs do not
provide adequate evidence of mutagenicity, but do identify the need for definitive chromosomal aberration studies.
When evidence of in vitro clastogenicity exists, the induction of SCEs is often used as evidence of likely in vivo
clastogenic activity because the in vitro aberration data demonstrate the clastogenic activity of the compound and the
in vivo SCE data demonstrate that the compound interacted with the DNA in the target tissue.
36
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 3.2
Quantitative risk assessment data requirements

5 Unscheduled DNA synthesis assay.
6 Hypoxanthine guanine phosphoribosyl transferase assay.
7 Minimum reported parameters include clinical observations, hematology and clinical chemistry, and gross pathology.
Table 3.3
TACs for qualitative risk assessment
Conclusion of data review TAC

The weight of evidence review of the required genotoxicity studies and all
other relevant data concludes that the substance is not a hazard at 10 μg/L
exposures of 10 μg/L or less.
The weight of evidence review of the required genotoxicity studies, a
repeated dose study of less than 90 duration,1 and all other relevant data
≤ 50 μg/L
concludes that the substance is not a human health hazard at exposures
of 50 μg/L or less.
The weight of evidence review of the required genotoxicity studies and all supplemental studies or
other relevant data concludes that the data are insufficient to determine chronic toxicity and
the potential human health hazard of the substance at exposures of carcinogenesis bioassay
10 μg/L or less. required for review
The weight of evidence review of the required genotoxicity studies and all chronic toxicity and
other relevant data concludes that the substance is likely to be a human carcinogenesis bioassay
health hazard at exposures of 10 μg/L or less. required for review
1
Required study parameters include organ and body weights, clinical chemistry and hematology, gross pathology,
and histopathology.
37
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 3.4
Uncertainty factors (UFs)
Areas of uncertainty Factor

Intraspecies extrapolation (species variation): This factor accounts for variations in
chemical sensitivity among individuals in a species including toxicokinetic and 1, 3, or 10
toxicodynamic parameters.
Interspecies extrapolation (animal to human): This factor accounts for variations in
chemical sensitivity between experimental animals and humans including 1, 3, or 10
toxicokinetic and toxicodynamic parameters.
Less than lifetime duration of exposure: This factor is intended to extrapolate
1, 3, or 10
experimental results from subchronic to chronic exposure.
Use of LOAEL rather than NOAEL1: This factor addresses the uncertainty in
1, 3, or 10
developing a RfD from a LOAEL rather than a NOAEL.
Lack of database completeness: This factor accounts for the absence of data for
1, 3, or 10
specific toxic endpoints.
1 This adjustment is not required for BMDL calculations.
NOTE — When uncertainties exist in four areas, a 3,000-fold composite UF is appropriate. When
uncertainties exist in five areas, a 10,000-fold composite UF is appropriate. This consolidation of individual
factors recognizes that each individual factor is conservative, and multiplication of four or five UFs is likely
to result in an overly conservative RfD. Datasets that would result in a composite UF of greater than
10,000-fold are considered too weak for quantitative risk assessment (see Section 3.3.2 for qualitative risk
assessment requirements) (Dourson, 1994).
Table 3.5
Unit Riskage values
Ingestion rate for 90th Exposure Potency

Unit Riskage1
Age grouping percentile consumer duration adjustment
(μg/L)-1
only (L/kg-d) (years) (p.a.)
birth to < 1 month 0.235 0.083 10 3 × 10-6 CSF
1 to < 3 months 0.228 0.167 10 5 × 10-6 CSF
3 to < 6 months 0.148 0.25 10 5 × 10-6 CSF
6 to < 12 months 0.112 0.5 10 8 × 10-6 CSF
1 to < 2 years 0.056 1 10 8 × 10-6 CSF
2 to < 3 years 0.052 1 3 2 × 10-6 CSF
3 to < 6 years 0.049 3 3 6 × 10-6 CSF
6 to < 11 years 0.035 5 3 8 × 10-6 CSF
11 to < 16 years 0.026 5 3 6 × 10-6 CSF
16 to < 21 years 0.025 5 1 2 × 10-6 CSF
21 to < 50 years 0.035 29 1 1 × 10-5 CSF
51 to 70 years 0.033 20 1 9 × 10-6 CSF
Total lifetime Unit Riskage 0.034 70 — 8 × 10-5 CSF
1 Based on 1 (mg/kg-day)-1 and an 80 kg adult body weight.
38
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 3.6
Peer reviewed risk values
Source Non-cancer value Cancer value Link Comments

<https://www.atsdr.cdc.gov/mrls/
Agency for Toxic mrllist.asp> and acute, intermediate and chronic
minimal risk levels (MRLs)
Substances and Disease not applicable <https://www.atsdr.cdc.gov/mrls/ MRLs available: Use chronic
(chronic MRLs only)
Registry (ATSDR) pdfs/atsdr_mrls.pdf> MRLs only
(comprehensive list)
public health goals (PHGs)
California Public Health public health goals (PHGs) <http://oehha.ca.gov/water/
for carcinogens —
Goal Risk Values for non-carcinogens public-health-goals-phgs>
(10-6 cancer risk)
Health Canada <http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/
tolerable daily intakes
Toxicological Reference oral cancer slope factors ewh-semt/pubs/contamsite/ —
(TDIs)
Values (TRVs) part-partie_ii/index-eng.php>
Joint FAO/WHO Meeting <http://www.fao.org/agriculture
acceptable daily intakes
on Pesticide Residues not applicable /crops/thematic-sitemap/ —
(ADIs)
(JMPR) theme/pests/lpe/en/>
additional lifetime cancer <https://www.health.state.mn.us/
Minnesota Department of
health risk limits (HRLs) risk (ALR) communities/environment/risk/ —
Health
(10-5 cancer risk) guidance/gw/table.html>
<https://oehha.ca.gov/
proposition-65/general- apply life-stage adjustment for
OEHHA Proposition 65 maximum allowable dose no significant risk levels
info/current-proposition-65-no- carcinogens acting through a
Safe Harbor Levels levels (MADLs) (NSRLs)
significant-risk-levels-nsrls- mutagenic mode of action
maximum>
RIVM TDIs and
apply life-stage adjustment for
independently derived peer IPCS TD50;
carcinogens acting through a
International Toxicity reviewed values, including RIVM cancer risk
<https://toxnet.nlm.nih.gov/ mutagenic mode of action; Non-
Estimates for Risk those of the Texas (1 × 10-4 cancer risk);
newtoxnet/iter.htm> oral route risk values require
Assessment (ITER) Commission on independently derived
adequate toxicokinetic data to
Environmental Quality peer reviewed values
extrapolate to oral route
(TCEQ)
<https://www.epa.gov/wqc/
US EPA Ambient Water apply life-stage adjustment for
national-recommended-water-
Quality Criteria: Human RfD 10-6 cancer risk carcinogens acting through a
quality-criteria-human-health-
Health mutagenic mode of action
criteria-table>
39
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 3.6
Peer reviewed risk values
Source Non-cancer value Cancer value Link Comments

1-day (10 kg child), 10-day
<https://www.epa.gov/sites/ apply life-stage adjustment for
US EPA Health (10 kg child), and lifetime
10-4 cancer risk production/files/2018-03/ carcinogens acting through a
Advisories (70 kg adult) health
documents/dwtable2018.pdf> mutagenic mode of action
advisory
US EPA Integrated Risk apply life-stage adjustment for
<https://cfpub.epa.gov/ncea/iris/
Information System oral reference dose (RfD) oral slope factor (CSF) carcinogens acting through a
search/index.cfm?>
(IRIS) Program mutagenic mode of action
<http://apps.who.int/
World Health acceptable daily intakes
not applicable food-additives-contaminants- —
Organization (WHO) (ADIs)
jecfa-database/search.aspx#>
WHO Guidelines for <http://www.who.int/ apply life-stage adjustment for
Drinking Water Quality tolerable daily intake (TDI) 10-5 cancer risk water_sanitation_health/water- carcinogens acting through a
(GDWQ) quality/guidelines/chemicals/en/> mutagenic mode of action
40
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
4 Normative drinking water criteria

(previously NSF/ANSI 60 Annex C, NSF/ANSI 61 Annex D)
4.1 General
The drinking water criteria provided in this Standard shall be used as evaluation criteria for the
determination of product compliance to the health effects requirements of drinking water Standards in which
this Standard is cited, including NSF/ANSI/CAN 60 and NSF/ANSI/CAN 61.
The values in Table 4.1 include the consensus US EPA and Health Canada drinking water criteria for
contaminants regulated by these agencies. The table also includes criteria for nonregulated contaminants
that have been derived using standard cancer and noncancer chemical risk assessment methodologies
according to the requirements of Section 3. Nonregulatory US EPA guidance values are also included, as
well as criteria for chemicals that have been evaluated using the class-based effect level and TOE
approaches detailed in Section 3.
The drinking water criteria in this Standard have not been evaluated for taste and odor considerations at
the indicated concentration limits.
NOTE — The substances listed in Table 4.1 are not intended to encompass all the potential analytes of interest
that need to be considered in evaluating products to the requirements of NSF drinking water Standards. The
user is cautioned that each product may have formulation-dependent analytes of interest for which acceptable
concentration limits have not been determined. In these cases, the user is directed to develop acceptable
concentration limits based on the requirements of Section 3 to be in compliance with the requirements of the
Standards in which this Standard is cited.
4.2 US EPA and Health Canada drinking water criteria
Where indicated, Table 4.1 contains drinking water criteria for contaminants regulated by the US EPA and
established by Health Canada. Values for each contaminant have been agreed upon by representatives of
both agencies for the purpose of evaluating products against the health effects requirements of this
Standard. For each substance, the values in the table represent a consensus decision regarding the
selection of the most appropriate assessment.
At the time of publication, the indicated values were valid. These values are subject to change, however,
and the user is encouraged to contact US EPA or Health Canada for the most current values. Some of
these values have been developed using a linear multistage model to predict theoretical excess
carcinogenic risk at low exposure concentrations. Where the database is sufficient and the compound mode
of action can be determined, the US EPA is replacing the default linear multistage model with either a
biologically based cell kinetic multistage model or a MOE analysis. Cancer potency (q1*) values developed
using the linear multistage model may be re-evaluated in the future.
4.3 Joint Peer Review Steering Committee (JPRSC) reconciled criteria
Effective April 17, 2013, CSA Group, NSF International, IAPMO R&T, UL, and the Water Quality Association
use harmonized procedures outlined in Section 3 to develop action levels for unregulated drinking water
contaminants. The JPRSC was established by the aforementioned certifying agencies to reconcile /
consolidate current pass/fail criteria and to harmonize the external per review process for future risk
assessments.
As part of the reconciliation / consolidation process, pass/fail criteria may be adopted following consensus
approval of the members of the JPRSC. Sources of the pass/fail criteria approved by the JPRSC may
include risk assessments submitted by each certifying agency as well as assessments based upon
authoritative agencies (i.e., US EPA, Health Canada). All JPRSC reconciled drinking water criteria are
determined in compliance with the requirements of Section 3.
41
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
and the user is encouraged to contact NSF International for the most current values.
4.4 Externally peer-reviewed drinking water criteria
Where indicated, Table 4.1 contains drinking water criteria for unregulated substances for which a certifying
agency has determined TACs and SPACs in accordance with Section 3 of this Standard. These criteria
have been externally peer-reviewed by the NSF International Health Advisory Board (HAB). The
NSF International HAB provides consensus peer review of documents supporting derivation of drinking
water criteria. The NSF International HAB is composed of expert toxicologists and risk assessors from
government, academia and industry.
4.5 NSF International drinking water criteria (not externally peer-reviewed)
Where indicated, Table 4.1 contains drinking water criteria for unregulated contaminants that have been
identified as extractants from products covered by this Standard. For criteria set by NSF International, the
TAC and SPAC criteria have been determined in accordance with Section 3, however, such criteria are
either in the process of undergoing external peer-review or have not been submitted for external peer
review. If not submitted for external peer review, these drinking water criteria will be reviewed and updated
as part of the JPRSC reconciliation process.
4.6 Drinking water criteria based on US EPA guidance concentrations
Where indicated, Table 4.1 contains drinking water criteria for unregulated contaminants for which the
acceptable drinking water concentrations are based on US EPA guidance values, including those in the
US EPA Health Advisory and IRIS databases. A RSC factor has been applied to calculation of the drinking
water criteria when such a factor was not applied as part of the US EPA risk assessment. In the absence
of sufficient information to determine a data-derived RSC factor, a default 20% drinking water contribution
is assumed.
and the user is encouraged to contact US EPA for the most current values. Some of these values have
been developed using a linear multistage model to predict risk at low exposure concentrations and may be
re-evaluated in the future.
4.7 TOE chemical list
Where indicated, Table 4.1 contains the list of chemicals that have been evaluated under the TOE because
either they lack of the minimum data to determine chemical-specific concentrations in accordance with the
requirements of Section 3 (see Section 3.6.1) or they may have sufficient toxicity data available that would
enable chemical-specific risk assessments to be performed but have not been detected at concentrations
exceeding the TOE criteria.
Qualification to the TOE category includes a comprehensive literature search for the particular substance
and consideration of structure-activity relationships.
42
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
Drinking water criteria
MCL/MAC
SPAC STEL Source of supporting documentation Additional
Substance CAS# or TAC 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
(mg/L) (mg/L) information
(mg/L)
Derived from the oral RfD on the
US EPA IRIS database with a default
formaldehyde 50-00-0 1 0.1 — —
20% RSC for drinking water.
Verification date: 1990-06-20
p,p’-dichlorodiphenyl US EPA IRIS 10-5/10-6 cancer risk levels.
50-29-3 0.001 0.0001 — —
trichloroethane (DDT) Verification date: 1987-06-24
Health Canada MAC.
benzo(a)pyrene 50-32-8 0.00004 0.000004 — —
Issue date: 2016-01
WQA action level.
benzoic acid, 2,5-dichloro- 50-79-3 0.01 0.01 — —
JPRSC consensus date: 2014-10-15
NSF action level.
benzoic acid, 2,4-dichloro- 50-84-0 0.1 0.01 0.5 —
External peer review date: 2004-04-21
WQA action level.
benzoic acid, 3,5-dichloro- 51-36-5 0.01 0.01 — —
benzoic acid, 3,4-dichloro- 51-44-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
bronopol 52-51-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
US EPA 10-5/10-6 cancer risk levels.
n-nitrosodiethylamine 55-18-5 0.000004 0.0000004 — —
benzamide 55-21-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dipropylamine,
56-18-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3,3’-diamino-
carbon tetrachloride 56-23-5 0.005 0.0005 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
tributyltin oxide 56-35-9 0.002 0.0002 — —
Agency consensus date: 1997-07-02
benzyltriethylammonium
56-37-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
chloride
Health Canada MAC.
parathion 56-38-2 0.05 0.005 — —
Issue date: 1986-02
WQA action level.
benzo(a)anthracene 56-55-3 0.0002 0.00002 —
43
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
WQA action level.
glycerol 56-81-5 2 0.2 — —
NSF action level.
hexadecanoic acid 57-10-3 0.5 0.5 — —
NSF action level.
octadecanoic acid 57-11-4 0.5 0.5 — —
cyanide (as free cyanide) 57-12-5 0.2 0.02 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.62 —
WQA action level.
propylene glycol 57-55-6 200 20 — —
chlordane 57-74-9 0.002 0.0002 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
WQA action level.
cholesterol 57-88-5 0.01 0.01 — —
lindane 58-89-9 0.0002 0.00002 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
Health Canada MAC.
2,3,4,6-tetrachlorophenol 58-90-2 0.1 0.01 — —
Issue date: 1987-02
WQA action level.
alpha-tocopheryl acetate 58-95-7 0.02 0.02 — —
1,2-propanediol, UL action level.
59-47-2 0.01 0.01 — —
3-(2-methylphenoxy)- JPRSC consensus date: 2015-01-27
NSF action level.
p-chloro-m-cresol 59-50-7 0.7 0.07 1 —
NSF action level.
N-nitrosomorpholine 59-89-2 0.00004 0.000004 0.00004 —
2-phenylethanol 60-12-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Health Canada MAC.
dimethoate 60-51-5 0.02 0.002 — —
Issue date: 1986-02
Detections shall be
0.0007 0.00007 Health Canada MAC. summed with the
dieldrin 60-57-1 —
(total) (total) Issue date: 1994-10 following chemical:
CAS# 309-00-2.
indole,
61-51-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE
3-(2-(diethylamino)ethyl)-
44
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
US EPA IRIS 10-5/10-6 cancer risk levels.
aniline 62-53-3 0.06 0.006 — —
n-nitrosodimethylamine 62-75-9 0.000006 0.0000006 — —
Health Canada MAC.
carbaryl 63-25-2 0.09 0.009 — —
Issue date: 1986-02
phenylurea 64-10-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
UL action level.
formic acid 64-18-6 0.01 0.01 — —
benzoic acid 65-85-0 30 3 — —
WQA action level.
hexanal 66-25-1 0.01 0.01 — —
5-hydroxymethylfurfural 67-47-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methanol 67-56-1 10 1 10 —
JPRSC consensus
WQA action level.
isopropyl alcohol 67-63-0 10 1 40 date for STEL value:
2014-08-13
acetone 67-64-1 6 0.6 — —
Detections shall be
summed with the
0.080 0.008 following chemicals:
chloroform 67-66-3 — 40 CFR § 141.64
(total) (total) CAS# 75-25-2,
CAS# 75-27-4, and
CAS# 124-48-1.
45
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
NSF action level.
dimethyl sufone 67-71-0 0.01 0.01 — —
ethane, hexachloro- 67-72-1 0.009 0.0009 — —
NSF action level.
n,n-dimethylformamide 68-12-2 0.09 0.009 0.4 —
Expressed as
anhydrous Chloramine
T. Detections shall be
benzenesulfonamide, 0.1 0.1 2 NSF action level.
70-55-3 summed with the
4-methyl- (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2018-10-23
following chemicals:
CAS# 127-65-1 and
CAS# 7080-50-4.
n-butanol 71-36-3 0.7 0.07 — —
benzene 71-43-2 0.005 0.0005 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
trichloroethane (1,1,1-) 71-55-6 0.2 0.02 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
endrin 72-20-8 0.002 0.0002 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
methoxychlor 72-43-5 0.04 0.004 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
72-54-8 0.001 0.0001 — —
dichloroethane (DDD) Verification date: 1987-06-24
72-55-9 0.001 0.0001 — —
dichloroethylene (DDE) Verification date: 1987-06-24
4-chlorobenzoic acid 74-11-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
diphenyl-p- UL action level.
74-31-7 0.01 0.01 — —
phenylenediamine, n,n’- JPRSC consensus date: 2015-01-27
bromomethane 74-83-9 0.01 0.001 — —
46
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
Based on the US EPA Lifetime Health
chloromethane 74-87-3 0.03 0.003 — —
Advisory. Issue date: 1989
iodomethane 74-88-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
US EPA Lifetime Drinking Water Health
bromochloromethane 74-97-5 0.09 0.009 — —
WQA action level.
propane 74-98-6 0.01 0.01 — —
JPRSC consensus date: 2014-0813
chloroethane 75-00-3 0.0004 0.00004 — NSF action level. Issue date: 1992-01-10 —
vinyl chloride 75-01-4 0.002 0.0002 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
acetaldehyde 75-07-0 0.01 0.01 — NSF action level. Issue date: 1996-04-24 —
dichloromethane 75-09-2 0.005 0.0005 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
diiodomethane 75-11-6 0.003 0.0003 — TOE —
carbon disulfide 75-15-0 0.7 0.07 — —
Detections shall be
summed with the
bromoform 75-25-2 — 40 CFR § 141.64
CAS# 124-48-1, and
CAS# 67-66-3.
Detections shall be
summed with the
bromodichloromethane 75-27-4 — 40 CFR § 141.64
CAS# 124-48-1, and
CAS# 67-66-3.
WQA action level.
propane, 2-methyl- 75-28-5 0.02 0.02 — —
ethane, 1,1-dichloro- 75-34-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
47
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
dichloroethylene (1,1-) 75-35-4 0.007 0.0007 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
ethane, 1,1-difluro- 75-37-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
vinylidine fluoride 75-38-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methane, chlorodifluoro- 75-45-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trimethylamine 75-50-3 0.01 0.001 — NSF action level. Issue date: 1996-11-11 —
propylene oxide 75-56-9 0.001 0.0001 — —
tert-butylamine 75-64-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
t-butanol 75-65-0 9 0.9 40 —
trichlorofluoromethane 75-69-4 2 0.2 — —
dichlorodifluoromethane 75-71-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methanesulfonic acid 75-75-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Action levels
expressed as TAA
(CAS# 75-85-4).
Detections of TAEE
(CAS# 919-94-8)
and TAME
(CAS# 994-05-8) are to
0.3 0.03 0.4 NSF action level.
tert-amyl alcohol 75-85-4 be multiplied by
(total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2019-10-22
molecular weight
adjustment factors of
0.76 and 0.86,
respectively, prior to
summation.
Detections shall be
summed with the
48
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
CAS# 994-05-8 and
CAS# 919-94-8.
propanoic acid,
75-98-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,2-dimethyl-
dalapon 75-99-0 0.2 0.02 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 79-08-3,
CAS# 79-11-8,
CAS# 631-64-1,
0.060 0.0060 0.060 and CAS# 79-43-6.
trichloroacetic acid 76-03-9 40 CFR § 141.64
(total) (total) (total) Dichloroacetic acid
(CAS# 79-43-6) must
also be evaluated
under its separate
pass/fail criteria
(TAC = 0.007 mg/L,
SPAC = 0.0007 mg/L).
heptachlor 76-44-8 0.0004 0.00004 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
hexachlorocyclopentadiene 77-47-4 0.05 0.005 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
1,3-dibromo-5,5- NSF action level.
77-48-5 60 10 — —
dimethylhydantoin External peer review date: 2010-05-05
Detections shall be
summed with the
propanoic acid, 2-methyl-, CAS# 144-19-4,
0.2 0.02 2 WQA action level.
3-hydroxy-2,2,4- 77-68-9 CAS# 6846-50-0,
trimethylpentyl ester CAS# 25265-77-4,
CAS# 74367-33-2,
CAS# 74367-34-3, and
CAS# 74381-40-1.
49
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
NSF action level.
acetyl tributyl citrate 77-90-7 5 0.5 8 —
NSF action level.
triethyl citrate 77-93-0 4 0.4 20 —
IAPMO action level.
tributyl citrate 77-94-1 0.01 0.01 — —
1,3-propanediol, 2-ethyl-2- IAPMO action level.
77-99-6 0.01 0.01 — —
(hydroxymethyl)- JPRSC consensus date: 2014-08-13
phosphonic acid, ethyl-, IAPMO action level.
78-38-6 0.01 0.01 — —
diethyl ester JPRSC consensus date: 2015-08-21
Detections shall be
summed with the
triethyl phosphate 78-40-0 following chemicals:
CAS# 126-73-8 and
CAS# 513-08-6.
tris(2-ethylhexyl) phosphate 78-42-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N-isopropyl-2-methyl-2-
propyl-1,3-propanediol 78-44-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dicarbamate
tris-(2-butoxyethyl) NSF action level.
78-51-3 0.4 0.04 2 —
phosphate External peer review date: 2011-05-10
isophorone 78-59-1 0.4 0.04 — —
2,2’-azobisisobutyronitrile 78-67-1 0.01 0.01 — NSF action level. Issue date: 1996-07-01 —
octadien-3-ol,
78-70-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3,7-dimethyl-1,6-
NSF action level.
isoprene 78-79-5 0.05 0.005 0.05 —
isobutyronitrile 78-82-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dichloropropane (1,2-) 78-87-5 0.005 0.0005 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
methyl ethyl ketone (MEK) 78-93-3 4 0.4 — —
50
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
propanol, 1-amino-2 - 78-96-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trichloroethane (1,1,2-) 79-00-5 0.005 0.0005 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
trichloroethylene 79-01-6 0.005 0.0005 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
Derived from the US EPA IRIS 10-5/10-6
acrylamide 79-06-1 0.0004 0.00004 — cancer risk levels in the IRIS Toxicological —
Review document. Dated: 2010-03
TT (0.05% TT (0.05%
acrylamide (as a monomer
dosed at dosed at TT = treatment
in drinking water 79-06-1 — 40 CFR § 141.111, 40 CFR § 141.110
1 ppm, or 1 ppm, or technique
treatment polymers)
equivalent) equivalent)
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 76-03-9,
CAS# 79-11-8,
CAS# 631-64-1, and
0.060 0.0060 0.060 CAS# 79-43-6.
bromoacetic acid 79-08-3 40 CFR § 141.64
(CAS# 79-43-6) must
also be evaluated
under its separate
pass/fail criteria
(TAC = 0.007 mg/L,
SPAC = 0.0007 mg/L).
propanoic acid 79-09-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acrylic acid 79-10-7 4 0.4 — —
0.060 0.0060 0.060 Detections shall be
chloroacetic acid 79-11-8 40 CFR § 141.64
(total) (total) (total) summed with the
51
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
CAS# 79-08-3,
CAS# 76-03-9,
CAS# 631-64-1, and
CAS# 79-43-6.
Dichloroacetic acid
(CAS# 79-43-6) must
also be evaluated
under its separate
pass/fail criteria
(TAC = 0.007 mg/L,
SPAC = 0.0007 mg/L).
WQA action level.
methyl acetate 79-20-9 30 3 30 —
NSF action level.
peroxyacetic acid 79-21-0 7 7 10 —
isobutyric acid 79-31-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
US EPA IRIS 10 /10-6 cancer risk levels.
-5
1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane 79-34-5 0.002 0.0002 — —
methacrylic acid 79-41-4 0.05 0.02 — NSF action level. Issue date 1993-05-25 —
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 79-08-3,
CAS# 76-03-9,
US EPA IRIS 10-5/10-6
CAS# 631-64-1, and
dichloroacetic acid 79-43-6 0.007 0.0007 — upper bound risk levels.
CAS# 79-11-8.
Dichloroacetic acid
(CAS# 79-43-6) must
also be evaluated
under its separate
pass/fail criteria
52
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
(TAC = 0.007 mg/L,
SPAC = 0.0007 mg/L).
pempidine 79-55-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
bisphenol A 80-05-7 0.1 0.01 0.2 —
4,4'-dichlorodiphenyl
80-07-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
sulfone
toluenesulfonamide,
80-39-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
n-ethyl-4-
peroxide, bis(1-methyl-1- UL action level.
80-43-3 0.05 0.01 — —
phenylethyl)- JPRSC consensus date: 2015-01-27
phenol, UL action level.
80-46-6 0.01 0.01 — —
4-(1,1-dimethylpropyl)- JPRSC consensus date: 2014-11-19
propanoic acid, 2-hydroxy-
80-55-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-methyl-ethyl ester
methyl methacrylate 80-62-6 10 1 — —
saccharin 81-07-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acetophenone, 4'-tert-butyl- UL action level.
81-14-1 0.01 0.01 — —
2',6'-dimethyl-3',5'-dinitro- JPRSC consensus date: 2015-01-27
naphthalene-1,8- CSA action level.
81-84-5 0.01 0.01 — —
dicarboxylic anhydride JPRSC consensus date: 3/09/2016
pentachloronitrobenzene 82-68-8 0.02 0.002 — —
acenaphthene 83-32-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1H-inden-1-one, UL action level.
83-33-0 0.01 0.01 — —
2,3-dihydro- JPRSC consensus date: 2015-01-27
53
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
1,2-benzenedicarboxylic
WQA action level.
acid, 1-butyl 2-cyclohexyl 84-64-0 0.01 0.01 — —
ester
WQA action level.
anthraquinone 84-65-1 0.008 0.0008 — —
diethyl phthalate 84-66-2 6 0.6 — —
NSF action level.
diisobutyl phthalate 84-69-5 0.8 0.08 — —
di-n-butyl phthalate 84-74-2 0.7 0.07 — —
phenanthrene 85-01-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
CSA action level.
isoindole-1,3-dione 85-41-6 0.01 0.01 — —
Detections shall be
summed with the
hexahydrophthalic 0.05 0.05 0.05 NSF action level.
85-42-7 CAS# 85-43-8,
anhydride (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2012-10-17
CAS# 11070-44-3,
CAS# 25134-21-8, and
CAS# 25550-51-0.
Detections shall be
summed with the
tetrahydrophthalic 0.05 0.05 0.05 NSF action level.
85-43-8 CAS# 85-42-7,
CAS# 11070-44-3,
CAS# 25134-21-8, and
CAS# 25550-51-0.
54
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
phthalic anhydride 85-44-9 10 1 — —
phenol, 4,4'-
UL action level.
butylidenebis(2-(1,1- 85-60-9 0.01 0.01 — —
dimethylethyl)-5-methyl-
butylbenzyl phthalate 85-68-7 1 0.1 — —
WQA action level.
acid, butyl 2-ethylhexyl 85-69-8 0.01 0.01 — —
ester
Detections shall be
summed with other
0.05 0.05 0.8 NSF action level. chemicals under the
1,3-diethyldiphenylurea 85-98-3
(total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2017-10-17 alkyl-substituted urea
class-based
evaluation level.
n-nitrosodiphenylamine 86-30-6 0.07 0.007 — —
azinphos-methyl 86-50-0 0.02 0.002 — Issue date: 1986-02 —
WQA action level.
fluorene 86-73-7 0.3 0.03 — —
carbazole 86-74-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
1(3H)-isobenzofuranone 87-41-2 0.01 0.01 0.01 —
benzene, 1,2,3-trichloro- 87-61-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenol, 2,6-dichloro- 87-65-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,3-butanediene, WQA action level.
87-68-3 0.004 0.0004 — —
hexachloro- JPRSC consensus date: 2015-05-20
55
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
hexabromobenzene 87-82-1 0.01 0.001 — —
pentachlorophenol 87-86-5 0.001 0.0001 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
Health Canada MAC.
2,4,6-trichlorophenol 88-06-2 0.005 0.0005 — —
Issue date: 1987-02
2-furancarboxylic acid 88-14-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 1-chloro-2-
88-16-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(trifluoromethyl)-
o-toluenesulfonamide 88-19-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenol, 2,2’-methylenebis
88-24-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(6-tert-butyl)-4-ethyl-
benzyl alcohol, 3,5-di-tert-
88-26-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butyl-4-hydroxy-
phenol, 2-nitro- 88-75-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-
(dimethylaminomethyl) 88-27-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenol
dinoseb 88-85-7 0.007 0.0007 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
NSF action level.
phthalic acid, o- 88-99-3 10 1 — —
benzeneacetic acid, WQA action level.
89-51-0 0.01 0.01 — —
2-carboxy- JPRSC consensus date: 2016-06-28
NSF action level.
2-methylbenzyl alcohol 89-95-2 0.01 0.01 — —
2-ethylphenol 90-00-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
UL action level.
benzaldehyde, 2-hydroxy- 90-02-8 0.01 0.01 — —
2-methoxy-phenol 90-05-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-methylnaphthalene 90-12-0 0.05 0.05 NSF action level. Issue date: 1996-09-16 —
56
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
NSF action level.
2-phenylphenol 90-43-7 7 0.7 20 —
phenol,
2,4,6-tris(dimethylamino- 90-72-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl)-
NSF action level.
benzhydrol 91-01-0 0.05 0.05 0.05 —
1,2-benzenedicarbonitrile 91-15-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
naphthalene 91-20-3 0.1 0.01 — —
quinoline 91-22-5 0.0001 0.00001 — —
methylcoumarin,
91-44-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
7-diethylamino-4-
quinoline, 6-ethoxy-1,2- WQA action level.
91-53-2 0.01 0.01 — —
dihydro-2,2,4-trimethyl- JPRSC consensus date: 2016-06-28
2-methyl naphthalene 91-57-6 0.03 0.003 — —
WQA action level.
2-chloronaphthalene 91-58-7 0.6 0.06 — —
diethylaniline 91-66-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
benzoguanamine 91-76-9 0.01 0.001 0.2 —
3,3’-dichlorobenzidine 91-94-1 0.0008 0.00008 — —
WQA action level.
biphenyl 92-52-4 0.01 0.01 — —
morpholine, 4-phenyl- 92-53-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
57
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
phenothiazine 92-84-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzidine 92-87-5 0.000002 0.0000002 — —
propanol, phenyl 93-54-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
propanone, 1-phenyl-1- 93-55-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
CSA action level.
styrene glycol 93-56-1 0.01 0.01 — —
WQA action level.
methyl benzoate 93-58-3 0.01 0.01 — —
formamide,
93-61-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
n-methyl-n-phenyl-
fenoprop 93-72-1 0.05 0.005 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
benzanilide 93-98-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzoic acid, 4-amino, NSF action level.
94-09-7 0.01 0.01 — —
ethyl ester JPRSC consensus date: 2019-09-18
NSF action level.
propylparaben 94-13-3 0.01 0.01 — —
butylparaben 94-26-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
triethyleneglycol
94-28-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
di(2-ethylhexanoate)
phenetidine, o- 94-70-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,4-D 94-75-7 0.07 0.007 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
WQA action level.
1,3-hexanediol, 2-ethyl- 94-96-2 0.2 0.02 — —
S,S-di(diethylaminothioxo-
95-05-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl)sulfide
indene 95-13-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzotriazole, 1,2,3- 95-14-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
benzothiazole 95-16-9 0.05 0.05 0.05 —
58
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
2-benzothiazolesulfen- UL action level.
95-33-0 0.01 0.01 — —
amide, n-cyclohexyl- JPRSC consensus date: 2015-05-20
1-bromo-2-methylbenzene 95-46-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with the
0.09 0.009 Health Canada MAC.
o-xylene 95-47-6 — following chemicals:
(total) (total) Issue date: 2014-08
CAS# 106-42-3 and
CAS# 108-38-3.
2-methylphenol 95-48-7 0.4 0.04 — —
Based on the oral RfD and lifetime
drinking water health advisory in the
2-chlorotoluene 95-49-8 0.1 0.01 — —
US EPA 2011 Edition of the Drinking
Water Standards and Health Advisories.
dichlorobenzene o- 95-50-1 0.6 0.06 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
NSF action level.
o-toluidine 95-53-4 0.02 0.002 0.02 —
bromophenol, 2- 95-56-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
0.2 0.02 1 NSF action level. high flash
trimethylbenzene, 1,2,4- 95-63-6
(total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2016-10-27 aromatic naphtha
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
benzenamine, WQA action level.
95-64-7 0.05 0.005 — —
3,4-dimethyl- JPRSC consensus date: 2015-05-20
3,4-dimethylphenol 95-65-8 0.007 0.0007 — —
59
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
2-chloro-1,4-
95-72-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethylbenzene
2,4-dichlorotoluene 95-73-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-chloro-1,2- NSF action level.
95-83-0 0.2 0.02 0.2 —
benzenediamine External peer review date: 2004-04-20
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
tetramethylbenzene, 0.2 0.02 1 NSF action level. high flash
95-93-2
1,2,4,5- (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2016-10-27 aromatic naphtha
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
CSA action level.
phenol, 2,4,5-trichloro- 95-95-4 0.7 0.07 — —
menthane, 1,2:8,9-diepoxy- 96-08-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
7,8-oxide styrene 96-09-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dibromo-3-chloropropane
96-12-8 0.0002 0.00002 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
(1,2-)
pentane, 3-methyl 96-14-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
US EPA Lifetime Drinking Water Health
1,2,3-trichloropropane 96-18-4 0.04 0.004 — —
Detections shall be
0.01 0.004 0.01 NSF action level. summed with the
1,3,-dichlroro-2-propanol 96-23-1
(total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2014-10-21 following chemical:
CAS# 616-23-9.
3-monochloro-
96-24-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,2,propanediol
60
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
Detections shall be
summed with other
urea, N,N'-dimethyl- 96-31-1
class-based
evaluation level.
methyl acrylate 96-33-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
WQA action level.
methylcyclopentane 96-37-7 0.01 0.01 — —
ethylene thiourea 96-45-7 0.0006 0.00006 — —
NSF action level.
γ-butyrolactone 96-48-0 4 0.4 4 —
4,4’-thiobis-
96-66-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(6-t-butyl-o-cresol)
NSF action level.
phenol, 2,4-di-tert-butyl 96-76-4 0.1 0.01 2 —
di-o-tolylguanidine, 1,3- 97-39-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
5-chloro-2,4-
97-50-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethyoxybenzamine
2-propenoic acid, IAPMO action level.
97-63-2 0.01 0.01 — —
2-methyl-, ethyl ester JPRSC consensus date: 2016-02-10
bis(dimethylthiocarbamoyl)
97-74-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
sulfide
isobutyl isobutyrate 97-85-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
isobutyl methacrylate 97-86-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-methyl-propanoic acid,
97-87-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butyl ester
ethylene glycol 0.05 0.05 2 WQA action level. Detections shall be
97-90-5
dimethacrylate (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2015-10-20 summed with the
61
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
CAS# 109-16-0,
CAS# 109-17-1, and
CAS# 2358-84-1.
tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol 97-99-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
furanmethanol, 2- 98-00-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
furfural 98-01-1 0.2 0.02 3 —
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
t-butylbenzene 98-06-6
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
benzotrichloride 98-07-7 0.00003 0.000003 — —
benzene, 1-chloro-3-
98-15-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(trifluoromethyl)-
4-t-butyl-2-chlorophenol 98-28-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexanol, 4-tert-butyl- 98-52-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
p-tert-butylphenol 98-54-4 0.5 0.05 7 —
terpineol, alpha- 98-55-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
4-chlorobenzo-trifluoride 98-56-6 0.3 0.03 2 —
IAPMO action level.
benzoic acid, 4-tert-butyl- 98-73-7 0.01 0.01 — —
isopropylbenzene Derived from the oral RfD on the
98-82-8 0.7 0.07 — —
(cumene) US EPA IRIS database with a default
62
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
NSF action level.
styrene, alpha-methyl- 98-83-9 0.006 0.0006 0.006 —
benzyl alcohol, UL action level.
98-85-1 0.7 0.07 — —
alpha methyl JPRSC consensus date: 2013-10-29
NSF action level.
acetophenone 98-86-2 0.2 0.02 1 —
cyclohexanamine,
98-94-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N,N-dimethyl-
nitrobenzene 98-95-3 0.01 0.001 — —
benzoic acid, m-methyl- 99-04-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,3,5-trinitrobenzene 99-35-4 0.2 0.02 — —
NSF action level.
methylparaben 99-76-3 0.01 0.01 — —
cyclohexane,
99-82-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-isopropyl-4-methyl-
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
isopropyltoluene 99-87-6
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
acetophenone, 4’-hydroxy- 99-93-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzoic acid, p-methyl- 99-94-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
63
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
UL action level.
aniline, 4-nitro- 100-01-6 0.04 0.004 — —
4-nitrophenol 100-02-7 0.06 0.006 0.06 —
NSF action level.
terephthalic acid 100-21-0 3 0.3 3 —
diethylaminoethanol 100-37-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Health Canada MAC.
ethylbenzene 100-41-4 0.14 0.014 — —
Issue date: 2014-08
styrene 100-42-5 0.1 0.01 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
benzyl chloride 100-44-7 0.002 0.0002 — —
cyclohexene, 4-cyano
also (1-cyano-3- 100-45-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexene)
benzylamine 100-46-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzonitrile 100-47-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-cyclohexene-1-
100-50-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
carboxaldehyde
UL action level.
benzyl alcohol 100-51-6 30 3 — —
NSF action level.
benzaldehyde 100-52-7 40 4 50 —
cyclohexanamine,
100-60-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N-methyl-
methoxybenzene 100-66-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pyridine, 2-ethyl- 100-71-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
N-nitrosopiperidine 100-75-4 0.00005 0.000005 0.00005 —
64
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolane-
100-79-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-methanol
benzene,
100-80-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-ethenyl-3-methyl-
hexamethylenetetramine 100-97-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
guanidine, 1,2,3-triphenyl- 101-01-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-chlorodiphenylamine 101-17-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
UL action level.
hydroxydiphenylamine, 3- 101-18-8 0.01 0.01 — —
UL action level.
triallyl cyanurate 101-37-1 0.05 0.05 — —
urea,
101-42-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,1-dimethyl-3-phenyl-
phenylenediamine,
101-54-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
n-phenyl-p-
4,4’-methylene bis US EPA IRIS 10-5/10-6cancer risk levels.
101-61-1 0.008 0.0008 — —
(N,N’-dimethyl) aniline Verification date: 1989-04-05
diphenylamine, 4,4’-dioctyl- 101-67-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylene diphenyl
101-68-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
diisocyanate
(isopropylamino)diphenyl- UL action level.
101-72-4 0.01 0.01 — —
amine, 4- JPRSC consensus date: 2015-11-18
NSF action level.
4,4’-methylene dianiline 101-77-9 0.0008 0.00008 0.0008 —
1,1’-methylene-bis-
101-81-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene
cyclohexanamine,
101-83-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N-cyclohexyl-
benzene, 1,1-oxybis- 101-84-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethylbenzene acetate 101-97-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
65
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
benzenemethanamine,
n-methyl-n- 102-05-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(phenylmethyl)-
diphenyl guanidine,
102-06-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,3- (or n,n-)
urea, 1,3-diphenyl- 102-07-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3,4-dichlorophenyl
102-36-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
isocyanate
triallylamine 102-70-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
triethanolamine 102-71-6 3 0.3 20 —
triacetin 102-76-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzothiazole, UL action level.
102-77-2 0.01 0.01 — —
2-(morpholinothio)- JPRSC consensus date: 2016-03-09
WQA action level.
1-butanamine, N,N-dibutyl- 102-82-9 0.01 0.01 — —
ethylhexyl acetate, 2- 103-09-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-ethylhexyl acrylate 103-11-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
di(2-ethylhexyl)adipate 103-23-1 0.4 0.04 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
azobenzene 103-33-3 0.003 0.0003 — —
dibenzylamine 103-49-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
dibenzyl ether 103-50-4 0.4 0.04 5 —
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
n-propylbenzene 103-65-1
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
66
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
aniline, N-ethyl- 103-69-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
formamide, n-phenyl- 103-70-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenyl isothiocyanate 103-72-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzylamine,
103-83-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N,N-dimethyl-
2,2’-p-
104-38-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenylenedioxydiethanol
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
n-butylbenzene 104-51-8
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
propanal, 3-phenyl 104-53-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with the
4 0.4 WQA action level.
2-propen-1-ol, 3-phenyl 104-54-1 — CAS# 104-55-2,
(total) (total) JPRSC consensus date: 2017-11-08
CAS# 140-10-3,
CAS# 621-82-9, and
CAS# 14371-10-9.
Detections shall be
summed with the
cinnamaldehyde 104-55-2 — CAS# 104-54-1,
CAS# 140-10-3,
CAS# 621-82-9, and
CAS# 14371-10-9.
dihydro-5-pentyl-2(3H)- IAPMO action level.
104-61-0 1 0.1 — —
furanone JPRSC consensus date: 2018-08-08
67
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
ethane, 1,2-diphenoxy- 104-66-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
diethyleneglycol
104-68-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
monophenyl ether
NSF action level.
2-ethylhexanol 104-76-7 0.8 0.08 3 —
NSF action level.
benzaldehyde, 4-methyl- 104-87-0 0.01 0.01 — —
diethyl malonate 105-53-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
propanoic acid, ethyl ester 105-37-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acetal 105-57-7 0.01 0.01 0.01 NSF action level. Issue date: —
NSF action level.
diethyl carbonate 105-58-8 0.5 0.05 1 —
methyldiethanolamine, n- 105-59-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
caprolactam 105-60-2 4 0.4 — —
2,4-dimethylphenol 105-67-9 0.1 0.01 — —
UL action level.
dibutylmaleate 105-76-0 0.05 0.05 0.05 —
octadecanoic acid,
2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethyl 106-11-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ester
hydroxystearic acid 106-14-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
geraniol 106-24-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,4-dibromobenzene 106-37-6 0.07 0.007 — —
68
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
benzene, 1-bromo-4-methyl 106-38-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
bromophenol, 4- 106-41-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with the
p-xylene 106-42-3 — following chemicals:
CAS# 95-47-6 and
CAS# 108-38-3.
4-chlorotoluene 106-43-4 0.1 0.01 — —
Detections shall be
0.4 0.04 6 WQA action level. summed with the
p-cresol 106-44-5
CAS# 108-39-4.
dichlorobenzene p- 106-46-7 0.075 0.0075 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
4-chlorophenol 106-48-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
para-toluidine 106-49-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzenediamine, 1,4- 106-50-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-propanol,
2-(2-hydroxypropoxy)- 106-62-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
isomer
NSF action level.
dimethyl succinate 106-65-0 0.01 0.01 0.01 —
hexanoic acid, methyl ester 106-70-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
decanedioic acid, dimethyl NSF action level.
106-79-6 0.01 0.01 — —
ester JPRSC consensus date: 2018-12-11
NSF action level.
1,2-epoxybutane 106-88-7 0.06 0.006 0.06 —
US EPA Drinking Water Health Advisory
epichlorohydrin 106-89-8 0.04 0.004 — 10-5/10-6 cancer risk levels. —
Issue date: 1987
69
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
epichlorohydrin TT (0.01% TT (0.01%
(as a monomer in dosed at dosed at TT = treatment
106-89-8 — 40 CFR § 141.111, 40 CFR § 141.110
drinking water treatment 10 ppm, or 10 ppm, or technique
polymers) equivalent) equivalent)
ethylene dibromide (EDB) 106-93-4 0.00005 0.000005 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
UL action level.
1,3-butadiene 106-99-0 0.1 0.01 — —
acrolein 107-02-8 0.004 0.0004 — —
WQA action level.
allyl chloride 107-05-1 0.3 0.03 — —
dichloroethane (1,2-) 107-06-2 0.005 0.0005 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
acrylonitrile 107-13-1 0.0006 0.00006 — —
NSF action level.
ethylenediamine 107-15-3 10 2 40 —
ethylene glycol 107-21-1 10 1 — —
NSF action level.
hexylene glycol 107-41-5 0.01 0.01 — —
2,4,4-trimethyl-2-
107-45-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pentylamine
tetradecamethylcyclohepta-
107-50-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
siloxane
NSF action level.
butylacrylamine, tert- 107-58-4 0.01 0.01 — —
pentane, 2-methyl 107-83-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,3-butanediol 107-88-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
70
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
WQA action level.
butanoic acid 107-92-6 0.2 0.02 — —
butenoic acid, trans-2- 107-93-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Expressed as PGME.
propylene glycol 2 0.2 3 NSF action level. Detections shall be
107-98-2
monomethyl ether (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2018-04-10 summed with PGMEA
CAS# 108-65-6.
ethanol, 2-(dimethylamino)- 108-01-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
vinyl acetate 108-05-4 0.02 0.002 — NSF action level. Issue date: 1991-05-03 —
1,3-dimethyl-n-butylamine 108-09-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl isobutyl ketone NSF action level.
108-10-1 7 0.7 100 —
(MIBK) External peer review date: 2005-10-06
CSA action level.
diisopropylamine 108-18-9 0.01 0.01 — —
acetic acid, 1-methylethyl IAPMO action level.
108-21-4 0.01 0.01 — —
maleic anhydride 108-31-6 0.7 0.07 — —
Detections shall be
summed with the
m-xylene 108-38-3 — following chemicals:
CAS# 95-47-6 and
CAS# 106-42-3.
Detections shall be
0.4 0.04 6 WQA action level. summed with the
m-cresol 108-39-4
(total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2015-05-05 following chemicals:
CAS# 106-44-5.
3-chlorophenol 108-43-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-toluidine 108-44-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
71
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
m-phenylenediamine 108-45-2 0.04 0.004 — —
pyridine, 2,4-dimethyl- 108-47-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Expressed as PGME.
propylene glycol
2 0.2 3 NSF action level. Detections shall be
monomethyl ether 108-65-5
(total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2018-04-10 summed with PGME
acetate
CAS# 107-98-2.
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
pyridine, 2,4,6-trimethyl- 108-75-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
melamine 108-78-1 3 0.3 3 —
cyclohexane, methyl- 108-87-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Health Canada MAC.
toluene 108-88-3 0.06 0.006 — —
Issue date: 2014-08
pyridine, 4-methyl- 108-89-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
monochlorobenzene 108-90-7 0.1 0.01 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
cyclohexylamine 108-91-8 1 0.1 — —
cyclohexanol 108-93-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
72
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
NSF action level.
cyclohexanone 108-94-1 30 3 40 —
phenol 108-95-2 2 0.2 — —
morpholine, methyl- 109-02-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pyrazine, 2-methyl- 109-08-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 97-90-5,
CAS# 109-17-1, and
triethyleneglycol 0.05 0.05 2 WQA action level. CAS# 2358-84-1.
109-16-0
dimethacrylate (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2015-10-20 Action level confirmed
through updated
external peer review of
CAS# 109-16-0.
External peer review
date: 2019-10-22.
Detections shall be
summed with the
tetraethyleneglycol 0.05 0.05 2 WQA action level. following chemicals:
109-17-1
dimethacrylate (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2015-10-20 CAS# 97-90-5,
CAS# 109-16-0, and
CAS# 2358-84-1.
n-butyl-n-butyrate 109-21-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
decanedioic acid, dibutyl IAPMO action level.
109-43-3 0.01 0.01 — —
n-pentanoic acid 109-52-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
73
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
NSF action level.
acetic acid, propyl ester 109-60-4 0.01 0.01 — —
butanenitrile 109-74-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-hydroxypropane nitrile 109-78-4 0.01 0.01 — NSF action level. Issue date: 1997-09-03 —
Derived from the oral RfD on the US EPA
IRIS database with a default 20% relative
tetrahydrofuran 109-99-9 6 0.6 — —
source contribution for drinking water.
dimethylhexane-2,5-diol, CSA action level.
110-03-2 0.01 0.01 — —
2,5- JPRSC consensus date: 2018-05-02
NSF action level.
di-t-butyl peroxide 110-05-4 0.05 0.05 0.09 —
methyl isoamyl ketone NSF action level.
110-12-3 0.06 0.006 0.8 —
(MIAK) External peer review date: 2002-04-25
NSF action level.
hexane-2,5-dione 110-13-4 0.01 0.01 — —
butanedioic acid 110-15-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
maleic acid 110-16-7 0.7 0.07 4 NSF action level. Issue date: —
NSF action level.
tetramethylethylenediamine 110-18-9 0.01 0.01 — —
WQA action level.
isobutyl acetate 110-19-0 0.01 0.01 — —
decanoic acid, methyl ester 110-42-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hexane 110-54-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pentane, 1-amino 110-58-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pentanenitrile 110-59-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
1,4-diaminobutane 110-60-1 2 0.2 9 —
NSF action level.
1,4-butanediol 110-63-4 0.6 0.06 2 —
cyclohexene 110-83-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
74
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
pyridine 110-86-1 0.007 0.0007 — —
NSF action level.
1,3,5-trioxane 110-88-3 0.7 0.07 3 —
piperidine 110-89-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
WQA action level.
2-propanol, 1,1-oxybis- 110-98-5 0.01 0.01 — —
squalene 111-02-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
palmitic acid, n-butyl ester 111-06-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
octanoate, methyl- 111-11-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
WQA action level.
heptanoic acid, n- 111-14-8 0.2 0.02 — —
ethylene glycol monoethyl
111-15-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ether acetate
tetramethyl hexanediamine 111-18-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
sebacic acid 111-20-6 200 20 200 —
NSF action level.
1-hexanol 111-27-3 2 0.2 30 —
gutaraldehyde 111-30-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butyl isocyanate, n- 111-36-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
diethylenetriamine 111-40-0 0.3 0.03 1 —
NSF action level.
diethanolamine 111-42-2 0.1 0.01 0.5 —
bis(chloroethyl)ether 111-44-4 0.0003 0.00003 — —
ethyl octadecanoate 111-61-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
heptyl aldehyde, n- 111-71-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
75
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
ethylene glycol monobutyl US EPA IRIS database with a default
111-76-2 4 0.4 — —
ether 20% RSC for drinking water.
diethylene glycol WQA action level.
111-77-3 0.01 0.01 — —
monomethyl ether JPRSC consensus date: 2018-04-30
methyl laurate 111-82-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethanol, 2-(2- WQA action level.
111-90-0 1 0.1 — —
ethoxyethoxy)- JPRSC consensus date: 2015-11-18
bis(2-chloroethoxy)
111-91-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methane
dibutylamine 111-92-2 0.01 0.01 — NSF action level. Issue date: 1995-08-19 —
propanenitrile, 3,3’-thiobis- 111-97-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
nonanoic acid, n- 112-05-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butylglycol acetate 112-07-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-undecanone 112-12-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-(2-ethoxyethoxy) ethyl WQA action level.
112-15-2 0.4 0.04 8 —
acetate External peer review date: 2014-04-23
dodecylamine, N,N-
112-18-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethyl-
NSF action level.
2-(hexyloxy)ethanol 112-25-4 0.01 0.01 — —
NSF action level.
triethylene glycol 112-27-6 10 1 10 —
formic acid, octyl ester 112-32-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
diethylene glycol mono-n- NSF action level.
112-34-5 0.6 0.06 8 —
butyl ether External peer review date: 2010-10-05
NSF action level.
undecanoic acid 112-37-8 0.5 0.5 — —
methyl palmitate 112-39-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
76
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
WQA action level.
dodecanol 112-53-8 0.05 0.05 0.9 —
dodecanal 112-54-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-dodecanethiol 112-55-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl stearate 112-61-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
octadecenoic acid, 9(Z)-,
112-62-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl ester
1-tridecanol 112-70-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
IAPMO action level.
docosenamide (erucamide) 112-84-5 0.2 0.02 — —
octadecene, 1- 112-88-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
oleanitrile 112-91-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
icosane 112-95-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dothiepin 113-53-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
propene 115-07-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
isobutylene 115-11-7 0.4 0.04 0.6 —
Detections shall be
2-methyl-3-buten-2-ol 115-18-4
CAS# 763-32-6.
3-hydroxy-3-methyl-2-
115-22-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butanone
propanediol, 2-ethyl-2-
115-84-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butyl-1,3-
triphenylphosphate 115-86-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Total combined
detections of
aldicarb 116-06-3 0.003 0.0003 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 CAS# 116-06-3,
CAS# 1646-87-3, and
CAS# 1646-88-4 shall
77
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
not exceed
0.007 mg/L (TAC)
or 0.0007 (SPAC).
hexafluoropropene 116-15-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
di(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate
117-81-7 0.006 0.0006 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
(PAE)
IAPMO action level.
bis(2-butoxyethyl)phthalate 117-83-9 0.01 0.01 — —
n-ethyl-1-naphthalenamide 118-44-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,3-dichloro-5,5- NSF action level.
118-52-5 40 7 — —
hydroxymethylpyrone 118-71-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hexachlorobenzene 118-74-1 0.001 0.0001 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
benzoic acid, o-methyl- 118-90-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2’-hydroxyacetophenone 118-93-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
-5
2,4,6-trinitrotoluene 118-96-7 0.01 0.001 — —
WQA action level.
methyl salicylate 119-36-8 0.01 0.01 — —
methylene bis(4-methyl-6-
119-47-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tertbutyl-phenol), 2,2’
NSF action level.
benzophenone 119-61-9 0.3 0.03 2 —
anthracene 120-12-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethylparaben 120-47-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
diethylene glycol NSF action level.
120-55-8 2 0.2 8 —
dibenzoate External peer review date: 2015-05-05
NSF action level.
dimethyl terephthalate 120-61-6 3 0.3 3 —
78
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
benzothiazole, 2-methyl- 120-75-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trichlorobenzene (1,2,4-) 120-82-1 0.07 0.007 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
NSF action level.
dichlorophenol, 2,4- 120-83-2 0.05 0.005 0.08 —
cyclopentanone 120-92-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
0.0005 0.00005 US EPA IRIS 10-5/10-6 cancer risk levels. summed with the
2,4-dinitrotoluene 121-14-2 —
(total) (total) Verification date: 1989-05-03 following chemical:
CAS# 606-20-2.
benzaldehyde, 4-hydroxy-
121-33-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-methoxy (vanillin)
WQA action level.
triethylamine 121-44-8 0.1 0.01 3 —
3-hydroxyacetophenone 121-71-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Health Canada MAC.
malathion 121-75-5 0.19 0.019 — —
Issue date: 1986-02
WQA action level.
isophthalic acid 121-91-5 0.6 0.06 9 —
acetophenone, 4-methyl 122-00-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
triisopropanolamine 122-20-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
simazine 122-34-9 0.004 0.0004 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
diphenylamine, 4-hydroxy- 122-37-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
diphenylamine 122-39-4 0.2 0.02 — —
NSF action level.
phenyl glycidyl ether 122-60-1 0.006 0.0006 0.1 —
sebacate, bis(2-ethylhexyl)- 122-62-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
-5
1,2-diphenylhydrazine 122-66-7 0.0005 0.00005 — —
79
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
NSF action level.
benzeneacetaldehyde 122-78-1 0.01 0.01 — —
ethanol, 2-phenoxy- 122-99-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hexanal, 2-ethyl- 123-05-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
WQA action level.
4-ethylphenol 123-07-9 0.05 0.05 1 —
NSF action level.
4-methoxy-benzaldehyde 123-11-5 6 0.6 30 —
succinic acid, diethyl ester 123-25-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
hydroquinone 123-31-9 2 0.2 4 —
NSF action level.
diacetone alcohol 123-42-2 3 0.3 10 —
NSF action level.
acetone, acetyl 123-54-6 0.1 0.01 0.6 —
propanoic anhydride 123-62-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trioxane, 1,3,5-trimethyl- 123-63-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pyrrolidine 123-75-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-oxopentanoic acid 123-76-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
n-butyl acetate 123-86-4 1 0.1 20 —
1,4-dioxane 123-91-1 0.004 0.0004 0.004 —
octadecanoic acid, 2,3- CSA action level.
123-94-4 0.01 0.01 — —
dihydroxypropyl ester JPRSC consensus date: 2018-11-05
stearic acid, butyl ester 123-95-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
adipic acid 124-04-9 30 3 100 —
NSF action level.
hexamethylene-diamine 124-09-4 10 1 20 —
80
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
NSF action level.
octanal 124-13-0 0.01 0.01 — —
butyl carbitol acetate 124-17-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
nonanal 124-19-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dodecanamine, 1- 124-22-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tetradecanal 124-25-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
octadecanamide 124-26-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethylamine 124-40-3 1.2 0.12 — NSF action level. Issue date: 1998-11-06 —
Detections shall be
summed with the
chlorodibromomethane 124-48-1 — 40 CFR § 141.64
CAS# 75-27-4, and
CAS# 67-66-3.
2-amino-2-methylpropanol 124-68-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,3-propanediol,2,2- UL action level.
126-30-7 0.01 0.01 — —
dimethyl JPRSC consensus date: 2016-10-12
tetramethylene sulfone 126-33-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with the
tributyl phosphate 126-73-8 following chemicals:
CAS# 78-40-0 and
CAS# 513-08-6.
tetramethyldec-5-yne-4,7- NSF action level.
126-86-3 0.05 0.05 0.05 —
diol, 2,4,7,9- External peer review date: 2017-10-17
tetrachloroethylene 127-18-4 0.005 0.0005 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
NSF action level.
N,N-dimethyl-acetamide 127-19-5 2 0.2 2 —
diphenyl sulfone 127-63-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
0.1 0.1 2 NSF action level. Expressed as
chloramine-T 127-65-1
(total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2018-10-23 anhydrous chloramine
81
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
summed with the
CAS# 70-55-3 and
CAS# 7080-50-4.
2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methyl NSF action level.
128-39-2 0.05 0.05 0.05 —
phenol External peer review date: 2012-10-17
pyrene 129-00-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
dimethyl phthalate 131-11-3 0.05 0.05 0.05 —
dihydroxybenzophenone 131-56-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
IAPMO action level.
oxybenzone 131-57-7 0.01 0.01 — —
captan 133-06-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl anthranilate 134-20-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
diphenylethanedione, 1,2- 134-81-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzaldehyde, 3,5-
134-96-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethoxy-4-hydroxy-
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
diethylbenzene, 1,2- 135-01-3
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
naphthylenamine,
135-88-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N-phenyl-2-
Detections shall be
0.2 0.02 1 NSF action level. summed with
phenylbutane, 2- 135-98-8
(total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2016-10-27 chemicals under the
high flash
82
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
aromatic naphtha
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
dimethyl-p-benzoquinone,
137-18-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,5-
acetamide,
2-(diethylamino)-N- 137-58-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(2,6-dimethylphenyl)-
bis(2-ethylhexyl) IAPMO action level.
137-89-3 0.01 0.01 — —
isophthalate JPRSC consensus date: 2019-02-20
2-hydroxy-propanoic acid,
138-22-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butyl ester
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 8001-54-5,
myristyl dimethylbenzyl 3 0.3 5 NSF action level. CAS# 53516-76-0,
139-08-2
ammonium chloride (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2014-10-21 CAS# 61789-71-7,
CAS# 63449-41-2,
CAS# 68391-01-5,
CAS# 68424-85-1, and
CAS# 85409-22-9.
Health Canada MAC.
nitrilotriacetic acid 139-13-9 0.4 0.04 — —
Issue date: 1990-01
diphenyl sulfide 139-66-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with the
trans-cinnamic acid 140-10-3 — CAS# 104-54-1,
CAS# 104-55-2,
CAS# 621-82-9, and
CAS# 14371-10-9.
83
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
benzyl acetate 140-11-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
piperazine, 1-(2-
140-31-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
aminoethyl)-
ethyl acrylate 140-88-5 0.01 0.001 — NSF action level. Issue date: 1992-01-28 —
furaric acid, bis(2-
141-02-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethylhexyl) ester
bis(2-(2-
NSF action level.
butoxyethoxy)ethyl) 141-17-3 0.6 0.06 8 —
adipate
NSF action level.
bis(2-butoxyethyl) adipate 141-18-4 0.7 0.07 0.7 —
NSF action level.
butyl acrylate 141-32-2 0.01 0.01 — —
Issue date: 1995-12-13
NSF action level.
ethanolamine 141-43-5 0.3 0.03 4 —
WQA action level.
ethyl acetate 141-78-6 5 0.5 — —
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
diethylbenzene, 1,3- 141-93-5
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
ethyl acetoacetate 141-97-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
IAPMO action level.
glyceryl monolaurate 142-18-7 0.01 0.01 — —
WQA action level.
1,3-dichloropropane 142-28-9 0.1 0.01 — —
hexyne-2,5-diol, 2,5- NSF action level.
142-30-3 0.01 0.01 0.2 —
dimethyl-3- JPRSC consensus date: 2020-02-12
84
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
hexanoic acid, n- 142-62-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
oleate, n-butyl- 142-77-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methacrylate, lauryl- 142-90-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
palmitate, isopropyl- 142-91-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
n-dodecanoic acid 143-07-7 0.5 0.5 — —
ethanol, 2-(2-(2- WQA action level.
143-22-6 0.05 0.05 — —
butoxyethoxy)ethoxy)- JPRSC consensus date: 2016-05-18
tetraethylene glycol
143-24-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethyl ether
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 77-68-9,
pentanediol, 2,2,4- 0.2 0.02 2 WQA action level.
144-19-4 CAS# 6846-50-0,
trimethyl-1,3- (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2016-10-26
CAS# 25265-77-4,
CAS# 74367-33-2,
CAS# 74367-34-3, and
CAS# 74381-40-1.
endothall 145-73-3 0.1 0.01 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
sodium US EPA IRIS database with a default
148-18-5 0.2 0.02 — —
diethyldithiocarbamate 20% RSC for drinking water.
vanillin, o- 148-53-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
thiabendazole 148-79-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
2-mercaptobenzothiazole 149-30-4 0.02 0.002 0.02 —
NSF action level.
2-ethylhexanoic acid 149-57-5 0.7 0.7 10 —
sodium dodecyl sulfate 151-21-3 7 0.7 — Derived from US EPA oral RfD —
85
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
(74 Fed Reg 40503-40509) with a default
20% relative source contribution for
drinking water.
dichloroethylene (cis-1,2-) 156-59-2 0.07 0.007 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
dichloroethylene (trans-1,2) 156-60-5 0.1 0.01 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
1,4-dioxaspiro(4,5)decane 177-10-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
WQA action level.
benzo(b)fluoranthene 205-99-2 0.0002 0.00002 — —
fluoranthene 206-44-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acenaphthylene 208-96-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzo(b)naphtha (2,1-
239-30-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
d)furan
5H-indeno(1,2-b)pyridine 244-99-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acridine 260-94-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzotropilidene, 3,4- 264-09-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,2-benzisothiazole 272-16-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
triethylene diamine 280-57-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
cyclohexene oxide 286-20-4 0.01 0.01 0.01 —
trithiane 291-21-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
WQA action level.
cycloheptane 291-64-5 0.2 0.02 — —
cyclododecane 294-62-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with the
1,6,11- 3 0.4 3 NSF action level. following chemicals:
295-63-6
trioxacyclopentadecane (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2002-10-04 CAS# 17043-02-6,
CAS# 56890-57-4, and
CAS# 64001-05-4.
86
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
cyclohexadecane 295-65-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Health Canada MAC.
phorate 298-02-2 0.002 0.0002 — —
Issue date: 1986-02
benzene, 2-propenyl- 300-57-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
amphetamine 300-62-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
octadecenamide 301-02-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
hydrazine 302-01-2 —
CAS# 10034-93-2.
chloral hydrate 302-17-0 0.7 0.07 — —
Detections shall be
0.0007 0.00007 Health Canada MAC. summed with the
aldrin 309-00-2 —
(total) (total) Issue date: 1994-10 following chemical:
CAS# 60-57-1.
tacrine 321-64-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Health Canada MAC.
diuron 330-54-1 0.15 0.015 — —
Issue date: 1987-03
Detections shall be
0.2 0.02 0.9 summed with the
NSF action level.
potassium thiocyanate 333-20-0 (total as (total as (total as following chemicals:
SCN) SCN) SCN) CAS# 540-72-7 and
CAS# 1762-95-4.
Health Canada MAC.
diazinon 333-41-5 0.02 0.002 — —
Issue date: 1986-02
NSF action level.
n-decanoic acid 334-48-5 0.5 0.5 — —
0.00007 0.000007 US EPA Lifetime Drinking Water Health Detections shall be
perfluorooctanoic acid 335-67-1 —
(total) (total)10 Advisory. Issue date: 2016 summed with the
87
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
following chemical:
CAS# 1763-23-1.
benzene, 1-chloro-2-fluoro- 348-51-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,1,2,3,3,4,4,5,5,6,6,7,7,7-
tetradecafluoro-1- 355-63-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
heptene
acetic acid, 2-cyano- 372-09-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
silane, fluorotrimethyl- 420-56-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
piperidine, 2-propyl- 458-88-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyanoguanidine 461-58-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hydantoin 461-72-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
WQA action level.
carbonyl sulfide 463-58-1 0.01 0.01 — —
hemanthamine 466-75-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
p-menthan-4-ol 470-65-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pinanol 473-54-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
WQA action level.
alpha-cadinol 481-34-5 0.01 0.01 — —
ethyl hydroxyphthalide 485-26-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
fluorenone 486-25-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
benzaldehyde, 2,4,6- 0.05 0.05 0.05 NSF action level. summed with the
487-68-3
trimethyl- (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2013-10-30 following chemical:
CAS# 5779-72-6.
phenol,
489-01-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methoxy-
cyanostyrene, a 495-10-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
diphenyl butanedione 495-71-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
indene, 2,3-dihydro- also
496-11-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(2,3-dihydro-1H-)
88
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
dihydrobenzofuran, 2,3- 496-16-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4’-hydroxy-3’-
498-02-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methoxyacetophenone
L-cysteic acid 498-40-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-methyl-5-(1-methylethyl)-
499-75-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenol
dipicolinic acid 499-83-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenol, 4-(2-propenyl)- 501-92-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
caprolactone 502-44-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hexadecanoic acid,
2-hydroxy-1,3- 502-52-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
propanediyl ester
isocrotonic acid 503-64-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
UL action level.
phorone 504-20-1 0.01 0.01 — —
tetrahydropyridine, 2,3,4,5- 505-18-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,4-dithiane 505-29-3 0.07 0.007 — —
1-tetracosanol 506-51-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tert-butyl hypochlorite 507-40-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butene, 2,3-dichloro-2-
507-45-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl-
borneol 507-70-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
chlorobenzilate 510-15-6 0.1 0.01 — —
fenchyl alcohol, alpha- 512-13-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
89
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
Detections shall be
summed with the
tripropyl phosphate 513-08-6 following chemicals:
CAS# 78-40-0 and
CAS# 126-73-8.
ferruginol 514-62-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzoquinone, 2,6-
517-61-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethyl-1,4-
dehydroacetic acid 520-45-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dihydromethoxymethyl
524-40-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
oxopyridinecarbonitrile
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
tetramethylbenzene, 0.2 0.02 1 NSF action level. high flash
527-53-7
1,2,3,5- (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2016-10-27 aromatic naphtha
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
Detections shall be
summed with
benzene, 1-methyl-2-(1- 0.2 0.02 1 NSF action level. chemicals under the
527-84-4
methylethyl)- (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2016-10-27 high flash
aromatic naphtha
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
90
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
class-based
evaluation level.
benzenetricarboxylic acid,
528-44-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,2,4-
NSF action level.
2-phenylhydracrylic acid 529-64-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexanone, 2-hydroxy 533-60-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-methylfuran 534-22-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzenemethanol, 4-(1-
536-60-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylethyl)-
tricaprylin 538-23-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
isobutylbenzene 538-93-2
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
benzyl ethyl ether 539-30-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
NSF action level.
sodium thiocyanate 540-72-7 (total as (total as (total as following chemicals:
CAS# 1762-95-4.
WQA action level.
isooctane 540-84-1 0.05 0.05 1 —
NSF action level.
t-butyl acetate 540-88-5 0.6 0.06 2 —
91
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
dodecamethylcyclohexa-
540-97-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
siloxane
decamethylcyclopenta-
541-02-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
siloxane
WQA action level.
hexamethylcyclotrisiloxane 541-05-9 0.05 0.05 0.5 —
butanamide 541-35-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
See o-dichlorobenzene
dichlorobenzene, m- 541-73-1 0.6 0.06 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61
(CAS# 95-50-1).
2H-pyran-2-one,
542-28-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tetrahydro-
bis(chloromethyl)ether 542-88-1 0.000002 0.0000002 — —
octodrine 543-82-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
tetradecanoic acid 544-63-8 0.5 0.5 — —
pinocampheol,
547-60-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(also pinocamphone)
CSA action level.
trimellictic anhydride 552-30-7 0.01 0.01 — —
tropic acid 552-63-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trimesic acid 554-95-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclotetrasiloxane, WQA action level.
556-67-2 0.01 0.01 — —
octamethyl- JPRSC consensus date: 2018-08-08
cyclononasiloxane,
556-71-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
octadecamethyl-
NSF action level.
3-methyl-2-buten-1-ol 556-82-1 0.5 0.05 2 —
nitroguanidine 556-88-7 0.7 0.07 — —
92
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
allyl ether 557-40-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
vinyl alcohol 557-75-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
chloromethyl propanol 558-42-9 0.2 0.02 0.3 —
1,1-dichloropropene 563-58-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
isobutyramide 563-83-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
naphthalene, 1,8-dimethyl- 569-41-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,3-dichlorophenol 576-24-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
US EPA IRIS database with a default 20%
2,6-dimethylphenol 576-26-1 0.004 0.0004 — —
RSC for drinking water.
acetophenone, 2’-methyl- 577-16-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
aniline, 2-ethyl- 578-54-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
aniline, 2,6-diethyl- 579-66-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
WQA action level.
2,7-naphthalenediol 582-17-2 0.01 0.01 — —
acetophenone,
582-24-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
alpha-hydroxy-
pentanedione,
583-05-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-phenyl-1,4-
93
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
2,5-dichlorophenol 583-78-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
CSA action level.
m-tert-butyl phenol 585-34-2 0.01 0.01 — —
acetophenone, 3’-methyl- 585-74-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
lanthanum carbonate 587-26-8 4 0.4 — —
benzaldehyde azine 588-68-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butyl propanoate 590-01-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
bromophenol, 3- 591-20-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexanol, 3-methyl- 591-23-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
WQA action level.
hexanone, 2- 591-78-6 0.04 0.004 — —
hexane, 2,5-dimethyl- 592-13-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with other
isobutylurea 592-17-6
class-based
evaluation level.
Detections shall be
0.05 0.05 0.8 NSF action level. summed with other
urea, butyl- 592-31-4
(total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2017-10-17 chemicals under the
alkyl-substituted urea
94
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
class-based
evaluation level.
hexamethylene oxide 592-90-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
octadecane, n- 593-45-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
heptacosane 593-49-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
chloroiodomethane 593-71-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,3-dibromo-2-
594-51-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylbutane
manool 596-85-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
propanal,
597-31-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,2-dimethyl-3-hydroxy-
triethylsilanol 597-52-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with other
urea, methyl- 598-50-5
class-based
evaluation level.
acetamide, 2,2-dibromo- 598-70-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with other
urea, N,N-dimethyl- 598-94-7
class-based
evaluation level.
phenol, p-(alpha,
599-64-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
alpha-dimethylbenzyl)-
sulfonylbis(4-methyl)-
599-66-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 1,’
triphenyl stibine 603-36-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
95
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
Detections shall be
2,6-dinitrotoluene 606-20-2 —
CAS# 121-14-2.
1-(phenylmethoxy)-
607-58-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
naphthalene
2,6-dichloro-1,4- NSF action level.
609-20-1 0.02 0.002 0.02 —
n,n-dimethyl-o-toluidine 609-72-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
2-ethyltoluene 611-14-3
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
benzene, 1-ethenyl-2-
611-15-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl-
9,10-dihydroanthracene 613-31-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
toluidine, N,N-diethyl-p- 613-48-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,2-benzenediacetonitrile 613-73-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylbenzamide 613-93-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-isocyanto-2-
614-68-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylbenzene
benzothiazole,
615-22-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-(methylmercapto)-
1,2,4-tribromobenzene 615-54-3 0.04 0.004 — —
96
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
615-66-7 0.3 0.03 0.5 —
Detections shall be
2,3-dichloro-1-propanol 616-23-9
CAS# 96-23-1.
phenol, 2,4-bis(1,1- IAPMO action level.
616-55-7 0.01 0.01 — —
dimethylethyl)-6-methyl- JPRSC consensus date: 2019-03-06
cyanamide, diethyl- 617-83-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
formamide, N,N-diethyl- 617-84-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
2-phenyl-2-propanol 617-94-7 0.3 0.03 1 —
benzene, (1-chloroethenyl)- 618-34-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
furfural, 5-methyl 620-02-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
3-ethylphenol 620-17-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
phenyl-(m-tolyl)-methane 620-47-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-methyl-4-(phenylmethyl)-
620-83-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene
4,4’-methylenediphenol 620-92-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
isovanillin 621-59-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
97
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
N-nitroso-di-N-propylamine 621-64-7 0.00007 0.000007 — —
Detections shall be
summed with the
cinnamic acid 621-82-9 — CAS# 104-54-1,
CAS# 104-55-2,
CAS# 140-10-3, and
CAS# 14371-10-9.
benzene, (2-chloroethenyl)- 622-25-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-morpholineethanol 622-40-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenol, 4-ethoxy- 622-62-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
benzene, 1-ethenyl-4-
622-97-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl-
urea, N,N’,N’-trimethyl- 623-14-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with other
diethylurea, 1,3- 623-76-7
class-based
evaluation level.
fumaric acid, diethyl ester 623-91-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
98
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
octadien-1-ol, 3,7-dimethyl-
624-15-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,6-
disulfide, dimethyl 624-92-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butenoic acid, 3- 625-38-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with other
ethylurea 625-52-5
class-based
evaluation level.
IAPMO action level.
furan, 2,5-dimethyl- 625-86-5 0.01 0.01 — —
methylpiperidine,1- 626-67-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with other
urea, propyl- 627-06-5
class-based
evaluation level.
adipic acid, monomethyl
627-91-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ester
dimethyl adipate 627-93-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
diglycol chlorohydrin 628-89-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
hexanediol, 1,6- 629-11-8 2 0.2 10 —
ethane, 1,2-diethoxy 629-14-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hexadecanamide 629-54-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hexadecene-1 629-73-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
heptadecane 629-78-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
nonadecane 629-92-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
99
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
heneicosane 629-94-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
docosane 629-97-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pentacosane 629-99-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hexacosane 630-01-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
octacosane 630-02-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
nonacosane 630-03-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,1,1,2-tetrachloroethane 630-20-6 0.01 0.001 — —
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 79-08-3,
CAS# 76-03-9,
CAS# 79-11-8, and
0.060 0.0060 0.060 CAS# 79-43-6.
dibromoacetic acid 631-64-1 40 CFR § 141.64
(CAS# 79-43-6) must
also be evaluated
under its separate
pass/fail criteria
(TAC = 0.007 mg/L,
SPAC = 0.0007 mg/L).
dimethyl thioacetamide 631-67-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with other
urea, trimethyl- 632-14-4
class-based
evaluation level.
Detections shall be
tetramethyl urea 632-22-4 summed with other
chemicals under the
100
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
class-based
evaluation level.
beta-ergostenol 632-31-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trichloroaniline, 2,3,4- 634-67-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenyl butanedioic acid 635-51-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trichloroaniline, 2,4,5- 636-30-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 1-propenyl- 637-50-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
ethyl t-butyl ether 637-92-3 20 2 20 —
2,6,10,14-
638-36-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tetramethylhexadecane
tetradecanamide 638-58-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tricosane, also n-tricosane 638-67-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
n-triacontane 638-68-6 0.7 0.07 — —
benzenesulfonamide, n,4-
640-61-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethyl-
3-methylbenzophenone 643-65-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,1’-biphenyl, 3-methyl- 643-93-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acetophenone, p-isopropyl- 645-13-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzenepropanenitrile 645-59-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
ethylhex-2-en-1-al, 2- 645-62-5 0.01 0.01 — —
lauric anhydride 645-66-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
decane, 1,10-diamino 646-25-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tetracosane 646-31-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
imidazole, methylphenyl- 670-91-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
101
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
benzaldehyde, 2-hydroxy-
673-22-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-methoxy
piperidone, 2- 675-20-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dichloroacetamide 683-72-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
penten-2-one, 3,4-dimethyl-
684-94-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-
2-propenoic acid,
IAPMO action level.
2-methyl-, 2-ethylhexyl 688-84-6 0.01 0.01 — —
ester
carbodiimide, di-t-butyl- 691-24-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
dodecanedioic acid 693-23-2 30 30 30 —
aminoundecanoic acid, 12- 693-57-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trans-13-octadecanoic acid 693-71-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
bicyclo[4.2.0]octa-1,3,5-
694-87-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
triene
2-hydroxy-4-
698-27-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylbenzaldehyde
2H-pyran-2-one,
698-76-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tetrahydro-6-propyl
Detections shall be
summed with other
urea, cyclohexyl- 698-90-8
class-based
evaluation level.
benzene, pentamethyl- 700-12-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzoquinone, 2,6-di-t-
719-22-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butyl-
2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-
728-40-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
nitrophenol
102
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
formamide,
758-16-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N,N-dimethylthio-
dimethylpropanamide 758-96-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
formamide, N,N-di-n-butyl- 761-65-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-methyl-1-pentene 763-29-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
3-methyl-3-buten-1-ol 763-32-6
CAS# 115-18-4.
propanoic acid,
763-69-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-ethoxy-, ethyl ester
2,4-dimethyl-1,3-dioxane 766-20-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
maleic anhydride,
766-39-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,3-dimethyl-
formamide, N-cyclohexyl- 766-93-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
indene, 1H-,
767-58-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,3-dihydro-1-methyl-
3-oxo-3-phenylpropene 768-03-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
n-phenylisopropylamine 768-52-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
piperidene,
768-66-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-
4-tert-butylaniline 769-92-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
propanol, 1-phenoxy 2- 770-35-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dioxane, 4-phenyl-1,3- 772-00-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dioxacyclododecane-7,12- WQA action level.
777-95-7 0.05 0.05 — —
dione, 1,6- JPRSC consensus date: 2016-08-17
toluenesulfonic acid, p-,
778-28-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butyl ester
alpha-(phenylimino)-ortho-
779-84-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cresol
103
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
benzenemethanamine,
780-25-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N-(phenylmethylene)-
WQA action level.
triphenylphosphine oxide 791-28-6 0.001 0.0001 0.02 —
phenylene diamine,
n-(1,3-dimethylbutyl)-n’- 793-24-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenyl-p-
tributylphosphine oxide 814-29-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hexanoic acid, 2-ethyl-,
816-19-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl ester
hex-5-en-1-ol 821-41-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dithiolane-2-thione, 1,3- 822-38-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
toluene, 2,6-diamino- 823-40-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
indene, 1H-,
824-22-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclopentylidenecyclo- NSF action level.
825-25-2 0.01 0.01 0.01 —
pentan-2-one JPRSC consensus date: 2019-09-18
Detections shall be
2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4- 0.05 0.05 0.05 NSF action level. summed with the
826-36-8
piperidinone (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2011-05-10 following chemical:
CAS# 2403-88-5.
Detections shall be
summed with the
0.05 0.05 4 NSF action level.
cyclododecanone 830-13-7 following chemicals:
(total) (total) (total)) External peer review date: 2014-04-22
CAS# 1724-39-6 and
CAS# 58567-11-6.
NSF action level.
p-hydroxybenzhydrol 833-39-6 0.01 0.01 0.01 —
methacrylic acid, IAPMO action level.
868-77-9 0.01 0.01 — —
2-hydroxyethyl ester JPRSC consensus date: 2020-04-02
N-butyl formamide 871-71-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone 872-50-4 1 0.1 — NSF action level. Issue date: 1993-06-17 —
104
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
benzene, cyclopropyl- 873-49-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, trans-1-propenyl- 873-66-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
indene, 1H-,
874-35-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
1,3-dimethyl-4- 0.2 0.02 1 NSF action level. high flash
874-41-9
ethylbenzene (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2016-10-27 aromatic naphtha
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
xylenol, 4-tert-butyl-2,6- 879-97-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
alpha-benzene-succinic
884-33-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acid
Detections shall be
summed with the
0.00008 0.000008 WQA action level. following chemicals:
lanthanum acetate 917-70-4 —
(total as La) (total as La) External peer review date: 2017-10-17 CAS# 10099-58-8,
CAS# 10099-59-9, and
CAS# 10099-60-2.
1,1,1-trichloro-2-propanone 918-00-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
silane, gamma-aminopropyl
919-30-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
triethoxy-
Action levels
expressed as TAA
(CAS# 75-85-4).
Detections of TAEE
butane, 2-ethoxy-2-methyl- 919-94-8 (CAS# 919-94-8)
and TAME
(CAS# 994-05-8) are to
be multiplied by
molecular weight
105
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
0.76 and 0.86,
summation.
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 994-05-8 and
CAS# 75-85-4.
hydroxypropyl NSF action level.
923-26-2 0.01 0.01 — —
methacrylate, 2- JPRSC consensus date: 2018-12-11
N-nitroso-di-n-butylamine 924-16-3 0.0003 0.00003 — —
hex-2-en-1-ol, cis- 928-94-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hex-2-en-1-ol, trans- 928-95-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
US EPA 10 /10-6 cancer risk levels.
-5
N-nitrosopyrrolidine 930-55-2 0.00002 0.000002 — —
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
933-98-2
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
benzothiazolinone, 2- 934-34-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with
1,3-dimethyl-5- 0.2 0.02 1 NSF action level. chemicals under the
934-74-7
ethylbenzene (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2016-10-27 high flash
aromatic naphtha
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
106
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
class-based
evaluation level.
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
934-80-5
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
benzene, (1-methoxy-1-
935-67-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylethyl)-
2-phenyl-2-imidazoline 936-49-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenyl-1-buten-4-ol, 4- 936-58-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-(4-ethylphenyl)-ethanone 937-30-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
naphthalene, 2-ethyl- 939-27-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4,6,8-trimethylazulene 941-81-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-hexanone, 1-phenyl 942-92-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
laurolactam 947-04-6 0.4 0.04 2 —
Action levels
expressed as TAA
(CAS# 75-85-4).
Detections of TAEE
(CAS# 919-94-8)
butane, 0.3 0.03 0.4 NSF action level. and TAME
994-05-8
2-methoxy-2-methyl- (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2019-10-22 (CAS# 994-05-8) are to
be multiplied by
molecular weight
0.76 and 0.86,
107
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
summation.
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 919-94-8 and
CAS# 75-85-4.
butanone, 1-phenyl-2- 1007-32-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with other
1-methyl-3-phenylurea 1007-36-9
class-based
evaluation level.
1,1’-(1,4-phenylene)bis- NSF action level.
1009-61-6 0.01 0.01 — —
ethanone JPRSC consensus date: 2020-05-06
1,3-bis(1,1-
1014-60-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethylethyl)benzene
heptachlor epoxide 1024-57-3 0.0002 0.00002 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
NSF action level.
triallyl isocyanurate 1025-15-6 0.04 0.04 0.04 —
WQA action level.
trimethyl silanol 1066-40-6 0.05 0.05 0.4 —
butanoic acid, 3,3-dimethyl- 1070-83-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methane, di-t-butyl- 1070-87-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
glyphosate 1071-83-6 0.7 0.07 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
Detections shall be
summed with
0.2 0.02 1 NSF action level. chemicals under the
1-methyl-2-propylbenzene 1074-17-5
(total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2016-10-27 high flash
aromatic naphtha
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
108
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
class-based
evaluation level.
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
NSF action level.
ammonium carbamate 1111-78-0 20 5 20 —
diethylmethyl borane 1115-07-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butenal, methyl- 1115-11-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N-nitrosodiethanolamine 1116-54-7 0.0001 0.00001 — —
NSF action level.
dimethyl glutarate 1119-40-0 0.01 0.01 0.01 —
1,2-decanediol 1119-86-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dodecanamide 1120-16-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tetradecane 1120-36-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,3-dimethyl-2-
1121-05-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclopentene-1-one
dimethylaminopyridine 1122-58-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
109
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
benzaldehyde,
1123-56-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,6-dimethyl-
tetramethylpyrazine,
1124-11-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,3,5,6-
acetamide, n-cyclohexyl- 1124-53-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pyridine,
1,2,3,6-tetrahydro- 1124-69-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
propanamide, n-cyclohexyl 1126-56-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
naphthalene, 1-ethyl- 1127-76-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
4-hydroxybenzophenone 1137-42-4 0.01 0.01 0.01 —
naphthalene-d8 1146-65-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
propenoic acid, 2-methyl-,
1-methyl-1,3-propanediyl 1189-08-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ester, 2-
pentaethylene glycol
1191-87-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethyl ether
cyclohexen-1-one,
1193-18-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-methyl-2-
furylmethylketone,
1193-79-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
5-methyl-2-
benzyl alcohol, α,α,4-
1197-01-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trimethyl-
glycine, n-benzoyl-,
1205-08-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl ester
4-chlorodiphenylamine 1205-71-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tricyclopentabenzene 1206-79-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
sodium p-sulfophenyl
1208-67-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methallyl ether
phosphate, NSF action level.
1241-94-7 0.01 0.01 — —
diphenyl-2-ethylhexyl- JPRSC consensus date: 2019-04-10
110
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
NSF action level.
sodium xylenesulfonate 1300-72-7 0.05 0.05 — —
Issue date: 1996-04
NSF action level.
cerium oxide 1306-38-3 0.05 0.05 0.05 —
lanthanum oxide 1312-81-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexanol, trimethyl- 1321-60-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, divinyl- 1321-74-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
MFL = million fibers per
asbestos 1332-21-4 7 MFL 0.7 MFL — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.62 liter, with fiber length
> 10 microns.
tetramethyldecynediol 1333-17-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzaldehyde, 2-, 3-, 4-
1334-78-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl- mixed isomers
propanol, phenyl-1- 1335-12-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
CAS# 1336-36-3
is representative of
polychlorinated biphenyls 1336-36-3 0.0005 0.00005 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 polychlorinated
biphenyls as a
chemical class.
Detections shall be
0.05 NSF action level. summed with the
sorbitan monopalmitate 1338-40-5 — —
(total) Issue date: 1996-12 following chemical:
CAS# 1338-41-6.
Detections shall be
0.05 NSF action level. summed with the
sorbitan monostearate 1338-41-6 — —
(total) Issue date: 1996-12 following chemical:
CAS# 1338-40-5.
NSF action level.
sorbitan monoleate 1338-43-8 4 0.4 20 —
benzenemethanol,
1445-91-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
α-methyl-, -(S)-
111
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
benzenebutanoic acid,
1453-06-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,5-dimethyl-
1-heptadecanol 1454-85-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
WQA action level.
2-pentene, 4-chloro 1458-99-7 0.002 0.0002 — —
dimethylcyanamide 1467-79-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
oct-2-enoic acid 1470-50-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzenemethanamine, 1,3- 1477-55-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzenemethanol,
1517-69-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
α-methyl-, -I-
piperidinocarbonitrile 1530-87-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
morpholine, 4-dodecyl- 1541-81-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-[2-(ethylhexyl)oxy]-
1559-35-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethanol
1-cyclopentene-1-
1560-11-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
carboxylic acid
2-chlorocyclohexanol 1561-86-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
carbofuran 1563-66-2 0.04 0.004 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
4[((4-
dimethylamino)phenyl)m
1564-29-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethylene]-2-phenyl-5(4H)-
oxazolone
3-phenyl-3-pentanol 1565-71-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
α-ethyl-α-methylbenzyl
1565-75-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
alcohol
propanol, 1-propoxy-2- 1569-01-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
penten-2-ol, 3- 1569-50-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pentenal, trans-2- 1576-87-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
112
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
Health Canada MAC.
trifluralin 1582-09-8 0.045 0.0045 — —
Issue date: 1989-02
ethyl benzoylformate 1603-79-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzaldehyde,
3,5-di-tert-butyl-4- 1620-98-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hydroxy-
hex-1-ene, 2-ethyl- 1632-16-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
fenchyl alcohol 1632-73-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
methyl t-butyl ether 1634-04-4 80 8 80 —
Total combined
detection of
CAS# 116-06-3,
CAS# 1646-87-3, and
aldicarb sulphoxide 1646-87-3 0.004 0.0004 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61
CAS# 1646-88-4
shall not exceed
0.007 mg/L (TAC) or
0.0007 (SPAC).
Total combined
detection of
CAS# 116-06-3,
CAS# 1646-87-3, and
aldicarb sulphone 1646-88-4 0.002 0.0002 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61
CAS# 1646-88-4
shall not exceed
0.007 mg/L (TAC) or
0.0007 (SPAC).
propanenitrile, 3,3’-oxybis- 1656-48-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
1 0.1 5 NSF action level. summed with the
bisphenol A diglycidyl ether 1675-54-3
CAS# 5581-32-8.
3H-1,2 benzodithiol-3-one 1677-27-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
113
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
benzenesulfonamide,
1678-25-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
n-phenyl
methyl-4-isopropyl
1678-82-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexane, trans-1-
terephthalic acid,
1679-64-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
monomethyl ester
1H-indene, 2,3-dihydro,
1685-82-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4,6-dimethyl-
Health Canada MAC.
bromoxynil 1689-84-5 0.005 0.0005 — —
Issue date: 1987-03
1,3-dimethyl piperidinone 1690-76-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,5-dimethylanilsole 1706-11-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with the
cyclododecanol 1724-39-6 following chemicals:
(total) (total) (total)) External peer review date: 2014-04-22
CAS# 830-13-7 and
CAS# 58567-11-6.
o-cresolsulfonephthalein 1733-12-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
diphenyl(ethyl)phosphine
1733-57-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
oxide
dimethylaminopropane-
1738-25-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
nitrile
dehydroabietic acid 1740-19-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenol, 2-allyl- 1745-81-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61
2,3,7,8-TCDD (dioxin) 1746-01-6 0.00000003 0.000000003 — —
US EPA Toxic Equivalency Factor: 1
allyl phenol ether 1746-13-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with
1,4-dimethyl-2- 0.2 0.02 1 NSF action level.
1758-88-9 chemicals under the
ethylbenzene (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2016-10-27
high flash
aromatic naphtha
114
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
n-cyclohexylbenzamide 1759-68-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexanamine,
1761-71-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4,4’-methylene-bis-
Detections shall be
NSF action level.
ammonium thiocyanate 1762-95-4 (total as (total as (total as following chemicals:
CAS# 540-72-7.
Detections shall be
perfluorooctanesulfonic 0.00007 0.000007 US EPA Lifetime Drinking Water summed with the
1763-23-1 —
acid (total) (total)10 Health Advisory. Issue date: 2016 following chemical:
CAS# 335-67-1.
Detections shall be
summed with other
urea, N,N'-dibutyl- 1792-17-2
class-based
evaluation level.
aniline, 2-propyl- 1821-39-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methoxytrimethylsilane 1825-61-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
anilinobenzothiazole 1843-21-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzimidazolone,
1849-01-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-methyl-2-
1,2,3-trichloro-2-
1871-58-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylpropane
2-octenoic acid, (2E)- 1871-67-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hydroxymethylcyclo-
1892-12-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dodecane
115
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
cembrene 1898-13-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzopyrimidine,
1904-64-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3,4-dihydro-
Health Canada MAC.
paraquat (as dichloride) 1910-42-5 0.01 0.001 — —
Issue date: 1986-02
atrazine 1912-24-9 0.003 0.0003 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
Atrazine
(CAS# 1912-24-9)
may not exceed its
individual criteria of
0.003 mg/L (TAC) or
0.005 0.0005 Health Canada MAC. 0.0003 mg/L (SPAC).
atrazine and metabolites 1912-24-9 —
(total) (total) Issue date: 1993-04 Atrazine metabolites
may include the
following:
CAS# 1007-28-9,
CAS# 3397-62-4, and
CAS# 6190-65-4.
Health Canada MAC.
dicamba 1918-00-9 0.12 0.012 — —
Issue date: 1987-03
Health Canada MAC.
picloram 1918-02-1 0.19 0.019 — —
Issue date: 1988-06
octadecenoic acid, 9(E)-,
1937-62-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl ester
methyl (Z)-octadec-11-
1937-63-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
enoate
NSF action level.
t-butyl hydroquinone 1948-33-0 5 0.5 7 —
Detections shall be
1-(2-methylcyclohexyl)-3- 0.05 0.05 0.8 NSF action level. summed with other
1982-49-6
phenylurea (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2017-10-17 chemicals under the
116
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
class-based
evaluation level.
1,1’-dimethyl-3-
1985-88-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
chloropropanol
phenol, 4-(1-phenylethyl)- 1988-89-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzenedimethanol,
1999-85-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
a,a,a’,a’-tetramethyl-1,3-
2,6-dichlorobenzamide 2008-58-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tetradecanamine, 1- 2016-42-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
decylamine, n- 2016-57-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
morpholine,
2038-03-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-(2-aminoethyl)-
benzenepropanamine 2038-57-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzenebutanenitrile 2046-18-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dibutyl cyanamide, N,N- 2050-54-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butanediol dimethacrylate,
2082-81-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,4-
berberine 2086-83-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dioxathiocane, 1,3,6- 2094-92-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
bisphenol F diglycidyl ether 2095-03-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,10-dichlorodecane 2162-98-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with other
urea,
N'-cyclopentyl-N,N- 2163-69-1
dimethyl-
class-based
evaluation level.
glycidyl ether,
2210-79-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-methylphenyl-
117
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
cyclohexanamine,
2211-66-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
n-(phenylmethylene)-
n,n-diethyl-p-nitroaniline 2216-15-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
n,n-diethyl-3-nitroaniline 2216-16-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-(1,1-dimethylethyl)-6-
2219-82-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl phenol
Detections shall be
summed with the
phosphonic acid, CAS# 6419-19-8,
0.01 0.01 NSF action level.
(nitrilotris(methylene))tri-, 2235-43-0 — CAS# 20592-85-2,
pentasodium CAS# 4105-01-5,
CAS# 7611-50-9,
CAS# 94021-23-5, and
CAS# 15505-05-2.
benzothiazole-2-thione,
2254-94-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
n-methyl-
propargite 2312-35-8 0.1 0.01 — —
ethanol,
2-[2-[4-(1,1,3,3-
2315-61-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tetramethyl-
butyl)phenoxy]ethoxy]-
Detections shall be
summed with the
octoxynol-3 2315-62-0 CAS# 58705-51-4,
CAS# 49796-75-0,
CAS# 38621-31-7,
CAS# 37809-81-7,
118
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
CAS# 2315-63-1, and
CAS# 2315-64-2.
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 58705-51-4,
octoxynol-4 2315-63-1 CAS# 49796-75-0,
CAS# 38621-31-7,
CAS# 37809-81-7,
CAS# 2315-62-0, and
CAS# 2315-64-2.
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 58705-51-4,
octoxynol-5 2315-64-2 CAS# 49796-75-0,
CAS# 38621-31-7,
CAS# 37809-81-7,
CAS# 2315-62-0, and
CAS# 2315-63-1.
fluorescein 2321-07-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
octadecenoic acid, 8-,
2345-29-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl ester
Detections shall be
summed with the
diethylene glycol 0.05 0.05 2 WQA action level. following chemicals:
2358-84-1
dimethacrylate (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2015-10-20 CAS# 97-90-5,
CAS# 109-16-0, and
CAS# 109-17-1.
nonanal, 2-oxo- 2363-87-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
decadienal, 2,4- 2363-88-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-octenal 2363-89-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
119
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
2,2-dimethyl-1-hexanol 2370-13-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
oxabicyclo (4.1.0) heptane-
2386-87-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-carboxylic acid, 7-
Detections shall be
summed with other
1,3-dicyclohexylurea 2387-23-7
class-based
evaluation level.
benzene, 1-ethyldecyl- 2400-00-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 1-hexylheptyl- 2400-01-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4- 0.05 0.05 0.05 NSF action level. summed with the
2403-88-5
piperidinol (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2011-05-10 following chemical:
CAS# 826-36-8.
piperidinol,
2403-89-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-
(phenylimino)
2406-04-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexadiene
propanol,
1-[4-(1,1-dimethylethyl) 2416-30-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenoxy]-2-
1-chlorotetradecane 2425-54-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
formamide,
2425-74-3 0.003 0.0003 — TOE —
N-(1,1-dimethylethyl)-
butanediol diglycidyl ether,
2425-79-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,4-
n-butyl glycidyl ether 2426-08-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
11-aminoundecanoic acid 2432-99-7 0.05 0.05 — NSF action level. Issue date: 1999-04-15 —
2,3,4-trimethylquinoline 2437-72-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
120
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
benzotriazole, 2-(2-
NSF action level.
hydroxy-5-methyl- 2440-22-4 4 0.4 6 —
phenyl)-
trimethyl trimellitate 2459-10-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
di(t-butyl) benzoquinone 2460-77-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-ethylhexyl glycidyl ether 2461-15-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dodecyl glycidyl ether 2461-18-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2462-84-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl ester
2,2’-bisphenol F 2467-02-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,4’-bisphenol F 2467-03-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trimethylthiourea 2489-77-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-methoxybutanol 2517-43-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methacrylic acid, 3-
2530-85-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(trimethylsilyl)propyl ester
nonanoic acid, 9-oxo- 2553-17-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
9,12-octadecanoic acid,
2566-97-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl ester
methane, di-t-butoxy 2568-93-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexanedimethan-
2579-20-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
amine, 1,3-
piperidine, 1-formyl 2591-86-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexadiene-1-one,
2,6-(1,1-dimethylethyl)-4- 2607-52-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylene-2,5-
2, 4-dichlorophenyl
2612-57-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
isocyanate
NSF action level.
benzisothiazolin-3-one 2634-33-5 0.01 0.01 — —
121
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
octadecadienoic acid,
2634-45-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(Z,Z)-9,12- , butyl ester
C.I. Acid Blue 9 2650-18-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,1-cycloheanedimethanol 2658-60-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3,4-
2670-38-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dichlorobenzenediamine
methyl isothiazolone 2682-20-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pyrrolidinone, 1-dodecyl-2- 2687-96-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
sodium 4-styrenesulfonate 2695-37-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
aniline, 4-n-propyl- 2696-84-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 1-methylundecyl- 2719-61-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 1-pentylheptyl- 2719-62-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 1-butyloctyl- 2719-63-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 1-propylnonyl- 2719-64-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dilauryl disulfide 2757-37-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-hydroxypropyl
2761-09-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methacrylate
diquat 2764-72-9 0.02 0.002 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
octadecenoic acid, 6(Z),
2777-58-4 0.003 0.0003 — TOE —
methyl ester
octadecanoic acid,
2778-96-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
octadecyl ester
NSF action level.
tetramethylthiourea 2782-91-4 0.01 0.001 0.2 —
1-hydroxyethylidene-1,
1-diphosphonic acid 2809-21-4 — 0.02 — NSF action level. Issue date: 1999-07-08 —
(HEDP)
NSF action level.
isophorone diamine 2855-13-2 0.1 0.01 0.6 —
122
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
Detections shall be
summed with
chemicals under the
2870-04-4
(CAS# 64742-95-6)
class-based
evaluation level.
2-nonen-4-one, 2-methyl- 2903-23-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,3-dioxolane,
2916-31-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,2-dimethyl-
Health Canada MAC.
chlorpyrifos 2921-88-2 0.09 0.009 — —
Issue date: 1986-02
benzenedimethanol,
2948-46-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
a,a,a’,a’-tetramethyl-1,4-
benzyldiphenylphosphine
2959-74-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
oxide
dimethyldodecanamide,
3007-53-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N,N-
3-methyl-cinnamic acid 3029-79-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-methyl-4-phenyl
3077-16-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
morpholine
cyclohexyl isocyanate 3173-53-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hexen-2-one, 5-methyl-5- 3240-09-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9-octa-
3268-87-9 0.0003 0.00003 — US EPA toxic equivalency factor: 0.0001 —
chlorodibenzo-p-dioxin
trimethylolpropane
3290-92-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trimethacrylate
1,2,3,4-tetrahydroacridine 3295-64-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dicyclohexyloxamide 3299-64-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3,5,5-trimethylhexanoic
3302-10-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acid
123
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
NSF action level.
tetramethyl-succinonitrile 3333-52-6 0.01 0.01 0.01 —
3-methyl-5-phenyl-1H-
3347-62-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pyrazole
NSF action level.
triclosan 3380-34-5 0.3 0.03 0.7 —
octen-3-ol, 1- 3391-86-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-pentene, 3,3-dimethyl 3404-73-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
morpholinecarboxamide,
3417-54-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N-cyclohexyl-4-
benzyl alcohol,
3445-42-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
a,a-dimethyl-p-isopropyl-
formamidine, N,N-dimethyl-
3459-75-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N’-cyclohexyl-
9H-pyrido(3,3-b)indole-1-
carboxylic acid, 3464-66-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl ester
hexane, 2,2,5-trimethyl 3522-94-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethylol glycol 3586-55-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N-butylbenzene- NSF action level.
3622-84-2 0.01 0.01 0.01 —
sulfonamide External peer review date: 2011-09-20
ethanone,
3637-01-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-(3,4-dimethylphenyl-
dioctyltin dilaurate 3648-18-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3648-20-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acid, diundecyl ester
dimethyl trisulfide 3658-80-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butenoic acid, 2- 3724-65-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-ethyl-2-methyl-
3728-54-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexane
C.I. Acid Red 1 3734-67-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
124
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
dimethyldithiocarbamate,
3735-92-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl
2-butanol,
3760-96-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-(dimethylamino-)
furan, 2-pentyl- 3777-69-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzoic acid, 2-cyano- 3839-22-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
triphenylphosphine sulfide 3878-45-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
monomethyl succinate
(monomethyl ester 3878-55-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butanedioc acid)
octadecanamide,
3886-90-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N,N-dimethyl-
hexadecanamide,
3886-91-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N,N-dimethyl-
2,6,10-trimethyl-dodecane 3891-98-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenylindan,
3910-35-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,1,3-trimethyl-3-
1,2-cycloheanedimethanol 3971-29-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene,
WQA action level.
(1,2-dimethoxyethyl)- 4013-37-0 0.05 0.005 — —
isomers
benzenesulfonyl
4083-64-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
isocyanate, 4-methyl
Detections shall be
summed with the
amino tris CAS# 6419-19-8,
(methylenephosphonic 4105-01-5 — CAS# 20592-85-2,
acid), 2Na salt CAS# 7611-50-9,
CAS# 94021-23-5,
CAS# 2235-43-0, and
CAS# 15505-05-2.
125
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
dimethyl-3,3’-
4131-74-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
thiobispropionate
1,4-dibutoxybutane 4161-40-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1H-indene, 2,3-dihydro,
4175-53-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,3-dimethyl-
benzene,
4218-48-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-ethyl-4-(1-methylethyl)
phenol, o-(1-phenylethyl)- 4237-44-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
isobutyl 4-hydroxybenzoate 4247-02-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,1,2-trimethylcyclopentane 4259-00-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phosphinic acid, p-phenyl-,
4297-95-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Na salt
adipic acid,
4337-65-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
mono(2-ethylhexyl) ester
1-benzothiepin,
4370-78-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-
methyl hydrogen phthalate 4376-18-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
n,n-dimethylhexylamine 4385-04-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
nonane, 2,2,4,4,6,8,8-
4390-04-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
heptamethyl
morpholinecarbaldehyde,
4394-85-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-
2,2’-azobis(2,4-
4419-11-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethylvaleronitrile)
2-(n-morpholinylmethyl)
4438-01-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenol
2,5-tetrahydrodipropylfuran 4457-62-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tridecane, 6-phenyl- 4534-49-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 1-butylnonyl- 4534-50-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 1-propyldecyl- 4534-51-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
126
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
benzene, 1-ethylundecyl- 4534-52-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 1-methyldodecyl- 4534-53-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 1-propyloctyl- 4536-86-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 1-ethylnonyl- 4536-87-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 1-methyldecyl- 4536-88-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 1-butylheptyl- 4537-15-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
morpholinepropanenitrile,
4542-47-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-
methyl pentanedinitrile 4553-62-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with other
urea, 1,1,3,3-tetrabutyl- 4559-86-8
class-based
evaluation level.
benzoquinone,
4584-63-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,5-di-tert-pentyl-p-
podocarpa-8,11,13-trien-
4586-72-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
16-oic acid
methyldiethyl carbamate 4652-44-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
buten-1-ol, 2-methyl-2- 4675-87-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene, 2,4-dimethyl-1-
4706-89-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(methylethyl)-
benzene, 1,3-dimethyl-5-
4706-90-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
isopropyl-
benzaldehyde, 4-ethyl 4748-78-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
15-octadeconoic acid,
4764-72-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl ester
1-chloro-3-phenoxy-2-
4769-73-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
propanol
127
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
3-cyclohexene-1-carboxylic
4771-80-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acid
alpha-chloro-benzeneacetic
4773-33-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acid-, ethyl ester
cyclobutane, ethyl- 4806-61-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3,4-diphenylfuran-2,5-dione 4808-48-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,5-dimethyl-3-hydroxy-4-
4811-03-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pyridinemethanol
butylamine, N-butylidene 4853-56-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclopentylcyclopentanone,
4884-24-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-
9-(ethoxycarbonyl)
4895-92-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenanthrene
pinanol (or cis-2-pinanol) 4948-28-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pinanol, trans-2- 4948-29-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-(2,6,6-trimethyl-1-
WQA action level.
cyclohexen-1-yl) 4951-40-0 0.3 0.03 — —
acrylaldehyde
benzene, 1,1’-
4957-14-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylenebis(4-methyl)-
ethylcyclopentanone 4971-18-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-phenylcyclohexene 4994-16-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethyldiphenyl sulphone 5097-12-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexanemethanol,
trans-alpha,alpha,4- 5114-00-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trimethyl-
methyl-14-
5129-60-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylpentadecanoate
heptadecanoic acid,
5129-61-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
16-methyl-, methyl ester
128
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
5131-60-2 0.3 0.03 0.3 —
propylene glycol n-butyl NSF action level.
5131-66-8 2 0.2 30 —
ether External peer review date: 2002-10-03
13-isoproylpodocarpa-
5155-70-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
8,11,13-trien-16-oic acid
benzene, 4,6-diisopropyl-
5186-68-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,3-dimethyl-
3,4,5,6-tetrahydro-1,3-
5259-97-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
oxazin-2-one
dodecyl tetraglycol 5274-68-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
n-nonanoyl morpholine 5299-64-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acetaldehyde,
5314-41-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
di-sec-butyl acetal
hexamethylene
5326-21-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dibenzamide
hexanamine, 2- 5329-79-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with other
urea,
N,N-bis-(1,1- 5336-24-3
dimethylethyl)-
class-based
evaluation level.
propanenitrile,
5351-04-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-(diethylamino)-
ethanone, 1-(4-(1- CSA action level.
5359-04-6 0.01 0.01 — —
methylethenyl)phenyl)- JPRSC consensus date: 2014-08-13
2,5-dichlorophenyl
5392-82-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
isocyanate
ethanol,
5394-57-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-(4-methoxyphenoxy)-
129
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
dihydromethyl
5400-75-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzimidazolone
3,4-dihydro-3,3,6,8-
tetramethylnaphthalen- 5409-55-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1(2H)-one
triisopropyl borate 5419-55-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-isopropyl
5427-03-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenol
benzoic acid, WQA action level.
5444-75-7 0.01 0.01 — —
2-ethylhexyl ester- JPRSC consensus date: 2018-08-08
cinnamate,
5466-77-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-ethylhexyl-4-methoxy-
butanone,
5471-51-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-
Detections shall be
bisphenol A diglycideryl 1 0.1 5 NSF action level. summed with the
5581-32-8
ether (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2002-10-03 following chemical:
CAS# 1675-54-3.
2,2-bis(3,5-dimethyl-4-
5613-46-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hydroxyphenyl)propane
benzeneamine,
4-(1-methylethyl)-N- 5650-10-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenyl-
1-propanone,
5650-41-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-hydroxy-1-phenyl-
pyrrolo(1,2-a)pyrazine-1,4-
dione, hexahydro-3-(2- 5654-86-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylpropyl)-
WQA action level.
decyltetraglycol isomer 5703-94-6 0.01 0.01 — —
phenanthro[3,4-c]furan-1,3-
5723-54-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dione
sitosterol 5779-62-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
130
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
Detections shall be
benzaldehyde, 0.05 0.05 0.05 NSF action level. summed with the
5779-72-6
2,4,5-trimethyl- (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2013-10-30 following chemical:
CAS# 487-68-3.
dimethylbenzaldehyde, 2,5 5779-94-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzaldehyde,
5799-95-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3,5-dimethyl-
acetylhexamethyleneimine 5809-41-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
WQA action level.
tau-cadinol 5937-11-1 0.01 0.01 — —
dimethylbenzaldehyde, 3,4- 5973-71-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dioxadithionane, 1,3,6,7- 5980-67-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trioxepane, 1,3,5- 5981-06-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
octadien-2-ol,
5986-38-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,6-dimethyl-5,7-
Methylenephenethyl
6006-81-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
alcohol, beta-
sodium formaldehyde
6035-47-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
sulfoxylate
cyclohexane,
6069-98-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cis-1-methyl-4-isopropyl-
Detections shall be
summed with other
N,N''-(Isobutylidene)diurea 6104-30-9
class-based
evaluation level.
formylcyclopentene, 1- 6140-65-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
tris(2-chloropropyl) 0.4 0.04 2 NSF action level. summed with the
6145-73-9
phosphate (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2017-04-19 following chemicals:
CAS# 13674-84-5,
131
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
CAS# 76649-15-5,
CAS# 76649-15-5,
CAS# 137888-35-8,
and
CAS# 137909-40-1.
benzyl alcohol, 4-ethoxy 6214-44-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acridine,
IAPMO action level.
9,10-dihydro-9,9- 6267-02-3 0.01 0.01 — —
dimethyl-
phenol, p-phenylethyl- 6335-83-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
indan-1-ol 6351-10-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-chloro-2,5-
6358-64-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethyoxybenzamine
Detections shall be
summed with the
methyl 3-(3,5-di-tert-butyl-
0.06 0.006 0.8 NSF action level. following chemicals:
4-hydroxyphenyl) 6386-38-5
(total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2017-10-18 CAS# 20170-32-5,
propionate
CAS# 82340-66-3, and
CAS# 138345-00-3.
fluorescein,
6417-85-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dipotassium salt
Detections shall be
summed with the
acid) CAS# 7611-50-9,
CAS# 94021-23-5,
CAS# 2235-43-0, and
CAS# 15505-05-2.
di(2-ethylhexyl) NSF action level.
6422-86-2 1 0.1 9 —
terephthalate External peer review date: 2008-04-17
132
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
carbonic acid,
6482-34-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
diisopropyl ester
benzene,
1-(1,1-dimethylethyl)-3- 6630-01-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethyl-5-methyl-
6-amino-1,3-dimethyluracil 6642-31-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene,
6669-13-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(1,1-dimethylethoxy)-
2,3-dihydro-4,5,7-trimethyl-
6682-06-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1H-indene
hexamethyleneimine,
6763-91-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-ethyl-
phenylene) bis-ethanone, NSF action level.
6781-42-6 0.01 0.01 — —
1,1’-(1,3- JPRSC consensus date: 2019-02-20
2-chloro-1,3-
6781-98-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethylbenzene
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 77-68-9,
2,2,4-trimethyl-1,3- 0.2 0.2 2 WQA action level.
6846-50-0 CAS# 144-19-4,
pentanediol diisobutyrate (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2016-10-26
CAS# 25265-77-4,
CAS# 74367-33-2,
CAS# 74367-34-3, and
CAS# 74381-40-1.
2,2’-dimethyl-4,4’-
methylene 6864-37-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
bis(cyclohexylamine)
2-methylindoline 6872-06-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cis-hexahydrophthalide 6939-71-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-chlorophenyl phenyl
7005-72-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ether
133
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
Expressed as
anhydrous Chloramine
chloramine-T trihydrate 7080-50-4 summed with the
CAS# 70-55-3 and
CAS# 127-65-1.
acrylic acid, 2-cyano-,
7085-85-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethyl ester
octanamide, UL action level.
7112-02-9 0.01 0.01 — —
N-(2-hydroxyethyl)- JPRSC consensus date: 2016-10-06
ethanol, 2-[2-(2-
7204-16-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenoxyethoxy)ethoxy]-
WQA action level.
5-octadecene (E) 7206-21-5 0.01 0.01 — —
2-thiazolecarboxylic acid,
7210-73-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-methyl-, ethyl ester
butyl glycolate 7397-62-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-nitro-1-phenyl-1-
7404-78-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butanone
NSF action level.
aluminum 7429-90-5 9 2 9 —
TT
TT = treatment
lead 7439-92-1 (action level 0.0005 — 40 CFR § 141.80; 65 FR 1950
technique8,9
0.005 mg/L)
lithium 7439-93-2 1 0.3 — NSF action level. Issue date: 1999-09-27 —
Health Canada MAC.
manganese 7439-96-5 0.12 0.012 — —
Issue date: 2019-05
mercury (inorganic) 7439-97-6 0.002 0.0002 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.62 —
US EPA Draft Health Advisory.
molybdenum 7439-98-7 0.04 0.004 — —
Issue date: 1993
neodymium 7440-00-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
134
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
WQA action level.
nickel 7440-02-0 0.1 0.02 — —
niobium 7440-03-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
WQA action level.
platinum 7440-06-4 0.01 0.001 — —
WQA action level.
potassium-39 7440-09-7 500 50 — —
praseodymium 7440-10-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
rhenium 7440-15-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
NSF action level.
rubidium 7440-17-7 0.5 0.2 0.5 —
ruthenium 7440-18-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
samarium 7440-19-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
silicon 7440-21-3 1 0.1 — NSF action level. Issue date: —
US EPA Lifetime Drinking Water
silver 7440-22-4 0.1 0.01 — Health Advisory. —
Issue date: 1992
strontium 7440-24-6 4 0.4 — —
tantalum 7440-25-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
thallium 7440-28-0 0.002 0.0002 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.62 —
NSF action level.
tin, inorganic 7440-31-5 4 0.4 — —
Detections shall be
90
90 9 NSF action level. summed with the
titanium 7440-32-6 (total as
(total as Ti) (total as Ti) External peer review date: 2003-09-04 following chemical:
Ti)
CAS# 13463-67-7.
NSF action level.
tungsten 7440-33-7 0.01 0.01 0.01 —
135
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
antimony 7440-36-0 0.006 0.0006 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.62 —
arsenic 7440-38-2 0.01 0.001 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.62 —
barium 7440-39-3 2 0.2 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.62 —
beryllium 7440-41-7 0.004 0.0004 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.62 —
Health Canada
boron 7440-42-8 5 0.5 — —
Issue date: 1990-09
cadmium 7440-43-9 0.005 0.0005 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.62 —
cerium 7440-45-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
chromium (total) 7440-47-3 0.1 0.01 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.62 —
WQA action level.
cobalt 7440-48-4 0.007 0.0007 0.2 —
TT
TT = treatment
copper 7440-50-8 (action level 0.13 — 40 CFR § 141.80, 65 FR 1950
technique8
1.3 mg/L)
NSF action level.
gallium 7440-55-3 0.01 0.01 — —
hafnium 7440-58-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
uranium 7440-61-1 — —
(20 pCi/L) (2 pCi/L) Issue date: 2019-05
vanadium 7440-62-2 0.03 0.003 — NSF action level. Issue date: 2000-02-11 —
yttrium 7440-65-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Under
NSF/ANSI/CAN 60,
direct additives
containing zinc as an
NSF action level.
zinc 7440-66-6 3 0.3 intentional component
(e.g., zinc
orthophosphate) may
be evaluated at
maximum use levels
136
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
based on 2 mg/L as
zinc.
zirconium 7440-67-7 0.7 0.07 — NSF action level. Issue date: —
NSF action level.
bismuth 7440-69-9 0.4 0.04 —
propanone, 1-, 2-hydroxy-
7473-98-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-methyl-1-phenyl-
NSF action level.
isobornyl methacrylate 7534-94-3 0.03 0.003 0.4 —
NSF action level.
iodine 7553-56-2 0.3 0.1 0.3 —
aconitic acid, tributyl ester 7568-58-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
chloromethyl p-tolyl sulfone 7569-26-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,7-dimethylxanthone 7573-15-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 94021-23-5,
CAS# 2235-43-0, and
CAS# 15505-05-2.
2-ethylhexyl
7659-86-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
mercaptoacetate
ammonia 7664-41-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
WQA action level.
supraene 7683-64-9 0.01 0.01 — —
trans-hexahydrophthalide 7702-72-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
10 1 10 NSF action level. Detections shall be
bromine 7726-95-6
(total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2011-09-21 summed with the
137
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
following chemical:
CAS# 24959-67-9.
WQA action level.
1,2-dimethoxypropane 7778-85-0 0.01 0.01 — —
40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.62.
selenium 7782-49-2 0.05 0.005 — Health Canada MAC. —
Issue date: 2014-03
Pass/fail values
represent the
chlorine (free as Cl2) 7782-50-5 4 0.4 — 40 CFR § 141.65 maximum residual
disinfectant level
(MRDL).
NSF action level.
cerium chloride 7790-86-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 —
toxaphene 8001-35-2 0.003 0.0003 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 139-08-2,
alkyl dimethylbenzyl 3 0.3 5 NSF action level. CAS# 53516-76-0,
8001-54-5
CAS# 63449-41-2,
CAS# 68391-01-5,
CAS# 68424-85-1, and
CAS# 85409-22-9.
Alternate
mineral oil (high viscosity, NSF action level.
8012-95-1 700 70 700 CAS #8042-47-5
≥ 11 centistokes) External peer review date: 2004-04-24
(white).
mineral oil (medium and Alternate
NSF action level.
low viscosity Class I, 8012-95-1 700 70 700 CAS #8042-47-5
8.5 to 11 centistokes) (white).
138
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
NSF action level.
low viscosity Class II, 8012-95-1 40 4 40 CAS #8042-47-5
7.0 to 8.5 centistokes) (white).
NSF action level.
low viscosity Class III, 8012-95-1 1 0.1 2 CAS #8042-47-5
3.0 to 7.0 centistokes) (white).
polyoxyethylene (6) lauryl
9002-92-0 — 0.05 — NSF action level. Issue date: 1996-12-28 —
ether
Detections shall be
summed with the
polyoxyethylene (9) octyl 0.05
9002-93-1 — — NSF action level. Issue date: 1996-12-28 following chemicals:
phenol (total)
polyoxyethylene
(40) octyl phenol.
Detections shall be
summed with the
polyoxyethylene (40) octyl 0.05
9002-93-1 — — NSF action level. Issue date: 1996-12-28 following chemicals:
phenol (total)
polyoxyethylene
(9) octyl phenol.
NSF action level.
PEG stearyl ether 9005-00-9 0.01 0.01 — —
Detections shall be
summed with the
polyoxyethylene sorbitan 1 NSF action level. following chemicals:
9005-64-5 — —
monolaurate (total) Issue date: 1997-01 CAS# 9005-65-6,
CAS# 9005-66-7, and
CAS# 9005-67-8.
Detections shall be
summed with the
9005-65-6 — —
monooleate (total) Issue date: 1997-01 CAS# 9005-64-5,
CAS# 9005-66-7, and
CAS# 9005-67-8.
polyoxyethylene sorbitan 1 NSF action level. Detections shall be
9005-66-7 — —
monopalmitate (total) Issue date: 1997-01 summed with the
139
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
CAS# 9005-64-5,
CAS# 9005-65-6, and
CAS# 9005-67-8.
Detections shall be
summed with the
9005-67-8 — —
monosteartate (total) Issue date: 1997-01 CAS# 9005-64-5,
CAS# 9005-65-6, and
CAS# 9005-66-7.
polyoxyethylene sorbitan NSF action level.
9005-71-4 — 0.05 — —
tristearate Issue date: 1996-12
polyoxyethylene (6)
dodecyl phenol
polyoxyethylene (9)
dodecyl phenol
polyoxyethylene (40)
dodecyl phenol
Detections of each
specified
polyoxyethylene (4, 9, 15, 0.05 polyoxyethylene length
9016-45-9 — — NSF action level. Issue date: 1996-12-28
30, or 40) nonyl phenol (total) shall be summed and
not exceed the
specified criteria.
Detections of each
specified
polyoxyethylene (6 or 20) 0.01 polyoxyethylene length
9016-45-9 — — NSF action level. Issue date: 1996-12-28
nonyl phenol (total) shall be summed and
not exceed the
specified criteria.
oxirane, methyl, polymer
9038-95-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
and oxibane, butyl ether
140
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
poly(oxy(methyl-1,2-
ethanediyl)), alpha-2- 9042-19-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
propenyl-omega-hydroxy-
sodium
9084-06-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
polynaphthalenesulfonate
Detections shall be
hydrazine sulfate 10034-93-2 —
CAS# 302-01-2.
heptanol, 2-propyl-1- 10042-59-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Pass/fail values
represent the
chlorine dioxide (as ClO2) 10049-04-4 0.8 0.8 — 40 CFR § 141.65 maximum residual
disinfectant level
(MRDL).
Detections shall be
cis-1,3-dichloropropene 10061-01-5 —
(total) (total) Agency consensus date: 2000-04-20 following chemical:
CAS# 10061-02-6.
Detections shall be
trans-1,3-dichloropropene 10061-02-6 —
(total) (total) Agency consensus date: 2000-04-20 following chemical:
CAS# 10061-01-5.
Detections shall be
summed with the
0.00008 0.000008 WQA actional level. following chemicals:
lanthanum chloride 10099-58-8 —
CAS# 10099-59-9, and
CAS# 10099-60-2.
Detections shall be
0.00008 0.000008 WQA actional level. summed with the
lanthanum nitrate 10099-59-9 —
(total as La) (total as La) External peer review date: 2017-10-17 following chemicals:
CAS# 917-70-4,
141
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
CAS# 10099-58-8, and
CAS# 10099-60-2.
Detections shall be
summed with the
0.00008 0.000008 WQA actional level. following chemicals:
lanthanum sulfate 10099-60-2 —
CAS# 10099-58-8, and
CAS# 10099-59-9.
2,2-dibromo-3-nitrilo- NSF action level.
10222-01-2 0.4 0.09 2 —
propionamide External peer review date: 2004-04-20
n-hexyl-butanamide 10264-17-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N-butyl-N,4-dimethyl- WQA action level.
10285-91-3 0.01 0.01 — —
benzenesulfonamide JPRSC consensus date: 2014-08-13
1-[2-(dimethylamino)
10336-55-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenyl]-ethanone
(1-methyl-3-butenyl)-
10340-49-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene
DL-camphorquinone 10373-78-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexadiene-1-one,
2,6-di-tert-butyl-4- 10396-80-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hydroxy-4-methyl-2,5-
chloroethane, 1-butoxy-2- 10503-96-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
N-nitroso-N- US EPA 10-5/10-6 cancer risk levels.
10595-95-6 0.00003 0.000003 — —
methylethylamine Verification date: 2016-12-01
Pass/fail values
represent the
chloramines (total as Cl2) 10599-90-3 4 0.4 — 40 CFR § 141.65 maximum residual
disinfectant level
(MRDL).
methyltetrahydrophthalic 0.05 0.05 0.05 NSF action level. Detections shall be
11070-44-3
anhydride (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2012-10-17 summed with the
142
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
CAS# 85-42-7.
CAS# 85-43-8,
CAS# 25134-21-8, and
CAS# 25550-51-0.
gross alpha particle activity 12587-46-1 15 pCi/L 1.5 pCi/L — 40 CFR § 141.15 —
beta particle and photon
12587-47-2 4 mrem/y 0.4 mrem/y — 40 CFR § 141.16 —
activity
cresol, 2-tert-butyl-m- 13037-79-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Health Canada MAC.
terbufos 13071-79-9 0.001 0.0001 — —
Issue date: 1987-01
Detections shall be
summed with other
3-methyl-1,1-diphenylurea 13114-72-2
class-based
evaluation level.
1-octene, 6-methyl- 13151-10-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,2’-azobis
13217-66-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(2-amidinopropane)
2,5-diethylpyrazine 13238-84-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
WQA action level.
1-pentadecene 13360-61-7 0.01 0.01 — —
Detections shall be
90 9 90
NSF action level. summed with the
titanium dioxide 13463-67-7 (total (total (total
External peer review date: 2003-09-04 following chemical:
as Ti) as Ti) as Ti)
CAS# 7440-32-6.
docosane, 11-butyl- 13475-76-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
13481-95-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl ester
143
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
1-chloro-4-
(1-chloroethenyl)- 13547-06-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexene
1-chloro-5-
(1-chloroethenyl)- 13547-07-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexene
sodium ferrocyanide 13601-19-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 76025-08-6,
tris(1-chloro-2-propyl) 0.4 0.04 2 NSF action level.
13674-84-5 CAS# 76649-15-5,
phosphate (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2017-04-19
CAS# 6145-73-9,
CAS# 137888-35-8,
and
CAS# 137909-40-1.
1-propene, 3-(2-(2-
13752-97-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methoxyethoxy)ethoxy)-
2-butanamine 13952-84-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
5 pCi/L 0.5 pCi/L summed with the
radium 226 13982-63-3 — 40 CFR § 141.15
(total) (total) following chemical:
CAS# 15262-20-1.
pentanedioic acid,
2-methyl-, 1,5-dimethyl 14035-94-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ester
WQA action level.
N,N-dibutylbutanamide 14287-95-7 0.2 0.02 3 —
3-methyl-2-biphenylamine 14294-33-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzylbenzenecarbo-
14309-89-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
thiamide
D-acetone glycerol 14347-78-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
144
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
Detections shall be
summed with the
trans-cinnamaldehyde 14371-10-9 — CAS# 104-54-1,
CAS# 104-55-2,
CAS# 140-10-3, and
CAS# 621-82-9.
decanamide, N,N-dimethyl- 14433-76-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-methoxythiazole 14542-13-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
fenchyl alcohol, alpha- 14575-74-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
nitrate (as N) 14797-55-8 10 1 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.62 —
nitrate + nitrite (both as N) 14797-55-8 10 1 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.62 —
nitrite (as N) 14797-65-0 1 0.1 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.62 —
Compliance to SPACs
based on US State or
other regulatory levels
US EPA Interim Health Advisory.
perchlorate 14797-73-0 0.015 0.005 — may be demonstrated
Issue Date: 2008
by establishing the
SPAC as 1/3 of the
regulatory level.
(E)-4-octene 14850-23-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Health Canada MAC.
chlorate 14866-68-3 1 0.3 — —
Issue date: 2008-06
chlorite 14998-27-7 1 0.1 — 40 CFR § 141.64 —
furan, tetrahydro-2,2,5,5-
15045-43-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tetramethyl-
4-hydroxy-3-
15174-69-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylbenzaldehyde
benzeneacetic acid,
15206-55-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
alpha-oxo-, methyl ester
145
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
Detections shall be
5 pCi/L 0.5 pCi/L summed with the
radium 228 15262-20-1 — 40 CFR § 141.15
(total) (total) following chemical:
CAS# 13982-63-3.
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 7611-50-9,
CAS# 94021-23-5, and
CAS# 2235-43-0.
2-methyl-1,5-
15520-10-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pentanediamine
bromate 15541-45-4 0.010 0.0033 — 40 CFR § 141.64 —
trimethylolpropane NSF action level.
15625-89-5 0.4 0.04 0.9 —
triacrylate External peer review date: 2019-10-22
cis-1,2-
15753-50-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexanedimethanol
dimethylbenzaldehyde, 2,4- 15764-16-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzyltriphenylphospho-
15853-35-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
nium
octane, 2,2-dimethyl- 15869-87-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
alachlor 15972-60-8 0.002 0.0002 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
thiocyanic acid,
15973-81-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
o-anilinophenyl ester
1,4-thoxane 15980-15-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-bromo-3-chloro-5,5- NSF action level.
16079-88-2 50 9 — —
norbornene,
16219-75-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
5-ethylidene-2-
146
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
2,4-dimethylbenzyl alcohol 16308-92-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-methyl-4-
16327-48-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phosphorinanone
erythrosine 16423-68-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
bromophenylbenzene
16468-97-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
sulfonamide
1,2,3,4,6,8-alpha-
hexahydro-1-isopropyl- 16728-99-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4,7-dimethylnaphthalene
hexane, 2,3,4-trimethyl 16747-26-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Operational control
range of 0.6 mg/L to
1.0 mg/L
1.0 US CDC Recommended Operational recommended to meet
(direct Control Range for Optimal Fluoride target level of 0.7 mg/L
fluoride 16984-48-8 1.0 additive) — Concentration in Community Water for prevention of tooth
0.1 Systems, 83 Fed Reg 32666-32667 decay, and to reduce
(contaminant) (July, 2018) the risk of dental
fluorosis.
83 Fed Reg 32666-
32667 (July, 2018)
Detections shall be
summed with the
1,6,11,16- 3 0.4 3 NSF action level. following chemicals:
17043-02-6
tetraoxacycloeicosane (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2002-10-04 CAS# 295-63-6,
CAS# 56890-57-4, and
CAS# 64001-05-4.
NSF action level.
chlorosulfamic acid 17172-27-9 0.01 0.01 0.01 —
4-acetamidobenzaldehyde
n-(4-methoxyphenyl) 17224-12-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
imine
147
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
Detections shall be
summed with other
3,3'-(4-methylbenzene-1,3- 0.05 0.05 0.8 NSF action level. chemicals under the
17526-94-2
diyl)bis(1,1-dimethylurea) (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2017-10-17 alkyl-substituted urea
class-based
evaluation level.
NSF action level.
diethyl 2-ethoxysuccinate 17596-10-0 2 0.2 2 —
benzene, 2-ethoxyethenyl- 17655-74-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-(1-indanyliden)indan 17666-94-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tert-octyl isothiocyanate 17701-76-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzenemethanol,
17849-38-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-chloro-
2(3H)-benzoxazolimine
18034-93-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-methyl-
phenol, o-(alpha, alpha-
18168-40-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethylbenzyl)-
tetraethyleneglycol di- WQA action level.
18268-70-7 0.01 0.01 — —
(2-ethylhexoate) JPRSC consensus date: 2019-01-08
1-methoxy-4-(1-methyl-2-
18272-83-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
propenyl)-benzene
ethanedioic acid,
18294-04-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
bis(trimethylsilyl)ester
hexadecanoic acid,
(2,2-dimethyl-1,3-
18418-21-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dioxolan-4-yl) methyl
ester
1-nonadecene 18435-45-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
octadien-3-ol,
18479-54-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3,7-dimethyl-4,6-
spiro-
18501-56-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
[bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-
148
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
2,2’-[1,3]-dioxolane]-3-
one, 1,7,7-trimethyl-
chromium VI 18540-29-9 0.02 0.002 — —
propenone, (dihydroxy
18956-15-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methoxyphenyl) phenyl-
Detections shall be
summed with other
1,1,3-triethylurea 19006-59-8
class-based
evaluation level.
hexamethylenebisguanidin
19010-47-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
e
phosphonic acid,
19047-85-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dioctadecyl ester
benzimidazolone, 4-methyl- 19190-68-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,2,3,7,8,9-hexachloro-
dibenzo-p-dioxin
NSF action level.
methyl m-hydroxybenzoate 19438-10-9 0.01 0.01 — —
1,3-dioxolane,
2,2-dipropanoic acid, 19719-88-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
diethyl ester
benzoxazole, N-methyl-2- 19776-98-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3,3-dimethyl-2-pentanol 19781-24-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4,4’-methylenebis NSF action level.
19900-69-7 0.05 0.05 0.05 —
(2,6-diisopropylaniline) External peer review date: 2009-10-29
tau-muurolol 19912-62-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
149
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
phenylenediamine,
N,N-bis(1,3-
19929-72-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethylbutyl)-N’-phenyl-
p-
glycidyl 2,2,3,3,4,4,5,5- NSF action level.
19932-27-5 0.0008 0.00008 0.0008 —
octafluoropentyl ether External peer review date: 2015-10-21
3-oxazolidine ethanol 20073-50-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with the
3-(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-
0.06 0.006 0.8 NSF action level. following chemicals:
hydroxyphenyl) propionic 20170-32-5
acid
CAS# 82304-66-3, and
CAS# 138345-00-3.
Detections shall be
summed with the
acid), xNa salt CAS# 7611-50-9,
CAS# 94021-23-5,
CAS# 2235-43-0, and
CAS# 15505-05-2.
hexen-2-one, 3-,
20685-46-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3,4-dimethyl-
NSF action level.
4-formylbenzophenone 20912-50-9 0.01 0.01 0.01 —
pentachlorobenzonitrile 20925-85-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3,5-pyridinedicarboxylic
acid, 1,4-dihydro-4-
20970-65-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl-2,6-diphenyl
diethyl ester
Health Canada MAC
metribuzin 21087-64-9 0.08 0.008 — —
Issue date: 1986-02
150
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
tonalid 21145-77-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-propanol,
21460-36-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-(2-propenyloxy)-
2-(thiocyanomethylthio)
21564-17-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzothiazole
hedycaryol 21657-90-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Health Canada MAC.
cyanazine 21725-46-2 0.01 0.001 — —
Issue date: 1986-02
3,3-dimethoxy-2-butanone 21983-72-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethanone, 1-[4-
22072-50-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(methoxymethyl)phenyl]-
methyl-1 bicyclo[4.2.0]octa-
22250-74-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,3,5-triene, 3-
tetradecanoic acid,
22413-00-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
eicosylester
octadien-3-ol,
22460-59-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,6-dimethyl-1,7-
trans-2,4-diphenyl-4-
22768-22-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl-2-pentene
Health Canada MAC.
bendiocarb 22781-23-3 0.04 0.004 — —
Issue date: 1986-02
methyl mercury 22967-92-6 0.0007 0.00007 — —
oxamyl (vydate) 23135-22-0 0.2 0.02 — 40 CFR § 141.60, 40 CFR § 141.61 —
hydroxy (hydroxymethyl)
23470-00-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethyl hexadecanoate
pyridine,
1,2,3,6-tetrahydro- 23513-16-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,2,4,6-tetramethyl-, cis-
alpha-amorphene 23515-88-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
151
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
cyanovaleric acid 23886-52-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,1-(3,3-dimethyl-1-
23586-64-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butenylidene)bisbenzene
ethyl-4-ethoxybenzoate 23676-09-7 0.05 0.05 — NSF action level. Issue date: 1999-11-17 —
5-methyl-6,7-dihydro-(5H)-
23747-48-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclopentapyrazine
pentaoxahexadecanol 23778-52-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethanediamide,
N-(2-ethoxyphenyl)-N’-(2- 23949-66-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethylphenyl)-
cyclopentanol, 2-methyl- 24070-77-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pyrido(3,2-d) pyrimidin-4
24410-22-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(3d)-one
aniline, 2-ethyl-6-methyl- 24549-06-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-methyl-1-indanone 24644-78-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acetophenone,
24650-42-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,2-dimethoxy-2-phenyl-
cis-3,3,5-trimethylcyclo-
24691-16-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hexyl acetate
Detections shall be
10 1 10 NSF action level. summed with the
bromide 24959-67-9
CAS# 7726-95-6.
3-formylbenzonitrile 24964-64-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
styrene, methyl-
25013-15-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(mixed isomers)
Detections shall be
summed with the
methyl nadic anhydride 25134-21-8 following chemicals:
CAS# 85-42-7,
CAS# 85-43-8,
152
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
CAS# 11070-44-3, and
CAS# 25550-51-0.
decadien-1-al, trans,trans-
25152-84-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,4-
The listed criteria are
applicable to all
isomers of nonyl
phenol. Due to the
significant number of
CAS# s associated
with potential isomers,
nonyl phenol 0.07 0.007 0.3 NSF action level.
25154-52-3 only CAS# 25154-52-3
(mixed isomers) (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2015-05-05
and CAS# 84852-15-3
are included in this
table. All isomer
detections shall be
summed and
compared to the listed
criteria.
Detections shall be
summed with the
2,2,4-trimethyl-1,3- CAS# 77-68-9,
pentanediol 25265-77-4 CAS# 144-19-4,
monoisobytyrate CAS# 6846-50-0,
CAS# 74367-33-2,
CAS# 74367-34-3, and
CAS# 74381-40-1.
NSF action level.
polyethylene glycol 25322-68-3 20 2 20 —
ethylphenol 25429-37-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
153
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
Detections shall be
summed with the
methylhexahydrophthalic 0.05 0.05 0.05 NSF action level.
25550-51-0 CAS# 85-42-7,
CAS# 85-43-8,
CAS# 11070-44-3, and
CAS# 25134-21-8.
benzofuran, methyl- 25586-38-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
poly(dimethyl diallyl
NSF action level.
ammonium chloride) 26062-79-3 5 2 5 —
(polyDADMAC)
methylisothiazolinone
26172-54-3 0.003 0.003 0.01 TOE —
hydrochloride
methylchloroisothiazolinone 26172-55-4 0.003 0.003 0.01 TOE —
tris(3-chloropropyl)
26248-87-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phosphate
ethan-1-one,
26444-19-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-(methylphenyl)-
Pass/fail criteria only
for specifed mixture
containing 80%
2,4-toluene
NSF action level.
toluene diisocyanate 26471-62-5 0.008 0.0008 — diisocyanate
Issue date: 1999-06
(CAS# 584-84-9)
and 20% 2,6-toluene
diisocyanate
(CAS# 91-08-7).
trichlorotrifluoroethane 26523-64-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2H,8H-benzo[1,2-b:5,4-
b’]dipyran-10-propanol,
26535-37-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
5-methoxy-2,2,8,8-
tetramethyl-
dioctyldiphenylamine 26603-23-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
154
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
isooctanol 26952-21-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzenemethanol,
27129-87-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3,5-dimethyl
naphthalene, ethyl 27138-19-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dipropylene glycol
27138-31-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dibenzoate
phenol,
27193-28-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl)
4,4'-bis(2-
27344-41-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
sulfostyryl)biphenyl
propenoic acid,
2-methyl-2-, polymer with
27401-06-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
octadecyl-2-methyl-2-
propenoate
cyclohexenecarbonitrile 27456-25-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
diethylene glycol
monomethacrylate 27598-43-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
homopolymer
ammonium chloride,
octadecyldimethyl{3- 27668-52-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(trimethoxysilyl)propyl}
(5α,9α,10β)-kauran-16-ol 27898-42-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-ethyl-3-(phenylmethyl)-
28122-24-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene
2,6-dimethyl-1-
28122-29-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(phenylmethyl)-benzene
benzothiazole, ethylamino- 28291-69-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzothiazole,
28291-75-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-(cyclohexylamino)-
IAPMO action level.
diisononyl phthalate 28553-12-0 0.8 0.08 — —
155
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
cyclohexanone,
28746-99-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-(1-hydroxycyclohexyl)-
poly(hexamethylene) NSF action level.
28757-47-3 2 0.7 3 —
biguanide External peer review date. 2018-10-24
naphthalene, dimethyl- 28804-88-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
formylmethylenetriphenyl-
28900-91-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phosphorane
methylindene 29036-25-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hydroxyethylidene
diphosphonic acid, 29329-71-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
sodium salt
2-methyl-5-propylpyrazine 29461-03-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclooctadiene, dichloro- 29480-42-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pyridine, trimethyl- 29611-84-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cadina-1,4-diene 29837-12-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
di-propylene glycol n-butyl NSF action level.
29911-28-2 2 0.2 30 —
ether External peer review date: 2002-10-03
dioxolane-1,3, 4-ethyl 29921-38-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclopentane, trimethyl 30498-64-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenylcyclohexene 31017-40-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dodecane, 2,6,11-trimethyl- 31295-56-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with other
cyclohexylurea, dimethyl- 31468-12-9
class-based
evaluation level.
binaphthyl sulfone 32390-26-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
bromophenol 32762-51-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
156
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
octadecanoic acid,
(2,2-dimethyl-1,3-
32852-69-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dioxolan-4-yl) methyl
ester
ethane,
1-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-2- 33675-75-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenyl-
benzenediamine,
33786-89-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
5-chloro-1,3-
4-butoxy-1-butene 34061-76-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dihydrofuran, 4-methyl-2,3- 34314-83-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
valeronitrile, 2,4-dimethyl- 34372-09-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
5,6,7,8-
34413-35-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tetrahydrochinoxaline
3,5-dichlorophenyl
34893-92-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
isocyanate
methylthioacetonitrile 35120-10-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
35447-99-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trien-7-ol
1,2,3,4,6,7,8-hepta-
benzoic acid,
mixed isomers 35915-19-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(2,4- or 2,5-dichloro-)
aminopiperidine,
36768-62-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-
phenol, 2,4-dibromo-,
36914-79-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acetate
NSF action level.
bioban P-1487 37304-88-4 0.4 0.04 2 —
157
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
bisphenol A
bis(polypropylene glycol) 37353-75-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ether
oxamide, di-tert-butyl- 37486-48-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 58705-51-4,
octylphenoxypentaethoxy- 0.1 0.01 0.5 NSF action level.
37809-81-7 CAS# 49796-75-0,
ethanol, tert- (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2018-04-11
CAS# 38621-31-7,
CAS# 2315-62-0,
CAS# 2315-63-1, and
CAS# 2315-64-2.
4-ethyl-1-oxide-quinazoline 37920-75-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butanetricarboxylic acid,
37971-36-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-phosphono-, 1,2,4-
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 58705-51-4,
octaphenyl pentaethylene 0.1 0.01 0.5 NSF action level.
38621-31-7 CAS# 49796-75-0,
glycol ether, tert- (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2018-04-11
CAS# 37809-81-7,
CAS# 2315-62-0,
CAS# 2315-63-1, and
CAS# 2315-64-2.
Detections shall be
summed with other
urea, pentyl- 38869-91-9
class-based
evaluation level.
1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9-
octachlorodibenzofuran
158
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
dibenzo-p-dioxin
lanthanum hydroxide 39377-54-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,3-dichloro-2-
39920-37-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
isocyanatobenzene
methyl, 4-acetyl-3-
39971-36-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methoxybenzoate
1,2,3,7,8-penta-
40321-76-4 0.00000003 0.000000003 — US EPA toxic equivalency factor: 1 —
n-ethyl-3-methoxyaniline 41115-30-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,2-dichloro-3-
41195-90-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
isocyanatobenzene
phenoxypropanol, 1- (or 2-) 41593-38-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
propane, 1,1-dimethoxy-2-
41632-89-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl
dihydrodicyclopentadienol 42554-02-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tripropylene glycol NSF action level.
42978-66-5 0.08 0.008 1 —
diacrylate External peer review date: 2015-05-06
2-propene-1-amine,
44898-60-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
n,n-(1-methylethyl)-
propanaminium chloride,
N,N,N-trimethyl-3-((1- 45021-77-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
oxo-2-propenyl)amino)-1-
3,3,4-trimethyldecane 49622-18-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with the
ethanol, 2-[2-[2-[2[(1,1,3,3- following chemicals:
tetramethylbutyl)phenoxy 49796-75-0 CAS# 58705-51-4,
]ethoxy]ethoxy]- CAS# 38621-31-7,
CAS# 37809-81-7,
CAS# 2315-62-0,
159
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
CAS# 2315-63-1, and
CAS# 2315-64-2.
tetrahydrofuran, diphenyl- 50637-09-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trimethylcyclohexanone 50874-76-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,3,7,8-
tetrachlorodibenzofuran
Health Canada MAC.
metolachlor 51218-45-2 0.05 0.005 — —
Issue date: 1986-02
Health Canada MAC.
diclofop-methyl 51338-27-3 0.009 0.0009 — —
Issue date: 1987-03
1-tert-butoxy-2-
51422-54-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethoxyethane
phenol, (phenylethyl)- 51937-33-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
52355-31-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl ester
decanedioic acid,
bis(2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4- 52829-07-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
piperidinyl)-
hexen-2-one,
53252-21-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-, 3,4-dimethyl-
NSF action level.
di(2-propylheptyl) phthalate 53306-54-0 0.4 0.04 2 —
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 139-08-2,
alkyl (C12-C18)
3 0.3 5 NSF action level. CAS# 8001-54-5,
dimethylbenzyl 53516-76-0
ammonium chloride
CAS# 63449-41-2,
CAS# 68391-01-5,
CAS# 68424-85-1, and
CAS# 85409-22-9.
160
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
n-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)-n-
53927-61-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl-benzenamine
2,5-dimethylbenzyl alcohol 53957-33-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2H-pyranmethanol,
54004-46-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tetrahydro-2,5-dimethyl
benzene,
54120-62-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethyl-1,2,4-trimethyl-
1-(1-methoxyethoxy)-3- WQA action level.
54340-97-5 0.05 0.005 — —
hexene JPRSC consensus date: 2016-02-10
1-(2-methyl-1-pyrrolo(2,1,5-
54398-68-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Cd)-indolizinyl)ethanone
4,6,8-trimethyl-1-nonene 54410-98-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethanone, 1-(4-(1-hydroxy-
54549-72-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-methylethyl)phenyl)-
ethanol, 2-(4-(1-
54576-35-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylethyl)phenoxy)-
methylcarbamate,
54644-60-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl N-butyl-N-
2-furanmethanol,
tetrahydro-5-methyl, 54774-28-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trans-
2H-pyrano[2,3f]isoquinolin-
54852-71-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-one
1,1’-(1,2-dimethyl-1,2-
ethanediyl)bis- 54889-87-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexane
benzeneacetic acid,
α-(acetyloxy)-α-methyl- 55012-78-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ester
3,5-dicyclohexyl-4-hydroxy-
55125-23-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzoic acid methyl ester
1,5-pentanediol,
55162-82-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
monobenzoate
161
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
pyrrolidinone, 1-decyl-2- 55257-88-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1,4-dimethyl-2-octadecyl-
55282-02-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cyclohexane
1-hexadecyl-2,3-dihydro-
55334-29-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1H-indene
55337-80-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trene, 7-methyl-
1H-Indene-4-methanol,
55591-09-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,3-dihydro-1,1-dimethyl-
1,2,3,4,7,8,9-hepta-
chlorodibenzofuran
6,7-diethyl-1,2,3,4-
tetrahydro-1,2,3,4- 55741-10-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tetramethyl-
n-(3-butenyl)dimethylamine 55831-89-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-propanol, 1-[1-methyl-2-
55956-25-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(2-propenyloxy)ethoxy]-
chloro-2-methyl-3(2H)-
isothiazolone with 2-
55965-84-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl-3(2H)-
isothiazolone
3-ethyl-4-phenyl-2(3H)-
55976-02-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
thiazolethione
1,3-dimethoxy-5,7-
56008-53-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dihydrobenz[c,e]oxepine
benzene,1,1’-[(1-
propenylthio)methylene] 56195-65-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
bis-, (E)-
benzene, 1,1’-[(1-
propenylthio)methylene] 56195-66-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
bis-, (Z)-
162
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
2-(2-(2-
mercaptoethoxy)ethoxy)- 56282-36-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethanol
diazacyclotetradecane-2,9-
56403-09-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dione, 1,8-
isoindole, 2H-, 4,7-dione 56460-94-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(2-phenyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)
methyl ester 56599-43-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
octadecanoic acid
4,4,5-trimethyl-2-
56599-79-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pentadecyl-1,3-dioxolane
Detections shall be
summed with the
1,6,11,16,21-
3 0.4 3 NSF action level. following chemicals:
pentaoxacyclopenta- 56890-57-4
cosane
CAS# 17043-02-6, and
CAS# 64001-05-4.
2,3,4,7,8- penta-
chlorodibenzofuran
1,2,3,7,8-penta-
chlorodibenzofuran
dibenzofuran
6-oxabicyclo[3.2.1]octan-7-
one, 1,5-dimethyl-8-[2-[3-
57119-17-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(1-methylethyl)phenyl]
ethyl]-, (1R-syn)-
n-ethyl-n,4-
dimethylbenzene- 57186-68-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
sulfonamide
1-phenanthrenecarboxylic
57345-30-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acid
163
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
57396-98-2 0.003 0.0003 — TOE —
methyl ester
dibenzo-p-dioxin
cresol, alpha-ethoxy-p- 57726-26-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,2-dimethyl-bis(1-
methylpropyl)ester 57923-28-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butanedioic acid
Detections shall be
summed with the
(ethoxymethoxy) 0.05 0.05 4 NSF action level.
58567-11-6 following chemicals:
cyclododecane (total) (total) (total)) External peer review date: 2014-04-22
CAS# 830-13-7 and
CAS# 1724-39-6.
Detections shall be
summed with the
ethanol, 2-[2-[2-[(1,1,3,3- CAS# 49796-75-0,
tetramethylbutyl)phenoxy 58705-51-4 CAS# 38621-31-7,
]ethoxy]ethoxy]- CAS# 37809-81-7,
CAS# 2315-62-0,
CAS# 2315-63-1, and
CAS# 2315-64-2.
1,3,6,8-pyrenetetrasulfonic
59572-10-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acid, tetrasodium salt
1-methoxy-2-t-butyl-6-
60772-80-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylbenzene
dibenzofuran
3-butene-1-amine, n-ethyl-
61308-10-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
n-methyl-
castor oil, hydrogenated,
61788-85-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethoxylated
164
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 139-08-2,
alkyl dimethylbenzyl 3 0.3 5 NSF action level. CAS# 8001-54-5,
61789-71-7
CAS# 63449-41-2,
CAS# 68391-01-5,
CAS# 68424-85-1, and
CAS# 85409-22-9.
quaternary ammonium,
61789-80-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ditallow dimethyl chloride
amines, coco alkyl,
61791-14-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethoxylated
soya alkylamines,
61791-24-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethoxylated
a-methyl-a-(1-methyl-2-
propenyl)- 61967-11-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzenemethanol
octane, 2,2,6-trimethyl 62016-28-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,6,7-trimethyl decane 62108-25-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,4,6-trimethyl-decane 62108-27-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenyl (1-phenyl-2-propyl)
62252-49-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
thioether
polydimethylsiloxane 63148-62-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
quinoline, 3,4-dihydro-
63177-93-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2,4,4-trimethyl-
benzothiazole, 2-methoxy- 63321-86-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
alkyl (C8-C18)
3 0.3 5 NSF action level. summed with the
(total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2014-10-21 following chemicals:
ammonium chloride
CAS# 139-08-2,
165
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
CAS# 8001-54-5,
CAS# 53516-76-0,
CAS# 61789-71-7,
CAS# 68391-01-5,
CAS# 68424-85-1, and
CAS# 85409-22-9.
pyridine, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-
63867-76-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with the
1,6,11,16,21,26- 3 0.4 3 NSF action level. following chemicals:
64001-05-4
hexaoxacyclotriacontane (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2002-10-04 CAS# 295-63-6,
CAS# 17043-02-6, and
CAS# 56890-57-4.
3-methyl-3-(2-methyl-3-
64042-54-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzofuranyl)phthalide
diphenylamine,
64092-29-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-(diisopropylamino)
3-methyl-pyrrolo (1,2-A)
64608-61-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
pyrazine
Class-based evaluation
level in which all
high flash aromatic 0.2 0.02 1 NSF action level.
64742-95-6 detected C8-C10
naphtha (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2016-10-27
aromatic hydrocarbons
should be summed.
acetamidoacetaldehyde 64790-08-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzalazine 64896-26-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene,
(2-methoxy-1- 65738-46-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylethyl)-
benzoic acid, 2,4,6-tris(1,1-
66415-27-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethylethyl)-
166
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
benzaldehyde,
66949-23-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tert-butylmethyl-
1,2,3,4,6,7,8-hepta-
chlorodibenzofuran
castor oil, sulfated, sodium
68187-76-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
salt
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 139-08-2,
N-alkyl (C12-C18)
ammonium chloride
CAS# 61789-71-7,
CAS# 63449-41-2,
CAS# 68424-85-1, and
CAS# 85409-22-9.
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 139-08-2,
alkyl (C12-C16)
ammonium chloride
CAS# 61789-71-7,
CAS# 63449-41-2,
CAS# 68391-01-5, and
CAS# 85409-22-9.
Detections shall be
diethyltoluenediamine, 0.0006 0.00006 0.0006 NSF action level. summed with the
68479-98-1
mixed isomers (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2010-10-06 following chemical:
CAS# 75389-89-8.
alkenes, C6-10,
hydroformylation 68526-82-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
products, high boiling
167
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
alcohols, C12-C15,
68551-13-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ethoxylated propoxylated
disodium
68604-71-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
cocoamphodiproprionate
benzene, (1-methoxy-4-
68705-86-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methyl-3-pentenyl-
dimethyl ditallow
68783-78-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ammonium chloride
PEG/PPG-15/15
68937-55-3 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethicone
alpha-hydro-
omegahydroxypoly(dimet 70131-67-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hylsiloxane)
1,3,7,7-tetramethyl-2,11-
dioxa-3,5-
70412-52-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
bicyclo(4.4.1)undecadien
-10-one
dibenzofuran
potassium
NSF action level.
peroxymonosulfate 70693-62-8 5 5 20 —
sulfate
benzenedicarboxylic acid,
1,2-, bis(2-propylpentyl) 70910-37-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ester
acrylic acid sodium
71050-62-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phosphinate polymer
3-isopropoxy-1,1,1,7,7,7-
hexamethyl-3,5,5-
71579-69-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
tris(trimethylsiloxy)tetrasil
oxane
168
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
dibenzofuran
poly(oxy-1,2-ethanediyl),
a-isotridecyl-w-hydroxy-, 73038-25-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phosphate
4,4-dimethyl-13α-androst-
73495-94-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
5-ene
oxononan-1-al, 4- 74327-29-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
summed with the
propanoic acid, 2-methyl-,
CAS# 77-68-9,
2,2-dimethyl-1-(2- 0.2 0.02 2 WQA action level.
74367-33-2 CAS# 144-19-4,
hydroxy-1- (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2016-10-26
CAS# 6846-50-0,
methylethyl)propyl ester
CAS# 25265-77-4,
CAS# 74367-34-3, and
CAS# 74381-40-1.
Detections shall be
summed with the
propanoic acid, 2-methyl-, CAS# 77-68-9,
3-hydroxy-2,4,4- 74367-34-3 CAS# 144-19-4,
trimethylpentyl ester CAS# 6846-50-0,
CAS# 25265-77-4,
CAS# 74367-33-2, and
CAS# 74381-40-1.
Detections shall be
summed with the
propanoic acid, 2-methyl-,
1-(1,1-dimethylethyl)-2- 0.2 0.02 2 WQA action level.
74381-40-1 CAS# 77-68-9,
methyl-1, 3-propanediyl (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2016-10-26
CAS# 144-19-4,
ester
CAS# 6846-50-0,
CAS# 25265-77-4,
169
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
CAS# 74367-33-2, and
CAS# 74367-34-3.
3,3-dimethyl-1-octene 74511-51-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
nonylcyclopropane 74663-85-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
Detections shall be
diethyltoluenediamine, 0.0006 0.00006 0.0006 NSF action level. summed with the
75389-89-8
mixed isomers (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2010-10-06 following chemicals:
CAS# 68479-98-1.
benzyltriphenyl-
phosphonium, salt with
4,4’-(2,2,2-trifluoro-1-
75768-65-9 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(trifluoromethyl)
ethylidene)bis(phenol)
(1:1)
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 13674-84-5,
bis(1-chloropropan-2-yl) 0.4 0.04 2 NSF action level.
76025-08-6 CAS# 76649-15-5,
2-chloropropyl phosphate (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2017-04-19
CAS# 6145-73-9,
CAS# 137888-35-8,
and
CAS# 137909-40-1.
1-phenyl-4,5-dimorpholino-
76458-32-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4,5-dihydroimidazole
Detections shall be
summed with the
1-chloropropan-2-yl bis(2- 0.4 0.04 2 NSF action level.
76649-15-5 CAS# 13674-84-5,
chloropropyl) phosphate (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2017-04-19
CAS# 76025-08-6,
CAS# 6145-73-9,
CAS# 137888-35-8,
170
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
and
CAS# 137909-40-1.
decane,
1-methyl-3,5,7-triaza-1-
76902-90-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
azoniatricyclo(3.3.1.1
(3,7))
3,5-di-tert-
80438-67-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butylchlorobenzene
1,2 diphenyl-1,2-hexanediol 80475-19-0 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
carbamothioic acid
dimethyl OO’-11’- 81056-07-7 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
biphenyl-22’diyl ester
Detections shall be
summed with the
oxaspirodecadienedione, 0.06 0.006 0.8 NSF action level. following chemicals:
82304-66-3
di-(t-butyl) (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2017-10-18 CAS# 6386-38-5,
CAS# 20170-32-5, and
CAS# 138345-00-3.
2-chloro-4,6-
82485-84-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dimethyoxybenzamine
propanedial,
82700-43-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
2-(phenylmethylene)-
bis(2-ethylhexyl)
NSF action level
cyclohexane-1,4- 84731-70-4 2 0.2 3 —
dicarboxylate
The listed criteria are
applicable to all
isomers of nonyl
nonyl phenol 0.07 0.007 0.3 NSF action level. phenol. Due to the
84852-15-3
(mixed isomers) (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2015-05-05 significant number of
CAS numbers
associated with
potential isomers, only
171
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
CAS# 25154-52-3 and
CAS# 84852-15-3 are
included in this table.
All isomer detections
shall be summed and
compared to the
listed criteria.
n-benzoyl-3-
85237-73-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylpiperidine
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 139-08-2,
alkyl (C12-C14)
ammonium chloride
CAS# 61789-71-7,
CAS# 63449-41-2,
CAS# 68391-01-5, and
CAS# 68424-85-1.
ethanol, 2,2'-(((methyl-1H-
benzotriazol-1- 88477-37-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
yl)methyl)imino)bis-
methylene bis(n-iso-
88990-59-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
butylbenzenamine)
naphthalenesulfonic acid,
tripropylene-, methylated, 90459-08-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
sodium salts
isoalkanes, C9-C12 90622-57-4 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
90949-18-1 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
90949-19-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
172
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
90949-20-5 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1-ethoxy-2-phenylmethyl
91404-27-2 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
benzene
ethanone,1-[4-
93205-94-8 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
(ethoxymethyl)phenyl]-
Detections shall be
summed with the
CAS# 7611-50-9,
CAS# 2235-43-0, and
CAS# 15505-05-2.
tetrathiacyclooctadecane,
1,3,10,12-tetraoxa- 99634-55-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
6,7,15,16-
benzo(b)fluorenone 99707-95-6 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenanthrene-1,2- 100578-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dicarboxylic acid 69-6
cyanobacterial toxin 101043- Health Canada MAC.
0.0015 0.00015 — —
(microcystin-LR) 37-2 Issue date: 2002-04
1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-9-propyl 101580-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
anthracene 33-0
7,8-dihydro-2,4,8,8-
102635-
tetramethyl-6H- 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
63-2
cyclohepta[b]pyrrole
3,6-heptanooxepin-4,5-
102652-
dicarbonaure- 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
08-4
dimethylester
dimethyl siloxane, hydroxy- 102782-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
term reaction with silica 80-9
173
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
2H-benz[f]isoindole-1-
carbonitrile, 103836-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
8-(dimethylamino)-2-(1,1- 41-5
dimethylethyl)-
4H-benzo[a]quinolizine-1-
carboxylic acid, 104628-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
6,7-dihydro-4-oxo-3- 87-7
phenyl-, methyl ester
trans-2,6-dimethyl-1,4- 106342-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
dioxane 05-6
benzaldehyde, 106799-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
hydroxymethoxy- 60-4
(E)-2-hydroxy-4’- 110598-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methoxystilbene 56-6
distillates (petroleum),
catalytic reformer
111163-
fractionator residue, 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
74-7
low-boiling, sulfonated,
sodium salts
ethanone,
112766-
1-[3-(methoxymethyl) 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
37-7
phenyl]-
2-phenylcyclohexane- 113215-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
carboxylic acid 84-2
3-(2-benzoylpropanoyl)-2- 116782-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
oxazolidinone 24-2
1-methylbicyclo[3,2,1] 119972-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
octane 41-7
3,3a,5,11-b-tetrahydro-5-
hydroxy-7-methoxy-5-
121638-
methyl-2H-furo[3,2- 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
14-0
b]naphtho[2,3-d]pyran-
2,6,11-trione
174
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
pyridine,
122913-
1,2,3,6-tetrahydro- 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
54-6
6-(p-t-butylphenoxy)-1,3-
125023-
dihydro-1,3- 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
52-1
diiminoisoindole
polyamino polyether
130668-
methylene phosphonic 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
24-5
acid
1H-pyrrolo[1,2-a]
134856-
benzimidazole,2,3- 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
49-8
dihydro-2-methyl-
ethyl 6,8-di-t-butyl-2-oxo-
136106-
2H-chromene-4- 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
29-1
carboxylate
Detections shall be
summed with the
phosphoric acid, 2-chloro-
137888- 0.4 0.04 2 NSF action level. CAS# 13674-84-5,
1-methylethyl bis
35-8 (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2017-04-19 CAS# 76649-15-5,
(3-chloropropyl) ester
CAS# 76649-15-5,
CAS# 6145-73-9, and
CAS# 137909-40-1.
Detections shall be
summed with the
phosphoric acid, following chemicals:
bis(2-chloro-1- 137909- 0.4 0.04 2 NSF action level. CAS# 13674-84-5,
methylethyl) 40-1 (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2017-04-19 CAS# 76649-15-5,
3-chloropropyl ester CAS# 76649-15-5,
CAS# 6145-73-9, and
CAS# 137888-35-8.
7,9-ditert-butyl-1- Detections shall be
138345- 0.06 0.006 0.8 NSF action level.
oxaspiro[4.5]deca-6,9- summed with the
00-3 (total) (total) (total) External peer review date: 2017-10-18
dien-8-one following chemicals:
175
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
CAS# 6386-38-5,
CAS# 20170-32-5, and
CAS# 82304-66-3.
propenamide, 146669-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
3-(2-methylphenyl)-2- 23-0
mono(2-ethylhexyl) 155603-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
terephthalate 50-2
pyridine,
155904-
1,2,5,6-tetrahydro- 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
89-5
acrylate phosphinate- 156105-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
sulphonate copolymer 39-4
1H-indole, 1,3-dimethyl-
156785-73-
5,6-dimethoxy-(2-(4- 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
8
methoxyphenyl))-
trisodium dicarboxymethyl 164462-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
alaninate 16-2
1,2-cyclohexane
166412-78- NSF action level.
dicarboxylic acid, 5 0.5 5 —
8 External peer review date: 2008-10-15
di-isononyl ester (DINCH)
fatty acids, C12-21 and
C18-unsaturated, 167078-06- NSF action level.
0.05 0.05 0.05 —
2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4- 0 External peer review date: 2010-05-06
piperidinyl esters
phosphino polycarboxylic 174763-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
acid 03-2
pyridine,
200561-41-
2,3,4,5-tetrahydro- 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
7
3-methyl-4-phenyl-1-hexen- 344308-86-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4-ol 7
176
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
1,2-cyclohexane
474919-59- NSF action level.
dicarboxylic acid, 5 0.5 5 —
0 External peer review date: 2008-10-15
di-isononyl ester (DINCH)
2-propenoic acid, telomer
514826-
with 2-methyl-2-(1-oxo-2- 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
28-9
propenyl)
pentanoic acid,
2,2,4-trimethyl-3- 1000140-
0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
carboxyisopropyl, 77-5
isobutyl ester
polyamino polyether
1118486-
methylenephosphonate, 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
47-7
sodium salt
poly[oxy(methyl-1,2-
ethanediyl)], α-[2-
[bis(phosphonomethyl)a
1128123-
mino]methylethyl]-ω-[2- 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
94-3
[bis(phosphonomethyl)a
mino]methylethoxy]-,
sodium salt
poly(oxy(methyl-1,2-
ethanediyl)), alpha-(2-
aminomethylethyl)-
1252600-
omega-(2- 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
17-1
aminomethylethoxy)-
phosphonomethylated,
sodium salt
butyltin compounds multiple 0.02 0.004
— NSF action level. Issue date: 1991-12-19 —
(mono- and di- only) chemicals (total) (total)
methyltin compounds multiple 0.03 0.006
— NSF action level. Issue date: 1991-12-19 —
(mono- and di- only) chemicals (total) (total)
phenol, 3,5-dibenzyl-2,4,6-
unavailable 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
trimethyl-
177
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
tri(1,2-propyleneglycol)
monoethylether
2-methyl-6,7-
(methylenedioxy)-2- unavailable 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
phenyl-2H-1-benzopyran
2-methyl-3-(2-
hydroxyphenyl)-3,4-
dihydro-1(2H)- unavailable 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
isoquinoline-4-
carboxylate
tetraethylene glycol
monobutyl monomethyl unavailable 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
ether
BHT aldehyde unavailable 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
4,4’-
bis(tetrahydrothiopyran)
2,4-dipropyl-5-ethyl-1,3-
dioxane
bicyclo[5.3.0]decane, 2-
methylene-5-(1- unavailable 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
methylvinyl)-8-methyl-
5-hydroxy-1,3,4-trimethoxy-
7-methyl-6- unavailable 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
proparagynaphthalene
(3H)indazole, 3,3-dimethyl- unavailable 0.003 0.0003 0.01 TOE —
1The references for criteria based on US primary drinking water regulations are from the US Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40 (Protection of Environment), revised as
of July 1, 2011. This document is available on-line at <www.gpo.gov/fdsys/browse/collectionCfr.action?collectionCode=CFR>. Issue dates are given for criteria based on
Health Canada guidelines. Additional information on the guidelines for these chemicals is available at <hc-sc.gc.ca/ewh-semt/pubs/water-eau/index-eng.php#tech_doc.>.
2 NSF action levels have been derived according to the requirements of Section 3.
3 Criteria are derived from the oral RfD on the US EPA IRIS database as follows:
Oral RfD (mg/kg-d) × (70 kg/2 L/d) × RSC factor = TAC (mg/L)
Where:
178
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
70 kg = assumed adult body weight
2 L/d = assumed adult water consumption
RSC factor = percentage of daily exposure to the substance represented by drinking water
(default value is 20%)
Other criteria have been used directly, unless otherwise noted.
4The IRIS verification date represents the date the oral RfD or the cancer risk assessment was peer reviewed by the US EPA. Refer to the online IRIS database for the
complete update and revision history of the IRIS files. <www.epa.gov/IRIS>
5Toxic equivalency factors (TEFs) have been established as a means to compare the potency of 2,3,7,8-tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (2,3,7,8-TCDD) to individual congeners
of polychlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins (PCDDs), polychlorinated dibenzofurans (PCDFs), and polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). The US EPA uses an approach to dioxin risk
assessment methodology in which levels of dioxins and furans are analytically determined, the concentration of each congener is multiplied by its respective TEF value,
and all the products are totaled to a single 2,3,7,8-TCDD equivalent.
Van den Berg et al., 1998. Toxic Equivalency Factors (TEFs) for PCBs, PCDDs, PCDFs for Humans and Wildlife. Environmental Health Perspectives 106(12):775:792.
US Environmental Protection Agency. 2000. Chapter 9: Toxic Equivalency Factors (TEFs) for Dioxin and Related Compounds. From Exposure and Human Health Risk
Assessment of 2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-Dioxin (TCDD) and Related Compounds. Part II: Health Assessment for 2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (TCDD) and
Related Compounds. NCEA-I-0386. September 2000. SAB Review Draft. <www.epa.gov/ncea/pdfs/dioxin/part2/fm-chap9.pdf>
6For the chemicals listed in this table under the threshold of evaluation (TOE), the evaluation criteria are 0.003 mg/L under static conditions, and 0.0003 mg/L under flowing
conditions. If any of these chemicals are detected at concentrations exceeding the TOE, toxicity data shall be reviewed to determine whether specific TAC and SPAC values
can be established, prior to using TOE to determine compliance with the Standard.
7 Effective April 17, 2013, CSA Group, NSF International, IAPMO R&T, UL, and the Water Quality Association use harmonized procedures outlined in Section 3 (previously
Annex A of NSF/ANSI/CAN 60 and NSF/ANSI/CAN 61) to develop action levels for unregulated drinking water contaminants. The Joint Peer Review Steering Committee
(JPRSC) was established by the aforementioned certifying agencies to consolidate current pass/fail criteria and to harmonize the external per review process for future risk
assessments. As part of the consolidation process, pass/fail criteria may be adopted following consensus approval of the members of the JPRSC. Sources of the pass/fail
criteria approved by the JPRSC may include risk assessments submitted by each certifying agency as well as assessments based upon authoritative agencies
(i.e., US EPA, Health Canada).
8TT = treatment technique. For NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 only, the lead and copper rule requirement that defines corrosion control optimization for large systems is based on the
difference between the 90th percentile lead level and the source water lead concentration being less that the practical quantitation level of 5 ppb (Code of Federal Regulations
40 CFR – Part 141.81(b)(3)).
9 For NSF/ANSI/CAN 61, Section 9 products other than supply stops, flexible plumbing connectors, and miscellaneous components, a Q statistic value of 5 μg or 1 μg of
lead is used as the evaluation criterion when the product is evaluated to the requirements of Section 9.5.1, or Section 9.5.1.1.1, respectively. For supply stops, flexible
plumbing connectors, and miscellaneous Section 9 devices, a Q statistic value of 3 μg or 0.5 μg of lead is used as the evaluation criterion when the product is evaluated to
the requirements of Section 9.5.1, or Section 9.5.1.1.1, respectively.
179
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Table 4.1
MCL/MAC
(mg/L)
10Limitations in analytical methods may preclude detection at levels sufficient to report these compounds at or below the SPAC. To the maximum extent possible, testing
laboratories shall seek the lowest detection limits via both sample exposure and analysis.
180
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Informative Annex 1
References for toxicology review and evaluation procedures
The information contained in this Annex is not part of this American National Standard (ANS) and
has not been processed in accordance with ANSI’s requirements for an ANS. Therefore, this Annex
may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process.
Barnes, D. G., Daston, G. P., Evans, J. S., Jarabek, A. M., Kavlock, R. J., Kimmel, C. A., Park, C., and
Spitzer, H. L. (1995). Benchmark Dose Workshop: Criteria for Use of a Benchmark Dose to Estimate a
Reference Dose. Regulatory Toxicology and Pharmacology 21, 296-306.
Beck, N.B., Becker, R.A., Erraguntla, N., Farland, W.H., Grant, Gray, G., Kirman, C., LaKind, J.S.,
Lewis, R.J., Nance, P., Pottenger, L.H., Santos, S.L., Shirley, S., Simon, T., and Dourson, M.L. (2016).
Approaches for describing and communicating overall uncertainty in toxicity characterizations: US
Environmental Protection Agency’s Integrated Risk Information System (IRIS) as a case study.
Environment International 89-90, 110-128.
California Environmental Protection Agency (CalEPA). (2009). Technical Support Document for Cancer
Potency Factors: Methodologies for Derivation, Listing of Available Values, and Adjustments to Allow for
Early Life Stage Exposures. Available at: <http://oehha.ca.gov/media/downloads/crnr/tsdcancer
potency.pdf>
The Chicago Manual of Style. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1982.
Dourson, M.L. (1994). Methods for establishing oral reference doses (RfDs). In Risk Assessment of
Essential Elements. W. Mertz, C.O. Abernathy, and S.S. Olin (editors), pages 51-61, ILSI Press
Washington, D.C.
Dourson, M.L., Felter, S.P., and Robinson, D. (1996). Evolution of science-based uncertainty factors in
noncancer risk assessment. Regulatory Toxicology and Pharmacology 24(2), 108-120.
European Commission. (2004). A compendium of case studies that helped to shape the REACH Guidance
on Chemical Categories and Read-Across. European Commission Joint Research Centre Institute for
Health and Consumer Protection, Ispra, Italy. Available at: <https://eurl-ecvam.jrc.ec.europa.eu/
laboratories-research/predictive_toxicology/doc/EUR_22481_EN.pdf>
European Commission. (2007). The Use of Computational Methods in the Grouping and Assessment of
Chemicals – Preliminary Investigations. EUR 22941 EN-007. European Commission Joint Research Centre
Institute for Health and Consumer Protection, Ispra, Italy. Available at: <https://eurl-
ecvam.jrc.ec.europa.eu/laboratories-research/predictive_toxicology/doc/EUR_22941_EN.pdf>
European Commission. (2010). Review of QSAR Models and Software Tools for Predicting Genotoxicity
and Carcinogenicity. European Commission Joint Research Centre Institute for Health and Consumer
Protection, Ispra, Italy. Available at: <https://eurl-ecvam.jrc.ec.europa.eu/laboratories-research/
predictive_toxicology/doc/EUR_24427_EN.pdf>
European Chemicals Agency (ECHA). (2008). Guidance on Information Requirements and Chemical
Safety Assessment. Chapter R.6: QSARS and Grouping of Chemicals. Available at: <http://echa.europa.eu/
documents/10162/13632/information_requirements_r6_en.pdf>
European Chemicals Agency (ECHA). (2012). Practical Guide 6. How to Report Read-across and
Categories. Available at: <http://echa.europa.eu/documents/10162/13655/pg_report_readacross_en.pdf>
182
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
European Chemicals Agency (ECHA). (2017). Read-Across Assessment Framework (RAAF). Available at:
<http://echa.europa.eu/documents/10162/13628/raaf_en.pdf>
European Food Safety Authority (EFSA) and World Health Organization (WHO). (2016). Review of the
Threshold of Toxicological Concern (TTC) approach and development of new TTC decision tree. EFSA
Supporting Publication 2016; 13(3):EN-1006, 50 pp. doi:10.2903/sp.efsa.2016.EN-1006.
International Programme on Chemical Safety (IPCS) (1994). Environmental Health Criteria No. 170:
Assessing human health risks of chemicals: Derivation of guidance values for health-based exposure limits.
World Health Organization, Geneva.
International Programme on Chemical Safety (IPCS). (2005). Chemical-specific adjustment factors for
interspecies differences and human variability: Guidance document for use of data in dose/concentration-
response assessment. World Health Organization/International Programme on Chemical Safety. World
Health Organization, Geneva, 2005. Available at: <http://whqlibdoc.who.int/publications/2005/
9241546786_eng.pdf>
Klaassen, Curtis. (2013) Casarett & Doull's Toxicology: The Basic Science of Poisons, Eighth Edition.
US: McGraw-Hill Professional.
Klimisch, H.J., M. Andreae, and U. Tillman (1997). A Systematic Approach for Evaluating the Quality of
Experimental Toxicological and Ecotoxicological Data. Regulatory Toxicology and Pharmacology 25, 1-5.
Kroes, R., Renwick, A.G., Cheeseman, M., Kleiner, J., Mangelsdorf, I., Piersma, A., Schilter, B.,
Schlatter, J., van Schothorst, F., Vos, J.G., and Wurtzen, G. (2004). Structure Based Thresholds of
Toxicological concern (TTC): Guidance for Application to Substances Present at Low Levels in the Diet.
Food Chem. Toxicol. 42, 65-83.
Meek, M.E., Newhook, R., Liteplo, R.G., and V.C. Armstrong (1994). Approach to assessment of risk to
human health for priority substances under the Canadian Environmental Protection Act. Environmental
Carcinogenesis and Ecotoxicology Reviews C12(2), 105-134.
Minnesota Department of Health (MDH). (2008). Statement of Need and Reasonableness. Available at:
<http://www.health.state.mn.us/divs/eh/risk/rules/water/hrlsonar08.pdf>
Minnesota Department of Health (MDH). (2010). Risk Assessment Advice for Incorporating Early-life
Sensitivity into Cancer Risk Assessments for Linear Carcinogens. Available at:
<http://www.health.state.mn.us/divs/eh/risk/guidance/adafrecmd.pdf>
National Research Council (NRC). (1983). Risk assessment in the federal government. Managing the
process. National Academy Press, Washington, DC.
National Research Council (NRC). (2009). Science and Decisions: Advancing Risk Assessment.
Washington DC: National Academies Press.
NSF/ANSI/CAN 60. Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects. NSF International, Ann Arbor,
MI.
NSF/ANSI/CAN 61. Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. NSF International, Ann Arbor,
MI.
Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD). (2014). Guidance on Grouping of
Chemicals, Second Edition. Series on Testing & Assessment. No. 194. ENV/JM/MONO(2014)4.
Available at: <http://www.oecd.org/officialdocuments/publicdisplaydocumentpdf/?cote=env/jm/mono(2014)
4&doclanguage=en>
183
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
Renwick, A.G. (1993). Data derived safety factors for the evaluation of food additives and environmental
contaminants. Food Additives and Contaminants. 10(3), 275-205.
TERA (Toxicology Excellence for Risk Assessment). 1996. Evolution of Science-Based Uncertainty Factors
in Noncancer Risk Assessment. Full Report Prepared for Health and Environmental Sciences Institute
(HESI), Cincinnati, Ohio. Jan. 31, 1996.
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (1988). Recommendations for and Documentation of
Biological Values for use in Risk Assessment. EPA/600/6-87/008, February 1988. Available at:
<https://cfpub.epa.gov/ncea/risk/recordisplay.cfm?deid=34855>
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (1991). National Primary Drinking Water Regulations; Final
Rule. Federal Register. 56(20):3526-3614.
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (1993). Reference Dose (RfD): Description and Use in
Health Risk Assessments. Background Document 1A. On-line Integrated Risk Information System (IRIS).
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (1995). The Use of the Benchmark Dose Approach in
Health Risk Assessment. Risk Assessment Forum. EPA/630/R-94/007.
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (1996). Proposed Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk
Assessment. Federal Register. 61(79):17960 - 18011. EPA/600/P-92/003C. Available at:
<https://cfpub.epa.gov/ncea/raf/pdfs/propcra_1996.pdf>
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (2000). Methodology for deriving ambient water quality
criteria for the protection of human health. Office of Water, EPA-822-B-00-004, October 2000. Available at:
<https://www.epa.gov/wqc/fact-sheet-methodology-deriving-ambient-water-quality-criteria-protection-
human-health-revised>
US Environmental Protection Agency. (2002a). A Review of the Reference Dose and Reference
Concentration Processes. Risk Assessment Forum. EPA/630/P-02/002F, December 2002. Available at:
<https://www.epa.gov/sites/production/files/2014-12/documents/rfd-final.pdf>
US Environmental Protection Agency. (2002b). Determination of the Appropriate FQPA Safety Factor(s) for
in Tolerance Assessment. Office of Pesticide Programs. February, 2002. Available at:
<https://www.google.com/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=2&ved=0ahUKEwjykYPkpYrQAh
WB8oMKHfFlDAgQFgg3MAE&url=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.epa.gov%2Fsites%2Fproduction%2Ffiles%2F
2015-07%2Fdocuments%2Fdeterm.pdf&usg=AFQjCNEnZg2benPsO6UBfd1zVB4tV5NP4w&sig2=20Qw
Z_TxAQPD94-YrzlllA>
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (2005a). Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk Assessment.
Risk Assessment Forum. EPA/630/P-03/001B, March 2005. Available at: <https://www.epa.gov/risk/
guidelines-carcinogen-risk-assessment>
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (2005b). Supplemental Guidance for Assessing
Susceptibility from Early-life Exposure to Carcinogens. Technical Panel of the Risk Assessment Forum,
EPA/630/R-03/003F, March 2005. Available at: <http://www3.epa.gov/airtoxics/childrens_supplement_
final.pdf>
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (2008). Child-Specific Exposure Factors Handbook.
National Center for Environmental Assessment, Washington, DC. EPA/600/R-06/096F. Available at:
<http://cfpub.epa.gov/ncea/risk/recordisplay.cfm?deid=236252>
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (2011a). Exposure Factors Handbook: 2011 Edition.
National Center for Environmental Assessment, Washington, DC. EPA/600/R-09/052F, September 2011.
Available at: <https://cfpub.epa.gov/ncea/risk/recordisplay.cfm?deid=236252>
184
© 2021 NSF NSF/ANSI/CAN 600 – 2021
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (2011b). IRIS Glossary. Integrated Risk Information
System (IRIS) Last updated on August 31, 2011. Available at: <http://ofmpub.epa.gov/sor_internet/
registry/termreg/searchandretrieve/glossariesandkeywordlists/search.do?details=&glossaryName=IRIS%
20Glossary>
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (2011c). Recommended Use of Body Weight ¾ as the
Default Method in Derivation of the Oral Reference Dose. Risk Assessment Forum, Washington, DC,
EPA/100/R11/0001. Available at: <https://www.epa.gov/sites/production/files/2013-09/documents/
recommended-use-of-bw34.pdf>
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (2012a). Glossary of Terms: Methods of Toxicity Testing
and Risk Assessment. Last updated September 9, 2012. Available at: <https://www.epa.gov/pesticides>
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (2012b). Toxicity Estimation Software Tool (T.E.S.T.).
Version 4.1. Available at: <http://www.epa.gov/nrmrl/std/qsar/qsar.html>
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (2014a). Guidance for Applying Quantitative Data to
Develop Data-Derived Extrapolation Factors for Interspecies and Intraspecies Extrapolation. EPA/100/R-
14/002F, September 2014. Available at: <https://www.epa.gov/sites/production/files/2015-01/documents/
ddef-final.pdf>
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (2014b). Framework for Human Health Risk Assessment
to Inform Decision Making. EPA/100/R-14/001, April 2014. Available from: <https://www.epa.gov/sites/
production/files/2014-12/documents/hhra-framework-final-2014.pdf>
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (2015a). Human Health Ambient Water Quality Criteria:
2015 Update. Office of Water, EPA 820-F-15-001, June 2015. Available at: <https://www.epa.gov/
sites/production/files/2015-10/documents/human-health-2015-update-factsheet.pdf>
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (2015b). Peer Review Handbook. 4th Edition. Science and
Technology Policy Council. EPA/100/B-15/001, October 2015. Available at:
<https://www.epa.gov/sites/production/files/2016-03/documents/epa_peer_review_handbook_4th_edition
.pdf>
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (2016). Guidelines for Human Exposure Assessment. Risk
Assessment Forum. Peer Review Draft, January 2016. Available at: <https://www.epa.gov/osa/guidelines-
human-exposure-assessment>
US Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). (2019). Exposure Factors Handbook, Chapter 3: Ingestion
of Water and Other Select Liquids. National Center for Environmental Assessment, Washington, DC.
<http://ofmpub.epa.gov/eims/eimscomm.getfile?p_download_id=538153>
US Food and Drug Administration. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 21 Food and Drug Regulations.
US Food and Drug Administration. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 21 Good Laboratory Practices.
US Food Quality Protection Act. 1996. 7 USC 136.
US Safe Drinking Water Act. 1996. Section 1412(b)(7)(A).
185
Standards11
The following Standards established and adopted by NSF as minimum voluntary consensus Standards are used internationally:
2 Food Equipment
3 Commercial Warewashing Equipment
4 Commercial Cooking, Rethermalization, and Powered Hot Food Holding and Transport Equipment
5 Water Heaters, Hot Water Supply Boilers, and Heat Recovery Equipment
6 Dispensing Freezers
7 Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers
8 Commercial Powered Food Preparation Equipment
12 Automatic Ice Making Equipment
13 Refuse Processors and Processing Systems
14 Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials
18 Manual Food and Beverage Dispensing Equipment
20 Commercial Bulk Milk Dispensing Equipment
21 Thermoplastic Refuse Containers
24 Plumbing System Components for Recreational Vehicles
25 Vending Machines for Food and Beverages
29 Detergent and Chemical Feeders for Commercial Spray-Type Dishwashing Machines
35 High Pressure Decorative Laminates for Surfacing Food Service Equipment
37 Air Curtains for Entranceways in Food and Food Service Establishments
40 Residential Wastewater Treatment Systems
41 Non-liquid Saturated Treatment Systems
42 Drinking Water Treatment Units – Aesthetic Effects
44 Residential Cation Exchange Water Softeners
46 Evaluation of Components and Devices Used in Wastewater Treatment Systems
49 Biosafety Cabinetry – Design, Construction, Performance, and Field Certification
50 Equipment and Chemicals for Swimming Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs, and Other Recreational Water Facilities
51 Food Equipment Materials
52 Supplemental Flooring
53 Drinking Water Treatment Units – Health Effects
55 Ultraviolet Microbiological Water Treatment Systems
58 Reverse Osmosis Drinking Water Treatment Systems
59 Mobile Food Carts
60 Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals – Health Effects
61 Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects
62 Drinking Water Distillation Systems
140 Sustainable Carpet Assessment
169 Special Purpose Food Equipment and Devices
170 Glossary of Food Equipment Terminology
173 Dietary Supplements
177 Shower Filtration Systems – Aesthetic Effects
11 The information contained in this Disclaimer is not part of this American National Standard (ANS) and has not been processed
in accordance with ANSI’s requirements for an ANS. Therefore, this Disclaimer may contain material that has not been subjected
to public review or a consensus process. In addition, it does not contain requirements necessary for conformance to the
Standard.
184 Residential Dishwashers

Conformity Assessment Requirements for Certification Bodies that Certify Products Pursuant to
223
NSF/ANSI/CAN 60 Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals – Health Effects
244 Drinking Water Treatment Units Supplemental Microbiological Water Treatment Systems – Filtration
245 Wastewater Treatment Systems – Nitrogen Reduction
305 Personal Care Products Containing Organic Ingredients
321 Goldenseal Root (Hydrasitis canadensis)
330 Glossary of Drinking Water Treatment Unit Terminology
332 Sustainability Assessment for Resilient Floor Coverings
336 Sustainability Assessment for Commercial Furnishings Fabric
342 Sustainability Assessment for Wallcovering Products
347 Sustainability Assessment for Single-Ply Roofing Membranes
350 Onsite Residential and Commercial Water Reuse Treatment Systems
350-1 Onsite Residential and Commercial Greywater Treatment Systems for Subsurface Discharge
358-1 Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings for Water-Based Ground-Source “Geothermal” Heat Pump Systems
358-2 Polypropylene Pipe and Fittings for Water-Based Ground-Source “Geothermal” Heat Pump Systems
Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe and Fittings for Water-based Ground-Source (Geothermal) Heat
358-3
Pump Systems
Polyethylene of Raised Temperature (PE-RT) Tubing and Fittings for Water-based Ground-Source
358-4
(Geothermal) Heat Pump Systems
359 Valves for Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Water Distribution Tubing Systems
360 Wastewater Treatment Systems – Field Performance Verification
363 Good Manufacturing Practices (GMP) for Pharmaceutical Excipients
372 Drinking Water Treatment System Components – Lead Content
375 Sustainability Assessment for Water Contact Products
385 Disinfection Mechanics
401 Drinking Water Treatment Units – Emerging Compounds / Incidental Contaminants
416 Sustainability Assessment for Water Treatment Chemical Products
418 Effluent Filters – Field Longevity Testing
419 Public Drinking Water Equipment Performance – Filtration
426 Environmental Leadership and Corporate Social Responsibility Assessment of Servers
455-1 Terminology for the NSF 455 Portfolio of Standards
455-2 Good Manufacturing Practices for Dietary Supplements
455-3 Good Manufacturing Practices for Cosmetics
455-4 Good Manufacturing Practices for Over-the-Counter Drugs
456 Vaccine Storage
457 Sustainability Leadership Standard for Photovoltaic Modules and Photovoltaic Inverters
600 Health Effects Evaluation and Criteria for Chemicals in Drinking Water
14159-1 Hygiene Requirements for the Design of Meat and Poultry Processing Equipment
Hygiene Requirements for the Design of Hand-held Tools Used in Meat and Poultry Processing
14159-2
Equipment
Hygiene Requirements for the Design of Mechanical Belt Conveyors Used in Meat and Poultry
14159-3
Processing Equipment

NSF Ansi Can 61-2021 + NSF Ansi Can 600-2021

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NSF Ansi Can 61-2021 + NSF Ansi Can 600-2021

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NSF International Standard /

American National Standard /

This Standard is subject to revision.

Users of this Standard may request clarifications and

Chair, Joint Committee on Drinking Water Additives – System Components

NSF International Standard /

Drinking Water System Components –

Designated as an ANSI Standard

Designated as a National Standard of Canada

Recommended for adoption by

Revised October 1988 Revised May 1990 Revised May 1991

Cette Norme Nationale du Canada est disponible en versions Franҫaise et Anglaise.

Copyright 2021 NSF International

Printed in the United States of America.

Preference is given to the use of performance criteria measurable by examination or testing in

3 General requirements ............................................................................................................................. 6

4 Pipes and related products ................................................................................................................... 17

5 Barrier materials ................................................................................................................................... 32

6 Joining and sealing materials ............................................................................................................... 46

7 Process media ...................................................................................................................................... 47

9 Mechanical plumbing devices ............................................................................................................... 63

10 Instructions and information ................................................................................................................. 67

Normative Annex 1 Product / material evaluation .................................................................................. lxviii

Normative Annex 2 Acceptable materials ............................................................................................... 115

Informative Annex 1 Toxicology review and evaluation procedures ....................................................... 119

Informative Annex 2 Normative drinking water criteria ........................................................................... 121

Informative Annex 3 Informational drinking water criteria ....................................................................... 123

Informative Annex 4 Revisions to the evaluation of lead ........................................................................ 125

Informative Annex 5 Weighted average lead content evaluation procedure to a 0.25%

Informative Annex 7 Revisions to the evaluation of lead ........................................................................ 135

All references to gallons (gal) are in US gallons.

This edition of the Standard contains the following revisions:

This revision includes several corrections and clarifications, including:

A National Standard of Canada is a standard developed by a Standards Council of Canada (SCC)

Water Research Foundation

The Association of State Drinking Water Administrators

American Water Works Association

Drinking Water System Components –

1.3 Normative references

40 CFR Part 141, National Primary Drinking Water Regulations3

40 CFR Part 160, Good Laboratory Practice Standards3

40 CFR Part 798, Health Effects Testing Guidelines3

ASTM C778-00, Standard Specification for Standard Sand5

ANSI/AWWA B100-96, AWWA Standard for Filtering Material6

ANSI/AWWA C652-92, AWWA Standard for Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities6

NSF/ANSI/CAN 60, Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals – Health Effects

NSF/ANSI/CAN 372, Drinking Water System Components – Lead Content

OECD, OECD Guidelines for the Testing of Chemicals, May 19967

US EPA-600/4-80-032, Prescribed Procedures for Measurement of Radioactivity in Drinking Water 9

US EPA-600/R-05/054, Determination of Nitrosamines in Drinking Water By Solid Phase Extraction and

1.5 Alternate products or materials

1.6 Significant figures and rounding

2.4 contaminant: A physical, chemical, biological, or radiological substance or matter in water.

in2 SAF VL VF(static) VTC 5 1 in2

SAF = surface area exposed in the field

SAL = 1 (per DSA definition)

VL = 1 (per DSA definition)

VF(static) = cancels out of the equation for this example

2.8 drinking water: Water intended for human consumption.

2.14 manufacturer: A corporation, company, or individual that produces, formulates, packages, or

3.2 Information and formulation requirements

NOTE 2 — A material is defined as a combination of ingredients used to manufacture (mold, extrude,

— a description / classification of the manner in which the product or material is manufactured